Construction Site Security

Construction Site Security This page intentionally left blank Construction Site Security Michael J. Arata, Jr. Mc...

Author: Michael J. Arata

208 downloads 1548 Views 7MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Construction Site Security

This page intentionally left blank


Michael J. Arata, Jr.

McGraw-Hill New York Chicago San Francisco Lisbon London Madrid Mexico City Milan New Delhi San Juan Seoul Singapore Sydney Toronto

Copyright © 2006 by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. All rights reserved. Manufactured in the United States of America. Except as permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976, no part of this publication may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means, or stored in a database or retrieval system, without the prior written permission of the publisher. 0-07-158917-1 The material in this eBook also appears in the print version of this title: 0-07-146029-2. All trademarks are trademarks of their respective owners. Rather than put a trademark symbol after every occurrence of a trademarked name, we use names in an editorial fashion only, and to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intention of infringement of the trademark. Where such designations appear in this book, they have been printed with initial caps. McGraw-Hill eBooks are available at special quantity discounts to use as premiums and sales promotions, or for use in corporate training programs. For more information, please contact George Hoare, Special Sales, at [email protected] or (212) 904-4069. TERMS OF USE This is a copyrighted work and The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. (“McGraw-Hill”) and its licensors reserve all rights in and to the work. Use of this work is subject to these terms. Except as permitted under the Copyright Act of 1976 and the right to store and retrieve one copy of the work, you may not decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, reproduce, modify, create derivative works based upon, transmit, distribute, disseminate, sell, publish or sublicense the work or any part of it without McGraw-Hill’s prior consent. You may use the work for your own noncommercial and personal use; any other use of the work is strictly prohibited. Your right to use the work may be terminated if you fail to comply with these terms. THE WORK IS PROVIDED “AS IS.” McGRAW-HILL AND ITS LICENSORS MAKE NO GUARANTEES OR WARRANTIES AS TO THE ACCURACY, ADEQUACY OR COMPLETENESS OF OR RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM USING THE WORK, INCLUDING ANY INFORMATION THAT CAN BE ACCESSED THROUGH THE WORK VIA HYPERLINK OR OTHERWISE, AND EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. McGraw-Hill and its licensors do not warrant or guarantee that the functions contained in the work will meet your requirements or that its operation will be uninterrupted or error free. Neither McGraw-Hill nor its licensors shall be liable to you or anyone else for any inaccuracy, error or omission, regardless of cause, in the work or for any damages resulting therefrom. McGraw-Hill has no responsibility for the content of any information accessed through the work. Under no circumstances shall McGraw-Hill and/or its licensors be liable for any indirect, incidental, special, punitive, consequential or similar damages that result from the use of or inability to use the work, even if any of them has been advised of the possibility of such damages. This limitation of liability shall apply to any claim or cause whatsoever whether such claim or cause arises in contract, tort or otherwise. DOI: 10.1036/0071460292

Professional

Want to learn more? We hope you enjoy this McGraw-Hill eBook! If you’d like more information about this book, its author, or related books and websites, please click here.

DEDICATION This book is dedicated to my wife, Karla, for putting up with me during the writing of this book; and to my daughter, Kristen; and son, Jimmy, without whose patience and understanding of late nights and weekends spent writing and rewriting, this book would not have been possible.

ACKNOWLEDGMENT Thank you Victoria Roberts of Lone Wolf Enterprises for the excellent, expert job you did in editing and guidance; without it this project would not have been possible.

ABOUT THE AUTHOR Michael Arata has over 15 years of security experience that includes positions from manager to vice president and consultant. He has developed and managed successful security programs from the ground up for several large organizations including the Director of Corporate Security for a major West Coast construction company. He holds a master’s degree in Public Administration, a B.A. in Business/Public Administration, and a B.S. in Safety and Fire Protection Technology. He has attended numerous seminars and training programs relating to security and holds CISSP, CPP, CFE and ACLM, professional certifications. He has spoken at various professional organization seminars on the subject of security and written articles about security for trade publications. He has guest lectured at the Oklahoma State University and the University of California, Berkeley on safety and security related subjects. He is an adjunct instructor of Criminal Justice at a local college.

Copyright © 2006 by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click here for terms of use.

For more information about this title, click here

Contents CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 Threat Assessments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 The Role of Threat Assessments in Physical Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Physical Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 The Role of Technology in Physical Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 Summary of the Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 CHAPTER 2 THREAT ASSESSMENT AND RISK ANALYSIS BASICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 How to Do a Threat Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Identify the Risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Analyze the Risk for Probability of Occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Calculating The Cost of a Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 The Survey Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18 The Crime Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28 Risk Analysis Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31 Choosing the Method to Mitigate the Risk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32 Planning and Designing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 CHAPTER 3 SECURITY OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39 Conducting and Using Threat Assessments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 How to Do a Threat Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40 Identify the Risks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Analyze the Risk for Probability of Occurrence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42 Calculating the Cost of a Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43 The Survey Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Physical Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Security Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Intrusion Detection for Job Trailers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Balanced Magnetic Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 Alarm Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53 Controlling Vehicular and Pedestrian Traffic Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Clear Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57 Locks and Key Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58 Equipment Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64 Job Site Security Surveys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65 The Security Officer’s Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

vi

Contents

vii

POST Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67 Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70 Access Control Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71 Information Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72 Investigations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73 Eco-Terror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74 The Security Survey and Security Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 CHAPTER 4 THE SECURITY SURVEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75 Tenant Improvement (TI) jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Access Points and the Perimeter Fence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79 Remote Job Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80 The Security Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82 Tools and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83 Security Officers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 Intrusion Detection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84 The Security Survey Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 Benefits of Doing a Security Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85 How to Conduct a Security Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94 CHAPTER 5 PERIMETER SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97 Types of Perimeter Fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98 Chain Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Wrought Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102 Wood Fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 Concrete Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105 Fence Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106 Roll/Slide Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 Cantilever Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108 Motorized Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Swing Gates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Barbed Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109 Razor Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110 CHAPTER 6 INTRUSION DETECTION FOR JOB TRAILERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113 Alarm Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114 Sensor Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116 Volumetric Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Ultrasonic Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119 Infrared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122 Glass Breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125 Microwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127 Vibration Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131 Fence Vibration Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133 Fiber Optic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

viii


Electric Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Capacitance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137 Taut Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Photo Electric Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140 Video Motion Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142 Intrusion Detection System Design Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154 CHAPTER 7 LOCKS AND KEY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189 Types of Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Cylindrical Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190 Deadbolt Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Mortise Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191 Drop Bolt Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Rim Cylinder Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Disc Tumbler Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192 Pin Tumbler Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Unit Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Cipher Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Fingerprint Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Padlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193 Electric Strike Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Electric Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Magnetic Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 High Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194 Keying Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196 CHAPTER 8 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207 CCTV System Components—Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208 Video Transmission—Coaxial Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Fiber Optic Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Microwave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 Multiplexer (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Displaying Video—Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Recorders—VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212 Digital Video Recorders (DVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213 Wireless Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 IP Addressable Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214 Basic System Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215 The Selection of the Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218 Selection of the Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219 Camera Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220 Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221 CHAPTER 9 HEAVY EQUIPMENT SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223

Contents

ix

Hardening the Job Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Protecting Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Protecting Tools and Portable Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229 National Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 Investigate All Job Site Thefts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233 CHAPTER 10 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Biometric Systems—Hand Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236 Fingerprint Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Iris Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Retina Scan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Voice Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237 Signature Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Facial Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Combination Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238 Access Control Systems Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Magnetic Stripe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Proximity Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239 Smart Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Dual Technology Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Designing the Access Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241 Types of Access Control System Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244 Request to Exit Device (REX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Door Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246 Automatic Door Closer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Access Control System Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 Sample Design Specifications for Electronic Security Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247 CHAPTER 11 ROLE OF THE SECURITY OFFICER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .277 Security Officer Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .278 Security Officer Company Contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279 Post Orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280 Security Officer Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283 Appendix A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .285 Appendix B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289 Appendix C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292 CHAPTER 12 SECURITY POLICIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301 Developing Policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302 Site Access Control for Job Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304 Equipment Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309 Workplace Violence Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315 Bomb Threats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318 CHAPTER 13 INVESTIGATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327 Pre-employment Screening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329 Investigations for Theft of Company Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332 CHAPTER 14 INFORMATION SECURITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341

x


Document Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342 Physical Security Countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 Physical Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344 Security Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Marking Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346 Securing Laptop and Desk Top Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347 Disposing of Confidential Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348 Security Awareness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349 Security Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Security Bulletins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350 Security Slogans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Physical Security Audits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Physical Protection for Cables and Closets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351 Technical Security Countermeasures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Computer and Network Access Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352 Installing Firewalls on Job Sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354 Virus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 Encryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355 CHAPTER 15 SECURITY LIGHTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357 Foot-Candle Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Categories of Security lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359 Types of Lamps (Luminaries) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360 Types of Security Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361 Lighting Requirements for security Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362 Lighting Requirements for CCTV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 Electrical Power Sources for Security Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366 Wiring and Lighting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367 Maintenance of Lighting Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 Security Lighting Design Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368 CHAPTER 16 ANIMAL RIGHTS AND ECO-TERRORISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371 The Groups: ALF and ELF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372 Protecting the Job Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381 CHAPTER 17 DEVELOPING THE JOB SITE SECURITY PLAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385 Performing the Threat Assessment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .386 The Elements of the Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 CHAPTER 18 WHERE TO FIND HELP WITH JOB SITE SECURITY AND USEFUL FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405 PART I Where to Find Help with Job Site Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406 PART II Useful Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

CHAPTER

Overview

1

E

ach of the components of security listed below has its own subset. This book will focus on physical security countermeasures and how they can be applied to the construction job site. Security encompasses several components:

• Physical • Personnel • Investigations • Awareness • Information security Physical security is the protection of people and things from harm by using such methods as intrusion detection, access control, and security officers. Physical security countermeasures are the measures used to safeguard personnel from harm. It also protects property from unauthorized access to equipment, installations, material, and documents and safeguards it against sabotage, damage, and theft. The main objective of physical security is to harden the target and make it unattractive for thieves and vandals to enter the site for fear of being caught. Target hardening will not deter those individuals who are highly motivated and determined to enter the site to steal or commit vandalism. If the target looks hardened, it will deter most thieves from feeling that there are easy pickings on the site so they will go to a place where there are no security countermeasures. Physical security, in some cases, can be a delaying tactic to slow down an intruder in order to increase the possibility of being seen from outside the perimeter by patrolling security officers and/or police.

1 Copyright © 2006 by The McGraw-Hill Companies, Inc. Click here for terms of use.

2


Most physical security countermeasures that are used in the private sector have their origins in the government defense and national security programs. Companies that do government contract work, especially defense or any work that is of a national nature, are required by the government to have a security program. There are inspections (audits) of the company's facilities to ensure compliance with the security requirements. Part of the audit is a threat assessment to identify the vulnerabilities. Then, recommendations are made to address the vulnerabilities. The same scenario is used in other private sector companies. The government is not involved unless there is a national security reason, such as with the country’s infrastructure including the utility companies, water, electric, and/or rail transportation. The general public perception is that physical security is guards, guns, and dogs. Nothing can be further from the truth. Physical security is more than the perception since it involves the employees of the company through the security awareness program and policies, as well other countermeasures like intrusion detection. The purpose of this book is to dispel the perception and present the specifics involved in the securing of a construction job site. Construction job sites present a unique set of issues when addressing physical security. Some of those issues are: • The site is usually in a state of flux that is it constantly changing. • The site perimeter is fenced by a temporary fence that will move as the site changes. • A great deal of traffic entering the site during working hours • Often, there are no clearly defined roles and duties for the security officers. • Intrusion detection is hard to position for the perimeter because of the changing environment and the cost. • Lighting is, at times, not adequate to deter would-be thieves from helping themselves to materials, equipment, and tools. • Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) systems are usually designed with security in mind. • They usually show progress of the project on a web cam. • The cost of security: Who pays? • Universal keys for starting heavy equipment • Job site trailers are easy targets for thieves.

Overview

3

In this book we will look at the definition of physical security and how it can be applied to the construction job site. There is no one way to approach implementing physical security countermeasures, but there are some steps that can be taken to help minimize the threats and the vulnerabilities to a job site. To do this there are some concepts that need to be explained. The first one is a threat assessment: what it is; why it is important; and how it helps in physical security planning.

THREAT ASSESSMENTS Properly designed and implemented physical security planning is the key to success. Threat assessment and risk analysis are both important to the process. Physical security countermeasures cost money to implement and to help justify the expenditures, threat assessments, and risk analyses are good tools. Threat assessment is the process of determining what the vulnerabilities are and the likelihood that they will result in a loss. To put it simply—what can go wrong resulting in a loss? Risk analysis is taking the vulnerabilities (threats) and determining the likelihood of whether a threat will cause a loss. The purpose of the risk analysis and threat assessment is to make sure the most cost-effective solutions are proposed. Therefore the steps of the process are as follows: 1. Identification of the assets 2. Identification of the threats 3. Analyze the threats (risk assessment) 4. Determine what countermeasure (security feature) will mitigate or minimize the impact of the threat 5. Do a cost analysis so the benefit of the countermeasure selected can be quantified In Chapter 2, more will be discussed about threat assessments and methods for doing them, including checklists that can be helpful.

The Role of Threat Assessments in Physical Security The threat assessment plays an important role in physical security by helping identify the most vulnerable areas. The threat assessment will help in planning the physical security countermeasures to minimize the risk from the vulnerabilities. It is the first step in the process of planning for physical security countermeasures and helps determine what to protect against based on the probability of occurrence. The probabilities of threat occurrence are then categorized as low, medium, or high. The high threats are the ones that should have countermeasures in place to minimize the risk. Details of the threat assessment process are explained in Chapter 2.

4


After the threat assessment is completed and the risks associated with them are identified, a set of recommendations is formulated based on priority established by the probability of risk occurrence. A countermeasure is developed to mitigate the threat and the resulting vulnerability that was discovered in the assessment. These countermeasures become the recommendations. A countermeasure can be one or a combination of the following: • Intrusion detection systems • Security officers • Access control • Perimeter controls • CCTV • Security lighting Intrusion detection systems can be integrated into the CCTV system so there is a record of who made an unauthorized entry into the job site. Intrusion detection systems can be used in conjunction with the access control system to receive an alarm of an unauthorized entry or attempted entry. This is important for the job site office trailers as well as the tool trailers that may be on site. The intrusion detection system along with access control can also be integrated with the CCTV system to record any events that occur after hours. More about intrusion detection will be presented in Chapter 6. Perimeter controls, such as access to the site by vehicles through gates, can be controlled by security officers if necessary. Good lighting is also important for physical security because it makes it easy for someone to be seen at night on the site from outside the perimeter. Threat assessments help managing the risks posed by the security vulnerabilities. After the threat assessment is completed, a set of recommendations (countermeasures) are made based on the risks posed by each threat. The physical security countermeasures are used to offset the vulnerabilities and risks. Threat assessments help identify the following: • Who • What • When • Where • Why • How

Overview

5

With each vulnerability, the five “Ws” and the “How” questions are asked to determine the extent of the risk of occurrence of the threat. Threat assessments can be an arduous task and may seem to be waste of time and resources. Nothing can be further from the truth. The time it takes to complete a threat assessment is well worth the effort because, by addressing the highest priorities, you get the most from the money you have to spend on security. Threat assessments have a positive impact on physical security spending when properly and conscientiously done. Money is spent judiciously to mitigate the greatest threats that have the highest probability of occurrence. The old 80/20 rule applies here. By taking care of the top 20 percent of the threats, you then will have addressed 80 percent of the security problem. Also the threat assessments will help in focusing on the 20 percent by prioritizing the most likely security events by probability of occurrence. In some cases the countermeasures will not entirely mitigate the threat, but can substantially reduce the impact from the threat if it does occur. In other words, not every countermeasure can stop a security event by those who have much to gain and who are determined and motivated enough to carry out the threat. For example, if stealing heavy equipment from a job site can be done in 10 minutes or less and someone is willing to purchase the stolen equipment, then the risk of stealing the equipment maybe worth the risk of being caught. Therefore, the job of the countermeasure is to make it appear to the thief that it will take longer than 10 minutes to gain access to the equipment in order to steal it. For example, if the job site is a road construction project, the following countermeasures could be implemented: • Placing all of the heavy equipment at the end of the work day in a fenced area that can be seen on all four sides from the roadway • The equipment storage area should have sufficient lighting and a clear zone of five feet around the fence perimeter • All of the equipment should have some type of kill switch so it cannot be easily started. • All equipment serial numbers should be recorded and signs should be posted around the site to that effect. It should also be stated that there is a reward for information leading to the recovery of the equipment and the arrest of those responsible for the theft. • Wireless CCTV can be used along with wireless motion sensors to detect any intrusion into the equipment storage area. These countermeasures may make the site unattractive to the thief because of the fear of being caught. On other job sites the equipment can be placed in a

6


fenced-in area as close to the center of the site as possible. The thieves would then need to go through two fences that are not close to each other. The first fence would be the perimeter fence and then the thief would need to go through the open well-lighted job site to get to the equipment storage area that is also well lighted. More will be discussed about countermeasures to secure heavy equipment in Chapter 9. Remember, the objective is to harden the target or at least to create the appearance that the target is hard. The thief may think twice about attempting to steal the heavy equipment. In order to make the target appear hard, set up a perimeter which includes lighting and clear zones.

PHYSICAL SECURITY Physical security protects people and things. Network or Information Technology (IT) security protects the information that is on computer hardware, software, and email. The physical protection of the computer hardware is a physical security function. The protection of the logic, i.e. software, information is an IT security function. The countermeasures that will deter, detect, and respond to security incidents are called physical security. Overtly making the site appear hardened can deter security incidents. This includes perimeter controls. Even a temporary fence with locked gates provides some sense of control. Good lighting that lights up the site, CCTV cameras, and roving security patrols are other excellent countermeasures. The detection of intruders can be done using various techniques like motion sensors. For job site trailers and buildings, door and window contact switches can be used. CCTV can record intruders entering the site. In order to be effective some design considerations need to be taken into account and Chapter 8 will provide the details about CCTV systems. The response to security incidents is the responsibility of the security officers, if the site has them. If properly trained and provided with a good set of POST orders, the security officers can provide an effective layer of security. POST orders are the procedures that the security officers are supposed to follow during every shift. Chapter 11 will outline the role of the security officers at a job site. Perimeter security can be enhanced by including the following countermeasures: • Intrusion detection • Security officers • Security lighting • CCTV • Warning signs, i.e. “No Trespassing”

Introduction

7

The Role of Technology in Physical Security There have been a number of technological advances in physical security. Some of these advances are in the intrusion detection systems. One measure is the ability to integrate the access control systems into the CCTV system. By having all the systems integrated together, they are more efficient and the security officer need only look at one screen instead of several screens for alarms and access control information. CCTV cameras and controls for pan, tilt, zoom (PTZ) cameras are very useful in this case. Wireless cameras and instruction detection systems are now available and being used. CCTV cameras can record on DVD instead of VHS, so there is no need to change tapes. This solves the problem of not getting the recording of a security event because the tape was either full or no tape was in the recorder. The CCTV cameras today can be set to record on motion and will record in real time instead of time lapse. Technology plays an important role in physical security now and will do so in the future. Technology can improve the efficiency of the security officers by increasing their productivity.

SUMMARY OF THE CHAPTERS The purpose of this book is to outline some methods and techniques for security construction job sites. The techniques outlined in the book are not the only way to approach the security issues facing construction sites, but offer some good basic security concepts and methods that can be employed to help protect the site. The book has five parts and the chapters associated with each are outlined below. Part I is “Understanding Security” and outlines what physical security is all about and why it is important. Chapter 1 is an introduction to some of the concepts and ideas that are presented throughout the book. Definitions of what the concepts mean are presented, especially the threat assessments and their importance. Chapter 2 presents a detailed discussion of threat assessments, their importance, and how to do them. There are checklists to help guide you through the process. The benefits of performing the threat assessment are presented. Chapter 3 is an overview of security and everything that is covered in the book is summarized for quick reference. Details about each of the subjects covered in the chapter are explained in detail in other chapters. In Chapter 4 the security survey is discussed in detail: what a security survey is; the benefit of doing them; and how to do them. There are sample checklists and forms for doing security surveys in the chapter.

8


Part II is all about “Physical Security,” what it is, what are the countermeasures used, and how to implement them. Chapter 5 outlines what can be done to establish perimeter security. A perimeter fence, even a temporary fence, will help in establishing a perimeter security boundary. Incorporating and using any natural boundaries in the perimeter security plan is mentioned. Rivers and cliffs, to name two, can be assets if they are assimilated into the perimeter security. Clear zones around the perimeter fence and other fenced areas on the job site are discussed and why they are an important buffer. Security lighting for the perimeter is also discussed in the chapter, since this an area that is often overlooked on construction job sites and can be a benefit. There is a section in the chapter about establishing control points, namely the entrances to the site during business hours and after hours. Controlling access to the job site is important in order for unauthorized persons or vehicles to have difficulty entering easily. Chapter 6 explores the types of intrusion detection systems. The technology of the systems is explained, as are the applications for each type of system. Also discussed are the problems with each of the intrusion detection systems, i.e. the causes of false alarms. Chapter 7 discusses locks and key control. This has been and continues to be a difficult problem, but there are technological advancements to help manage the key control system. The types of locks useful for a job site will be presented. Chapter 8 is all about CCTV systems. The types of systems are presented as are some basic design requirements for an effective system. Why security lighting is important to an effective CCTV system is also discussed. Chapter 9 takes a look at ways to secure the equipment on a job site. There are some basic things that can be done, such as having a complete record of all serial numbers for all equipment assigned to the job site. The use of kill switches is discussed as a strategy for deterring thefts of heavy equipment from the site. Chapter 10 discusses access control. Access control technologies have come a long way in the last several years. The systems are more user-friendly for the system administrators and there is research work being done in the use of wireless readers. Access control keeps unauthorized persons offsite and accounts for those who are on site, especially in the job site trailers. Since there is a great deal of vehicle and pedestrian traffic at some job sites, some type of control, especially the control of trucks and private cars, will be helpful. Chapter 11 explains the role of the security officer. Security officers can be a valuable asset in physical security by helping control vehicle traffic and the flow of pedestrians through access points. Security officers can also provide a good deterrent to vandalism and other types of crimes to the property and equipment by performing patrols around the perimeter after hours at unscheduled intervals. In

Overview

9

most cases security officers are not required to do anything if there are not any POST orders to follow. The importance of POST will be discussed. Chapter 12 discusses developing policies and what subjects the policies need to cover. Policies are the framework that helps keeps the physical security program in place. Without policies employees and visitors to the job site would not know what is expected of them and what the consequences for non-compliance are. For example, a sign can be posted that all visitors must sign in at the job site trailer and be escorted on the job site at all times. Without the sign and the enforcement of the policy, employees and visitors would not know about signing in. Just placing a sign stating that visitors must sign without the policy to back it up would not get the same results, since the employees would not be motivated to comply. Chapter 13 addresses using background investigations for hiring and for dealing with issues of policy, theft, harassment, etc. Pre-employment or background investigations are an important part of the hiring process today. Companies need know who they are hiring. The Fair Credit Reporting Act affects doing background investigations. What are the employers' responsibilities and the prospective employee's rights? Part III is about information security, not just the company's information but that of the construction project's owner. Chapter 14 is about information security basics. What is information security and why it is important? The physical protection of the computer hardware on the job site is a part of the physical security program. Chapter 15 discusses the classification of documents and why it maybe important to maintaining a competitive edge for the owner of the project or for the company doing the design build project. Part IV is about animal and eco-terrorism and how it affects the construction site. Chapter 16 provides a brief overview of domestic terror groups as classified by the FBI. The groups and their goals are outlined. The Animal Liberation Front (ALF) and the Earth Liberation Front (ELF) are the two groups that have been getting most of the press for domestic terrorism in the last few years. The organization of the groups is also important.


CHAPTER

Threat Assessment and Risk Analysis Basics

2

P

roperly designed and implemented physical security planning is the key to success. Threat assessment and risk analysis are both important to the process. Physical security countermeasures cost money to implement and, to help justify the expenditures, threat assessments, and risk analyses are good tools. Threat assessment is the process of determining what the vulnerabilities are and the likelihood that they will result in a loss. To put it simply - what can go wrong resulting in a loss? Risk analysis is taking the vulnerabilities (threats) and determining the likelihood of whether a threat will cause a loss. Determining the probability or likelihood that something will go wrong to cause a loss is known as risk management. The purpose of the risk analysis and threat assessment is to make sure the most costeffective solutions are proposed. So the steps to the process are as follows: 1. Identification of the assets 2. Identification of the threats 3. Analyze the threats (risk assessment) 4. Determine what countermeasure (security feature) will mitigate or minimize the impact of the threat 5. Do a cost analysis so the benefit of the countermeasure selected can be quantified. Using the survey and the risk analysis the design specifications for perimeter security of the facility can be developed to meet the threats of the facility. This way the most severe threats and risks are addressed. To identify the threats you need to first identify the assets. Table 2-1 outlines the risk assessment steps and provides a brief description of each one. This is a good summary of the process.


12


Table 2-1 Risk assessment steps. STEP

Description

Identification of the assets Identification of the threats Analyze the threats (risk assessment) Choose Countermeasure Cost analysis of countermeasure Cost benefit, ROI

People, equipment, buildings, etc. CAP Stats, etc. Probability of occurrence Alarms, access control, etc.

This chapter is an overview and a guide for doing a threat assessment, including some useful tools to aid in the process such as a cost benefit analysis. To fully understand the concepts in the chapter there are some terms that need to be defined: • Threat assessment—What can or will cause harm or loss to the people, facility, products, etc. (Vulnerabilities) • Risk assessment—The evaluation of the threats and determine which ones pose the greatest potential to cause harm. The analysis is used to categorize the threats in rank order by the highest probability of occurrence. • Risk management—The process used to minimize the exposure to loss. There are entire books devoted to risk management that include risk assessment, analysis, and mitigation. Formulas are used to determine the probability of a potential loss occurring and what the dollar of the loss would be. For the purposes of our discussion, we will keep it basic. The basics outlined in this chapter are effective tools and are easy to use.

HOW TO DO A THREAT ASSESSMENT A Threat Assessment is the first step in determining what security measures will be needed. The assessment is the first step in risk analysis and is used to determine the threats and vulnerabilities. Conversely the first step in risk analysis is identifying the threats. Why do we need do a risk assessment you may be asking? Security costs and money is limited so expenditures need to be justified. This includes being a part of the risk management program.


13

The risk management program has two methods for achieving the goal: 1. Pay for loss prevention countermeasures 2. Purchase insurance The risk management program has the following steps: 1. Identify the risks 2. Analyze the risks for probability of occurrence 3. Choose the method of mitigating the risk a. Risk avoidance b. Risk reduction c. Risk segregation d. Risk acceptance e. Risk transfer (purchase insurance) f. Combinations of any of the above 4. Continually re-evaluate the steps above

IDENTIFY THE RISKS Now let’s look at how we can identify the risks. The security survey is a tool that can be used to identify the risks. The survey starts by looking at the location of the building or structure. The purpose of the survey is to provide the information necessary to make decisions on what level is security is needed. To effectively perform the survey you need to collect some background information about the crime statistics in the area of the proposed or existing building or structure. The survey form and the crime statistics are used to determine the threat to the facility. This is the first step in risk analysis. What you are looking for are the types of security features that will best meet the need. So looking at crime statistics is an important first step. The following steps are an abbreviated version of what the security survey is all about: 1. Where is the facility located or where will it be located? 2. Crime statistics for type and frequency? 3. What type of facility or structure will be or is at the location? 4. What is it you are trying to protect? 5. Who are trying to protect it from? 6. What is the best way to protect the facility, people, and process? a. External intrusion detection b. Access control c. Video surveillance (CCTV) monitoring

14


d. e. f. g.

Locks and keys Clear zones Security officers Controlling vehicular and pedestrian traffic

7. What natural barriers can be used in the protection and design plan? a. Rivers b. Cliffs c. Beaches d. Other rugged terrain The most effective way to collect the information necessary to identify the risks is to have some kind of form or checklist. These forms are extremely helpful and make the job easier by ensuring that all the information is collected and recorded. The forms can be simple to comprehensive. The more comprehensive the form, the more accurate the survey and risk analysis will be.

ANALYZE THE RISK FOR PROBABILITY OF OCCURRENCE First of all, we want to know if an event will happen that will cause a loss. This is also known as the probability of risk occurrence. There are various methods used to determine the probability of risk occurrence. Some are simple, such as the Simple Probability Formula. Others are more complex and will left for the risk management books and books on statistics. For our discussion we will look at the simple formulas. A simple explanation of probability is given by the action of tossing a coin. The action will generate one of two outcomes, either heads or tails. If the coin used is perfectly symmetrical, the probability would be ½ (.5 percent) for heads, ½ for tails (.5 percent). The probability measure of an event can be defined as the ratio of the number of outcomes. Therefore when you toss the coin the odds are that heads will come in half of the tosses and tails will come up in the other half of the tosses. Thus if you toss the coin 100 times and you get tails 50 times, then a probability measure of 50/100 to the event that the coin will come up tails on the toss. Simple Probability 4 p(Event 1) + p(Event 2) The Probability of Event 1 plus the probability of Event 2 Then there is the probability of related events. Probability of Related Events 4 p(Event 1) 2 p(Event 2) 4 p(Both Events) The Probability of Event 1 times Probability of Event 2 gives the probability of both events occurring.

15


Let’s look at an example of how you can use the simple probability formulas. Event 1 and Event 2 are two independent events and the probability that both events will occur is determined by the product of their separate probabilities. The probability that either of the events will occur is the determined by the sum of their separate probabilities minus the probability that they both will occur. Event 1—there is and unprotected window on the first floor. Event 2—the burglar forces entry through the unprotected window and steals computers with company secrets. So we add the probability of each event together to assess the likelihood that the events will cause a loss. To use the formula we need to assign numbers to the events. The probability Event 1 will happen is 0.5, the probability that Event 2 will happen 0.8. The probability both events will happen is 0.5 2 0.8 = 0.4 and the probability that either Event 1 or Event 2 will happen is 0.5 + 0.7-0.4 = 0.8. So there is an 80 percent probability that one Event will occur and a 40 percent probability that both events will occur. There are matrices that rate an event for low to high as seen in the tables below. Matrix tables that rate probabilities from high to low are used to predict frequency. They are based on past performance and other data such as the CAP crime statistics of an address. A company called the CAP Index provides excellent crime statistics and tables to aid in the decision making by providing information to determine the type and probability of crime occurring at the chosen location. More will be presented about the CAP crime statistics later in the chapter. They are an accepted method of rating risk. The numbers in Table 2-2 can be used to explain the severity of an event from “Low” to “High.” The numbers can take on any number of representations. For example, take our earlier example of the unprotected window and the burglar. If the crime statistics show from the CAP report that burglaries have a high incidence of occurrence, you would select the probability of occurrence as 1. Now if a burglary does occur, you have determined that the loss would be severe so you give the severity a 1 as well. The result is a “High” “High” in the matrix means the severity is high as is the probability of occurrence. Action should be taken to reduce the exposure by implementing some countermeasure.

Table 2-2 Risk matrix. Severity High

High Medium Low

1 4 7

Probability of Occurrence Medium

2 5 8

Low

3 6 9

16


CALCULATING THE COST OF A LOSS Now that we have calculated the probability of a risk occurring, we need to go one step further and calculate the cost of the loss so we then calculate whether the cost of avoidance is worth the expense. This is an important step in the process because expenditures for security, like any business expense, need to be justified. This is also known as a Return on Investment (ROI). If the cost of the security countermeasure is greater than the loss, the measure will not be implemented. For example, let’s say the cost of the countermeasure will be $20,000 but the potential loss is only $2,000, then the countermeasure will not be implemented. The process will also aid you in decision making by prioritizing where the dollars will do the most good. To do this we can follow the steps below. (Based on information from http://www.epmbook.com/risk.htm “Risk Management: Who, What, Why,” Simon Wallace copyright 2002). Step One: Calculate the expected loss. There is a basic equation used to determine the cost of a loss. Probability of the Risk 2 Cost if it happens = expected cost if it happens Step Two: To justify the avoidance actions the following can be used to calculate the net benefit of the cost avoidance and/or reduction: Quantifying Risks and Justifying Avoidance Expenditures Probability 2 Financial Impact = Expectation of Losses .8 2 $50,000 = $40,000 Expected loss Where .8 is the probability of an event occurring times the $50,000 the financial impact equals the expected loss. Below is the amount of the expenditure to prevent or reduce the loss. $15,000 Probability aftereffect of avoidance and/or reduction actions 2 Financial Impact after Effect of avoidance and/or reduction actions = Revised expectation of losses .1 2 $50,000 = $5,000 .1 is the corrected probability after the preventive measure has been implemented. So the actual benefit from the cost avoidance/or reduction measure $15,000 (cost of avoidance or reduction) - $5,000 = $10,000 Net Benefit


17

Now take the deductible for the insurance + the net benefit to determine the total cost avoidance of the countermeasure. A deductible of $50,000 + $10,000 countermeasure = $60,000 cost total cost avoidance Figure 2-1 is sample spreadsheet that illustrates the information discussed in quantifying risks and justifying cost avoidance expenditures.

FIGURE 2-1 Sample spreadsheet.

18


THE SURVEY FORM In Figure 2-2 is a sample survey form. It is one that I have used. The form is broken into eight parts. It is one that was compiled from other forms. The following is a list of each part: Part 1 Building and site physical features Part 2 Social and political environment Crime statistics Crimes against persons Crimes against property Part 3 Perimeter Grounds Exterior doors Exterior Windows Other openings Exterior lighting Part 4 Interior Interior lighting Interior doors Offices Keys Locks Access control Alarm systems Part 5 Warehouse activities Part 6 Employee training Part 7 Security loss reports Part 8 Security policy and standards and procedures Each section of form needs to be completed. Each question in Parts 3-8 have a check box to the right of the question. An example follows. Table 2-3 explains the scoring scheme for this particular form. In Figure 2-3 the section is Grounds and there are a total of 66 points possible for the section. Each question requires a Yes or No answer. The total number of possible points is listed for each question. To complete the form all you need to do is to put an X in either the Yes or No box after the question. In the Chapter 18 of the book you will find several other survey forms to choose from.

19


PART 1 BUILDING and/or JOB SITE PHYSICAL FEATURES 1. Location of facility: 2. Job: 3. Street Address and Zip: 4. Telephone: 5. Number of structures on the Site: (a) 1 story

(b) 2 story

(c) 3 story

(d) 4 story

(e) 5 story or higher

6. Number of structures interconnected: (a) At grade level or higher 7. Total working population on: a) First (day) shift

(b) Below grade

(b) Second shift

(c) Third shift

8. Estimated number of daily visitors: 9. Number of automobiles parked daily:

PART 2 SOCIAL and POLITICAL ENVIRONMENT 10. Is the facility in a:

(a) City

(e) Unincorporated hamlet

(b) Town

(c) Incorporated village

11. Estimated percentage of neighboring area: (a) Residential (c) Industrial

(d) Agricultural

(e) Rural area

(d) Agricultural

(b) Commercial

(e) Undeveloped

12. Estimated percentage of residential area: (a) One family homes (b) Two family homes _____

(c) Multiple dwellings

High rise multiple dwellings ______

13. Police department having jurisdiction: 14. Total sworn officers in the department: 15. Average response times for emergency calls: 16. Is the jurisdiction separately reported in the Standard Metropolitan Statistical Area section of the Uniform Crime Reports? 17. If 16, is yes, what are the most recent indexes for: (a) Total crime _______ (b) Violent crime _______ (c) Property crime _________ (d) Murder and Manslaughter _________ (e) Rape _________ (f) Robbery _________ (g) Aggravated assault _________ (h) Burglary _________ (i) Larceny over $50 _________ (j) Car theft _________

FIGURE 2-2 Sample survey form.

20


Explanation of Element Scoring (X0) - Score No = Zero; Yes = Points Indicated (%) - Score up to the points indicated based on the percent compliance (Part Whole) - Award points indicated for each part up to the whole number indicated. (PJ) - Score up to the points indicated based on your professional judgment. PART 4 Physical Security Survey Perimeter 1. GROUNDS (66) Yes No 1.1 1.2

1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 1.10 1.11 1.12 1.13

Is there a perimeter fence? (X0-5) Does the fence meet the minimum specifications for security fencing? (.5/3) (1) Chain-link? (2) No. 11 gauge or heavier wire? (3) Mesh opening not larger than 2 inches square? (4) Selvage twisted and barbed at top and bottom:? (5) Fence bottom is within 2 inches of solid ground? (6) Is the fence top guard strung with barbed wire & angled outward & upward at a 45-degree angle? Are boxes or other items placed a safe distance from the fence? (X0-5) Is there a cleared area on both sides of the fence? (X)-5) There are not any unsecured overpasses or subterranean passageways near the fence? Are fence gates solid and in good condition? (X0-5) Are fence gates' hinges secure and non-removable? (X0-5) Have unnecessary gates been eliminated? (X0-5) Are locks and chains used to secure gates? (X0-5) Do you regularly check those gates that you have locked? (X0-5) There are not weeds or trash adjoining the building that should be removed? (X0-5) Is shrubbery near windows, doors, gates, and near entrances kept to a minimum? (X0-5) Stock, crates, pallets, etc. are not allowed to be piled near the building? (X0-5)

FIGURE 2-2 Sample survey form. (continued)

21


2. EXTERIOR DOORS (Office Trailers) (55) 2.1 2.2 2.3

Are doors constructed of sturdy material? X0-5) Are all hinge pins located on the inside? If No, are they pinned or welded? (X0-5) Are all door hinges installed so that it would be impossible to remove the closed doors without seriously damaging the door or Jam? (X0-5) 2.4 Are all door frames well constructed and in good condition? (X0-5) 2.5 Are the exterior locks double cylinder, dead bolts, or jimmy-proof type locks? (X0-5) 2.6 The breaking of glass or a door panel then will not allow the person to open the door? (X05) 2.7 Are all locks working properly ? (X0-5) 2.8 Are all doors properly secured or reinforced? (X0-5) 2.9 Are all unused doors secured? (X0-5) 2.10 Are all padlocks, chains, and hasps case hardened? (X0-5)

3. EXTERIOR WINDOWS (Office Trailers) (20) 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

Are all windows securely fastened from the inside? (X0-5) Are windows within 14 feet from the ground equipped with protective coverings? (X0-5) Do those windows with locks have locks that are designed and located so they cannot be reached and/or opened by breaking the glass? (X0-5) Windows cannot be removed without breaking them? (X0-5)

4. OTHER OPENINGS (Equipment Warehouses) (25) 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5

Are all ventilators or other possible means of entrance to the buildings) covered with steel bars or wire mesh? (X0-5) Are exposed roof hatches properly secured? (X0-5) Are the accessible skylights protected with bars or an intrusion alarm? (X0-5) Do fire exit doors have a portable alarm mounted, to alert if door is opened? (X0-5) Entrance cannot be gained from an adjoining building? (X0-5)

5. EXTERIOR LIGHTING 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7

Is the lighting adequate to illuminate critical areas? (X0-5) Is there sufficient lighting over entrances? (X0-5) The protective lighting and the working lighting system are not on the same circuit? (X0-5) Is there an auxiliary power source for protective lighting? (X0-5) Has the system been tested? (X0-5) Is the auxiliary system designed to go into operation automatically when needed?: (X0-5) How are the protective lights controlled? (5/10) 1. Automatic timer 2. Photo cells 5.80 Are the switch boxes and/or automatic timer secured? (X0-5)


Yes No

22


PART 5 INTERIOR I. INTERIOR LIGHTING (Office Trailers) (20) 1.1 Is there a back-up system for emergency lights?: (X0-5) 1.2 Is the lighting provided adequate for security purposes? (X0-5) 1.3 Is the lighting at night adequate for security purposes? (X0-5) 1.4 Is the night lighting sufficient for surveillance by the police department? (X0-5) 2. INTERIOR DOORS (Office Trailers) (30) 2.1 Are doors constructed of a sturdy and solid material? (X0-5) 2.2 Are doors limited to the essential minimum? (X0-5) 2.3 Are outside door hinge pins spot welded or bradded to prevent removal? (X0-5) 2.4 Are hinges installed on the inward side of the door? (X0-5) 2.5 Is there at least one lock on each outer door? (X0-5) 2.6 Is each door equipped with a locking device? (X0-5) 3. OFFICES (Office Trailers(20) 3.1 Are offices locked when unattended for a long period of time? (X0-5) 3.2 Are maintenance people, contractors, vendors, other visitors, required to show identification? (X0-5) 3.3 Are desks and files locked when left unattended? (X0-5) 3.4 Items of value are not left on desks in an unsecured manner? (X0-5) 4. KEYS (33) 4.1 Are methods taken to control the issuance and management of keys? (X0-20) 4.2 Do these controls include: (1/13) 1. Total keys issued? 2. Total master keys? 3. Is there an adequate log maintained of all keys that are issued? 4. Key holders are not permitted to duplicate keys? 5. Are keys marked "DO NOT DUPLICATE"? 6. If master keys are used, are they devoid of markings identifying them as such? 7. Are losses or thefts of keys promptly reported to security? 8. Is there a person responsible for issuing and replacing keys? 9. Are visual audits made of the keys? 10. Are locks changed immediately upon loss or theft of keys? 11. Are the duplicate keys stored in a safe and secure place? 12. Are keys returned when an employee resigns, is discharged, or suspended? 13. Are records maintained indicating buildings and entrances for which keys are issued?


Yes No


5. LOCKS (35) 5.1 Are entrances equipped with secure locking devices? (X0-5) 5.2 Is the lock designed or the frame built so that the door cannot be forced by spreading the frame? (X0-5) 5.3 Are all locks in working order? (X0-5) 5.4 Are the screws holding the lock firmly in place? (X0-5) 5.5 Is the bolt protected or constructed so it cannot be cut? (X0-5) 5.6 Are locks' combinations changed or rotated immediately upon resignation, discharge, suspension of an employee having possession of master keys? 5.7 Are locks changed after a major security violation resulting in large loss? 6. ACCESS CONTROL (20) 6.1 Are methods taken to control entry and movement of people and vehicles? 6.2 Do these controls include: (1/10): 1. Employees? 2. Service people? 3. Truck, rail, and other delivery/pickuup vehicle operators? 4. Outside contractors? 5. Visitors? 6. Sales personnel? 7. Employees' vehicles? 8. Other vehicles? 9. Intruders? 10. Other: & 7. ALARM SYSTEMS (Office Trailers and Tool Storage)(25) 7.1 Does the alarm system have an intrusion alarm system? (X0-5) 7.2 Does the alarm system have the following features: (2/20) 1. Is it connected to a central station? 2. Is it a proprietary system? 3. Is the system tested before activating it for non-operational periods? 4. Is the alarm system inspected and tested annually? 5. Is the system tamper resistant? 6. Is the system weather resistant? 7. Is there an automatic emergency power supply? 8. Is the alarm system properly maintained by trained technical specialists? 9. Are frequent tests conducted to determine the adequacy and promptness of response to alarm signals? 10. Other:


23

24


PART 6 1. WAREHOUSE ACTIVITIES (30) 1.1 1.2

Are methods taken to control entry and the movement of people and finished products and raw materials? (X0-16) Do these controls include: (2/14) 1. Is there separate lounge facilities for truck drivers? 2. Trash collectors are not permitted in the warehouse? 3. Employees/vehicles? 4. Contractor's vehicles? 5. Are shipping and receiving platforms free of trash? 6. Are pin locks used for loaded trailers parked on company property? 7. Other? N/A

PART 7 1. EMPLOYEE TRAINING (50) 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5

What percentage of employees receive an orientation to security program standards? (%-10) Are written materials included in the orientation? (X0-5) Are signs and notices posted in appropriate places to reinforce knowledge of security standards? (X0-5) Are training manuals used to aid and reinforce security training? Are records kept to verify security training and identify employees who need training?

PART 8 SECURITY LOSS REPORTS (24) 1.1 1.2

Are security losses investigated with the findings and actions reported on a standard incident report form? (X0-10) Does the security program require a complete investigation of incidents involving the following: (2/14) 1. Cash funds? 2. Irregularities in financial accounts? 3. Equipment and materials shortages? 4. Production losses from disturbances? 5. Expendable supplies and inventories shrinkage? 6. Computer theft? 7. Other security losses:



PART 9 SECURITY POLICY (50) 1.1

Is there a written policy signed by the site manager emphasizing the importance of protecting people, property, and intellectual property against loss by taking or intentional destruction? (X0-15) 1.20 Does the security policy include: (1/10) 1. Theft of property? 2. Burglary? 3. Theft of process or trade secrets? 4. Assault on employees and visitors? 5. Bomb threats? 6. Arson? 7. Civil disturbances? 8. Other security losses? 1.3 Is the security policy: (2/10) 1. Communicated in writing to all employees? 2. Referred to during new employee orientation? 3. Referred to in group meetings? 4. Contained in some manual? 5. Referred to in management program? 1.4 Does senior management support the security policy: 1. By periodic written communications? (X0-5) 2. By regular security tours? (X0-5) 3. By participating in security program audits? (X0-5) 2. SECURITY STANDARDS AND PROCEDURES 2.1 Are there written standards for management performance in the security program? (X0-5) 2.2 Are security program standards communicated to all levels of management? (X0-10) 2.3 Are security instructions and procedures defined in a program manual? (X0-5)

Total Points Scored for Security Total Possible Points: Percentage Score for Security: (Total points scored divided by total points possible multiplied by 100. Figure to nearest 1/10 of 1%)


25

26


Table 2-3 Explanation of Element Scoring. (X0) - Score No = Zero; Yes = Points Indicated (%) - Score up to the points indicated based on the percent compliance (Part Whole) - Award points indicated for each part up to the whole number indicated. (PJ) - Score up to the points indicated based on your professional judgment

FIGURE 2-3 Example of a CAP map.


27

The survey form is the key to helping you choose the protection necessary based on the threat making the solutions cost effective. The advantages to using a form are as follows: 1. You will have a plan to follow. 2. The important areas to be analyzed will be evident. 3. Any deficiencies will be noted. 4. You will have documentation and history. 5. Your decisions will be based on facts rather than subjectivity. 6. The design of the perimeter protection will zero in on the mitigating the risks. Table 2.4 is a physical security features for basic level security. The spreadsheet is not exhaustive but it can be used to give a quick look at the physical security status of a facility or property. Each checklist list specifies what the elements that are required for that level covering the three levels of security from basic to high. Each level calls for progressively more security based on company standards. The spreadsheet is used to check a location against a set of predetermined standards. The standards can be used for an existing facility or for the design of a new facility. The purpose of the spreadsheet is to visually spell out the requirements of the security policy as it relates to physical security based on location and critical nature of the operation. Crime statistics play a part in designing and planning the security. The higher the rates of crime against person such as homicide, rape, robbery, aggravated assault and crimes against property such as burglaries, larceny, motor vehicle theft will dictate if more perimeter security may be needed. Across the top of the sheet you will notice that the main elements of physical security are listed starting with CCTV and ending with perimeter fence. The list is not in order of importance. The headings for the rows are listed with a main heading of exterior, interior, and a description location for each area. There is a legend at the bottom of each sheet under the heading “Footnotes”. An “X” in the box denotes that the feature is optional. The “R” denotes the feature is required to meet the level of security listed on the top of the form. Finally, “N/A” means that the feature is not applicable to the location. Table 2-5 outlines the requirements for the intermediate level of security. Any thing marked with an “R” is required to meet the standard. As you can see the intermediate level requires progressively more elements than the basic level does. Table 2-6 outlines the requirements for a high level of physical security. Table 2-7 provides a snapshot of the seven steps to performing a risk analysis. The checklist can be used as a guide to make sure the steps are all completed.

28


Table 2-4 Basic Level Physical Security Standards Features. LOCATION

CCTV YES/NO INTRUSION GUARDS KEY CNTRL DURESS LIGHTING PERIMETER FENCE LOCKS SIGN IN/OUT

PERIMETER PROTECTION Fence Parking Lots Access Control N/A Doors Windows Gates Equipment Storage TOOLS/ EQUIPMENT Inventory Marking Storage Computers Office Suites Common Areas Service Areas

R R R R R

R R N/A R N/A R R

R R N/A R R R R

R

R R N/A X N/A X

R

R R Yes R R R R R

R R R R R

R R R R R

N/A N/A

R

FOOT NOTES X Denotes option for meeting standard R Denotes required feature N/A Denotes no action

The Crime Statistics There is a company that provides the crime statistics on any specific address in the US and Canada. The company is called CAP Index. In Figure 2-3 the name of the company is displayed as well as a legend on the right side of the map. The data used in the CAP Index is based on US and Canadian census and other government data and uses a scientific approach. The methodology used is based on a cause and effect relationship of the amount of crime in a neighborhood and what CAP calls the “social disorganization of the neighborhood.” CAP combines the social information, crime indicators, and survey information providing the most

29


Table 2-5 Intermediate Level Physical Security Standards Features. LOCATION

CCTV

PERIMETER PROTECTION Fence Parking Lots Access Control N/A Doors Windows Gates Equipment Storage Security Officers TOOLS/ EQUIPMENT Inventory Marking Storage Computers Office Suites Common Areas Service Areas

YES/NO INTRUSION GUARDS KEY CNTRL LIGHTING PERIMETER FENCE LOCKS

Yes R R R R R

R R N/A R R R

R R N/A R R R R

R

R R N/A X N/A X

SIGN IN/OUT

R

Yes

R Yes Yes

R R R R R R

R R R R R

R R R R R

N/A N/A

R


accurate scores indicating the area’s risk to crime. The area can be as specific as an address. This makes the statistics more meaningful and accurate in taking into consideration the type of crimes and the rates. The CAP site at www.capindex.com explains how the system works in detail and you can request further information. The numbers are compared to county, state and national averages. The “social disorder” number is based on the known indicators of crime and has 21 demographic values such as population, mobility, economic data, education data, and others. 90 crime vulnerability assessment scores are provided for each address provided to CAP. The data used is standardized across the US and Canada. The data for the

30


Table 2-6 High Level Physical Security Standards Checklist. LOCATION

CCTV YES/NO INTRUSION GUARDS KEY CNTRL DURESS LIGHTING PERIMETER FENCE LOCKS SIGN IN/OUT

PERIMETER PROTECTION Fence Parking Lots Access Control N/A Doors Windows Gates Equipment Storage TOOLS/ EQUIPMENT Inventory Marking Storage Computers Office Suites

R R R R R

R R N/A R N/A R R

R R N/A R R R R

R

R R N/A X N/A X

R

R R Yes

Common Areas Service Areas

R R R

R R R

R R R

R R

R R

R R

N/A N/A

R


police and FBI uniform crime reports are not uniformly available and therefore not as accurate as the CAP scores. The reason for the inconsistency in the Uniform Crime Report (UCR) is that reporting is voluntary and some jurisdictions do not report everything. The UCR data can be up to 18 months old. CAP, on the other hand, updates their data every year. The data is a good tool to predict the vulnerabilities associated with crime for a given address. By reviewing the data you can more accurately assess what types of crime will occur where the building is or will be located. Armed with the information you can make more intelligent decisions about countermeasures that will mitigate the threats. There is no software to buy to get the CAP Map for your address of interest.


31

RISK ANALYSIS STEPS Now that you have identified the risks using the tools we described, you must now interpret what you have collected. There are six (6) steps for analyzing the risks. The following paragraphs outline these steps. First, identify the assets of the facility (Security Survey), people, facilities, equipment, etc. The table in Figure 2-2 can be used to collect the information to identify the assets. A separate asset table can be used to collect information about assets by location or department. Now a value must be assigned to the assets. Assigning value is not a simple task. For equipment or products, the value can be the purchase or the replacement costs. To determine value, you would answer the following questions: a. How much revenue does this equipment and facility generate? b. How much does it cost to maintain? c. How much would it cost if the equipment were lost? d. How much would it cost to replace? Now that the assets are identified the risks need to be identified. The various risk categories are examined, and the various factors are applied until a list of possible threats is created. Since there is not a scientific way to determine which risk categories apply to an asset, it is a subjective determination. Common sense should prevail. The next step is to go through the various assets and the threats to estimate how much would be lost if the threat causes a loss. Building and equipment replacement costs can be calculated. What about business loss because patrons are afraid to go to the business because it is in a high crime area or the crime rate is increasing? Now calculate the probability of occurrence by using the formula below or use a matrix chart as depicted in Table 2-1. Simple Probability = p(Event 1) + p(Event 2) The Probability of Event 1 plus the probability of Event 2 Then there is the probability of related events. Probability of Related Events = p(Event 1) 2 p(Event 2) = p(Both Events) The Probability of Event 1 2 Probability of Event 2 gives the probability of both events occurring. The frequency of occurrence is then used to determine cost of the expected loss the on a particular asset because of a threat. The following formula is used.

32


Probability 2 Financial Impact = Expectation of Losses he corrected probability 2 the expected loss after the countermeasure has been implemented = The corrected loss The cost of the counter measure 1 the corrected loss = The net benefit of the countermeasure ost of deductible savings + the net benefit of the countermeasure = Total cost avoidance

Choosing the Method to Mitigate the Risk After the risks are identified you need to select a method to mitigate the risk. The mitigation method we are talking about here is now whether to add an intrusion detection system. The risk management program methods are as follows: • Risk avoidance • Risk reduction • Risk segregation • Risk acceptance • Risk transfer (purchase insurance) • Combinations of any of the above Table 2-7 is a synopsis of the risk mitigation methods. Each method is outlined and a brief definition is included. This is quick reference guide to risk mitigation. Risk avoidance is when you cease doing or simply don’t do something. An example is not driving in a snowstorm because of the high risk of getting into an accident. You simply avoided the risk by not driving in the snowstorm. Businesses can choose to not do something that has a high risk or potential loss. An example would be to not allow customers in a work area that is dangerous, like your local mechanic shop’s garage while work is being performed. Risk reduction is used to lower the severity of a potential or actual loss. Fire sprinklers are a good example of risk reduction. When a fire occurs in the facility the fire sprinklers will activate, controlling or extinguishing the fire. The fire sprinklers will limit the spread of a fire and therefore reduce the loss. Risk segregation has two components. First is the separation or spreading out of the activity to minimize the exposure. An example is having a policy that all the top executives don’t travel together on the same flight. In the unlikely event the plane crashes, all the top executives are not lost in the single event. Another example is not locating a business or operation in an area that is at high risk for


33

Table 2-7 Mitigation of risk. Method

Defined

Risk Avoidance Risk Reduction Risk Segregation Risk Acceptance Risk Transfer Combination

Avoid the risk Reduce the potential loss Separation/duplication Accept the risk Purchase insurance or self insure Any combinations of above

causing a disruption, like placing the only data center of a company in an area prone to earthquakes. To offset such a decision a company would need to have an update disaster and business continuity plan that calls for a backup data center to be used in the event of the loss of the primary data center and to back-up the critical company data regularly. Second is duplication or back-up. This is where you back up your company’s critical data on a regular basis in case there is a server or disk failure. Critical data can be identified as anything that is important to keeping the business running like accounts payable and receivable. Other data such as orders, payroll, etc. may also be needed to be backed up. The backed-up data can be used to keep the business running (continuity). There are entire books written on the subject of disaster planning and business continuity and beyond the scope of this book. Another example is to have back-up power for perimeter lighting so the facility will still have lights in the event of a power outage. Risk acceptance is when the company management decides, after doing an analysis, that the potential loss from the risk is not significant and nothing needs to be done about it. Risk transfer is when a company purchases insurance, thereby transferring the liability of the risk to the insurance company. Companies pay an insurance premium to transfer the risk. Premiums can be high, so to offset the cost there is a deductible, the higher the deductible the lower the premium. We all do this and a common example is automobile insurance which transfers the cost of the liability to the insurance company. If you are involved in an accident, the insurance company pays for the damages of your claim if the other motorist was uninsured and you are responsible for the deductible which is usually $500.00. For companies the deductible can be as high as $250,000 or more so using risk mitigation techniques is a good business financial consideration.

34


Businesses can also transfer the cost of the risk to an insurance company by purchasing a property and casualty policy. The insurance company will not accept all of the risk and, in some cases, will not accept the risk at all. There are deductibles that we have outlined in our automobile insurance policies and businesses also have deductibles for their property insurance. These deductibles keep rates down. As previously stated it is not unheard of for a business to have a deductible of $250,000 or more for a loss experienced from a property casualty claim. This is why the whole concept of risk analysis and mitigation is important to the business’s bottom line. Other risks that need to be considered are natural disasters such as tornados, hurricanes, blizzards, and earthquakes and the effect they would have on the security. Is there back-up power available? How long will it keep critical systems operational? Combinations of the risk mitigation methods can be used to determine the risk for a particular construction job site. For example, you can transfer part of the risk and reduce the other part. To transfer the risk you purchase insurance for part of the risk and then you implement a countermeasure for the other part of the risk. For example the insurance company will only consider insuring the risk for part of its value for a burglary of computer equipment by only insuring the hardware and not the critical data. To offset the remaining exposure from the loss of the data you decide to implement a countermeasure of locking the computers down and encrypting the data to prevent easy theft of the intellectual property along with an intrusion alarm system to protect the remaining exposure. You have now used a combination of mitigation methods, risk transfer, and risk reduction to address the exposure of the company’s computers.

PLANNING AND DESIGNING Now that we have identified the threats and analyzed the risks, we need to choose the countermeasures necessary to mitigate the exposures. There are some things to keep in mind when completing this phase. 1. What does the countermeasure cost to implement? 2. What amount of the project budget has been allocated to security? 3. Does it make sense? 4. What is the cost benefit of the countermeasure? (see sidebar example) 5. Can the cost of the countermeasure be justified? 6. Is there a benefit? 7. Does the cost exceed the potential loss?


Table 2-8 Asset identification table. ASSET

DESCRIPTION OF ASSET, NUMBER, ETC.

People Buildings Computers Intellectual Property Equipment

Table 2-9 Risk Analysis Checklist. STEPS

DESCRIPTION

Identify Assets Set Value of Asset Identify Risks Estimate Loss of Asset (formulas below) CALCULATE PROBABILITY: Simple Prob = p(Event 1) + p(Event 2) Prob of related Events p(Event 1) X p(Event 2) = p(Both Events) CALCULATE COST OF LOSS: P X (Financial Impact = EL (Expected Loss) CP (corrected probability) X EL = corrected loss (CL) CM (cost of countermeasure) - CL = Net benefit of CM Cost of deductible + net benefit CM = Total cost avoidance

People, equipment, etc Cost of replacement or loss of use What could cause a loss How to calculate Simple Probability

Calculating the cost of a loss and the cost avoidance

35

36


FIGURE 2.4 XYZ Corporation Floor Plan.


37

XYZ Corporation XYZ Corporation is a construction company building an office building. The architectural conceptual design drawings include windows on the first floor. The CAP statistics for the address of the proposed building show a high incidence of crimes to property especially burglaries. The windows are designed to go around the entire first floor including the back end of the building which is not visible from the street. After analysis it is determined that the cost of a potential loss from a burglary would be $500,000 in heavy equipment theft. The average cost of each piece of heavy equipment is $200,000. The company has a $300,000 deductible for its property and causality insurance policy to keep the premiums low. The probability of occurrence is 80%. The countermeasure to mitigate the risk is to install a perimeter fence for an equipment storage area with security lighting and CCTV. The cost for the countermeasures is $180,000. Now we would use the formula to determine the whether the countermeasure will net a cost avoidance when it is implemented. Probability 2 Financial Impact = Expectation of Losses .9 2 $500,000 = $450,000 Expected loss Cost of countermeasure $180,000 .4 2 $500,000 = $200,000 .4 is the corrected probability after the preventive measure has been implemented. $200,000 - $180,000 = $20,000 net benefit of countermeasure Cost of deductible savings + the net benefit of the countermeasure = Total cost avoidance $300,000 + $20,000 = $280,000 the cost avoidance of the countermeasure. So the countermeasure is worth the cost since the total cost avoidance would be the cost of the installation. The design will include the countermeasures since they are cost effective and a cost avoidance.


CHAPTER

Security Overview

3

T

his chapter will provide an overview of everything that is covered in the book. The chapter is a summary of what is presented in all of the preceding and succeeding chapters of the book. The information can be used a quick reference guide. The details about each area of security will be summarized in this chapter and the preceding and succeeding chapters will have the detailed information about each topic summarized in this chapter. Security is defined as the protection of people and things such as buildings and information from harm, theft, or sabotage. People come first when designing and implementing physical security protection of a job site. People need to feel safe coming to work and feel that they are protected from problems such as physical threats, harm, robbery, thefts while at the job site. This is not an easy task since these problems are just outside the perimeter fence that separates the job site from the outside world. The more the target is hardened or appears to be hardened will help to make the employees feel safe. What should not be done under any circumstances is to provide a false sense of security. For example, do not install dummy CCTV cameras. These are fake cameras or just housings without the camera that are made to look like real CCTV cameras except they are not connected to any system and no recordings are made. The camera is essentially an empty dome or other type of housing. These dummy cameras also come with blinking lights to make them appear real. If an incident occurs on site and there is the appearance that it occurred in an area with one of these cameras and the recording is asked for, there will not be one. A suit claiming a “false sense of security” may then be filed and the suits have been successful in claiming a false sense of security. The suit will be based on the fact that if a camera, even a dummy, is needed to be placed in the location then that means there was a security concern. Why spend the time to put in dummy CCTV cameras? If it warrants a dummy camera then probably a real camera will be justified. The cost savings that may be


40


realized from installing the dummy camera or cameras will be for naught when an incident occurs and there are no recordings to produce. The awards in the civil trials for “false sense of security” cases are usually high.

CONDUCTING AND USING THREAT ASSESSMENTS Using the survey and risk analysis in the design of specifications for physical security of the job site can be accomplished through the use of a threat assessment. Meeting the threats of the job site is then addressed. This way, the most severe threats and risks are covered. To identify the threats you need to first identify the assets. This chapter is an overview and description of the process of doing a threat assessment including some useful tools to aid in the process, such as a cost benefit analysis. To fully understand the concepts in the chapter, there are some terms that need to be defined: 1. Threat assessment—What can or will cause harm or loss to the people, facility, products, etc. (Vulnerabilities) 2. Risk assessment—The evaluation of the threats and determining which ones pose the greatest potential to cause harm. The analysis is used to categorize the threats in rank order by the highest probability of occurrence. 3. Risk management—The process used to minimize the exposure to loss. There are entire books devoted to risk management that include risk assessment, analysis, and mitigation. Formulas are used to determine the probability of a potential loss occurring and what the dollar of the loss would be. For the purposes of our discussion, we will keep it basic. The basics outlined in this chapter are effective tools and are easy to use.

How to Do a Threat Assessment A Threat Assessment is the first step in determining what security will be needed. The assessment is the first step in risk analysis and is used to determine the threats and vulnerabilities. Conversely the first step in risk analysis is identifying the threats. Why do we need do a risk assessment you may be asking? 1. Security costs and money is limited. 2. Justify the expenditures 3. Be a part of the risk management program The risk management program has two methods for achieving the goal: 1. Pay for loss prevention countermeasures 2. Purchase insurance. The risk management program has the following steps: 1. Identify the risks 2. Analyze the risks for probability of occurrence

Security Overview

41

3. Choose the method of mitigating the risk a. Risk avoidance b. Risk reduction c. Risk segregation d. Risk acceptance e. Risk transfer (purchase insurance) f. Combinations of any of the above 4. Continually re-evaluate the steps above

Identify the Risks Now let’s look at how we can identify the risks. The security survey is a tool that can be used to identify the risks. The survey starts by looking at the location of the building or structure. The purpose of the survey is to provide the information necessary to make decisions on what level is security is needed. To effectively perform the survey you need to collect some background information about the crime statistics in the area of the proposed or existing building or structure. The survey form and the crime statistics are used to determine the threat to the facility, which is the first step in risk analysis. What you are looking for is the type of security features that will best meet the need. So looking at crime statistics is an important first step. The following questions are an abbreviated version of what the security survey is all about: • Where is the job site located or where will it be located? • Crime statistics for type and frequency • What type of job site will be or is at the location? • What is it you are trying to protect? • Who are trying to protect it from? • What is the best way to protect the facility, people, and process? a. external intrusion detection b. access control c. video surveillance (CCTV) monitoring d. locks and keys e. clear zones f. security officers g. controlling vehicular and pedestrian traffic • What natural barriers can be used in the protection and design plan? a. rivers b. cliffs

42


c. beaches d. other rugged terrain The most effective way to collect the information necessary to identify the risks is to have some kind of form or checklist. These forms are extremely helpful and make the job easier by ensuring that all the information is collected and recorded. The forms can be simple to comprehensive. The more comprehensive the form, the more accurate the survey and risk analysis will be.

Analyze the Risk for Probability of Occurrence So we want to know if an event will happen that will cause a loss. This is also known as the probability of risk occurrence. There are various methods used to determine the probability of risk occurrence. Some are simple, such as the Simple Probability Formula. Others are more complex and will left for the risk management books and books on statistics. For our discussion we will look at the simple formulas. A simple explanation of probability is given by the action of tossing a coin. The action will generate one of two outcomes, either heads or tails. If the coin used is perfectly symmetrical, the probability would be 1/2 (.5%) for heads, 1/2 for tails (.5%). The probability measure of an event can be defined as the ratio of the number of outcomes. Therefore when you toss the coin the odds are that heads will come in half of the tosses and tails will come up in the other half of the tosses. Thus if you toss the coin 100 times and you get tails 50 times, then a probability measure of 50/100 to the event that the coin will come up tails on the toss. Simple Probability 5 p(Event 1) 1 p(Event 2) The Probability of Event 1 plus the probability of Event 2 Then there is the probability of related events. Probability of Related Events 5 p(Event 1) 3 p(Event 2) 5 p(Both Events) The Probability of Event 1 times Probability of Event 2 gives the probability of both events occurring. Let’s look at an example of how you can use the simple probability formulas. Event 1 and Event 2 are two independent events and the probability that both events will occur is determined by the product of their separate probabilities. The probability that either of the events will occur is the determined by the sum of their separate probabilities minus the probability that they both will occur. Event 1–there is an unprotected window on the first floor. Event 2–the burglar forces entry through the unprotected window and steals computers with company secrets. So we add the probability of each event together to see the likelihood that the events will cause a loss.

Security Overview

43

To use the formula we need to assign numbers to the events. The probability Event 1 will happen is 0.5, the probability that Event 2 will happen 0.8. The probability both events will happen is 0.5 3 0.85 0.4 and the probability that either Event 1 or Event 2 will happen is 0.5 1 0.7 2 0.4 5 0.8. So there is an 80 percent probability that one Event will occur and 40 percent that both events will occur. There are matrices that rate an event for low to high as seen in the tables below. Matrix tables that rate probabilities from high to low are used to predict frequency. They are based on past performance and other data such as the CAP crime statistics of an address. A company called the CAP Index provides excellent crime statistics and tables to aid in the decision making by providing information to determine the type and probability of crime occurring at the chosen location. More will be presented about the CAP crime statistics later in the chapter. They are an accepted method of rating risk. The numbers can take on any number of representations. For example, take our earlier example of the unprotected window and the burglar. If the crime statistics show from the CAP report that burglaries have a high incidence of occurrence, you would select the probability of occurrence as 1. Now if a burglary does occur, you have determined that the loss would be severe so you give the severity a 1 as well. The result is a “High”. “High” in the matrix means the severity is high as is the probability of occurrence. Action should be taken on reducing the exposure by implementing some countermeasure.

Calculating the Cost of a Loss Now that we have calculated the probability of a risk occurring, we need to go one step further and calculate the cost of the loss so we then calculate whether the cost of avoidance is worth the expense. This is an important step in the process because expenditures for security, like any business expense, need to be justified. This is also known as a Return on Investment (ROI). If the cost of the security countermeasure is greater than the loss the measure will not be implemented. For example, let’s say the cost of the countermeasure will be $20,000 but the potential loss is only $2,000, then the countermeasure will not be implemented. The process will also aid you in decision making by prioritizing where the dollars will do the most good. To do this we can follow the steps below. (Based on information from http://www.epmbook.com/risk.htm “Risk Management: Who, What, Why”, Simon Wallace copyright 2002). Step One: Calculate the expected loss. There is a basic equation used to determine the cost of a loss. Probability of the Risk 3 Cost if it happens 5 expected cost if it happens

44


Step Two: To justify the avoidance actions the following can be used to calculate the net benefit of the cost avoidance and/or reduction: Quantifying Risks and Justifying Avoidance Expenditures Probability 3 Financial Impact 5 Expectation of Losses .8 3 $50,000 5 $40,000 Expected Loss Where .8 is the probability of an event occurring times the $50,000 the financial impact equals the expected loss. Below is the amount of the expenditure to prevent or reduce the loss. $15,000 Probability after effect of avoidance and/or reduction actions 2 Financial Impact after Effect of avoidance and/or reduction actions 5 Revised expectation of losses .1 3 $50,000 5 $5,000 .1 is the corrected probability after the preventive measure has been implemented. So the actual benefit from the cost avoidance/or reduction measure $15,000 (cost of avoidance or reduction) 2 $5,000 5 $10,000 Net Benefit Now take the deductible for the insurance 1 the net benefit to determine the total cost avoidance of the countermeasure. A deductible of $50,000 1 $10,000 countermeasure 5 $60,000 cost total cost avoidance In Chapter 2, a sample spreadsheet can be found that illustrates the information discussed in quantifying risks and justifying cost avoidance expenditures.

THE SURVEY FORM In Chapter 2 is a sample survey form. It is one that I have used. The form is broken into eight parts and was compiled from other forms. The following is a list of each part: • Part 1 Building and site physical features • Part 2 Social and Political Environment Crime statistics Crimes against persons Crimes against property Q Q Q

Security Overview

45

• Part 3 Perimeter Grounds Exterior doors Exterior Windows Other openings Exterior lighting Q Q Q Q Q

• Part 4 Interior Interior lighting Interior doors Offices Keys Locks Access control Alarm systems Q Q Q Q Q Q Q

• Part 5 Warehouse Activities • Part 6 Employee training • Part 7 Security loss reports • Part 8 Security policy and standards and procedures

PHYSICAL SECURITY Physical security starts at the perimeter of the job site. The temporary construction fence is used to mark the boundary of the job site. The fence is also used to help keep people out of the job site for safety reasons. A construction job site is a place where there is a great deal of activity and hazards, including the movement and operation of heavy equipment. There are usually large deep excavations where people that may wander onto the site can fall in and be seriously hurt or killed. The posting of “No Trespassing” signs is important to warn people to stay out. The required wording of the signs varies from jurisdiction to jurisdiction so check with local law enforcement to make sure that the signs cite the proper ordinance that prohibits trespassing. The Construction Industry Crime Prevention Programs on the West Coast of the US have provide “No Trespassing” signs to their members for a fee with the proper wording on them. The signs are durable and can be used at other job sites after the current one is completed. Natural boundaries can also be incorporated into the perimeter security fence. Chapter 5 has more details about perimeter security.

Security Lighting Security lighting alone will not discourage an unauthorized person from attempting entry to the job site, but the lighting will assist security and law enforcement

46


personnel in the detection of the unauthorized person attempting to gain entry. The lighting will enable the security force to observe activities around the job site while minimizing the presence of the security force. To accomplish this task the lighting must be able to contrast the intruder from the background. For painted surfaces, grass, clean concrete, and brick walls the lighting does not need to be as intense and is therefore a cost savings from an operational point of view. An initial purchase of equipment is often needed for dark and dirty surfaces. To contrast an intruder from a dark or dirty background surface, the intensity of the lighting must be greater otherwise the background will provide cover for the intruder wearing dark clothes. The elimination of shadowing is an important consideration in the design of the security lighting system. Along with more intense lighting, there are other things that can be done to the background to assist the lighting. The goals of security lighting are as follows: 1. Lighting is a psychological deterrence to an intruder because of the fear of being detected. 2. Aid in detecting intruders 3. Prevent glare that may blind security officers but produce outward glare to blind intruders 4. Provide enough lighting for CCTV to depict and record colors with accuracy Categories of Security lighting Security lighting is divided into four basic categories. The four categories of security lighting are: 1. Continuous lighting 2. Standby lighting 3. Movable lighting 4. Emergency lighting Continuous lighting is the most common and widely used security lighting system. It consists of a series of fixed lights arranged to flood an area with light continuously during darkness. The lights are arranged to provide overlapping cones of illumination. An example is the lights used in a chemical or oil refinery. There are two types of continuous lighting glare projection and controlled lighting. Glare lighting also known as security lights. These lights will cause glare outwardly from inside the perimeter causing any intruder attempting to enter the site to be temporarily blinded thereby making it difficult to see inside the perimeter.

Security Overview

47

Controlled lighting can be seen along highways where the lighting is controlled and the width of the lighted strip is adjusted to fit a certain area which is a portion of the roadway. Standby lighting is similar to continuous lighting in arrangement but the lighting is not continuously illuminated. The lights come on either automatically by a sensor trip or manually illuminated by security officers when an intruder or suspicious activity is detected. Movable lighting is not continuous and is similar to a search light to track the movement of an intruder. A good example is the prison search light that watches several areas as it illuminates while it moves around. Emergency lighting can duplicate all the previously discussed lighting systems and is used during a power outage or other failure that causes the permanent lighting system to become inoperative. This can also include an attack on the system by an intruder. The emergency lighting is dependent upon an alternative power source, either a generator or batteries. Types of Lamps (Luminaries) The bulb or lamp is the part of the light that produces the illumination. There are six types of lamps used in security lighting. Incandescent lamps are the bulbs we all use in the lights in our homes. The incandescent bulb will provide instant illumination when it is switched on and is the most common bulb used in security lighting. Fluorescent lamps are most commonly found in office lighting, kitchens, and bathrooms. The fluorescent bulb will produce 62 lumens per watt and is therefore very efficient. The bulb is mercury vapor and temperature-sensitive. They are not used outdoors in cold climates. Fluorescent lamps will cause interference with radio reception. Mercury vapor lamps are commonly used in security and produce a bluish cast when illuminated. The bulbs of mercury vapor lamps last longer than incandescent lamps and can tolerate a 50 percent power dip. The time required for illumination of mercury vapor lamps when they are switched on is considerable. Metal Halide lamps are another lamp that is very tolerant of power dips. The time for illumination when switched on is also considerable. However a power dip of 20 seconds or more will cause the lamp to turn off. Sodium Vapor Lights are both high and low pressure lamps that produce a soft yellow light and are more efficient than mercury vapor lights. These lights are used in areas prone to fog and are usually found on highways and bridges because the yellow light will penetrate the mist more readily than white light. Quartz lamps produce a very bright white light. The lamp illuminates almost as quickly as do the incandescent lamps. Quartz lamps are high wattage ranging

48


from 1500 to 2000 watts in security lighting systems. The quartz lights are used along the perimeter fences and other barriers. Halogen lamps are charges with Xenon gas. The lamp produces a bright white light. The halogen lamp is popular today especially for vehicle headlights. Halogen lights are long-lasting. Types of Security Lighting There are four general types of security lighting systems in use today. Floodlights are luminaries that use a narrow beam to focus on a specific area. The lights are very bright and concentrated and therefore will produce glare and can be used to direct glare outward from the site. The lights can be automatically tripped using a passive inferred (PIR) device, by motion sensors, or manually by security personnel. More will be said about sensors in a later chapter. Fresnel lenses are those that produce an illumination in a long horizontal beam. A good example is the light from a lighthouse. Fresnel lenses were designed for use in lighthouses to project a light in a long horizontal beam to warn ships of danger. In security use the illumination can be concentrated to produce glare for the intruder but not for those inside the perimeter. The lenses can be tripped by a PIR device, motion sensors, or manually. Searchlights are incandescent lamps that are narrowly focused. They can be moved around and focused on any location inside or outside the perimeter. Searchlights are used for grand openings of stores, restaurants, etc. Hollywood also uses searchlights to signify gala events. Street lamps are also considered a security light. Street lights are used in parking lots and sometimes at vehicle entrances to the site. Street lights are also used along the perimeter. There are two types of street lights, symmetrical and asymmetrical. Symmetrical lights are used to disperse the illumination evenly and asymmetrical lights are used to disperse the light by reflection to where it is needed. Lighting Requirements for Protection Each of the four types of security lighting has its uses but no one type of lighting is good for all applications. So when designing the system, you need to take into consideration the following areas and lighting requirements (see Table 3-1). The table outlines the minimum amount of illumination needed and states it in footcandles based on the Department of the Army Field Manual 19.30 Physical Security (FM). FM 3-19.30 dated 8 January 2001 supersedes FM3-19 which was dated March 1979. FM 3-19.30, like the older version, is the standard used in the security industry for security lighting requirements. The foot-candles have not changed from the old to the new edition of the FM. The minimum lighting recommendations below are based on FM 3-19.30.

49

Security Overview

TABLE J-1

Areas and Lighting Requirements FOOT-CANDLES ON HORIZONTAL PLANE AT GROUND LEVEL

LOCATION

Perimeter of outer area

015

Perimeter of restricted area

0.4

Vehicular entrances

1.0

Pedestrian entrances

2.0

Sensitive inner areas

0.15

Sensitive inner structure

1.0

Entrances

0.1

Open yards

0.2

Decks on open piers

1.0

Table 3-2 summarizes the security requirements of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. These standards are used in numerous local ordinances that call for security lighting as a part of Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design (CPTED). CPTED has gained wide acceptance in a number of communities across the US and Canada. CPTED is the concept of adding the element of prevention through the use of the build out of the site to reduce the incidence of crime and the fear of crime occurring. More about CPTED is in Chapter 1. Security lighting according to the ordinances in most communities state that security lighting will not be directed above the horizontal plane of the project. The lights will have shields on the fixtures to keep the light from being visible on the adjacent properties and roadways. The general use of floodlights as a part of the security lighting design is discouraged and may not be permitted.

TABLE 3-2

Security Requirements

LOCATION

FOOT-CANDIES REQUIRED AT LEVEL ON GBOUND

Perimeter Fence

0.5

Buildings

0.5-2.0

Large open areas

0.5-2.0

Entrances

10

Gatehouses

30

Pedestrian walkways and access points Courtesy of Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

1-6

50


The following outlines the requirements of some jurisdictions for security lighting. The requirements are usually part of an ordinance that outlines all lighting requirements that area acceptable throughout the jurisdictions. The ordinances are usually enforced as a part of the building permit process: 1. The illumination from security lighting will not illuminate vertical surfaces on buildings to a level of eight feet above grade or eight feet above the bottom of doorways or entries whichever is greater. 2. Poles for mounting security lighting can be no more than 10 feet from the perimeter of the designated secure area. 3. Perimeter security lights will have motion sensors to activate the lights since the lights are to be in the off position until the motion sensor is tripped by an intruder that is within five feet of the perimeter. 4. The height of the pole that a security lighting fixture is mounted on is usually restricted to no more than 15 to 20 feet depending on the jurisdiction. 5. The illumination tables (foot-candles) permitted for each security lighting application are based on the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. Those jurisdictions that have adopted CPTED use the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America’s security lighting standards outlined in 3.2 below. 6. The jurisdictions will review and approve the plans for security lighting as a part of the site lighting master plan. Lighting requirements for the perimeter fence based on FM 3-19.30 are as follows. The perimeter fence where the fence is more than 100 feet or more from the building and there is 100 foot clearance for 100 feet outside of the perimeter fence. The type of lighting recommended is glare projection. For what is known as semi-isolated fenced perimeters where there is not a clear zone within 60-100 feet outside the fence controlled lighting is recommended. For perimeter fence lines that are immediately adjacent to buildings, etc. inside the fence area, controlled lighting is recommended. Lighting needed for illuminating the entrances to the site based on FM 319.30. Lighting of entrances used for pedestrians to go to and from the site should be controlled lighting. The lighting should provide enough illumination for the recognition of people and examination of ID badges. This requires a minimum of 2.0 foot-candles of illumination. Vehicle entrances on the other hand, should have lighting that produces enough illumination so a complete inspection of passenger cars, trucks, and freight cars (rail), including the contents, can be done safely. Security officer gatehouses usually have a lower intensity of illumination inside the gatehouse so officers can see approaching vehicles and pedestrians. If the

Security Overview

51

illumination intensity inside the gatehouse is too high then the officer will not be able to see out as easily but they would easy to see from the outside. Other Lighting Lighting needed for illuminating the other areas of the site and property is based on FM 3-19.30. Vacant land, storage, garages, and parking areas require illumination by controlled lighting of not less than 0.2 foot-candles. Open areas adjacent to security officers and the perimeter fence require controlled lighting illumination. The decks on open piers are to be illuminated at minimum 1 foot candle and water approaches to piers within 100 feet will be illuminated to 0.5 foot candles. Areas beneath the pier will be illuminated with small wattage floodlights. The floodlights are to be anchored to the pilings of the pier. Movable lighting is also used for docks and piers. Lighting on docks and piers must not be glaring to pilots and violate any marine rules and regulations. The US Coast Guard has the authority to approve lighting adjacent to navigable waterways. Lighting fixtures placed in outdoor storage places are there to provide an adequate distribution of illumination in aisles, passageways, and recesses to eliminate shadowed areas where an intruder could seek to hide from detection. There are also lighting requirements for CCTV in Chapter 5 under the heading “Security Lighting”. Proper lighting is needed for the CCTV to be effective.

INTRUSION DETECTION FOR JOB TRAILERS Intrusion detection for job trailers is important to the overall physical security plan and should concentrate on the doors and windows. Window and door contact switches can be used. Balanced magnetic switches are recommended.

Balanced Magnetic Switches Balanced magnetic switches contain two parts like the magnetic switches, however one magnet is mounted on the door or window frame and a balancing magnet is mounted on the door or window. The magnet mounted on the frame is known as the internal magnet and the magnet mounted on the door or window is known as the external magnet. The balancing of the switch is accomplished by the magnetic field of the magnets in the open position. When the magnetic field is disturbed by movement of the external magnet, the switch closes. While the door or window is in the normal closed position, the magnetic field will cause the switch to be stable. If the door or window is opened when the system is activated, the magnetic field is disturbed and the switch becomes unstable activating an alarm. Balanced magnetic switches provide a higher level of security than do the magnetic switches. The switches are used on doors and windows and other devices such as motion sensors.

52


There are some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in balanced magnetic switches. Excessive door or window movement will cause too much “play” in the door and window and its frame. So if the door is shaken, the contact will be broken and an alarm will be sent. The wind can cause the rattling of doors and windows causing false alarms because the contact is broken. Improper alignment of the switch on the door or window with the switch on the frame will cause false alarms. Improper alignment can be caused by a bent or warped frame. The fluctuations in the frame due to seasonal conditions such as heating and cold can cause the magnetic switch to lose contact and send an alarm. The balanced magnetic switch cannot be defeated by using a stronger external magnet and placing it on the switch when the door or window is open. Balanced magnetic switches are widely used today because they cannot be easily defeated by using a stringer external magnet or taping over one of the magnets. Figure 3-1 shows the mounting of a balanced magnetic switch. The magnetic switch is the same as the balanced magnetic switch mounting.

FIGURE 3-1 Mounting of a balanced magnetic switch.

Security Overview

53

Alarm Systems All alarm systems have three main parts: sensor, monitoring, and warning device. The sensor is what detects the intruder, fire, etc. and sends a signal to the monitoring station. The monitoring station can be an alarm panel or a console located at the security officer station as well an offsite monitoring station. The sensors use various technologies such electrical circuits, infrared, etc. The monitoring station can be a panel in the lobby of the building as is commonly used for fire systems to an alarm notification screen through the access control system software. All alarm systems have some type of audible and visual devices so the alarm can be acknowledged and appropriate action can be taken. For example, a fire alarm system will have audible and visual devices that alert people in the building to evacuate. Intrusion detection alarms have audible and visual devices that alert the security force monitoring or offsite station that an alarm sensor has been tripped so the alarm can be acknowledged and the appropriate action taken. Alarms are used to monitor the following functions and each one is a separate kind of alarm system. Other alarms are explained below and they can be monitored by the access control system, since most of the alarms in the other category are used to monitor critical building systems: intrusion, fire and others. Sensors For the interior of the trailer, motion sensors can be used after hours to detect anyone who may have forced entry through the side of the trailer. Infrared motion sensors are normally used in this type of setting. There are two types of infrared sensors, passive and active. The passive infrared (PIR) sensors are divided into zones or sectors with each being defined with specific boundaries. Passive infrared sensors detect electromagnetic radiated energy that is generated by sources that produce temperatures below that of visible light. The sensors measure the change in thermal radiation. Passive sensors do not emit any signal. Instead the radiation of any movement in the room is checked against the environment of the room. Changes that are hot images as contrasted between the hot image and the cooler background is detected as an intruder and alarm is sent. This occurs because the room is at a certain temperature and it is usually below that as to what a human emits so the image appears as “hot” to the sensor. The infrared energy is measured in microns and, for humans, the micron range is 7-14 microns with PIR sensors being focused on this narrow band. Passive infrared are mounted on the wall or ceiling and are used in conjunction with ultrasonic sensors, balance magnetic switches, glass break sensors, and time-delayed CCTV cameras. One condition that causes nuisance alarms is the radiation produced by small animals and/or rodents. Time-activated space heaters, ovens, and hot water

54


FIGURE 3-2 Number ranges and projection angles of the detection beams.

pipes also will produce false alarms if they are in the field of view of the sensors. Room temperatures that are between 80 to 100 degrees will make the sensors less effective. Passive infrared sensors can be defeated by cloaking, masking or shadowing the intruding heat source from the field of view and this will decrease the probability of detection (PD) since it reduces the possibility of sufficient radiant heat emitted being focused on the thermal sensor. Knowing the dead spots of the detection pattern can permit an intruder to bypass active regions. Also walking into

Security Overview

FIGURE 3-3 Ceiling-mounted PIR detector.

FIGURE 3-4 Wall-mounted PIR with a curtain detection pattern.

55

56


FIGURE 3-5 PIR wall mount showing the most sensitive area field of view.

the sensor rather than across the sensor’s field of view will also reduce the detection capability by not allowing the boundaries of the detection beams to be broken. Figure 3-2 shows the number ranges and projection angles of the detection beams vary depending upon design. Figure 3-3 is a ceiling-mounted PIR detector. Figure 3-4 is a wall-mounted PIR with a curtain detection pattern. Figure 3-5 is a PIR wall mount showing the most sensitive area field of view.

Security Overview

57

CONTROLLING VEHICULAR AND PEDESTRIAN TRAFFIC FLOW Controlling access to the job site can pose a problem. When considering controlling vehicle traffic, a balance needs to be struck between controlling traffic and impeding the progress on the project. To address this situation, establish one gate for construction-related truck traffic and one for automobile traffic. The reason for two gates is to permit the flow of equipment and materials into the job site without long delays. A truck gate can be used for deliveries of equipment or for specialized equipment such as arc welding machines that are mounted on pickup trucks. All other pickup trucks would not be permitted to enter the construction job site at this gate. They need to enter at the automobile traffic gate. An automobile gate is mandated for all non-construction vehicles that are not to enter at the truck gate. This includes all private automobiles and pickup trucks without specialized equipment mounted on them. By separating the traffic, a more thorough inspection of automobiles and other non-construction related vehicles can be implemented. Also separating truck and automobile traffic addresses the safety issue of mixing autos and trucks and possibly preventing some accidents between the two types of vehicles since the trucks are larger and more difficult to maneuver than the automobile or pickup truck. To control the traffic security, officers can be posted at the gates to check paperwork of deliveries at the truck gate and to inspect the automobiles at the auto gate. The gate for the automobile traffic can remain closed and opened by the security officer after a vehicle has been approved for entry. The truck traffic gate will remain open so trucks can leave without being impeded after the delivery is made. Also signs can be posted at both gates that all vehicles are subject to search upon entering and leaving the job site. Depending on the job site’s size, there may the need for more than two gates and there can also be two truck gates, one for entry and one for exiting. This will help keep traffic flowing in and out of the job site.

CLEAR ZONES Establishing clear zones around the perimeter fencing and the tool cribs is important to help detect intruders. A clear zone is defined as an open area five feet out from the perimeter fence on both sides and the same for around the tool cribs. In the clear zones there are not any places for an intruder to hide. This means no brush, shrubs, pallets, or storage of any kind which will provide cover for an intruder within the five-foot zone. Also, when there is a five-foot clear zone on both sides of the perimeter fence, the job site can be monitored by roving police patrols from the street or by the job site security officers.

58


The clear zone around the tool crib will assist in keeping the tool crib from becoming a target after hours because it will hard to get close without being detected by the security officers.

LOCKS AND KEY CONTROL There are different types of locks on the market today. These range from deadbolts to electric strikes to keypad and combination locks. Some locks are offer more security than others and require considerable time and expertise to open. Other locks can be opened more easily without any special knowledge. Dead bolts are the most popular lock for residential use. All locks are operated by either a key, electronically using an access card, or numerical combination by entering pin numbers into a keypad to gain access. To enhance the use of locks, they are usually used in conjunction with another security device such as an intrusion detection system especially on the job site trailers and tool cribs. The type of locks to use on job site trailer doors are deadbolt locks with a one inch throw. On the other hand, for tool cribs, a case-hardened steel pad lock with a lock guard and case-hardened hasp should be used on the tool crib or trailer. There are various methods for controlling keys and one that may be a good solution for a large job site is the use of an electronic system. The system is a board with all the keys accessible. To remove a key, an authorized person will place their driver’s license or company access control card into the slot near the key. After the card is in place and access PIN is entered, the key is removed. The driver’s license or access card cannot be removed until the key is replaced. The primary part of a lock is the latch or bolt and most key-operated locks use it except for combination and padlock locks. There are various types of locks and below are the most widely used are described. Cylindrical locks are also known as key-in-knob or key-in-lever locks. Normally these locks are used to secure, offices, storage rooms, etc. A cylinder in the center of the doorknob identifies these locks. Some of the cylinder locks have a key way in both sides of the lock to unlock or lock the lock. These are used in a door that has a window above the doorknob and the potential exists that if the glass is broken, entry can be made by reaching in and turning the thumb turn or handle to open the door. Some cylindrical locks are also installed with lever handles with the cylinder in the center. The cylindrical lock has a cylinder or plug that is the key way. The grooves in the key are there so when the key is inserted into the lock they line up with the configuration of the pins in the plug. The pins cause the rotation of the plug as the key is turned, moving the latch from the strike plate. The cylindrical lock is good for low security locations and applications. The lock is easily compromised by either removing the doorknob or lever or prying the latch from the strike plate. Figure 3-6 is a picture of a cylindrical lock made by Sargent Locks, Inc.

59

Security Overview

FIGURE 3-6 Cylindrical lock.

The dead bolt lock is also known as a tubular dead bolt. The lock is mounted on the door in a similar fashion to the cylindrical lock except that there is a bolt that slides into the strike plate. When locked the bolt extends into the frame at a minimum of 1 inch to prevent easy forcing of the lock out of the frame. The dead bolt lock is used on apartment doors, house doors, etc. The lock provides more protection than the cylindrical lock. To prevent unlocking the lock by breaking a window, it is recommended that dead bolt locks that are placed in doors with windows or next to windows have a double key cylinder which means that a key is needed to lock or unlock the lock on either side of the door. Deadbolt locks are used for residential and office security and provide an acceptable level of security. The lock can be defeated by prying the bolt back from the frame freeing the bolt from the strike plate. This is why a minimum 1-inch throw on the bolt is important since it cannot be forced back by prying the bolt. The frame can be forced open by spreading the door frame using an old automobile jack. The jack is placed in between the door frame and is extended until the frame forces the bolt to open. Another way to defeat the deadbolt is to find a weak point to enter, like a window. Figure 3-7 is a typical deadbolt lock. The mortise lock gets its name from the way that the lock case is “mortised” or recessed into the edge of the door. The mortise lock with a doorknob on the both sides of the door is the most common one. On some models there is an exterior thumb latch on entrance doors rather than a doorknob. To lock the lock there is a thumb turn or button. The button is usually in the side of the door above the latch and pushing the button in will lock the door. On some doors there is a very small lever instead of a button and, by moving the lever up or down, the lock is either locked or unlocked. To install the lock into the edge of the door by recessing it into the door weakens the door and therefore the lock is considered to be low security and not to be used for areas requiring high security.

60


FIGURE 3-7 Typical deadbolt lock.

Drop bolt locks, also known as jimmy-proof locks, are used as auxiliary locks like the dead bolt. The strike and the lock body have interlocking leaves that are similar to a door hinge and, when closed, the locking pins in the lock body drop down into the holes in the strike locking the lock. The lock is extremely difficult to separate since the lock body and strike are interconnected with locking pins and the lock becomes a single unit. The lock is used in residential and commercial locations.

FIGURE 3-8 Medeco drop bolt lock.

61

Security Overview

FIGURE 3-9 Yale rim cylinder lock.

The drop bolt lock is a deterrent to spreading the door frame since the strike does not extend into the door frame horizontally. Spreading the frame will not fee the bolts from the strike since the bolts drop down into the strike. Figure 3-8 shows a Medeco drop bolt lock. Rim cylinder locks are mounted by screwing to the inside surface of the door face. The rim cylinder lock is usually used in conjunction with the drop bolt lock or other surface- mounted lock. The lock consists of an outer barrel, a cylinder and ring, tailpiece, back mounting plate, and two mounting screws. To help the lock fit varying door thicknesses, the tailpiece screws are scored. Figure 3-9 shows a Yale rim cylinder lock. Disc tumbler locks were designed for automobile doors. The locks are now used for desks, file cabinets, and padlocks and are easy and cheap to produce. The lock however, has a limited life because they are produced using soft metal. The locks are not very effective as security devices and do not have an extensive delaying since they are easily compromised. Figure 3-10 shows several disc tumbler locks. Pin tumbler locks are widely used today in residential and industrial settings. The lock has a cylinder that rotates and is called a plug that is linked to the locking mechanism. The plug has a shell around it and the shell with the plug inside is fixed to the door. When a key is inserted, the cylinder will rotate and this rotation is what works the locking mechanism. The key for the pin tumbler lock is grooved on both sides. When in the locked position the plug cannot rotate because a set of spring-loaded pin stacks extend into the top of the

62


FIGURE 3-10 Disc tumbler locks.

FIGURE 3-11 Old Yale pin tumbler lock cut away with the key inserted.

Security Overview

63

FIGURE 3-12 Front and side view of a pin tumbler lock.

plug to keep it in place. The pin tumbler locks can be mater keyed to a variety of patterns. The lock is not for high security applications since it can be compromised easily. Figure 3-11 shows an old Yale pin tumbler lock cut away with the key inserted. Figure 3-12 shows a front and side view of a pin tumbler lock. Unit locks are used in areas that have heavy use like institutional buildings and hospitals. The lock is installed into the door by cutting a notch at the door’s edge. The lock is one piece and the lock has a standard size for the cutout which helps simplify the door in preparation for the lock installation. Cipher locks are also known as keypad locks or mechanical push button locks. These locks have a keypad with numbers from 0-9. Anyone wanting to gain entry inserts their assigned PIN into the keypad and the lock is released. The locks are similar to the unit lock since the lock and door handle is one piece. These locks are used in secure areas to limit access and provide access control. Fingerprint locks are similar to the cipher lock in design and look. However, instead of a keypad, there is a fingerprint reader installed. The lock also has a dual technology system that incorporates the fingerprint with a keypad. The lock is powered by 4 AA batteries and can get up to 5,000 operations before the batteries need to be replaced. Since the lock is standalone, it can hold up to 10 persons’ fingerprint records. A key is needed to add or delete users. The lock can be used to replace an existing mechanical lock. Padlocks are portable, detachable locks and are used in conjunction with a hasp. There are low and high security padlocks. The low security padlocks are made using hardened steel shackles. High security padlocks on the other hand are made of case- hardened steel and are used with a security hasp. Electric strike locks are used in conjunction with an access control system. The strike is electrified rather than the lock. The strike is the part of the lock

64


that is installed into the door frame. When a card is presented that has valid access, the electric strike moves and releases the latch from the lock allowing the door to open. Electric locks are also used in conjunction with an access control system. The electric lock electrifies the lock which is the part of the lock that is attached to the door. When a valid access card is presented at the reader, the electric lock releases the lock for the strike and the door opens. Magnetic locks, also known as Mag locks, are an electronic magnet. Chapter 6 discussed the operation of the magnetic lock. The locks are used in conjunction with an access control system. High security locks meet the following criteria: a. Resistant to being picked b. Resistant to forced entry c. Tamper-resistant d. Permit entry to those with special knowledge and tools e. Record access and entry using electronic locks. All of the major lock manufacturers make a high security lock. For example, Schlage makes the Primus(tm) lock which is a high security lock. The Primus(tm) lock uses special keys. Special blanks are needed to make duplicate keys as well as a special machine to cut the key. To change the cores in these locks a special key is used and this allows for easy, rapid re-keying of the locks in the event a key is compromised or when someone leaves the company. Medeco has a high security lock called KeyMark(tm) that uses special keys and the cylinders are interchangeable as well. To make duplicate keys special machine duplicate blanks are needed so any keymaking machine cannot make duplicate keys. Corbin Russwin has a high security lock called the Pyramid(tm). The lock’s cylinder is 7 pin and is also interchangeable with other cylindrical locks that Corbin Russwin makes. The keys,, like the other high security locks cannot be duplicated without a special machine and special key blanks.

EQUIPMENT SECURITY Equipment security encompasses the heavy equipment used on the job site. The protection of the equipment from vandalism and theft is usually overlooked. There are things that can be done to help secure the equipment: 1. Kill switches—The use of an engine kill switch to prevent the starting of the equipment by unauthorized persons. The switch will not allow fuel or electric-

Security Overview

65

ity to flow to the engine. All heavy construction equipment made by the same manufacturer will have the same keys known as universal keys which will work any of the same equipment by that manufacturer. So that is where the kill switch will be of benefit because, even with the key, the equipment cannot be started when a kill switch is installed. 2. Keys with chips—Some equipment manufacturers are now making keys that have a chip installed so the key can be coded to the same code for all the company’s equipment. 3. Mark all equipment—Prominently mark all heavy equipment with the company’s name to deter thieves. For example, mark the name of the company using a welder’s torch in places where the police can see it if the equipment was stolen. By marking the equipment in this way thieves are less likely to steal the equipment. 4. Notification to manufacturer and law enforcement — Notify the manufacturer and the law enforcement immediately when equipment is stolen. Provide the serial and model number.

JOB SITE SECURITY SURVEYS Job site security surveys are an important tool for establishing a security program that meets the needs of the jobsite and the company. The steps for doing a job site security survey are as follows. Perform a threat and vulnerability assessment. See the section earlier in this chapter called “Conducting and Using Threat Assessments”. Also see Chapter 4 for more detailed information. Sample forms for conducting the survey. Figure 3-13 is a sample form that can be used to conduct the security survey. The form is easy to use and does not take a great deal of time to complete. There are other more detailed forms that can be completed by a security professional but the forms take time to complete and the information that is collected is extensive. After the forms are completed then a security plan needs to be formulated. Figure 3-14 is a sample job site security plan which outlines what the security plan should include.

THE SECURITY OFFICER’S ROLE The security officer plays an important role in the securing of the job site. Security officers can be a great benefit to the security of a job site or just another burden depending on what is expected of them. Remember this saying, “What you expect is what you get”. So if you don’t expect anything you won’t get anything. Security officers need to be motivated into doing a stellar job. This is based on

66


FIGURE 3-13 Sample form for conducting a security survey.

Security Overview

67

FIGURE 3-13 Sample form for conducting a security survey. (continued)

the simple premise that all humans want to feel needed and appreciated. Now saying that you want to motivate the security officer is one thing, actually doing it is another. The first place to start is to develop a good set of POST Orders.

POST Orders The POST Orders are what is expected of the officers on each shift. They should set the standard of performance for the security officer. The orders can be viewed as being only menial routine tasks to be performed every shift or as really contributing something to securing the job site. To make the orders meaningful, they need to be developed with input from the security officers. The orders need to be reviewed periodically to keep them current. When the security officer completes all the paperwork, reports for the shift correctly, and follows the orders, he needs to be recognized for doing his job. A pat on the back goes a long way es-

68


FIGURE 3-14 Sample job site security plan.

Security Overview

FIGURE 3-14 Sample job site security plan. (continued)

69

70


pecially when the reports reflect what is happening on the site. Security officers who are proactive in their approach should be rewarded with an extra day off with pay or a bonus. More details about security officers will be in Chapter 11. The POST Orders include such tasks as: • Post boundaries • Name of the post • Purpose • Duties Making rounds or roving patrols What to look for What to check, doors, looks the fence line, etc. Q Q Q

• Exception to POST Orders • Policies • Reports When to complete an incident report Completing the Daily Activity Report (DAR) Account for the activities of the security officer on each shift Q Q

• Maintaining and using the call list • Calling the police • Completing the pass-on log The tasks listed are just some examples of the POST Orders. The POST Orders provide the information necessary for the officer to do his job. Training is another important part of the security officer’s job. The security officers assigned to a construction job site should have a minimum of 80 hours of basic training and another 40 hours of site-specific training.

CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION (CCTV) Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) means that the system is a closed system and is intended for use by a facility to monitor their premises. The idea of closed means that the system does not broadcast TV signals over the airwaves as do the commercial TV stations do but transmits them over a closed circuit. The system, in most cases, is designed and installed with the cameras wired to a central location on the site for monitoring and consists of cameras, multiplexers, monitors, and recorders depending the on the size and complexity of the system. CCTV systems range in complexity. The simple systems use several cameras, a multiplexer, monitor, and a recorder. More complex systems use hundreds of cameras,

Security Overview

71

multiplexers, monitors, and recorders and some even use a disk array for storing recordings. There are some systems that use wireless cameras but the system is still monitored by a central location on the site or over the company’s intranet. CCTV systems have been around for a long time and were primarily used by the government and government contractors in the beginning. These early systems were large, expensive, and needed to be monitored by security personnel since there was not any motion-sensing capability in the system. The earlier systems were analog and now the systems are digital. The camera images were recorded on reel-to-reel video tape recorders (VTR) and then came the VHS tape recorded on a VCR (Video Cassette Recorder) and now DVR (Digital Video Recorders) are common. The advent of CCTV allowed multiple locations to be viewed by one or two people and freed up security officers to perform other duties like responding to alarms. CCTV is used by security officers to do a video tour of the area. The systems consisted of a camera, monitor, and cable that ran from the camera to the monitor. More sophisticated systems with multiple cameras use other hardware like multiplexers which can transmit up to 16 cameras through a single cable, microwave, and infrared line to a location for viewing and recording. It can transmit the images almost simultaneously to the central point. A MUX (multiplexer) is used to accept and record a number of camera inputs simultaneously. There are CCTV cameras that are wireless and have applications in job-site surveillance. The cameras do need power, even if they are wireless, for connecting them to a video surveillance system that includes a recorder. To address the problem of needing power in the remote job sites, battery packs can be used.

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS Electronic access control is used to enhance the other physical security safeguards such as the perimeter fence, barriers, and intrusion detection devices to aid in the preclusion of unauthorized entry. An access control system can minimize pilfering, loss of assets like desktop computers, personal and company property including the loss of intellectual property, through the use of a package control system. Also the introduction of harmful materials, devices, and compounds to the site is minimized by a good access control system. The administration and procedures of the access control system like access control lists, personnel recognition, ID cards, badges, and personal escorts all contribute to an effective access control system. An important component of the access control system is the hardware that reads the badges and permits access to the site by unlocking the entry doors and operating the perimeter fence gates. Access control systems have been used for a long time to control entry to site. The systems can be a simple as a lock on a door to more sophisticated electronic systems.

72


The basic premise of an electronic access control system is based on the concept of something you have or are. The something you have could be a PIN number for a keypad for a cipher lock, an ID access card with or without a picture, or a key fob. The ID card is the size of a credit card. When the card is inserted or read by placing it near the reader, the information about the access status of the person is verified in the access control system’s data base. The system sends a signal to operate an electric strike or magnetic lock to release the door for entry. The keypad works in a similar fashion except, in most cases, the system is connected to a main or head end part [Query - phrase is unclear]of the system by punching in the right set of numbers. The lock will be released on the door and the person will be able to enter. Sometimes the keypads operate an electric or magnetic strike but the majority of the keypad lock systems work a mechanical lock to open the door. The other system for access is based on something you are. The system works on biometrics. When choosing a biometric device it is a good idea to combine it with a card system. This way, there are two different checks before access is granted, an access card and reader which pulls the template from storage and the biometric reader or scanner. There is difference between identification and verification. Positive identification answers the question, “Who am I”? The system matches the person’s identity by selecting the person’s identity from a number of possible matches. Verification on the other hand addresses the issue of, “I am who I say I am”. In the verification system the person is matched with a template that was captured when the person was enrolled in the system. Several types of biometric systems in use today are listed below: 1. The hand geometry reader 2. The finger print reader 3. Iris readers 4. Retina scans 5. Voice recognition 6. Signature recognition 7. Facial recognition More about the biometric systems is detailed in Chapter 10.

INFORMATION SECURITY Information security is the protection of company and customer documents. The

Security Overview

73

documents can be either hardcopy or soft copy. A hard-copy document is one that is on paper and a soft copy is on a computer disk or in the computer files. To protect hard copies, keep them locked in a file cabinet when not in use. The hard copies can consist of anything that is considered proprietary information and can include the drawings of the project if they detail a special process or equipment. When using the drawings for the project, only those that have a need to know should be given access. The same thing goes for the engineering specifications on the process. All hard copies need to be sequentially numbered and stamped stating that they are confidential. When the information is in soft copy in computer files it needs to be protected as well. Below are some ways to protect the information that is in soft copy: • Locking cables can secure laptop computers with the critical information. • All computers should be password-protected to prevent easy access by those who do not need to see the proprietary information. • All computer disks that contain proprietary information need to be passwordprotected and/or encrypted. • Computer files that contain proprietary information need to be protected using some type of access control.

INVESTIGATIONS Background or pre-employment investigations are now more common then ever. The purpose of them is to make sure that the person who applied for the job is in fact that person and there are no surprises in their background that could be a problem. Work experience is an area where people tend to embellish their achievements and education. They usually exaggerate the colleges and/or universities they may have graduated from. To help verify the employment, financial, and educational background of a prospective employee, a background check is used. The company usually pays a third party to conduct the background check. Before a background check is done, the prospective employee must sign a form stating that they are giving permission to have the company do a background check. The form is required by the Fair Credit Reporting Act. If the employee does not sign the form, they are not hired and it is so stated in the application. The employer must have the approval of the prospective employee in writing before the background check can begin. Failure to do so is a violation of law. Investigations are also conducted into cases of theft and threats that may occur in the workplace and can be conducted by a third party.

74


ECO-TERROR Eco-terrorism is a new threat facing the job site. These are groups of people that are dedicated to stopping any growth they feel is damaging the environment. They use such tactics as fire bombings and vandalism to destroy and damage construction projects. There have been a number of cases across the country where this has occurred. The group that usually claims responsibility for such acts is known as the Earth Liberation Front (ELF). The ELF is an underground group of loosely-knit cells that carry out what they call “direct actions”. Direct actions are the attacks on developments, SUVs, etc. that they feel makes a statement about their position on the environment. Not all construction projects are targets. Before an attack is carried out, surveillance is conducted on the target by the cell. Surveillance usually takes the form of taking pictures, drawing sketches of the job site, and probing to test security response. Any suspicious activity like people in vehicles or standing across the street taking pictures of the job site or drawing sketches should be reported to the police. The license plate of the suspicious vehicles needs to be given to the police. There is no need to paranoid about eco-terror if you have a good security program in place. Remember, not all construction projects are targets but a little security awareness on the part of everyone on the job site will help keep the job site safe and secure.

CHAPTER

The Security Survey

4

T

he security survey is important for establishing and maintaining security at a job site. The survey will help in the identification process of the security vulnerabilities for the job site and what security has been implemented. The survey is used to identify gaps in the security program. This could entail policies, procedures, or systems, such as CCTV, intrusion detection, locks, lighting, etc. To complete the survey and capture useful information, there needs to be a plan. The survey form can be considered the plan. The form will have the information that is important to the survey. In this chapter we will explore what a security survey is, the benefit of doing a survey, and how to conduct the survey.

THE SECURITY SURVEY AND SECURITY PLANNING To start with, we need to define what a security survey is. A security survey is a study of the security countermeasures of a facility and includes the policies, procedures, and programs. To put it simply, a security survey reviews all the policies, procedures and security systems the company has in place. The security survey is used to plan security for a facility or security programs for a company. The security survey can also be used to plan security for a job site. Planning for security can’t be done without some information about the job site. The information in the survey includes the following: 1. Policies and procedures 2. The location of the job site a. Physical features of the site b. Crime statistics (CAP Index) 3. The perimeter


76


4. Any structures on job site trailers, storage containers, etc. 5. Tools and equipment security 6. Security officers 7. Lighting 8. Intrusion detection systems Reviewing the company security policies and procedures is a good starting point. By reviewing the policies and procedures you will be able to determine the company’s commitment to security. If there are well-written security polices that are understood by the employees, then security will be taken more seriously. Another area to review is the security awareness program that is or is not in place. Job-site security should have the same focus as job-site safety. Security slogans and posters can be used to reinforce the importance of job-site security, just as slogans and posters help to reinforce the importance of job-site safety. Safety and security both protect the employees from harm. This can be seen in the crime statistics and prevention programs that address incidents causing personal harm like assaults and robberies. When there are not any security policies or procedures in place, security will probably be lacking on the job site or at least hit-or-miss in its implementation. To have a unified, planned approach to job-site security, policies and procedures play an important role. Figure 4-1 is a set of security standards that can be applied to all job sites. The standards set a minimal level of security for a job site and address all of the areas of security for a job site. The security standards are brief statements that outline what a job site must do to be in compliance with the standards. The job site security checklist discussed in Chapter 18 will be used to make sure the standards are being complied with. The checklist is used on a weekly basis to ensure that security is in place and to identify any gaps in the protection. Weekly surveys or audits are important because of the ever-changing job site. As the work progresses, the job site will change. Waiting more than one week to do the survey may be too long and the gaps may go undetected until there is a loss through vandalism or other means. The location will have a direct impact on the level of security needed to secure the job site. Job sites located in high crime areas will generally have a higher level of security than those located in low crime areas. The levels from basic to high are outlined and presented in Chapter 2 and again in Chapter 18. The forms are spreadsheets that outline the various elements of security for basic, intermediate, and high. The physical features of the location will be reviewed as a part of the survey. For example, the following questions will be answered:

The Security Survey

Construction Site Security Standards 1 All Sites All construction sites shall at least meet these minimum security standards.

1.1

PERIMETER PROTECTION 1.1.1 All sites will have a perimeter fence around the entire site. Exception: When the work is TI work only inside the building. 1.1.2 Fence must installed so it is secure and will not fall over in a wind 1.1.3 Gates shall be closed at all times or the opening will be guarded when open 1.1.4 All gate hinges should be welded to prevent easy removal. 1.1.4 Padlocks are to be case hardened steel. 1.1.6 A clear zone should be maintained on both sides of the fence line will provide unobstructed view and detection of someone cutting the fence for entry. The black plastic material to obstruct the view of the site from outside the perimeter is permitted. 1.1.7 Post “No Trespassing” signs on fence at frequent intervals so they can be seen all along the fence line. 1.1.8 Walk the fence line periodically to ensure that all cuts and breaks in the fence are repaired in a timely manner.

1.2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 1.2.1 Lighting shall be 0.2 foot-candles. Note: A foot-candle is a unit for measuring the intensity of illumination equal to 1 lumen per square foot or the amount of light a single candle provides over 1 square foot. 1.2.2 The lighting system must be reliable and overlapping illumination to avoid unprotected areas in the event of individual light failures. 1.2.3 The lighting system should have a backup power supply in the event of a power failure.

1.3 Locks and Keys 1.3.1 All trailer doors should have dead bolt locks with dead bolt that extends into the keeper 2 inches when in the locked position. 1.3.2 Key control is an essential part of the security program. A careful strictly supervised record of all keys issued must be maintained. The record should indicate the name of the person to whom the key was issued.

FIGURE 4-1 Security standards.

77

78


1.4 Intrusion Detection 1.4.1 Job site trailers shall be pre-wired for alarms 1.4.2 Alarms will include door and window contacts 1.4.3 In some locations (high crime areas) exterior audible devices shall be installed.

1.5 Site Security Plans 1.5.1 All sites should have a written site security plan. 1.5.2 The plan can be as simple as listing emergency phone numbers; 911 1.5.3 For larger sites the plan will cover the following topics: 1.5.3.1 Perimeter security 1.5.3.2 Lighting 1.5.3.3 Lock and key procedure 1.5.3.4 Security Officer POST orders ( Security will provide the POST Orders) 1.5.3.5 Make sure tools are marked (subcontractor and employee) 1.5.3.6 Visitor sign in and out procedure 1.5.3.7 Shipping and receiving procedures 1.5.3.8 Securing of laptop and server computers 1.5.3.9 Shredding of discarded documents

1.6 Tools and Equipment 1.6.1 All job sites will have marked tools on the site. All of the equipment used on the site will also be marked. 1.6.2 A check out/in system will be used to check tools and equipment out and in at the job site. 1.6.3 All equipment and tools not in use will be secured to prevent theft. 1.6.4 All equipment will be stored in or lined up in a row after hours.

FIGURE 4-1 Security standards. (continued)

• Is the job site a tenant improvement (TI) job or new construction? • What will be the access points to the job site? • Are there areas that the perimeter fence cannot be placed? • Are there natural boundaries that can be used as a perimeter fence? • Is the site in a congested area?

The Security Survey

79

• Is there a buffer between the job site and other properties? • Does the job-site perimeter entail the need for closing or covering sidewalks? • Is the job site in a remote area? • Are there areas of the job site that are not visible from the street? • Is the lighting adequate around the job site location? By finding answers to the questions above, you get a pretty good idea about the status of the physical location of the job site. Information about the local law enforcement agency will also be included in the survey along with contact phone numbers for crime prevention.

Tenant Improvement (TI) jobs Tenant improvement (TI) jobs offer a different set of security issues than a ground-up construction project. The tenant improvement job is usually done in a building and security for the building will help to secure the TI job-site project work. Heavy equipment is usually not used since the TI project is basically a remodel of the existing structure and not the building of the structure itself. The building where the TI work is being done will control security of the building and the TI. If this is not the case, then the company performing the TI work must consider securing the TI job site.

Access Points and the Perimeter Fence When planning the job site, access points need to be considered. The fewer the number of access points through the perimeter fence, the better for security. Limit the number of access points to the minimum needed to keep the job moving forward unencumbered and unimpeded. Openings or access points in the perimeter fence or soft points in the perimeter fence line (since gates are not always closed and locked when not in use) permit easy access to the job site. The security survey for the proposed job site should note any areas where the perimeter fence cannot be placed because of a terrain project like road construction. Alternative methods for securing the perimeter need to be discussed. Can any of the natural boundaries be incorporated into the job-site perimeter security? To help protect the tools and equipment on job sites that cannot be completely fenced, establish an equipment storage area that is fenced, has sufficient lighting, and maybe portable (wireless) CCTV to monitor the area. For the storage containers for materials and tools, add instruction detection by using prewired, pre-engineered systems that can be used at other job sites as long as they are monitored offsite. Also, add audible and visual alarms to warn that an intrusion has taken place.

80


Job sites that are in a congested area of a city need to have a perimeter fence that does not have unguarded openings during working hours so unauthorized persons will not enter the job site, even it is to find a place to escape the weather. As previously stated, no trespassing on the job site should be tolerated because this is important for safety reasons as well as for security. If the job-site boundary is right up to the adjoining property, the perimeter fence must be inspected every day along this part, especially if the adjoining property has a setback and the perimeter fence is not visible from the street. This is important, especially in the winter months, to keep out those who are seeking shelter from entering the job site through a cut in the perimeter fence along the area where it borders the adjoining property. If the job site requires the closing or covering of sidewalks, make sure that the closure or cover conforms to the local jurisdiction’s codes and ordinances. The sidewalk cover should be in addition to the perimeter fence in that area.

Remote Job Sites Remote job sites present a unique set of security issues. There are not as many “eyes” that view the site daily, especially after hours, like jobs in more populated areas. The following are issues that should be part of the job site security survey: • The perimeter fence should have “No Trespassing” signs prominently posted along the fence. • These job sites in remote areas offer the element of not being watched and probably will necessitate the use of the security officers after hours to bolster the security. • Remote job sites should have all tools, equipment, and materials secured after working hours to minimize the possibility of theft. • Tools should be secured in the container (trailer) at the end of each workday and when unattended. Equipment should be lined up or secured in a fenced in area. • Kill switches and wheel locks should be used. Serial, model, and manufacturer information should be recorded for all equipment that is on the job site. • To help with securing tools and equipment there should be sufficient lighting so the site can be viewed from the street side and for CCTV monitoring to work effectively. For areas of the job site not visible from the street, CCTV should be considered as a recommendation. The CCTV should be set to record on motion. With the advances in technology, the CCTV motion sensor may also be able to acti-

The Security Survey

81

vate an intrusion detection alarm. The alarm should have a local audible and visual alarm as well as being monitored by a central station offsite. Neighbors that have a visual of the job site that does not border the street maybe solicited to watch that part of the job site in addition to the CCTV monitoring and to report to police and any security officers on site. Also, there should be no storage of tools, equipment, or materials in the areas of the job site that are not visible from the street. Storage in non-visible areas invite thefts more than if the storage was visible from the street. Remember that the doors to the tool and material-storage containers should have their doors positioned so they can be seen from outside the perimeter fence from the street. This visibility may be a deterrent to thieves who are targeting the tools and materials for fear of being caught in the act. The lighting around the proposed or current job site should be checked. Is the lighting on the street enough to help illuminate the perimeter fence line? If not what can be done to increase the lighting? Will more light be needed on the site to compensate for the poor illumination for the surrounding area? These are questions that need to be answered when doing the security survey of the proposed or current jobsite.

THE SECURITY SURVEY The perimeter of the job site will be surveyed. The following areas will be the basis of the survey for perimeter security. The security survey form in Chapter 2 is a detailed form. This survey form is usually used for the initial assessment and can be used on a quarterly basis in addition to the weekly job-site security surveys to ensure compliance. Other sample security survey forms can be found later in this chapter. Below are some items and questions to answer when doing the survey: • Perimeter fence • Type • Height • Topped with barbed wire • Number of openings in fence • Gates • Security of gates • Clear zone maintained around fence • Lighting

82


• Does the lighting adequately illuminate the perimeter? • Does the lighting on the perimeter face in or out? • Is there sufficient lighting around critical areas such as equipment and tool storage areas? • Is there sufficient lighting around the office trailers? • How are the exterior lights controlled? • Is there auxiliary power for the security lighting? • Access control • Are there a limited number of gates? Q

Are remote gates locked or monitored?

Q

Are locks for gates sufficient and protected?

Q

Are cables used instead of chains?

Q

Do all visitors check in at the office before going on site?

Q

Are strangers challenged that are on site?

Q

Is there some of identification system for contractors?

• Alarms • Do all the office trailers have intrusion alarms? • Are the alarms monitored? • Do the storage containers (trailers) have instruction alarms? • Are there audible alarm devices installed on the site? • Are the alarms tested? • Does the alarm system have back up emergency power? The perimeter security is just part of the job-site security program or plan. The tools and equipment need to be secured when not in use and during non-operational times (after hours). The perimeter fence should be chain-link and 8 feet high, topped with barbed wire if the local codes and ordinances permit the use of barbed wire. The fence needs to be anchored to prevent the wind from blowing it over.

Lighting The use of lighting on the job site is usually an overlooked area of security. Most job sites have dark areas and the perimeter fence is not illuminated with the lights

The Security Survey

83

facing in toward the site so the site will be visible from the street. Lighting of the job site needs to be surveyed to determine if it is sufficient to illuminate the job site to a point that it will be a deterrent to thieves. The lighting should also be sufficient to help the CCTV cameras provide good images. To check the lighting, a light meter can be used by the person doing the survey. There are lighting charts in Chapter 18 that can be used as guides for what the illumination should be in various areas of the job site.

Tools and Equipment Tools and equipment security is often overlooked on most job sites until thefts occur. The largest dollar loss to construction job sites is the result of thefts of tools, equipment, and materials. All types of tools are taken from job sites but the most common are power tools such as electric circular saws, air hammers, drills, and roto hammers. Other types of portable equipment taken from job sites are portable generators, air compressors, and welding equipment. The following are the elements of a tool and equipment security plan that should be in place and surveyed weekly for compliance. • Is there a system in place to account for all the tools on the job site? • Does the system for accounting for tools include a sign out/in sheet? • Is the tool storage area monitored during working hours or is it locked when unattended? • Are there alarms and CCTV used to monitor the storage area after hours? • How often are inventories of the tools on the site done? • Are all the tools marked according to company standards? • Are construction materials secured? • Are the materials on site for long periods of time or they delivered close to installation time? • Are portable generators locked to a solid location using cable and padlocks or with the wheels removed? • Are compressors locked to a solid location using cables and padlocks or the wheels removed? • Is the welding equipment secured to a pickup truck and does the truck have a wheel lock to prevent movement? In Chapter 2 there are three spreadsheets that outline job-site security for three levels: basic, intermediate, and high. The spreadsheets can be used as a guideline

84


for establishing site security. The spreadsheets are based on the threat assessment and are just an example of the levels of security that a job site can implement. They can be modified to meet the needs of a company, location, etc.

Security Officers When reviewing the document in Figure 4-1, the “Construction Site Security Standards” you will notice in Section 1.5 “Site Security Plans” that, for larger sites, security officers are recommended to be part of the plan. The use of security officers on large construction sites has many benefits. There are more materials, tools, and equipment on the job site. Having someone to keep an eye on them after hours will be helpful and may deter thefts. The security officers can challenge anyone entering or on-site after hours. The security officers will be completing a Daily Activity Report (DAR) for every shift. The information in the report will be helpful to find out what happens at the job site after hours. When incidents occur, especially after hours, the security officer is there on site to contact the local law enforcement agency immediately. The law enforcement agency will have someone to question when they arrive at the job site, saving time because they don’t need to wait for someone from the company to come to the job site from home. The security officer will complete incident reports on all incidents that occur after hours. The officers will also have a call list for contacting key company employees for emergencies. The visibility of the security officers on site will some times be a deterrent to thieves.

Intrusion Detection Systems Intrusion detection systems are a tool that can be used for protecting office trailers and tool storage containers. The intrusion detection systems are a good warning system that someone has gained entry to one of these important areas. To be effective, the intrusion detection systems should be monitored off-site by an alarm company that will contact the police when an alarm is received. Without a response the intrusion detection systems are not effective. The intrusion detection system should also have an audible device installed outside the trailers and storage containers. This will help alert the neighbors as well as police that are patrolling in the area. Adding a visible device like a strobe light or lights along with the audible device will increase the chances of catching someone’s attention. The intrusion alarms should also be monitored on-site if the site has security officers. Like any electronic system the intrusion detection systems installed on the job site need to be checked regularly to make sure they are working properly. Faulty systems produce a great of headache by sending false alarms. So calibrating the intrusion detection systems according to the manufacturer’s recommendations makes good sense.

The Security Survey

85

THE SECURITY SURVEY FORM The security survey form is in Figure 2-2 in Chapter 2 and is one of many that are being used. Chapter 18 also includes the form in the “Useful Forms” section of the Chapter. Figure 4-2 is a sample survey from the U.S. Department of the Interior. The form will need to be modified and customized for use. It is another option to choose from. The survey form used by the U.S. Department of the Interior and covers some of the same information as the form in Chapter 2. The layout of the form is different and the information is not in the same order as the U.S. Department of the Interior survey form. Also the Department of the Interior form does not give you a rating for the survey. A rating system could be developed using the form as a guide. After you modify the form, remove any reference to the U.S. Department of the Interior since the form has been changed. The form is used to help guide a jurisdiction through the vulnerability and physical survey process. The form has some similarities as those already discussed. There is one major difference in the form it is set up for public agencies mainly state agencies to use for doing a vulnerability survey for selection of a building to be leased for state business but it can be modified for use in the private sector i.e. construction job sites as well. Modify the survey form to be used when the job site is proposed before construction begins. Figure 4-3 shows a modified State of Texas form that could be used for proposed construction job-site surveys. Once the form is modified, remove any reference to the State of Texas from the form since the form has been changed. Notice in Figure 4-3 there is no reference to the State of Texas on the modified form. The four levels on the form represent different aspects of the jobsite security. The first three are for surveying the crime of the surrounding area of the proposed job site. The fourth area is the survey of the proposed job site. Another method to find out about crime in area is to use a company called CAP Index. CAP Index is discussed in detail in Chapter 2. The important thing to remember about CAP Index is that you pay a fee for their services but the information provided is very useful and probably better than collecting crime statistics from local law enforcement agencies. The CAP statistics use a specific address for the analysis which is more accurate than using crime statistics for an area. The more accurate information will make planning security for the job site better since the types of crimes will be known and more current. The Uniform Crime Statistics data can be up to 18 months old. The local law enforcement agencies will have more current data but it can be up to 12 months old.

BENEFITS OF DOING A SECURITY SURVEY The security survey is the key to helping you choose the protection necessary for the job site based on the threat making the solutions cost effective. The results of

86


Department of the Interior Physical Security Survey Data

FWM#: 367 (New) Date: June 17, 2001 Series: Securityl Part 432: Physical Security Originating Office:Division of Contracting & General Svcs

1. Bureau: 2. Location 3. Building Name 4. Building Number: Lease Number: 5. Address 6. Lessor's Address if applicable: 7. Business Phone of Lessor: 8. Dates of Survey 9. Contacts: __ Security Officer: Collateral Duty; Y__ N__ Phone___________ Address: __ Facility Manager Collateral Duty; Y__ N__ Phone___________ Address: __ Classified Document Custodian Collateral Duty; Y__ N__ Phone___________ Address: __ Other Contacts (Repeat as necessary.) Title:________________ Name:______________ In Person___ By Phone__________ Agency/Bureau: Address: __ Alarm Contacts (Repeat as necessary.) Title:________________ Name:______________ In Person___ By Phone__________ Agency/Bureau: Address: __ Police Department: Title:________________ Name:______________ Agency: Address: __ Will police department conduct crime prevention programs? Y___ N___ __ Will the police department provide crime statistics? Y___ N___ __ Is there a verbal/written agreement with local police? Y___ N___ 10. Identify any Federal Law Enforcement Presence in the facility, as a tenant. __ Agency: Title:________________ Name:______________ In Person___ By Phone__________ __ Will they respond to offenses/incidents? Y___ N___

FIGURE 4-2 Sample security survey—U.S. Department of the Interior.

The Security Survey

11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. __ __ __ 24. __ __ __

Date of previous survey conducted: Title and name of surveyor: Were all recommendations implemented? Y___ N___ Which recommendations were not implemented and why? Primary Occupant: Other Occupants: Other Occupants: Other Occupants: Population: Total Federal Occupants: Total Civilian Occupants: Normal Hours of Operation: Visitor Traffic flow: High More than 1/3 of building occupants receive visitors. Moderate Less than 1/3 of building occupants receive visitors. Low No visitor traffic. Exterior Security Systems (1 = Adequate; 2 = Inadequate; 3 = None.) Perimeter Fencing: ___ Perimeter Wall: ___ Access Control: Card Key System: ___ CCTV System: ___ Guard Force: ___ Other:_______________ ___ Exterior Lighting: ___ Exterior Ground Lighting: ___ Perimeter Surveillance/Alarm: ___ Employee Identification: ___ Visitor Identification: ___ Intrusion Detection Alarm System: ___ Does lighting illuminate all ground level points of entry/exit during hours of darkness? Y__N__ What time of day (during darkness) was lighting checked?______ 25. Interior Security Systems (1 = Adequate; 2 = Inadequate; 3 = None.) __ Duress Alarm: ___ __ Perimeter Alarm System: ___ __ Intrusion Alarm: ___ __ Fire Alarm: ___ __ Is there a safe, vault area or lockable cabinet for storage of valuable items? Y___ N___ __ Is the safe alarmed? And has the alarm been tested? Y___ N___ __ Does the facility store money or high value items or equipment? Y___ N___ 26. Guard Force (as applicable):

FIGURE 4-2 Sample security survey—U.S. Department of the Interior. (continued)

87

88


__ FPS: Y___N___ __ Civilian Contractor: Y___N___ __ Guard Service COTR: __ Site Manager's Name: __ Site Manager's Title: __ Site Manager's Address: __ Is there 24-hour guard service on site? Y___N___ __ Are guards present during duty hours? Y___N___ __ Are guards present during non-duty hours? Y___N___ __ Are guard procedures posted? Y___N___ __ Are guard post emergency notifications posted? Y___N___ __ Is guard force armed? Y___N___ __ Response to Offenses/Incidents Do Federal Police Officers respond? Y___N___ What is the emergency response time?______ Do contract guards respond? Y___N___ What is their emergency response time?____ Do local police respond?Y___N___ What is their emergency response time?____ 27. Access Controls: __ Are adequate locking system on all exterior doors? Y___N___ __ Are hinges on outside of exterior doors? Y___N___ __ Is a guard plate required on exterior door? Y___N___ __ Are exterior first floor windows lockable? Y___N___ __ Does key control for perimeter doors comply with GSA regulations Y___N___ __ Comment: 28. Parking __ Number of spaces - Assigned___ __ Number of spaces - Open Parking___ Official __ Type Employee Visitor On site Enclosed Open Lot


89

The Security Survey

Multiple Level Controlled Access Secured Lighted Within 3 Blocks Other_________ 29. Miscellaneous Building Information: __ Date of construction: __ Number of floors: __ Square feet: __ Building composition: __ Identify significant modifications since last survey: __ Is there an Occupant Emergency Plan? __ Are bomb threat procedures in place? __ Are building rules and regulations posted? 30. Storage of Classified Documents: __ Are any classified national security documents stored at this facility? Y___N___ If Yes, Types of Documents: SCI ___ Top Secret ___ Secret ___ Confidential ___ If Yes to any of the above, __ Are there other sensitive documents stored at the facility? Y___N___ __ If Yes, Types of Documents: Law Enforcement Sensitive ___ Personnel Information ___ Proprietary Information ___

Signature of inspecting official:

______________ Title

_________________________ Name

_____ Date


Y___N___ Y___N___ Y___N___

90


the survey are a part of the threat assessment. The advantages of doing a security survey are as follows: • You will have a plan to follow and the information will be documented. • The critical areas of the job site to be surveyed are captured and gaps will be noted. • A plan can be developed to close the gaps. • You will have documentation and history of security at the job site. • Your job-site security decisions will be based on facts rather than subjectivity. • The design of the perimeter security will focus on the mitigation of the risks rather than just marking the boundaries of the job site. One of the benefits of doing a security survey is that it is part of the threat assessment. The information from the survey will help in preparing a plan for securing the job site. The information from the survey will be documented and will outline the issues that need to be addressed by the security plan. The security survey will identify the job-site critical areas and any gaps in security will also be noted. The critical areas are the employee parking lot, tool storage, equipment and material storage, and office trailers. Any gaps or potential gaps in security for these areas are noted. The critical areas are sometimes overlooked when developing security plans for the job site. Most job sites don’t have formalized site security plans and areas like tool and equipment security are often overlooked until a loss incident occurs. All gaps in security on the job site are noted. Plans can then be developed to close those gaps to make the job site more secure. For example, adding more light around the tool storage container area may improve visibility at night and add to the effectiveness of the CCTV system. Lights can be a deterrent to thieves for fear of being seen. The survey provides a history of the security of the job site. The security survey documents provide the information about what the status of security of the job site is at various times. So now there is some historical information about the job-site security and improvements can be made in the security program by knowing what works and what doesn’t work. Decisions about job-site security are based on information rather than subjective emotional reaction to an event or the potential for an event to occur. The information is from the survey which includes crime statistics, either CAP Index or of the immediate area using the local law enforcement agency’s statistics. The statistics are used for security planning and the frequency and type of incidents will help establish the priorities for the job site security plan.

91

The Security Survey

Job Site Location:

Address:

Date:

LEVEL I: Survey of crime in the area of the proposed job site and in the greater area, e.g., East XXX City, YYY, County. Consider: Prominent Types of Businesses Socio-Economic Profile Overall Crime Rate Violent Crime Rate Ratio of: Private-Public-Commercial Property Presence of Gangs and Gang Related Activities Overall Rating: Very Low / Low / Average / Moderately High / High LEVEL II: Survey of crime in the immediate area (within four blocks each direction from the proposed job site. Consider: Specific types of businesses in the area Ratio: Private-Public-Commercial properties Special entities in area, e.g., Halfway House, Bail/Bond office, Probation facility On or adjacent to designated Hazardous Cargo (HC) route Walk-in traffic: Low / Moderate / High Police Station / Fire Station in area Number of fires reported from this area last year Overall Rating: Very Low / Low / Average / Moderately High / High LEVEL III: Survey of crime for the proposed job site.

security of parking lots, personal vehicles, etc.

This would be for employees’ safety and

Consider: Size/shape of parking lot(s) Outside lighting on building(s) and in parking lot(s) and walkways - automatic on/off View unobstructed from parking to building entrances Area secured by fencing Access control to parking Security personnel present Office trailers and employee parking abuts high-speed roadway

FIGURE 4-3 Modified State of Texas security survey form.

92


Open 24 hours/day or other hours Overall Rating: Very Low / Low / Average / Moderately High / High

Countermeasures Required

2.

Personnel: Hardware:

3.

Software:

1.

LEVEL IV: Survey of proposed job site security. (Security that will needed for this job site) Consider: Perimeter fence Intrusion detection for office trailers Intrusion detection for tool storage Fire safety (extinguishers, sprinklers, alarm system, smoke detectors) Closed-circuit TV Lighting Access to job site Security personnel needed Equipment security Kill switches for equipment Gates and locks Marking of all tools and equipment Tool sign put/In system Overall Rating: Very Low / Low / Average / Moderately High / High

Countermeasures Required

2.

Personnel: Hardware:

3.

Software:

1.

Physical Security / Crimes in area - Latest Five Year Period

FIGURE 4-3 Modified State of Texas security survey form. (continued)

93

The Security Survey

Type Incident:

Date:

Outcome:

1. 2. 3.

Emergency Responders Available

Type:

Response Time:(Approximate)

1.

On-site Security

2.

5.

City Police EMS Fire Department County Sheriff Department

6.

Dept of Public Safety

7.

Other (__________)

3. 4.

Photos of proposed job site area Note: Attach photos of all four views of the building complex or building to be occupied. Summary of Estimate:

FIGURE 4-3 Modified State of Texas security survey form. (continued)

The perimeter fence will be more than a marking of the job-site boundary and be a part of the security program by keeping a clear zone of five feet around on both sides of the fence. The purpose of the clear zone is to have visibility from outside of the fence of the job site. The office trailers and tool storage containers should have their doors facing the outside perimeter fence so they can be easily seen. A chain-link fence will provide the best views. It is not recommended that the chain-link mesh be covered with anything to obstruct the view from outside the job site. The trailers should be set back from the fence but in plain sight from

94


outside the perimeter fence. By having a clear view of the doors to the office trailers and the tool storage containers, the neighbors and police will notice if someone enters the trailers after hours. If the site has security officers for after hours, they will most likely will have access to one of the office trailers for their work space. The perimeter fence should have “No Trespassing” signs mounted along the fence line. The signs will serve as warning that trespassing is not permitted and violators will be prosecuted to the full extent of the law. As a matter of routine any trespassers found on the site, especially after hours, should be arrested by the police. It is important to send the message that trespassing on the job site will not be tolerated. The benefits of doing of a security survey are many as discussed above. The biggest benefit of doing a security survey, however, is to understand the security gaps of a job site or proposed job site, then using the information from the survey to formulate a security plan that closes those gaps.

HOW TO CONDUCT A SECURITY SURVEY To conduct a security survey, you need a survey form to capture the information, a digital camera to document areas and issues and a light meter to check the illumination of the job site. There are numerous survey forms that have been presented in this book, as well as others that can be found online. Pick one of the forms or take several forms and create your own form for the initial survey. If the survey is an update, use the completed survey as a guide to check to see if the gaps noted have been closed. Then complete the form and note any new gaps in security since the last survey. The survey form will be the guide and plan for doing the job-site security survey. Following the survey form will ensure that all areas are completed and any gaps noted. The survey forms can be completed online so there is an electronic record of the survey results for future reference. Having the report online will make it easier to search and get an historical perspective of the job-site security. Having the survey documents online will permit comparisons to be quickly made between reports of what has been done to close the gaps and what still remains as an open item. These quick references will help keep tabs on the status of job-site security as the job progresses by tracking open items until they are resolved in some manner. The use of digital camera is important for documenting the gaps in security. The picture can be used to assist in describing what the gap is and what can be done to close the gap. The use of digital pictures will permit the storing of pictures with the completed report. This way, the pictures and the report will be readily available for review.

The Security Survey

95

A light meter is an important tool for the security surveyor because there is a need to make sure that the lighting is sufficient to illuminate the job site and for the CCTV cameras to capture good, usable, images of any intruders that may come on site. Security surveys are an important tool for planning and executing job-site security. The security survey will help formalize the process and permit easy tracking of the status of gaps. By tracking the gaps and what was done to close them, job-site security can be improved.


CHAPTER

Perimeter Security

5

T

he perimeter fence usually marks the boundary of the property. It helps differentiate where the private and public lines begin and end. For construction job sites, the perimeter fence also keeps people from falling into the excavation that is done during construction. To mark the boundary, the fence does not have to be high since it is not meant to help secure the property. There are perimeter fences that enhance security of the perimeter by being higher and topped with barbed wire. The purpose of a perimeter security fence is to slow down the intruder by adding another layer to defeat to gain entry. However, the perimeter fence is not designed to completely stop the intruder. The perimeter security fence is used as a delaying tactic to slow down the intruder and does serve to control vehicle and pedestrian traffic access to the property. There needs to be a clear zone around the perimeter fence. The view should not be obstructed from the outside the perimeter. This will aid in detecting an intruder that has managed to gained access to the property. The clear zone will also provide for detection of the intruder attempting to gain access by climbing or cutting the fence. The perimeter fence can take many forms. It could be a block or concrete wall. Wooden, wrought iron, or chain-link fence can mark the property line or be the perimeter security fence. The chain link is the most common of the perimeter fences used for commercial properties. There are federal guidelines for chain-link fences and we will explore the guidelines in more depth in the chapter. The chain-link fence helps in providing the clear zone on each side of the fence because the chain mesh leaves an opening so the property can be viewed from out side the fence. The block wall is also used for commercial properties. Even though the block or concrete wall does not provide visibility from both sides of the property line, it is still a good perimeter fence for some applications since it can be harder to climb over or go through. The wooden fence is commonly


98


found separating single and small multi-family properties from each other. The perimeter fence has openings known as gates. There are several types of gates used for vehicle and pedestrian traffic access and we will look at them in this chapter. The various gates are as follows: • Roll/slide • Cantilever • Lift • Motorized • Swing In this chapter we look at the types of fences, their components, types of barbed wire, openings in the fence (gates), designs, and uses. At the end of the chapter is a table that outlines the advantages and disadvantages for each type of fence. Sensors can also be used to detect intruders that climb, cut, or otherwise disturb the fence.

TYPES OF PERIMETER FENCES Perimeter fences are constructed from one of the four types of fence construction materials: 1. Chain link 2. Wrought iron 3. Wood 4. Concrete block wall The most widely-used material is the chain-link mesh. Wrought iron is gaining in popularity as is the concrete wall. These fences are used primarily around the perimeters of industrial sites such as water treatment plants and power substations. The use of these materials has been around for a long time but, since 9/11/01, they have become more popular and are being used at new installations and even replacing some of the chain-link fences at existing sites. The concrete or block walls are usually topped with barbed wire. The openings in the concrete or block walls are limited for allowing vehicular traffic access. To allow for vehicular traffic access, some type of motorized gate is used. Since the walls are installed around a high security site, the gate motor is operated by an access control card or a keypad. The gates are either wrought iron or chain link to allow ease of movement. When a pedestrian opening is installed, it is sometimes made of a metal door to prevent easy access for non-authorized personnel. The rise in

Perimeter Security

99

use of wrought iron or concrete or block walls is not to say that chain link is not still the most widely used fence because it is. The Federal Specifications for the chain-link fence have become the industry standard when designing and constructing a perimeter chain-link fence. The Federal Specifications are discussed below under the chain-link fence section.

Chain Link The chain-link fence is the mostly widely used perimeter fence for construction job sites. The federal government uses chain-link fences as a boundary around many federal buildings, facilities, and especially the parking lots. The Federal specifications for the design and construction of a chain-link perimeter fence are found in Federal Standard RR-F-191/1A. The requirements include the barbed wire as well as the components of the fence and how it is to be constructed. The chain-link fence requirements in Federal specifications RR-F-191/1A are taken from Defense Logistics Agency (DLAI 5710.1) below. The Federal Specifications for perimeter chain-link fences are the standard in the security industry. Below is a summary of the Federal Specifications for chain-link fences. • Fabric made of chain link • No. 9 gauge or heavier wire • Seven (7) feet high • The fence fabric is to be mounted on metal posts set in concrete. • Mesh opening not larger than 2 inches square • Fence bottom is within 2 inches of solid ground • The fence top guard is strung with barbed wire & angled outward & upward at a 45-degree angle The chain-link fabric material is to be constructed of galvanized, aluminized, or plastic-coated woven steel. The fabric is to be secured to the posts with at least 9gauge or heavier diameter wire. If the fence is constructed of 10-gauge diameter wire then the anchors used to secure the fabric to the posts shall be made of 10gauge diameter wire. The anchor wire gauge diameter must be equal to the fabric gauge diameter. The only type of paint to be used on a chain-link fence is non-reflective to reduce glare and maintain the clear zone on both sides of the fence. The mesh openings in the fabric should not be larger than 2-inches square. A larger opening in the mesh will permit an intruder to climb the fence more easily. The smaller opening makes it harder to rest the toes of the foot on while climbing. The fence is to be mounted on metal posts using the proper diameter gauge wire as outlined above. The posts are to be secured by setting them in concrete

100


at the proper height of 7 feet. All openings and corners of the fence are to be secured with additional bracing. All the posts, bracing, and other structural members are to be located inside the of the fence fabric and will be of equal structural strength. See Figure 5-1. The minimum height of the fence is to be 7 feet. Some locations may not permit fences to be constructed higher than 6 feet without a permit from the planning and zoning or building department. Check with the local jurisdiction before constructing the fence. Remember, if you are going to add barbed wire set at a 45-degree outward angle, it will add another 12 inches to the overall height of the fence. On the top of the fence the Federal Standard calls for three strands of barbed wire that are placed on an 18-inch outrigger facing upward and outward at a 45-degree angle on the outside of the fence. This makes it harder to climb from the outside of the perimeter fence. See Figure 5-2 for more details. Make sure that the angled barbed wire faces outward at a 45-degree angle otherwise the purpose of adding will be for naught. To prevent the fence from being lifted from the bottom to gain easy entry, the bottom of the chain-link fabric should be extended 2 inches into the ground and be anchored not allowing an opening of more than 5 inches in height. To anchor the 2-inch extension into the ground, horizontal bottom rails, concrete curbs, or sills may be used to anchor the bottom of the fence. This part of the installation is a sometimes overlooked but it is important. Finally, the fence needs

FIGURE 5-1 Security fence corner with truss braces & tension rods.

Perimeter Security

101

FIGURE 5-2 The 18-inch outrigger for the barbed wire.

to be stabilized in areas where there is loose sand, shifting soils, or surface waters that may cause erosion and make it easy for an intruder to gain entry by penetrating the perimeter fence. When surface stabilization is not possible, concrete curbs or sills or another similar permanent anchoring system below the ground level needs to be provided. There are chain-link fences that have a mesh fabric size of 3/8-inch vinyl coated. Since the mesh is smaller, it more resistant to damage by being struck with a projectile because the object will be hitting a greater number of strands of the 3/8-inch mesh rather than just a few strands. This gives the fence more strength. Small size mesh fabric fences are used in high security areas. There are also chain-link fences that have slats in the chain link to obscure the view into the area the perimeter fence surrounds. The problem with the “privacy” slats woven into the chain link is that it does block the view of what is inside so, from a security perspective, the fence voids the clear-zone concept. There are uses for this type of fence. The woven slats fence is found around construction excavating sites to block the public’s view. Another use is for around swimming pools and tennis courts for privacy. The slats do make it very difficult if not impossible to climb the chain-link fence. The drawback is that the inside of the perimeter is not visible from the outside, leaving no clear zone. Once an intruder has gained entry he/she will not be easily detected. At high security locations, such as prisons, you will see two fence lines. There is an interior fence line with a clear zone of approximately 10 yards then another outer fence. Both fences have three coils of razor wire. This type of double fence installation can be seen around other high security locations as well including military bases and nuclear power plants.

102


Wrought Iron Wrought iron is another material used to make security perimeter fences. The fences come in all shapes and sizes. Some of these wrought iron fences are decorative and are found mainly around the perimeter of commercial properties that contain high-value equipment. To be effective as a perimeter security fence, it must be at least 6 feet high. An example of a wrought iron fence can be seen in Figure 5-3. The specifications of the wrought iron fence in Figure 5-3 are listed below: • The fence is 7 feet tall. • The top has rounded ends facing downward toward the outside and has pointed ends on a 45° angle facing outward similar to the barbed wire outrigger on a chain-link fence. • The ends are sharp and climbing the fence would not be an easy task.

FIGURE 5-3 A wrought iron fence.

Perimeter Security

103

• The diameter of the pickets ranges from 1-18 gauge tubular steel. • The fence in Figure 5-4 is a two rail fence, one rail at the bottom and one at the top and the pickets and slats are 2-inch diameter. • The pickets on the fence are called spade pickets since they look like an ace of spade found on a playing card. • The posts are 4 inches in diameter and are set in concrete. • The bottom of the fence’s wrought iron slats are not above the ground more than three inches. • The fence is built around a water treatment plant facing the road. The wrought iron perimeter fence looks formidable and is not one that can be easily scaled by just climbing. This type of fence is good for an industrial site such as a water treatment plant. Before designing and constructing a wrought iron fence that is 6 feet or higher, check with the local jurisdiction to find out if the fence can be used on the site. Some jurisdictions require a permit to construct such a fence and others may not allow the fence at all. The wrought iron fence is a good deterrent to the uncommitted intruder who is looking for an easy target. The design shown in Figure 5-4 would be time-consuming for an intruder to defeat and even the motivated intruder may think twice about attempting entry, which is what the perimeter security fence is designed to do. Time is important to the intruder and the time spent at a location to commit a burglary is 10 minutes to evade detection. If it takes time to penetrate the perimeter fence, the intruder may think twice for fear of being detected and move on to an easier target.

Wood Fences Wood is also used to in the construction of perimeter fences. These types of fences are sometimes used on job sites to keep people working on the job site from large, deep excavations. There are various types of wood fences. For a wood fence to provide some sense of security the fence must be at least 6 feet or higher. Remember the fence is used as a tool to slow down the intruder and wood fences are not as secure as the chain-link or the wrought iron fences. Remember the fence is used as a tool to slow the intruder down when attempting to enter the property. Some wood fences are constructed using steel posts instead of wood. The steel posts tend to last longer are not subjected to rot as the wood posts are. The steel posts add to security because since they are not susceptible to rotting the fence will have a tendency to lean over or fall down in a wind storm. The types of wood fences are as follows:

104


FIGURE 5-4 Wrought iron perimeter fence.

1. Privacy 2. Decorative 3. Shadow box 4. Solid board Privacy wood fences are usually 5 feet or higher and are made using solid board slats with a top and bottom rail to secure the slats known as the board-on-board fence. There is limited visibility from either side of the fence because the boards are placed close together with a small space for expansion and contraction of the wood. There is also a kickplate at the bottom. These fences are made from either Redwood or Cedar and used to mark property boundaries in single family residential lots. The fence is also used to enclose a swimming pool. Wood fences that are higher than 5 feet high are not easy to climb. Wood fences usually are not topped with barbed wire since the predominant use of the wood fence is for residential mainly around the property line of a single family residence. Openings in wood fences are primarily swing gates. Swing gates that provide access for pedestrians to backyards that have swimming pools or spas usually have spring loaded

Perimeter Security

105

self closures installed to prevent the gate from in advertently being left open because of the danger of the pool. The wood fence has its uses but for a high security situation it is better to use a wrought iron or a chain-link fence. Figure 5-5 is an example of the construction of a solid board fence.

Concrete Walls Concrete walls are used as perimeter fences. These types of fences are constructed around industrial operations such as power substations. Here are some of the construction features of the wall. Concrete or block walls that are less than 6 feet in height are sometimes used around residential properties such as apartment complexes and single family homes that back up to commercial property. The walls are used as separations and not for security although they provide some by being an obstacle for an intruder to tackle. The concrete wall is between 8 to 15 feet high and is topped with barb and razor wire. The walls are often constructed of filled reinforced concrete cinderblock or pre-cast reinforced concrete, making the wall 4" thick. The pre-cast concrete is made off site in sections and put together on site. The razor and barbed wire is attached to the wall using the same outriggers as found on the chain-link fence set at a 45-degree. There are three strands of barbed wire and on top of the barbed wire is the razor wire. The columns for the concrete walls are anchored to concrete footings (piers), that are set below grade. The columns

FIGURE 5-5 Construction of a solid board fence.

106


FIGURE 5-6

Shadow box fence.

are attached to the footings. The column sits down on the re-bar rods that are protruding from the footings. Concrete walls may not be permitted by zoning laws to be installed in certain areas if they are over a certain number of feet and are topped with barbed and razor wire. You do see these walls however in residential areas usually to separate the subdivision from main road ways and the walls are not topped with barbed and razor wire. Concrete walls are also used as sound walls along freeways and other highways to deaden the noise from the traffic.

FENCE OPENINGS Openings in the perimeter fence are necessary to allow vehicles and pedestrians to enter the property. These are vulnerable points to the integrity of the perimeter fence. So care must be taken when designing the opening to ensure that it is secure as can it can be. To accomplish this task follow the steps listed below: 1. Make sure the same material in constructing the opening as was used in constructing the fence. 2. Limit the number of openings to those that are essential. 3. Use self closures on any pedestrian gates to prevent them from being left opened.

Perimeter Security

107

4. Monitor the openings in high security perimeter fences using sensors (sensors will be discussed in Chapter 7) or security officers. 5. Provide a latch and lock to secure pedestrian gates when they are not needed. 6. When installing gates make sure that the posts are installed so the gate is supported but access by climbing over the gate by using the post to stand on. To stop this from occurring barbed wire can be strung across the post to make it harder to climb the fence. There are different types of gates. The roll/gate, cantilever, and motorized versions of each are used to allow vehicular traffic in to the property. The swing gate is also used as a man gate to allow pedestrians to enter the property and they gates can sometimes by electrically locked and a PIN or access card is needed to gain access. There are 5 types of gates found in perimeter fences. Each has an advantage and use and we will look at the five in the next section of the chapter. 1. Roll/slide 2. Cantilever 3. Lift 4. Motorized 5. Swing

Roll/Slide Gates Roll/slide gates are the gates that you see that either slide from one side to open or from both sides. When there are two gates that slide, one is the “Master.” The gates have small wheels on the bottom and the gate is easy to open by sliding the gate in the direction of travel either right or left of center. On some roll/slide gates the wheels run along a track or guide. This helps guide the gate to move straight along the track/guide when opening. Motorized slide gates will be discussed later in this section. The roll gates are usually used to allow vehicular traffic to enter the property. The gates open wide enough to allow vehicles to enter. If the gates are not motorized then they need to be opened manually. At most locations when the manual roll/slider is opened at the beginning of the work day it is usually left all day. This creates a large opening in the perimeter fence line thus a large breach in perimeter security. The roll/slide gate is constructed of the same material as the rest of the fence. The roll/slide gates are found primarily in chain-link and wrought iron fences and are used to allow vehicular traffic access.

108


Cantilever Gates The cantilever gate is one gate that operates as a roll/slide gate (see Figure 5-7). The gate is used in places that are too tight and will not permit the use of a two gate roll/slide gate. This type of gate is can be manually operated or driven. The motor driven gate is not left open after entry is made since the loop inside the perimeter will close the gate after the vehicle has tripped the loop by driving over it. The gate is constructed of the same material as the rest of the fence which in most cases is chain link or wrought iron. The lift cantilever gate opens as roll/slide gate only lifts at a 45-degree angle. The gate is used in places that are too tight and will not permit the use of a two gate roll/slide gate. You can see the cantilever gate at a self storage facility. This type of gate is not usually manually operated so consequently the gate is not left open after entry is made. The gate is constructed of the same material as the rest of the fence which in most cases is chain link or wrought iron. There are also lift gates that lift straight up. These gates are usually chain link and for areas that have limited space and not enough room for roll/slide, cantilever, or swing gates. The gates are motorized and lift up like a garage door except the gate does have folding sections it lifts in one piece.

Motorized Gates Motorized gates are usually used at industrial sites for roll/slide, cantilever, lift or swing gates. The gates are operated either by a keypad or access card reader. The

FIGURE 5-7

Cantilever gate.

Perimeter Security

109

keypad or access card reader will activate a ground loop or the gate operator motor thereby opening the gate. The gates are opened by a motorized operator and will close either at a predetermined set time usually a few seconds after being activated or after the gates are fully opened and the ground loop is activated inside the perimeter by the vehicle that is entering the site. To prevent damage to vehicles that are entering the site, there are sensors used in the ground loop to prevent the gate from closing and damage the vehicle. Exiting through the gate with a motorized operator is activated by a ground loop sensor to start the gate opening. Sometimes the ground loop for exiting is activated by an access card or a keypad. The access card or keypad will send a signal to activate the ground loop to start the motor to open the gate. When selecting a motorized gate operator for the gate it must be the proper size to operate the gate size and weight. Choosing the wrong motor will cause problems, either the motor will burn out quickly or the gate will open completely.

Swing Gates Swing gates are used for both vehicle and pedestrian openings. The gates for vehicle traffic sometimes are motor-operated. Swing gates are hinged on the same side the way it swings to open. For example, if the gate swings to the left the hinges will be on the left, and if the gate opens to the right the hinges will be on the right side. On the other hand swing gates for pedestrian traffic are usually not motor-operated but are often times have a spring self-closure on the gate.

BARBED WIRE Barbed wire is used to top the perimeter security fence to make it harder for an intruder to climb or scale the perimeter fence. Without adding the barbed wire on the top of the fence, climbing the fence would be easy and not much of a deterrent to discourage the not-so-motivated intruder. The barbed wire is attached to the top of the fence either by the outriggers discussed earlier in the chapter, or strung between other connectors (posts) spaced at set intervals along the fence. Barbed wire has sharp edges at set intervals along the wire. The barbs are designed to cause discomfort or injury to anyone attempting to gain entry by climbing over or passing through the wire. The wire is made of two strands of twisted wire and the barb is made of a piece of wire that is tightly coiled around the two strands of wire. The barb has four sharp edges protruding which are the ends of the wire that is coiled around the twisted strands. The barbs are strategically placed along the twisted stands of wire, making it hard for an intruder to climb over or pass through the barbed wire. The twisted strand barbed wire can be cut with a pair of wire cutters as can the mesh on a chain-link fence. Since the barbed wire sits on top of the fence is usu-

110


ally not in easy reach from the ground. The determined intruder will come equipped to attack the barbed wire and the fence. Most not so determined intruders will probably go somewhere else where gaining access will be easier so the barbed wire is used as a deterrent. Methods for stringing barbed wire are discussed below: • Outriggers—The barbed wire strung through the outriggers can position the barbed wire strings at a 45-degree angle facing outward making it hard to climb over. • Straight barbed wire—These are strings of the twisted strand barbed wire that are strung between the straight posts are not at angle but straight and horizontal to the ground. Climbing the straight strands of barbed wire is not as difficult as the angle wire. The straight strands of barbed wire are usually strung across gates.

RAZOR WIRE Razor wire is similar to barbed wire, but is sharper and will cause injury to an intruder attempting to climb or pass through. Razor wire was first used by the military to quickly install a perimeter since it was easy to place in position because it comes in rolls. One roll will cover 50 feet and by connecting several rolls together you span a large distance quickly. Sometimes the razor is laid out two rolls side by side for more protection. Razor wire looks intimidating and this is enough to get some intruders thinking of moving to some place easier to gain access. For commercial use the razor is used to top the barbed wire on the outriggers that hold the barbed wire. There are some commercial locations that also have razor wire at the bottom of the fence as well. The razor at the bottom of the fence is used to deter those who may be thinking of climbing or coming under the fence to gain access to the site. As previously stated, no fence or razor wire will stop the determined intruder but the razor and barbed wire make a good delaying tactic to slow down the intruder. The wire comes in coils and gets its name because the sharp edges look like the old double edge razor blades, except the ends are very sharp and have a point on each of the four ends. Razor wire is used on high security location fences like prisons, government installations, and industrial sites. Razor wire, when used at high security installations, usually has at least three coils, one at the top of the fence, one half way down the fence and one coil at the bottom of the fence. The wire that is on the top of the fence is strung over the top string of barbed wire on the outriggers and under the bottom string. On prison fences the razor wire coils cover the entire length of the fence making it impossible to climb. This usually takes more than

Perimeter Security

111

four coils of razor wire to cover the entire fence. The other two coils of razor wire are attached to the fence by using anchors. The wire is made either from galvanized or stainless steel. This helps keep the wire from rusting and needing to be replaced. There are a number of jurisdictions that do not permit razor wire to be used so it wise to check before you specify the use of razor wire. Razor wire cannot be cut with conventional wire cutting tools making it more desirable because it can not easily defeated except by the determined intruder. Industrial locations using razor wire in most cases have no more than two coils but most have only one coil of razor wire at the top of the fence. Razor wire is also used on the top of vehicle gates and it is strung through the straight strands of barbed wire. There are many options to the perimeter fence materials. The choice you make will depend on the risk analysis you performed to determine what level of security is needed for the site. The use of barbed and razor wire is an important consideration and the local ordinances will dictate what can be used in what areas of the jurisdiction.


CHAPTER

Intrusion Detection for Job Trailers

6

A

s a part of overall security for a job site, intrusion detection systems must be considered for job trailers. Alarms and sensors have been around for a long time. In the early days, most of them in were burglar alarms with door contacts, window tape, and the like. Today there is a variety of intrusion detection systems. The alarm points can be integrated into the electronic access control system for monitoring purposes. Alarms are one of the three elements of physical security: detection, delay, and response. The detection is an important aspect because without detection there could not be a timely response or any response at all to an intruder or intruders. There is a factor known as “Probability of Detection” (PD) which is used to determine whether an intruder will be picked up by the sensor device before entry to the perimeter or structure is made. The PD is important for choosing the right detector to meet the application. The use of instruction detection systems and alarms help make the work of security officers more efficient and can reduce the number of officers needed if the system are properly deployed and cover the critical areas. Today intrusion detection systems and alarms are integrated into the access control system and CCTV is used to view and record what is going on at the alarm point. All alarm systems have three main parts. 1. Sensor 2. Monitoring 3. Warning device The sensor is what detects the intruder, fire, etc. and sends a signal to the monitoring station. The monitoring station can be an alarm panel or a console located at the security officer station as well an offsite monitoring station. The sensors use


114


various technologies such electrical circuits, infrared, etc. More detail about the technologies used by sensors will be presented later in the chapter. The monitoring station can be a panel in the lobby of the building as is commonly used for fire systems to an alarm notification screen through the access control system software. All alarm systems have some type of audible and visual devices so the alarm can be acknowledged and appropriate action can be taken. For example a fire alarm system will have audible and visual devices that alert people in the building to evacuate. Intrusion detection alarms have audible and visual devices that alert the security force monitoring or offsite station that an alarm sensor has been tripped so the alarm can be acknowledged and the appropriate action can be taken. Alarms are used to monitor the following functions and each one is a separate kind of alarm system. We will focus on intrusion alarms in this chapter. Fire alarms will be discussed in a later chapter. Other alarms are explained below and they can be monitored by the access control system, since most of the alarms in the other category are used to monitor critical building systems. Intrusion alarms are used to detect intrusion into a building or restricted area. Motion sensors are the most widely used type of alarm sensor today. These are known as the burglar alarms. Fire alarms, according to fire codes, need a separate panel for monitoring purposes. They can also be monitored through the access control system. However this does not negate the need for its own panel to meet the fire code. Fire alarms can be smoke and/or heat detectors, manual pull stations, and fire suppression systems like sprinklers and gaseous systems. Fire alarms not only detect the signatures of a fire but they also provide an audible and visual alarm for evacuation. Other types of alarms can be used to monitor critical building systems like HVAC. For example, they can detect a sudden temperature rise in a computer server room which could cause the servers to shut down due to excessive heat build up. Other alarms are used to monitor process systems for temperature and flow. Most of the electronic access control systems' software allows for monitoring of building alarms and they will even send a page to the appropriate personnel in the event of an alarm.

ALARM CATEGORIES Alarms are categorized by the technology used in the sensors. They are a variety of sensor technologies being used today in alarms. The two main types of sensor categories are as follows. In most cases the sensors are not interchangeable due to the elements they may be exposed to so, when designing the intrusion detection system, consideration must be given to the location of the alarm sensors: 1. Exterior 2. Interior


115

Exterior intrusion detection sensors are used to detect intruders that are attempting to enter the protected area. The sensors are placed in the clear zones, around buildings, along the perimeter fence line, or on the perimeter fence. The exterior sensor is designed to stand up to the elements, such as heat, cold, rain, dust, snow, and sleet and still be able to function and detect intruders. As you might have already guessed, the false alarm rate for exterior sensors is high. The reason for this high false alarm rate is due to the uncontrollable elements such as wind causing blowing debris, snow and ice build up, or animals brushing up or crossing through the sensor field. For example sensors on fences are notorious for false alarms during wind storms just from the movement of the fence by the wind as well as blowing debris. Interior intrusion detection sensors are used to detect intrusion into a building or into a restricted area of a building. For example, motion sensors are used to detect the movement of an intruder. The false alarm rate for interior sensors is not as high as for the outdoor sensors but still they are susceptible to nuisance alarms. The most common cause of interior false alarms is an authorized person not deactivating the alarm after entry. The functions performed by interior sensors are as follows: 1. Detect an intruder penetrating a boundary like a door, wall, roof, floor, vent, and window 2. Tracking the movement of an intruder inside the building 3. Detecting the movement or touching of an object by an intruder such as a portable safe

SENSOR TECHNOLOGY The sensor technology is based on the following types. • Switches Q

Magnetic

Q

Balanced magnetic

Q

Mechanical

• Volumetric sensors • Ultrasonic Q

Passive

Q

Active

• Infrared

116


Q

Passive

Q

Interior active

Q

Exterior active

• Glass breaks • Microwave • Vibration Q

Fence

Q

Wall

• Fiber optic • Electric field • Capacitance • Taut wire • Photo electric beam • Video motion detection

SWITCHES There are several types of switches in use today for intrusion detection systems. The switch technologies include, magnetic, balanced magnetic, and mechanical. The magnetic switch is a magnet contact switch used to detect the opening of a door or window. The magnetic switch consists of two parts: a magnet on the door or window frame and the other magnet on the door or window. The switch is a two-position switch and designed to be normally open or normally closed. The switch is in the normal position when the door or window is closed. A magnetic field is produced and pulls the switch to the non-alarmed position. If the window or door is opened, the contact is broken and the alarm is activated. The magnetic switches are usually mounted on window and door frames and are used in conjunction with a motion sensor to detect that an entry has been made. Some of the conditions that will cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in magnetic switches are: • Excessive door or window movement will cause too much “play” in the door and window and its frame. So if the door is shaken the contact will be broken and alarm will be sent. The wind can cause the rattling of doors and windows causing false alarms because the contact is broken.


117

• Improper alignment of the switch on the door or window with the switch on the frame will cause false alarms. Improper alignment can be caused by a bent or warped frame. • The fluctuations in the frame due to seasonal conditions such as heating and cold can cause the magnetic switch to loose contact and send an alarm. The main method for defeating a magnetic switch is using a stronger magnet to keep the contact, allowing the door or window to be opened without activating the alarm. This is accomplished because the location of the switch is observable to the intruder, allowing the proper placement of the stronger outside magnet to jump the terminal. Balanced magnetic switches contain two parts like the magnetic switches however one magnet is mounted on the door or window frame and a balancing magnet is mounted on the door or window. The magnet mounted on the frame is known as the internal magnet and the magnet mounted on the door or window is known as the external magnet. The balancing of the switch is accomplished by the magnetic field of the magnets in the open position. When the magnetic field is disturbed by movement of the external magnet, the switch closes. While the door or window in the normal closed position, the magnetic field will cause the switch to be stable. If the door or window is opened, the magnetic field is disturbed and the switch becomes unstable activating an alarm. Balanced magnetic switches provide a higher level of security than do the magnetic switches. The switches are used on doors and windows and are used with other devices such as motion sensors. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in balanced magnetic switches are: • As in the case of the magnetic switches, excessive door or window movement will cause too much “play” in the door and window and its frame. If the door is shaken, the contact will be broken and an alarm will be sent. The wind can rattle the doors and windows causing false alarms because the contact is broken. • Improper alignment of the switch on the door or window with the switch on the frame will cause false alarms. Improper alignment can be caused by a bent or warped frame. • The fluctuations in the frame due to seasonal conditions such as heating and cold can cause the magnetic switch to lose contact and send an alarm. The balanced magnetic switch cannot be defeated by using a stronger external magnet placed on the switch when the door or window is open. Balanced magnetic switches are widely used today because they cannot be easily defeated by

118


using a stringer external magnet or taping over one of the magnets. Figure 6-1 shows the mounting of a balanced magnetic switch. The magnetic switch is the same as the balanced magnetic switch mounting. Mechanical switches are contact switches used to detect the opening of a door or window. Mechanical switches are constructed of a spring-loaded plunger that is triggered when the door or window is opened. The switches send an alarm when there is physical disturbance to the sensor. Like the magnetic switches, mechanical switches are mounted on doors and windows and are used in conjunction with a motion sensor to compensate for the failed alarm if is compromised. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in mechanical switches are.

FIGURE 6-1 Mounting of a balanced magnetic switch.


119

• Excessive door or window movement—Causes too much “play” in the door and window and its frame. The alarm will be triggered if there is enough movement in the door or window. The wind can cause the rattling of doors and windows causing false alarms because the contact is broken. • Improper alignment—Can be caused by a bent or warped frame on the door or window. • Fluctuations in the frame—Seasonal conditions such as heating and cold can cause the magnetic switch to lose contact and send an alarm. The mechanical switch can be defeated by holding the switch in the open position and taping it when the door or window is open. A small piece of metal will also hold the switch in the open position. Both of these methods will bypass the alarm and permit undetected entry when the switch is supposed to be in the closed position.

VOLUMETRIC SENSORS Volumetric sensors are used to detect intrusion and motion in an interior space. Even though microwave is considered a volumetric sensor it will be discussed later in the chapter under its own heading since it is used mainly for exterior use. There are two types of volumetric sensors: 1. Ultrasonic 2. Infrared

Ultrasonic Sensors There are two types of ultrasonic sensors, passive and active. A passive ultrasonic sensor is a motion sensor that is listening for ultrasonic sound. The device reacts to high frequency sounds associated with an intrusion attempt. The device listens for frequencies that are from 20 to 30 KHz. The range of 20 to 30 KHz is chosen because it is the range at which metal striking metal, the hissing of an acetylene torch, and the sound of concrete or brick shattering makes. The sound travels the air in a wave-type motion. When the sound reaches the passive ultrasonic sensor, the sensor determines whether the frequency is a characteristic of an intrusion attempt and then sends an alarm if it meets the criteria. The ultrasonic sensors are mounted on a wall or ceiling and are used in a tandem with another type of sensor like a passive infrared sensor to increase the probability of detection (PD). The pitfall to using the sensor in tandem is that it increases the rate of false alarms and this will depend on the environment and how much control there is over what happens in the space.

120


Ultrasonic sensors are not affected by heat so any changes in temperature either up or down will not make any difference in the sensor capability. Since ultrasonic energy does not pass through walls, roofs or other partitions, it is easy to contain the detection to a defined area. On the other hand a big disadvantage is that ultrasonic energy does not pass through furniture, boxes or other such obstructions and therefore creates “dead zones” where there is not any detection. To overcome this short coming additional detector can be added to cover the “dead zones”. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in passive ultrasonic sensors are. • The sensors are susceptible to extreme changes in temperature and humidity thanthose encountered during the initial installation and calibration and may cause detector reliability problems. The sensors need to be recalibrated periodcally to maintain reliability and this should be done at the change of seasons. • The detectors are installed on walls and ceilings to detect intrusions into sensitive areas are effective when used in combination with passive infrared sensors. • The most common false alarm in areas that ultrasonic sensors are installed is changes in air movement caused by the HVAC system, hissing from pipes, drafts from windows and doors, and the ring of a telephone. All of these stimuli can create noise near or at the ultrasonic range thus triggering the alarm. Since the ultrasonic have a narrow frequency range and intrusion methods that do fall into the frequency range will not be detected such as drilling and no alarm will be went. This is why it is strongly recommended that the ultrasonic sensor be used in conjunction with another technology such as passive infrared sensors. Figure 6-2 shows an example of the wall and ceiling mount ultrasonic detectors. The active ultrasonic sensor is a motion sensor. The active ultrasonic detector emits ultrasonic energy rather than listening like the passive sensor does. The sensor reacts to the change in the reflected ultrasonic energy in the area that sensor is monitoring. The principle of the active ultrasonic sensor is based on a frequency shift in reflected energy to detect intruders. This is similar to sonar used to detect submarines and surface ships except there the passive ultrasonic senor does emit a sound. The principle is based on the fact sound uses air and travels in wave like motions. The sound wave is reflected back from the surroundings and the sensor hears the pitch characteristics of the protected environment. An intruder is detected upon entering the room because the wave pattern is disturbed and reflected back more quickly and sends an alarm.


121

FIGURE 6-2 Wall and ceiling mount ultrasonic detectors.

Active ultrasonic sensors are not affected by heat so any changes in temperature either up or down will not make any difference in the sensor capability. Since ultrasonic energy does not pass through walls, roofs or other partitions, it is easy to contain the detection to a defined area. On the other hand a big disadvantage is that ultrasonic energy does not pass through furniture, boxes or other such obstructions and therefore creates “dead zones” where there is not any detection. To overcome this short coming additional detector can be added to cover the “dead zones”.

122


Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in active ultrasonic sensors are the same as for the passive ultrasonic sensors. The only exception is that since the active sensors are motion anything that causes movement will trigger an alarm such as animals passing through the protected area. The typical way to defeat active ultrasonic sensors is to move slowly in a horizontal direction and the detector will probably not detect the movement. To remedy this short coming proper calibration is necessary to detect slow movement. Another way a knowledgeable intruder can defeat the system is to use a special test light to detect the coverage patterns and then avoid these areas. Figure 6-3 shows the active ultrasonic detector.

INFRARED There are two types of infrared sensors, passive and active. The passive infrared (PIR) sensors are divided into zones or sectors with each being defined with specific boundaries. Passive infrared sensors detect electro magnetic radiated energy that is generated by sources that produce temperatures below that of visible light. The sensors measure the change in thermal radiation. Passive sensors do not emit any signal instead the radiation of any movement in the room is checked against the environment of the room and changes that are hot images as contrasted between the hot image and the cooler background is detected as an intruder and alarm is sent. This occurs because the room is at a certain temperature and it is usually below that as to what a human emits so the image appears as “hot” to the sensor. The infrared energy is measured in microns and for humans the micron range is 7–14 with PIR sensors being focused on this narrow band. Passive infrared like the ultrasonic sensors are mounted on the wall or ceiling and are used in conjunction with ultrasonic sensors, balance magnetic switches, glass break sensors and time delayed CTV cameras. Some conditions that cause nuisance alarms are the radiation produced by small animals and/or rodents can cause false alarms. Time activated space heaters, ovens, and hot water pipes also will produce false alarms if they are in the field of view of the sensors. Room temperatures that are between 80 to 100 degrees will make the sensors less effective. Passive infrared sensors can be defeated by cloaking, masking or shadowing the intruding heat source from the field of view and this will decrease the probability of detection (PD) since it reduces the possibility of sufficient radiant heat emitted being focused on the thermal sensor. Knowing the dead spots of the detection pattern can permit an intruder to bypass active regions. Also walking into the sensor rather than across the sensor’s field of view will also reduce the detection capability by not allowing the boundaries of the detection beams to be broken. Figure 6-4 shows PIR placement and coverage patterns.


123

FIGURE 6-3 Active ultrasonic detector.

Active infrared on the other hand generates a curtain pattern of modulated infrared energy. The sensor then reacts to a change in the modulation of the frequency or an interruption in the received energy. These occurrences happen when an intruder passes through the area being protected by the sensor. Active infrared sensors have a transmitter and a receiver within a single unit. The transmitter uses a laser to create the protection zone and the laser is projected onto a special retro-reflective tape that is used to define the protection zones outline. The energy is reflected off the tape back to the receiver located in the same housing as the laser projector. The energy is converted to an electrical signal and when the signal drops below a preset threshold for a specific period of time an alarm is sent.

124


FIGURE 6-4 PIR placement and coverage patterns.

The coverage patterns are dependant upon the type of reflective tape used. The range can be between 15-25 feet wide by 17-30 feet long. The laser plane can be adjusted from 37 to 180 degrees. The system has high probability of detection (PD) of an intruder and the speed, direction and the temperature of the intruder have no effect on the detection characteristics. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms are. • Dust or other particles that are deposited on the surface of the reflective tape will hinder the detection capabilities. Gaps in the reflective tape will cause unreliable detection. The tape must be continuous. The angle from the sensor to the ends or corners of the tape must not exceed 45 degrees. • An incandescent light that shines directly into the sensor will generate an alarm. Any incandescent light greater than 100 watts and sunlight falling directly in line with the tape to be reflected back to the receiver will cause an alarm. The active infrared detector can be defeated by avoiding the projected laser plane. Also a knowledgeable intruder can deduce the field of the potential detection pattern from the location of the reflective tape and plan his movements to avoid detection. Figure 6-5 shows an exterior active infrared sensor. The exterior active sensor in Figure 6-5 produces a multiple beam pattern. Exterior sensors are susceptible to nuisance alarms from animals and vegetation that grows to a size that blown by the by the wind cause detection.


125

FIGURE 6-5 Exterior active infrared sensor.

Since the sensors are out doors the weather can affect the reliability of the sensors such as fog, heavy rain, and blowing sand and dust, will attenuate the infrared energy. The sensors can be defeated by tunneling underneath the sensors beams.

GLASS BREAKS Glass break sensors are used to monitor glass that can be broken during an intrusion for entry. The glass breaks use a microphone to listen for frequencies associated with breaking glass. The sensor has a processor that will filter frequencies not associated with glass breaking and allows only a certain range of frequencies to be analyzed. Glass come in three different types. 1. Acoustic 2. Shock 3. Dual Technology acoustic/Shock Acoustic sensors are designed to listen for and detect the high frequency cre-

126


ated when an initial shattering of the window occurs. This is the impact of hitting and shattering the glass. After the initial impact high frequencies will travel from the point of impact toward the outer edges of the glass. These are the vibrations that are picked up by the acoustic processor which passes them through the filter and a comparison is made to determine if there is a match and if there is an alarm is sent. Shock sensors will “feel and sense” the 5 KHz frequency associated with the breaking of glass. Two types of shock sensors are available: 1. Electric piezo transducers have electricity present. 2. Non-electric piezo transducers do not have electricity present until the 5 KHz signal hits the transducer causing it to bend. This reduces false alarms. Dual technology acoustic/shock sensors link the acoustic sensor with a shock sensor. The combination reduces the false alarm rate. The two sensors are located in the same unit and are connected electronically through the use of “AND” logic function. When one sensor either the acoustic or shock sense a break each sends it to an “AND” gate and once both signals are received by the “AND” gate an alarm is sent. Figure 6-6 shows a wall mounted installation of a glass break sensor. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in glass break sensors are: • The sensors should be mounted according to the manufacturer's specifications as some acoustic sensors are to be mounted on the window, window frame, wall or ceiling. Sensors mounted on the glass should be placed in the corner about two inches from the edge of the frame. Sensors mounted on the ceiling or wall should be mounted opposite the window it is protecting. • For best results glass break sensors should be used in conjunction with magnetic switches, balanced magnetic switches, or contacts. • Inappropriate sensor matching of range capacity to window size and poorly locating the sensor may cause the senor to be out of range and therefore not detect a glass break intrusion. • If the acoustic sensor is improperly calibrated or installed it will be a cause of nuisance alarms. Any RF interference or sharp impact noises will cause false alarms. • The sensor is defeated by removing a window pane or cutting a hole in the window rather than breaking it. This is why it is important to use the sensor with another technology like motion sensors.

MICROWAVE Microwave sensors are motion sensors that microwaves to detect intruders. Mi-


127

FIGURE 6-6 Wall-mounted installation of a glass break sensor.

crowave sensors transmit and flood an area or zone with an electronic field. Microwave sensors use the Doppler frequency shift to detect intrusions. Human movements cause a frequency shift of 20Hz to 120 Hz so most microwave sensors are tuned to measure the Doppler shift of these frequencies. There are two types of microwave sensors: 1. Monostatic sensors have the transmitter and the receiver in the same unit. The antenna is mounted with in the microwave cavity and flexible enough to be configured and shaped to cover a specified area or zone. The beam can be a short oval or a long slender one. Figures 6-7 and 6-8 show typical detection patterns of a monostatic sensor. 2. Bistatic Sensors have separate units for the transmitter and the receiver. A detection zone is created between the two units. The antenna is flexible enough to be configured to alter the signal field width and height to create different detection zones. Figure 6-9 shows microwave detector zones. Figure 6-10 shows a stacked microwave sensor pattern. Figure 6-11 shows

128


FIGURE 6-7 Short range monostatic sensor detection pattern.

FIGURE 6-8 Long-range monostatic sensor detection pattern.

bistatic microwave layout configurations. Figure 6-12 shows a microwave detector. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in microwave sensors are. If the detectors are placed in close proximity to other high frequency spectrum band the signal can be adversely affected. The sensors should


FIGURE 6-9 Microwave detector zones.

FIGURE 6-10 Stacked microwave sensor pattern.

129

130


FIGURE 6-11 Bistatic microwave layout configurations.

FIGURE 6-12 Microwave detector.


131

not be used near large electric generators, radio transmitters, fluorescent lights can cause a problem as well because of the ionization cycle created by the bulbs can be detected as motion by the sensor. Also any large metal objects that can reflect or block the signal should be kept out of the detection zone. The high frequency waves produced by the detectors can travel through walls, glass, sheet rock, and wood adjacent to the protection zone. This can be a source of false alarms. Tests should be conducted for dead zones to keep them from a source of intrusion attempts. Any objects that could reflect the signals should be removed from the protection zone because they can extend the coverage to areas not intended to be covered and be a source of false alarms. The system can be defeated by an intruder that has access to the area and periodically performs walk tests to determine the sensor patterns and may be able to identify low detection points. An intruder that approaches in a slow deliberate manner using obstruction that may block or absorb the signal may avoid detection.

VIBRATION SENSORS The vibration sensors are mounted on a wall, ceiling, floors and fences. The sensors are designed to detect mechanical vibrations caused by chopping, drilling, ramming, sawing and any other physical intrusion attempt that would penetrate the structure that is protected by the sensor. The vibration sensor is deigned has transducers that detect low frequency energy like those found in vibrations generated by a physical intrusion attempt. There are two types of transducers, piezo electric and mechanical with both converting the seismic vibrations to electrical signals. Vibrations sensors need to be firmly mounted about 8 to 10 feet apart on a wall ceiling where the instruction is expected. When placing the sensor be cognizant of whether the sheetrock, plywood, or thin metal wall is connected to main support or there will be prone to false alarms. The vibration sensor should be used in conjunction with a volumetric sensor such as a PIR or ultrasonic detector. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in wall vibration sensors are. The unstable or improper placement of the sensors will cause detection issues. Mounting the sensors on rugs, fabric, heavy wall coverings will also diminish the detector's effectiveness. The main reason for nuisance alarms is poor placement. For example vibration detector placed on a wall that is prone to external vibrations such as planes, heavy truck traffic, etc. will cause false nuisance alarms. The sensor can be defeated by avoiding entry through an area or zone that is protected by vibration sensors. Another method is to produce random persistent false alarms over a period of time so the alarms will be ignored. Figure 6-13 shows a wall-mounted vibration sensor.

132


FENCE VIBRATION SENSORS Fence vibration sensors are mounted on perimeter fence fabric to detect intrusion attempts to the fence. The detectors will sense, cutting, climbing, sawing, or lifting of the fence fabric.

FIGURE 6-13 Wall-mounted vibration sensor.


133

The types of fence vibration sensors are. Electromechanical that use mechanical inertia switches or mercury switches to detect vibration. Mechanical inertia switches that consist of a vibration sensitive mass that rests on two or three electric contacts so as to create a closed circuit. When an intrusion attempt is made the vibration disturbs one or more the contact points opening the circuit causing an alarm. Mercury switch is a glass vial that contains a small amount of mercury with a set of normally open electrical contacts located in close proximity but not touching the mercury. When an intrusion attempt is made, the mercury is displaced from its normal resting position causing the contact with one of the electric contacts creating an alarm. Piezo electric sensors convert mechanical impact forces into electrical signals and operate similar to the wall piezo electric sensors using a filter processor to check the signal before an alarm is sent. Figure 6-14 shows a fence vibration system. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in fence vibration sensors are: • Improper spacing and installation • Fences with loose fabric that sags, sways, and flexes will cause false alarms. • Shrubbery, tree branches, and animals coming in contact with fence fabric will cause an alarm. In areas where the perimeter fence line is subjected to frequent animal interactions, fence vibration sensors should not be used to avoid nuisance alarms. • Vehicles, containers, structures, etc. should not be parked next to a fence that is protected using a fence vibration sensor because they can be used to bridge the fence. • Fence corners are an area that can be defeated because of the bracing of fence posts and more solid foundations used at a corner or turn point. The system can be defeated by an intruder that deep tunnels under the fence and does come into contact with the fence.

FIBER OPTIC There are two types of fiber sensors used in perimeter security. One is the inwall fiber optic and the other is fence fiber optic. Fiber optic sensors use light (a Light Emitting Diode (LED) as the light source) rather than electricity for transmission and detection. The fiber optic is used as a line sensor and uses an LED as the light source that travels through the fiber optic network and is picked up by a detector. The detector is very sensitive to changes in the light transmission and

134


FIGURE 6-14 Fence vibration system.

will send an alarm if there any even if slight changes occur. The fiber optic sensors are very sensitive and analysis must be done to determine their suitability for a wall, roof, or fence. There are two types of fiber optic sensors. • Fiber optic continuity is where the fiber strand needs to be broken to initiate an intrusion alarm. • Fiber optic microbending is the detection of alterations in the light pattern caused by movement of the fiber optic cable.


135

FIGURE 6-15 Fence optic sensor.

Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in-wall fiber optic sensors are. Improper calibration or installation will cause problems. Not to be used on walls of lesser structural integrity such as sheet rock, plywood, or thin metal because they are susceptible to vibrations and will cause nuisance false alarms. Fiber optics should not be on walls near any machinery that causes vibrations as well as walls that are subjected to exterior airplane, train and heavy truck vibrations. The fiber optic wall sensor can be defeated by bypassing it altogether and making entry away from the area protected by the sensors. Figure 616 shows a wall fiber optic sensor. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in the fence fiber optic sensors are. Radio frequencies, electro-magnetic Interference, extreme changes in temperatures, and blowing debris can cause problems for the fence fiber optics. Poor fence quality is the most common cause of nuisance alarms because the fence will have too much movement. To compensate for the

136


FIGURE 6-16 Wall fiber optic sensor.

poor fence quality the calibration of the sensors is set lower than proffered. When properly installed on a stable fence the wire will be taut. Extreme weather that causes damage to the fiber optic cable will cause nuisance alarms. The fence fiber optic sensor can be defeated by tunneling under the fence and not contacting the fence during entry.

ELECTRIC FIELD Electric field sensors produce an electrostatic field between an array of wire conductors and electric ground. The sensors are designed to detect distortions or changes in the electric field. The distortions or changes are probably caused by anyone approaching the fence. The components of the electric field sensor is an alternating current generator to excite a field wire which consists of two or more sensing wires creating an


137

electrostatic field and an amplifies to detect changes in the signal amplitude of the sensing wires. The changes in amplitude are caused when an intruder enters the field because large amounts of the electric charge flow the intruder disrupting the field and initiating an alarm. Electric field wires are mounted on free standing posts or chain link fences. The wires are all mounted parallel to each other and to the ground which helps ensure uniform sensitivity along the entire fence length. Since the electric field sensor has a self adjusting circuit located in the processor false alarms from wind and ambient noise are not an issue as they are with other fence sensors. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in the electric field fence sensors are. The nuisance alarm rate for the electric field sensor is extremely low. Weather conditions such as rain, snow, and lightening can create problems for the sensor. Animals and vegetation along the fence line can cause false alarms. During installation large spaces between the wires should be avoided since they may make possible to move between the wires without detection. The electric field fence sensor can be defeated by deep tunneling under or bridging over the protected fence. Figure 6-17 shows the electric field sensor configuration patterns. Figure 6-18 shows a three-wire and a four-wire sensor.

CAPACITANCE The purpose of capacitance sensors is to detect a change in an electrostatic field. The electrostatic field is produced by an array of wires usually three wires spaced close together. A low-voltage signal is used to create an electrical field in the fence and serves as the ground. The differential capacitance between the sensor wires and the ground is continually measured. Any change in the signal that is detected is sent to the process filter to determine if it is in the accepted range if the signal is not it will initiate an alarm. The strands of wire used are 16-gauge and consists of three strands spaced closely together. The capacitance sensors are mounted the existing fence fabric. Capacitance sensors can also be used around other objects like safes, file cabinets, etc. inside a building. Figure 6-19 shows the capacitance sensor used around a file cabinet and a safe. The capacitance senor is not affected by weather or EMI/RFI interference. The system does require high degree of maintenance to keep the capacitance at the optimal settings. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in the capacitance fence sensors are. • Vibration caused by weather (winds), animals and vegetation coming into contact with the fence will cause nuisance false alarms. Birds landing the fence will also cause nuisance alarms as will blowing debris that hits the fence. • The sensors can be defeated by bridging or tunneling under the fence.

138


FIGURE 6-17 Electric field sensor configuration patterns.

FIGURE 6-18 Three-wire and a four-wire sensor.


139

FIGURE 6-19 Capacitance sensor used around a file cabinet and a safe.

TAUT WIRE Taut wire sensors are micro-switches used to detect changes in tension on the fence fabric rather vibration. The taut wire is installed to the barbed wire on the top of the chain link fence. The micro-switch consists of a movable center rod that is suspended inside a cylindrical conductor. The open position of the switch is when the center rod is in the middle of the cylinder and does not touch the outer cylinder. The switches are installed about 6 inches apart in a vertical line on the inside of the tamper proof case and mounted on a fence post near the middle of the sensor zone. When the taut wire sensors are used on the outriggers of the barbed wire t the top of the fence they re designed to detect climbing. Sensors at the top of the fence on the outriggers have no detection capability for fence cutting at the lower part of the fence. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in the taut wire fence sensors are. The taut wire sensor system is one of the most reliable fence sensor systems since it less likely to create nuisance alarms due to weather or small animals. Improper or no maintenance will cause sensor sensitivity issues especially if the tension on the wire is loose. Large animals that brush up against the fence

140


will cause false alarms especially those animals that graze like cattle. As with all of the other fence sensors they can be defeated by bridging and tunneling to avoid detection. Figure 6-20 shows a dual technology microwave and taut wire system.

PHOTO ELECTRIC BEAM Photo electric beam sensors transmit a beam of infrared light to a remote receiver. The process of projecting the beam to a remote receiver sets up an “electronic fence”. There are two components in the beam a transmitter and a receiver. An LED is used as the light source to transmit a consistent beam of light to the receiver. The receiver is a photo electric cell that detects the whether the beam is present. The photo cell must receive at least 90 percent of the beam. If the beam is disrupted for 75 milliseconds, an alarm is initiated. The 75 milliseconds is the time it takes for an intruder to cross the beam. The photo electric beam can be used to protect, doorways, long wall surfaces, and hallways. The beam can be projected for up to a receiver 1,000 feet away. The beam beam's path can be altered by mirrors so a less predictable path can be created but it will reduce the signal strength and lessens the distance the beam can be projected. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in the photo electric beam sensors are. The false alarm rate is high with the photo electric beam sensor. Weather conditions such as fog, mist, or dust will cause the beam to be refracted or scattered and will initiate an alarm if there is a 10% reduction in the light signal. Birds, animals blowing leaves or paper can cause nui-

FIGURE 6-20 Dual technology microwave and taut wire system.


141

sance alarms because the signal will be interrupted. If the transmitted is out of line with the receiver it will cause nuisance alarms. To defeat the beam an intruder can step over or go under the beam signal path. Mirrors can be used to mitigate the risk of stepping over or going intruder the beam by causing a zig-zag affect to the beam’s pattern.

VIDEO MOTION DETECTION Video motion sensors use Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) with low light capabilities and infrared to detect and provide a visual of an intrusion. CCTV systems also record for documentation purposes the event using digital or VHS recorders. The video motion sensors detect changes in the monitored area by comparing the current scene to the pre-recorded stable scene. The motion sensors monitor the video signal being transmitted from the camera. A signal change will indicates that there is some movement in the field of “view” of the camera and an alarm is initiated. More about CCTV will be presented in another chapter. Some conditions that cause unreliable detection and nuisance alarms in the video motion sensors are. Poor lighting will produce unreliable detection. If the lighting is not adequate a low light camera and infrared detection is recommended. It is better to attempt to increase the lighting as much as possible. The infrared detector does not use light to detect an intruder it uses the heat from the intruder so low or poor lighting is not a problem for the infrared sensor. Remember camera placement in critical when installing the CCTV cameras. The field of view can be adversely affected by direct sunlight such as sun rise of sun set that looks directly into the camera iris. Clouds and wind-blown debris all cause false alarms. Manmade light sources such as vehicle headlights, changes in parking lot parking patterns or security light patterns will also cause false alarms. Insects flying close top the lens will initiate an alarm. An intruder can defeat the system if they are aware of it and know the layout and may be able to avoid detection by moving around “blind” spots.



143

APPENDIX INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS Below is a sample design specification for an intrusion detection system.

SECTION 17000 - Intrusion Detection System PART 1 - General 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. All drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2

PROJECT SCOPE

A. The system being developed under this design is an electronic intrusion detection, egress control system that incorporatesthetechnologies shown below. For the purpose of clarification,the following parties will be referenced in this document in the following manner: 1. The ABCD Corporation The Client 5667 Gibraltar Drive Livermore, CA. 94588 925-224-7955 Tel 925-224-7964 Fax www.abcd.com 2. The XYZ Consultants Inc. The Consultants 4847 S. Orange Blossom Trail Orlando, Florida, 32835 407-851-8734 Tel 407-851-1215 Fax www.xyzconsult.com 3. The ABCD Corporation The Facility(s) Livermore, California Toronto, Canada Paris, France Amsterdam, Holland London, England B. In all new facilities, the system is being installed for the purpose of detecting

144


an intruder entering the Client's facility. The systems within the United States are being retro-fitted however the contractor must still comply with this specification and the bidder instructions. It is a requirement of the system that all technologies be integrated into one system to allow for instantaneous alert and response to any alarm condition that may be activated in the secured area. The system will be integrated through the access control system installed in the facility if applicable. C. It is also a requirement of the system to monitor all building management services as they relate to the facility. The operations manager shall have the ability to both monitor and control building management equipment through the access control system or building management system, the only exception is the fire alarm, smoke detection systems will still have their own annunciation panels to meet the requirements of the fire codes. D. This Section calls for the contractor of choice to provide all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for the completion of the integrated intrusion detection system and as indicated on the drawings and as described herein. The internal “NET” shall be supplied by the Owner however it is the responsibility of the contractor to verify that communication pathways are open and compatible with all components within the global system. The Owner reserves the right to supply other components if they are needed for this project. The system technologies called for within this Scope of Work are: 1. Intrusion Detection Devices 2. Duress Reporting Devices E. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, software, and programming required to provide the Client with an integrated security system that is compatible with existing components in other offices operated by the Client. F. Contractor shall ensure the system meets the operational and functional needs of the Client as specified herein, and as indicated on the drawings. The drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein, or on the plans, that are required to meet the functional and operational intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Client. G. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with other trades and contractors to provide a system that is totally integrated and operational as required for this project. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing with their Submittal, a one year spare parts list with single component (itemized) and quantity pricing. Should any particular component be in redesign stage that would possibly cause


145

it to be a non-production item within the 1 year period, this component shall be identified as such and the substitute or new component be identified on this spare parts list. 1.3

RELATED SECTIONS

A. The contractor shall review the following sections of the total project to ensure compliance with: 1. Division 2—Site Work 2. Division 7—Alarm detection Devices 3. Division 8—Door Contacts for other than access controlled doors 4. Division 16—Electrical All specification divisions are identified by The Construction Specification Institute Master Format. 1.4

SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit bid data containing original catalog cut sheets that provide complete technical data as required by the Owner to allow evaluation of the material and equipment proposed. The information should include component dimensions, wiring and block diagrams, wire/cable sizes, conduit sizes, performance data, ratings, operational characteristics, control sequences, and other descriptive data to describe the items proposed. B. The Contractor's submittal shall include a complete list of equipment, materials, and installation instructions. All prices shall be itemized in single component prices as well as quantity pricing with any discounts so indicated. Alternative proposals are acceptable under this specification and shall comply with all standard requirements for the bid package submittal. C. The Contractor receiving the award shall submit within two weeks (14 days) of the award date a complete set of shop drawings. These drawings shall contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been properly coordinated and installed to function as described within the specifications. D. The Contractor shall upon the completion of the project, provide to the Client or their designated representative, a complete and accurate set of As-Built drawings. The submittal shall be in AutoCAD V2000 and supplied on a disk along with five copies of system(s) manuals and drawings. The submittal shall be completed and delivered to the Client and/or their designated representative at least two weeks prior to final acceptance testing. Punch item corrections will require a re-submittal if the list is substantial.

146


1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The Contractor shall only represent a Company that specializes in the business of having provided Electronic Integrated Security Systems for a period of at least five (5) years. The supporting documentation supplied by the Contractor shall demonstrate the Manufacturer’s as well as the Contractor's experience by including: 1. Installations for at least five (5) facilities of equal size and comparable technical requirements utilizing the equipment submitted. 2. For each facility, the information should include: a. Name and address of facility; b. Date of the Installation and System Acceptance; c. A point of contact for either the Owner or the Owner’s designated representative; d. The name of the project or construction manager, if applicable; and e. The name of the Architect of Record, if applicable. 3. A description of the technical aspects of the system describing how the system functions in comparison to the System described within this specification. B. References and Regulatory Requirements. 1. All workmanship and materials supplied under this Section shall comply with the requirements of the following agencies and authorities: a. International Electrical Engineers (IEE) b. European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CE ELEC) c. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) US Standard e. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) US Standard f. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) (1999) US Standard g. National Burglar and Fire Alarm Association (NBFAA)—Standards of Application - US Standard h. Closed Circuit Television Manufacturers Association (CCTMA)— U.S. Standard i. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - European Equivalent 1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF THE DESIGN A. THE SYSTEM—The design for this system consists of several components. The intent is to allow full monitoring of all security and security related activities, including building management services (HVAC, Fire, Power, etc.) at the


147

systems management console (SMC). The monitored functions shall consist of but not be limited to: 1. All access control devices for access and egress to and from the facility; 2. Intrusion detection equipment as it relates to fire doors, duress buttons, and other similar devices; 3. Delayed Egress Locking Devices; 4. Closed circuit surveillance cameras with a processor integrated into the overall system to provide reactive design functions and a digital recording device; and 6. Any additional components required for a complete installation but not identified within this specification. B. THE INSTALLATION—The Contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing the electronic system required for this design. All work will be inspected during the installation process and final acceptance testing will be conducted prior to the system being accepted by the Client. The contractor shall advise the Client at each point of substantial completion to allow periodic inspections. Final acceptance testing shall be conducted when contractor advises the system is ready. Punch list corrections shall be completed within two weeks after list development. The testing process is on all items prior to acceptance of the system by the Client. The Client reserves the right to require complete system testing a second time if the punch list is of considerable size. 1. CENTRALIZED MONITORING—This design of this system is such that monitoring will be required in two locations. The primary monitoring of CCTV and all alarms will be at the systems monitoring console (SMC) located in the main console room. A second monitoring station at the Security Command Center (SCC) may be required for each site. This workstation will be monitored by security officers and shall mirror the information being sent to the SMC. This station will be a workstation with all security and security related functions reporting to this location as well as the SCM. The system shall archive all access control, intrusion detection alarms, BMS functions, and CCTV video storage information at the main system server located in Livermore, California. The information shall be sent via the owner provided “NET” on a pre-programmed basis established by the Client and programmed by the Contractor. 2. The system shall provide for automatic display of alarm point locations at the SMC and SCC. The components of the integrated system shall include but not be limited to: a. Forty five (45) balanced magnetic switches for door contacts for nonaccess controlled doors;

148


b. Forty (40) Dual technology glass breaks; c. Thirty six (36) dual technology volumetric protection devices with adjustable lens units; d. Power supply with battery backup; e. Field panels as required to monitor all points identified within this specification and on the drawings; f. Building management systems (BMS) monitoring and control capability for up to 100 points; g. Duress reporting devices (6) to be located at a later date; h. Training, manuals, service, and maintenance as specified; and, i. Any additional components required, but not specifically mentioned within this or other sections. C. INTRUSION DETECTION—The Contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing, door position switches as indicated on the drawings accompanying this specification. Each door position switch shall be interfaced into the system in order that either intrusion or egress alarms through secured doors are reported to both the SMC and SCC. The IDS also shall interface with the camera controller unit to activate the camera system for the purposes of alerting the personnel in the monitoring areas and also to activate the recording functions of the system. This system shall be integrated through the Contractor provided cabling for the purpose of activating the video and security response techniques required for both interior as well as limited exterior areas. The system shall consist of the following components: 1. Door Position Switches; and 2. Any additional components required, but not specifically mentioned within this or other sections. D. DURESS REPORTING—The contractor shall provide, install, terminate, program, and submit for final acceptance testing, duress buttons at the locations indicated on the drawings accompanying this specification. The duress system shall, when activated, report to the SMC as well as the SCC. Additionally, the cameras selected by the Client and programmed by the Contractor shall be activated for the purpose of viewing the controlled area and recording all events that take place during the alarm. The components required for this portion of the system shall consist of: 1. Duress buttons—desk mounted 2. Any additional components required, but not specifically mentioned within this or other sections.


1.7

149

WARRANTY

A. Warrant material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of system final acceptance. B. Warranty shall include the repair, replacement, and upgrade of defective security components and/or materials including the correction of defective work when given notice by the Client during the warranty period. C. Warranty response time shall be within 8 hours upon receipt of request from Client or their designated representative during normal working hours. Weekend response shall be extended to a period not to exceed 12 hours. 1.8

RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. The Contractor shall provide project record drawings identifying the system architecture and rack/component distribution. B. The “document package” shall include three sets of system manuals for the overall system concept as well as individual components within the system. Manuals shall consist of: 1. Operations manual—provide all information for operation of the system, including but not limited to, trouble shooting information, as well as software operational information; 2. Installation manual—provide drawings describing all circuits, power distribution, equipment placement, and cable routing, in an As-Built drawings (C size) format. This manual shall also include reference to any conduit routing; 3. Maintenance/Service Manual—Provide all trouble shooting information, data that is applicable to on-site software manipulation, programming information, and service/maintenance records. C. The “drawing package” shall include three (3) sets of As-built drawings. These drawings shall be supplied to the Client or the Client's designated representative for final acceptance testing, punch list development, and system acceptance. The drawings shall be corrected as required for final system acceptance. The As-Built drawings shall not be considered complete until accepted by the Client. 1.9

OPERATION TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Included with the shop drawing submittal should be a syllabus outlining the training program that will be provided to the Client or their designated representative with reference to the operation of this system. This syllabus should include

150


a minimum of 16 hours training with demonstrations of the features and functions of the primary system and integrated subsystems. B. The training classes should be conducted with competent supervisors or factory trained technicians and shall be conducted on site. The Client shall designate which individuals from their organization shall receive the training. 1.10

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA MANUAL

A. Assemble a set of three (3) manuals in hard bound covers, presenting for the Client's guidance, full details for care and maintenance of visible surfaces, and of equipment included in the work. B. Include manufacturer's literature relating to components and other equipment, catalog cut sheets, parts list, wiring diagrams, instruction sheets, and other pertinent information which will be useful to the Client in overall system operation and maintenance. C. Include a list of installers and service representatives with company names and addresses, names of individuals to contact, and telephone numbers. D. Prepare operating instructions, complete and explicit, including, but not limited to, instructions for start-up, operating, and stopping. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. The contractor shall test and service system on a quarterly basis during the warranty period. Each quarterly inspection shall “cover” up to 30% of the installed components. B. After each quarterly maintenance inspection the Contractor shall provide written notification to the Client of the system's condition before and after service, exact components that were tested and serviced, and overall status of the system. All notices shall be sent to Mr. Mike Arata, ABCD Corporation, 5667 Gibraltar Drive, Livermore, California, 94588.

PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1

INTEGRATED ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM (IESS):

A. Refer to Intrusion detection system section for selected equipment and operational requirements. 2.1.2

Intrusion Detection Systems:

A. Required Performance Features


151

The contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing an intrusion detection system consisting of the following equipment: 1. Door contacts 2. Power Supplies 3. Other components not identified within this specification but required to provide a complete installation. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h.

The door contact switches shall be provided with the following features. Manufactured for use on steel without insulating brackets; Concealed terminal screws; Easy claiming terminals for expedited installation; Mounting screws; Biased for high security applications; Capable of providing detection over a 3/8" to 1 ¼" gap; and Color—natural.

The door balanced magnetic switch supplied for this project shall be the Sentrol 1047 series with the 1933 magnet, biased for high security applications, or equivalent. 2.1.3

Duress Reporting System:

A. Required Performance Features: 1. The contractor shall supply, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing, a duress reporting system that will be monitored at the SMC and SCC. The equipment required for this design shall be Sentrol 3040 Surface Mounted Panic Switch or equivalent and shall have the following performance features: a. The unit shall be UL listed for duress reporting; b. The unit shall be single pole/double throw; c. The unit shall be capable of mounting under or on the side of desks, counters, or any other area thereby making it hard to detect by outsiders; d. The unit shall be supplied in a housing that is smooth to prevent accidental damage to clothing; e. an actuating lever designed to accommodate only the tip of a finger for activation, shall be a feature of the unit; f. each unit shall have reed contacts that reset when the lever is in a closed position; g. a latching LED shall “lock-in” when the unit is activated and be powered by 12 VDC; h. the unit shall have single pole/double throw output for electrical

152


compatibility; and i. the unit shall be supplied in white. 2.1.4 FIRE STANDARDS COMPLIANCE The contractor shall ensure that all equipment supplied for this project is in compliance with the United States Standard NFPA 101 including delayed egress locking devices, door hardware, emergency lighting, signal transmissions, and signage.

PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION

A. Examine all surfaces, anchors, and “grounds” that are to receive materials, fixtures, assemblies, components, and equipment. Immediately report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to project manager. 3.2

CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean all units internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer prior to final acceptance testing. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Client and/or the designated representatives of the Client, the features and functions of the system and subsystems as well as instruct and train the designated personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the system. B. The contractor shall provide, on high quality VHS formatted videotape, documentation of the training sessions and maintenance procedures. Each video shall be clearly identified for Client's future reference. 3.4

INSTALLATION

A. The contractor is required to install all equipment and/or devices in accordance with recommendations and/or instructions supplied by the Manufacturer. Where systems integration is required, the system shall work “as one” to provide the client an operational system as per specifications.


3.5

153

ELECTRICAL

A. Power will be available at the site. The contractor is responsible for wiring from the source of power to the individual components. The contractor shall be responsible for providing to the Client, a complete set of shop drawings indicating the wiring and power requirements of their individual system and conduct a review of the electrical drawings as they pertain to Section 17. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide additions, corrections, or modifications to the electrical design as they relate to the installation of the security equipment called for under this specification.

154


INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A.

DEFINITIONS

1. Bid Documents Bid documents include the bid advertisement/invitation, instructions to bidders, sample documents, the bid form, contract documents and any addenda issued prior to the bid opening date.

2. Addenda Any narrative or graphic material issued by either the Client, or the Clients designated representative which would modify or change the bid documents by the addition, deletion, correction, or clarification of individual items contained in the bid documents, instructions, or specifications.

3. Bid All qualified bidders shall submit a complete and properly executed bid statement to the Client or their designated representative. Proposals will include an offer to supply, install, terminate, and check out a complete and operational system as specified. All work will be performed in accordance with any specifications, drawings, and data included in the bid documents. The bid statement has to be signed by a person in position of authority for the bidder. Lump sum pricing is acceptable for the bid statement, however, itemized pricing must be supplied in the bid package as support materials.

4. Base Bid A properly executed statement outlining the cost for hardware, work and services which the bidder proposes to perform, and which may be adjusted accordingly, at the option of the Client, by an alternate bids included with the base bid package.

5. Alternates Additional amounts that could be added (Add-Alternates) or deducted (Deduct Alternates) from the base bid for components, installation techniques, systems, or interfaces pertaining to the system design, which the Client does not wish included in the primary system. All prices submitted for alternates must be signed as required for the base bid, and will be subject to the same terms and conditions as the base bid.


155

6. Unit Pricing All bids must be itemized showing unit prices for materials and labor in order for the bid submittal to be considered complete.

7. Definition of the term qualified bidder A prime business entity that was invited to bid on this project, and submitted a bid for work described in the documents and specifications of this bid package.

8. Definition of the term qualified sub-contractor A corporate entity submitting pricing information for equipment and services related to a portion of this project. The pricing is submitted to the bidder for inclusion in the total package.

9. Definition of the term prime contractor The corporate entity proposing to be totally responsible for the services called for in the bid package submitted to the Client. The party accepts total responsibility for all sub-contractor performance related to the provision of equipment, installation, service, warranty, and any other conditions or requirements related to this project.

B.

BIDDER REPRESENTATION 1. Each bidder, by the action of submitting a bid package, is classified as a prime contractor and represents that: a. Contract documents, specifications, and supporting documents have been read and are fully understood by the bidder and all sub-bidders involved with the bid package. b. The bidder is fully responsible for the procurement, coordination, installation, and start-up of a complete and operational system and its related components, including all necessary accessories and peripheral equipment, whether or not specifically indicated by the contract documents. c. The bidder will make every effort to ensure that the various components of the project are purchased and installed in a coordinated, efficient manner. d. As limited by information contained in this proposal, the bidder fully understands the conditions under which the work is to be performed. Full disclosure of information will be made to bidders invited to enter into final negotiations. The bidder's final offering represents a full understanding of all issues, including but not restricted to: 1. Transportation

156


2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Disposal Handling and storage of materials or equipment Availability of labor, water, power and roads The uncertainties of the weather in this region Coordination of construction efforts Conditions of the surface and subsurface around the project Shipping restrictions of certain suppliers and equipment manufacturers.

2. Submission of a proposal warrants that the bidder fully understands and agrees to coordinate with all other contractors (trades) on the project, and that this effort will include, but not be limited to: a. Scheduling of construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results when part of the work is depending upon the installation of other components. b. Coordinate installation of different components, where availability of space is limited, to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. c. Make adequate provisions to accommodate any items, components, or systems, scheduled for later installation. d. Where and when necessary, prepare memorandum for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required for coordination. This memorandum may include but not be limited to items such as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 3. The bidder guarantees coordination of schedules and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts, and ensure orderly progress of the work. Such administrative activities should include but not be limited to: a. b. c. d. e.

C.

Schedule preparations Installation and removal of temporary facilities Delivery and processing of submittals Progress (construction) meetings Project close out activities

DOCUMENTS 1. Bid documents may be obtained in accordance with the provisions of this specification. 2. All bidders are responsible for preparing and submitting a complete set of bid documents.


157

3. The Client, in duplicating the bid documents and making available the same, does so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and does not confer a license for, or grant any other use of the documents by any party either involved in the bid process, acting as a sub-bidder, or only having come into contact with the documents, unless so authorized by the Client. 4. All bidders and sub-bidders must immediately advise the Client, or the Clients designated representative, of any inconsistency or error discovered while examining the bid documents or of the site and local conditions. 5. All requests for clarification or interpretation will be submitted in accordance with the procedures outlined in the bid advertisement. 6. All interpretations, changes, additions, or deletions to the documents of this project will be made by addendum issued by the Client, and/or the Clients designated representative. 7. Substitution requests for system equipment, components, or installation procedures must be submitted with the bid package and documented. 8. All addenda to this project will be mailed, FAXED, or delivered via overnight services to all parties known to the Client as having received a copy of the bid documents for this project.

D.

BIDDING PROCESS The following instructions apply to the bid process: 1. Bid Submittal Format a. b. c. d. e.

All bids will be typed and submitted complete. Telephone or oral bids not acceptable. Blank pages, sections or other spaces must be marked accordingly. All pricing submitted for the bid must be itemized. Each copy of the bid will include the legal name of the bidder and a statement indicating whether the bidder is the sole proprietor, a partnership, corporation, or other legal entity. Each copy will be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to the contract. All bids by corporations will further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agents authority to sign the bid documents, and subsequently bind the bidder to the project.

2. Submission Procedures a. Each submission will be typed and will include copies of the bid, the bid

158


security, and other documents as required, in a sealed envelope addressed in accordance with the bidder instructions. The envelope will be identified with the following information: a. Clients representatives address as specified in the bid instructions. b. The title of the project. c. The Bidders name and address. d. The Bidders license number if applicable. e. All bids must be delivered by the time and date, and in accordance with the manner specified in the bidder instructions. f. The bidder is fully responsible for timely delivery of the bids. Bids received after the time and date designated within the bidder instructions will be rejected. 3. Separate Contracts The Client reserves the right to enter into separate contracts for this work. The bidder will properly coordinate to the best of their ability with all other contractors to schedule and connect the work required under the scope of this project. 4. Bid Modification or Withdrawal a. The bid may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled after the stipulated closing time for bid submittal. b. Bids withdrawn before the stipulated closing time may be resubmitted prior to the designated closing time and will be considered if they are fully in compliance with submittal requirements, and the security is in an amount sufficient to meet the requirements of the bid security section.

E.

CONSIDERATION OF BIDS a. Rejection The Client reserves the right to reject any and all bids when such action is in the Client’s best interest. b. Unacceptable Bids All bids based on the following will be unacceptable for this project: 1. Any bid not based on the specifications included in this design and bid package. 2. Bids not signed by any person(s) having legal authority to bind the bidder to the submitted bid package. 3. Bids containing quotations qualified by memoranda. 4. Alternates, substitutions, additions, or deletions, submitted by the Bidder, and which are found by the Client, or the Client’s designated representa-


159

tive, not to be in compliance with the intended design of this specification. c. Acceptance of Bids 1. The Client reserves the right to waive any informality or irregularity in the bid when such action is found to be in the Clients best interest. 2. It is the intent of the Client to award the contract to the bidder showing the best combination of factors including; compliance with the bid format and submission requirements, compliance with technical specifications, bidders stability, strength and reputation, and that the bid is found to be reasonable in cost and schedule. Bids will not necessarily be awarded on the basis of any one factor, such as cost. 3. The Client reserves the right to request a best and final proposal from any or all bidders should it be deemed necessary. d. Unit Pricing 1. Unit prices (for individual hardware or software applications) will be considered in the process of awarding this contract. 2. Quantities specified in this design are approximate. Should additional hardware be required, prices will be modified at the same rate as the itemized price originally quoted.

F.

AGREEMENT/SUBMITTAL FORMS A. Introduction The following forms will be required, as described by the specification: a. b. c. d. 4.

Bond Forms—Proof of Bond Capability with submittal Insurance Forms—Proof of coverage with submittal Surety Consent Forms—None required with initial submittal Licensing Certificate of Compliance—Required with submittal Bid Summary Form—Required with submittal

B. Bond Forms Required from selected vendor prior to final award of contract: a. Performance Bond A performance bond shall be supplied for the full value of the work to be performed as called for within the specifications and drawings. b. Payment Bond A payment bond shall be supplied for the full value of all work to be performed by sub-contractors and suppliers or for other financial obligations required under this project.

160


C. Insurance Forms a. Certificates of Insurance Certificates of Insurance will be in the amount of $1,000,000 liability for each occurrence, combined liability, each occurrence and property damage, listing the ABCD Corporation as an additional insured. D. Surety Consent Statements a. Consent of Surety Company to elimination of further retainer at 50% contract completion. b. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment. E. Licensing Certificate of Compliance Before work is performed at the site, file or record the construction contract with proper governmental or regulatory officials if such filing is required. Submit a statement of compliance signed by the issuing agency stating that filing has been accomplished.

G.

UNIT PRICES A. Introduction This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for unit pricing. All pricing must be quoted in US Dollars. However, the Client reserves the right to pay the amounts due in local currency. Unit prices are amounts proposed by bidders and should be indicated as the price per unit of materials or services. Unit prices are also required for change orders that will be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum, in the event the estimated quantities of work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. Unit prices include necessary material, overhead, profit, and applicable taxes. Any costs or taxes unique to work in the European Economic Community must be included. B. Schedule The unit price schedule should include all items comprising the specified systems. The Client reserves the right to reject the Contractors measurement of workin-place that involves the use of established unit prices, and to have this work measured by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor at the Clients expenses.


H.

161

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Schedule of Values a. All payments, invoices, etc. will be routed through the Consultant for approval and review. The Contractor will develop a Schedule of Values that indicates the cost of each phase of construction listed in the Contractors Construction Schedule. The Schedule of Values will account for (but not be limited to accounting) for the following: 1. Contractors Construction Schedule 2. Application for payment 3. List of sub-contractors 4. Schedule of allowances 5. Schedule of alternates 6. List of products 7. List of principal suppliers and fabricators 8. Schedule of submittals Submit the Schedule of Values to the Consultant at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than 10 working days before submittal of the initial Application for Payment. b. Identity the Schedule of Values by: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Project name and location Name of the Client Name of Consultant Contractors name and address Date of submittal

c. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns for: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Line item (phase, equipment, work to complete, etc.) Related specification section Name of sub-contractor Name of manufacturer or fabricator Name of supplier Change orders (numbers) that have affected value Dollar value Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

d. Provide to the Consultant a breakdown of the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation or applications for payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items.

162


e. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar. The total shall equal the Contract Sum. f. For each part of the work where an application for payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide the Consultant separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the work. Payment for materials stored off site shall be subject to the Clients approval. g. Where appropriate, show line item value as a product of unit cost times quantity as estimated in the Contract Documents. h. Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to the extent that such items will be listed individually in applications for payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and applications for payment will be complete including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. At the Contractors option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost may be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense. B. Schedule Updating Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values to the Consultant when change orders or construction change directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. C. Applications for Payment Each application for payment shall be submitted through the Consultant and will include information and be in an approved format. All applications for payment will be consistent with previous applications and payments as reviewed by the Consultant. The initial application for payment, the application for payment at time of Final Acceptance, and the final application for payment involve additional requirements. a. Payment Application Schedule Each progress payment date is as indicated in the agreement. The period of construction work covered by each application for payment is the period indicated in the agreement.


163

b. Payment Application Forms Use Client supplied formats for application for payment. c. Application Preparation Applications must include notarization and execution by the person authorized to sign legal documents. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. 1. Entries will match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractors Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 2. Include amounts of change orders and construction change directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. D. Transmittal Submit three executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Consultant by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours of posting. One copy will be complete, including, but not limited to, waivers of lien and similar attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Client. E. Waiver of Mechanics Lien a. Subcontractors With each application for payment submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors, or sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retention, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. The Client reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the work must submit waivers. b. Contractors Submit each application for payment with the Contractors waiver of mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application.

164


c. Final Application for Payment Submit final application for payment with or proceeded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of work covered by the application who could lawfully be entitled to a lien. d. Waivers of Lien Submit waivers of liens, and execute in a manner acceptable to the Client. F. Initial Application for Payment Submittals Submittals required prior to the first application for payment include, but are not limited to: a. List of subcontractors b. List of principal suppliers and fabricators c. Schedule of Values d. Contractors Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final) e. Schedule of principal products f. Schedule of unit prices g. Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final) h. List of Contractors staff assignments i. List of Contractors principal consultants j. Copies of building permits k. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the work l. Initial progress report m.Report of pre-installation meeting n. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies o. Performance and Payment Bonds (if required) p. Data needed to acquire the Clients insurance q. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required G. Application for Payment at Final Acceptance Following issuance of the Certificate of Final Acceptance, submit to the Consultant an application for Payment. This application will reflect any Certificates of Partial Final Acceptance issued previously for Client occupancy of designated portions of the work. Actions and submittals required prior to this application include, but are not limited to: a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties, guarantees and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjustment/balance records.


d. e. f. g. h. I. j. k. l.

165

Maintenance instructions. Meter readings. Start-up performance reports. Change-over information related to Clients occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. Final cleaning. Application for reduction of retention, and consent of surety. Advice on shifting insurance coverage. Final progress photographs. List of incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to the Consultants certificate of Final Acceptance.

H. Final Payment Application Actions and submittals required prior to submittal of the final Application for Payment include, but are not limited to: a. Completion of project closeout requirements. b. Completion of items specified for completion after Final acceptance. c. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. d. All work shall be complete and accepted by the Consultant. e. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Consultant. f. Certified property survey. g. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations have been paid. h. Removal of temporary facilities and services. I. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. j. Change of door locks to the Clients access.

I.

MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Minor Changes in the Work Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the work, not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued as needed by the Client or their designated representative. Changes in the scope of work for this project may affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Said changes will be negotiated by the Client and/or their designated representative. Said work should not progress until the receipt of the properly authorized by either the client and/or their designated representative. B. Change Order Proposal Requests a. Client-Initiated Proposed Requests Proposed changes in the work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Consultant, with a detailed description of

166


the proposed changes and supplemental, or revised drawings and specifications, if necessary. 1. Proposal requests are for information only. Do not consider them to be directives to either stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change. 2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 20 days of receipt of the proposal request, submit to the Consultant an estimate of cost necessary to execute the proposed change. 3. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, finish survey data to substantiate quantities. 4. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amount of trade discounts. 5. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the work will have on the Contract Time. b.

Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests

When unforseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to the Consultant. 1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements for substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. C. Allowances Change Order Cost Adjustment Base Change Order cost adjustments solely on the difference between the original proposed work and actual cost of work under the Change Order. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or the Contractors handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit, within 20 days of receipt of the change order or construction change directive authorizing work to proceed. Claims submitted later than 20 days may be rejected.


167

Change order costs will not include Contractors or subcontractors indirect expenses. D. Construction Change Directive When the Consultant and the Contractor are not in total agreement on the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Consultant may issue a Construction Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work for subsequent inclusion in a change order. The Construction Change directive will contain a complete description of the change in the work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor will maintain detailed records, on a time and materials basis, of work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

J.

PROJECT COORDINATION A. Errors, Omissions and Inconsistencies The Contractor is responsible for thorough study of contract documents furnished by the Consultant on the Clients behalf. The Contractor must report at once, in writing, all errors, inconsistencies, or omissions. The Contractor is liable for any damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency, or omission, and knowingly failed to report it to the Consultant or Client. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract documents without the specified notice to the Consultant, the Contractor will assume the risk for such performance, and will bear the attributable costs. Neither the Consultant nor the Client offers, or implies, any warranty regarding the availability of equipment, materials, supplies, labor or any other aspect of project completion. The Consultant and Client do not imply superior knowledge in those areas where the Contractor should have technical capabilities exceeding those of the Client and the Clients representatives. B. Drawings and Dimensions Dimensions marked on drawings will generally apply. Large scale drawings in general govern over small scale drawings. When measurements are affected by actual conditions, take actual measurements correcting dimensions in the drawings. Do not scale the drawings.

168


C. Interface and Project Coordination a. Conduit and Wire Runs The Contractor is responsible for supplying and installing the wire required for this project. The conduit will be provided and installed by others. The Contractor shall complete termination utilizing the recommended wire. Final decisions, as to right-of-way and conduit “runs,” will be made by the Client and/or their designated representative. Review the relationship of work to that of other work before installation. In particular, review the following: Rough-ins and connection prints will be furnished for equipment not shown in the contract by those providing the equipment. Where applicable, the Contractor recommended conduit will be above ceiling and in wall cavities unless otherwise indicated. b. Coordination with Other Trades Close cooperation between the trades is required. Work installed without regard for other work may be removed, if necessary as determined by the Consultant; at the installing Contractors expense. Each trade shall cooperate with and assist other trades on the project in conformance with trade jurisdictional rulings, and each trade shall perform the work that is within its jurisdiction. Examine the Contract Documents to determine the material and equipment that will be provided by other Contractors. Cooperate to provide continuity and progress of the work. Furnish to other Contractors, information required for the execution of the work. Furnish other Contractors advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves, and openings needed for the work, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected to install their work properly and without delay. Where there is evidence that work of one contractor will interfere with the work of another contractor, all contractors are required to assist in working out conditions to make satisfactory adjustments, and will be prepared to submit and revise coordinated shop drawings. c. Drawing Coordination Locations indicated on the bid package drawings or described in the specifications are approximated. The Contractor shall provide the exact dimensions nec-


169

essary to secure the best conditions and indicate same on the shop drawings which will be reviewed by the Consultant. The Contractor shall determine exact location requirements by dimensions of their equipment and submit same for review by the Consultant for any revised layout before the equipment is installed. The Contractor shall review the drawings for dimensions, locations of partitions and equipment, locations and sizes of structural support, foundations, and other detailed information required for the correct installation of the work. Work not shown on the drawings, but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and ready for operation, will be furnished and installed by the Contractor without additional expense to the Client. The Contractor shall be responsible for items not shown on the drawings or specified otherwise, but reasonably incidental to the installation, as required by applicable codes, as practiced by the trade, or is stipulated by the manufacturer of the equipment being supplied, installed, or connected. These items shall be supplied, installed, and/or connected by the Contractor without additional expense to the Client.

K.

REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DEFINITIONS A. Reference Standards 1. When reference is made to the standard specifications of nationally known organizations, government agencies, or regulatory bodies, the edition in effect on the date shown on the Project Specification will govern unless another edition is indicated in the Project Specifications. If the standard specifications are revised prior to completion of any part of the work to which such revision pertains, the Contractor may, upon approval by the Consultant in writing, perform the work in accordance with the revised standard specifications. 2. Regarding standard specifications, when specific articles, divisions, sections, and headings are not given in the Project Specifications, the standard specifications will apply in full. 3. Standard specifications when included as references apply only to those parts of the specifications where, In accordance with the referenced standards, is stated. 4. The system specifications, except as modified in the Project Specifications or where the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, will have

170


full force and effect as though printed in the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Standard specifications are not furnished with the Contract Documents, because manufacturers and trades involved are expected to be familiar with these references. Upon request, the Consultant may furnish information obtaining copies of the references. B. Codes and Ordinances a. Install work in accordance with applicable local codes, Federal ordinances and statutes. Nothing in the specifications or drawings will be construed to permit deviation from the governing codes. b. In case of conflict with local ordinances and statutes, the more stringent will take precedence, and will be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Client. c. Conflict between Contract Documents and applicable codes or ordinances will be brought to the attention of the Consultant for clarification. The decisions of the Consultant with regard to the governing criteria, will be implemented by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Client. d. Where material specified exceeds the cost or quality of that permitted by code, the specifications shall govern. e. References made herein to standards, specifications, or codes, attempt to include the latest addenda, or other revisions thereto, existing on the date of the contract documents. However, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify the latest standards, specifications, and/or codes and comply with same for the scope of this project. C. Construction Industry Standards a. Publication Dates Comply with the standard in effect as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless another edition is indicated in the specifications. b. Conflicting Requirements Where compliance with two or more standards is specified, the standards may establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels. Refer requirements that are different, but apparently equal, and uncertainties to the Consultant for a decision before proceeding. The decision of the Con-


171

sultant regarding the governing criteria will be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Client. c. The quantity or quality level provided or performed will be at least the minimum specified. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate for the context of the requirements. Refer uncertainties to the Consultant for a decision before proceeding. The decision of the Consultant regarding the governing criteria will be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Client. D. Copies of Standards Each entity engaged in construction on the project is required to be familiar with industry standards applicable to that entity's construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with Documents. Where copies of standards are needed for performance of a required construction activity, the Contractor shall obtain copies directly from the publication source. E. Abbreviations and Names (Addendum will be issued including European Standards and regulatory organizations.) Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. The following acronyms/abbreviations, as referenced in Contract Documents, are defined to mean the associated names: ADA

Americans with Disabilities Act

ASTM

American Society for Testing and Materials became ASTM in 1983

BOMA

Building Clients & Managers Association

BIFMA

Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturers Association

DOA

Department of Agriculture

DOC

Department of Commerce

DOD

Department of Defense

DOE

Department of Energy

DHI

Door and Hardware Institute

172


IES

Illuminating Engineering Society for North America

LPI

Lighting Protection Institute

NBFAA

National Burglar and Fire Alarm Association

NECA

National Electrical Contractors Association

NEMA

National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NFPA

National Fire Protection Association

OSHA

Occupational Safety and Health Administration

SAMA

Scientific Apparatus Makers Association

SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association UL

L.

Underwriters Laboratories

PROJECT MEETINGS A. Introduction a. Scheduling and Administration The Consultant will schedule and administer the General Preconstruction Conference. The contractor will schedule and administer other Project meetings. b. Administration The Consultant will prepare agenda, conduct the meeting, record proceedings, and distribute a written record to the following within three days of the meeting: 1. The Client 2. The Contractor 3. Other parties affected by decisions made or interested in subjects discussed. c. Notification Notice for meetings not regularly scheduled will be made not less than seven days prior to the meeting date. d. Conclusions Decisions, instructions, and interpretations made by the Client or Consultant at Project meetings are binding on the Contractor unless the Contractor takes exception at the meeting. Representatives of the Contractor, subcontractors, and


173

suppliers attending the meetings must be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. B. General Pre-construction Conference a. The Consultant will schedule this conference. The Contractor will notify the Consultant when ready for this conference, no later than ten (10) days after the date of Notice to Proceed. The place, date, and time of this conference is to be established by the Consultant. The following parties shall attend this conference. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

The Client The Consultant The Contractors project manager and superintendent. The Contractors quality control and safety representative. The Contractors coordinating engineer for mechanical and electrical.

b. Minimum Agenda 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Administrative procedures. Application for payment. Shop drawings, coordination drawings, and schedules. Project record drawings. Contractor monthly progress report. Contract documents.

C. Pre-installation and Prefabrication Conferences a. The Contractor will call these conferences where required by the individual specification sections for the purpose of reviewing product selections, procedures for executing work, and coordination with other subcontractors. The place, date, and time of these conferences will be established by the Contractor and approved by the Client and Consultant. Do not schedule these conferences until the subcontractor executing the work has made the submittals for action called for in the Contract Documents, and they have been returned to the Contractor by the Consultant. The following parties will attend these conferences: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

The Contractor The Contractors coordinating engineer The subcontractors executing the work Subcontractors affected by the work Manufacturers representatives The testing laboratory, when applicable

b. The Client and any designated Clients representative may attend all such meetings.

174


D. Weekly Progress Meetings (Optional) a. The Contractor shall call these meetings for the purpose of reviewing the general progress of the work with the Client and Consultant, and for coordinating and expediting the works prosecution. The date, time, and place of meetings are to be acceptable to the Consultant. b. Frequency Meeting will be scheduled on a regularly scheduled basis, from the date of commencement of the work until the date of Final acceptance. c. Attendance 1. The following parties will attend these meetings: aa. The Contractor bb. Major subcontractors cc. Material suppliers and manufacturers representatives dd. Testing laboratory representative where applicable. ee. Others whose presence may be requested by the Client or Consultant. 2. The Client and any designated Clients Representative may attend all such meetings. d. Agenda Distribute the agenda for each meeting to the Consultant and the participants not less than 24 hours before the start of the meeting. Include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Review and acceptance of minutes of previous meeting. Review of work progress since previous meeting. Review field observations, problems, and recommendations. Review problems which impede planned progress. Review off-site fabrication and delivery status. Develop corrective measures if required to maintain or regain projected progress schedule. 7. Review revisions to progress schedule if required. 8. Plan progress for succeeding work period. 9. Coordinate projected progress with other current submittals. 10. Review submittal schedules and status of current submittals. 11. Review status of Contractors remedial actions to previously observed nonconforming work. 12. Review proposed changes for the following:


175

aa. Effect on progress schedule. bb. Effect on completion date. cc. Effect on contract sum. 13. Review of monthly application for payment (monthly). 14. Review status of project record drawings (monthly). 15. Other business

M.

SCHEDULES, REPORTS, AND PHOTOGRAPHS A. Schedule of Values A list of the important elements of the Contract Sum, with a value assigned to each by the Contractor will be developed by the Contractor. B. Progress Schedules The Contractor will develop and submit a milestone chart showing all activities associated with completion of the project. This chart will be formatted to indicate where activities occur concurrently. C. Submittals Schedule A schedule showing the dates on which the Contractor will furnish to the Consultant the submittals required by each of the specification sections. List each submittal by its unique subparagraph number in the specifications. Correlate the submittals schedule directly to the construction progress schedule. D. Progress Reports a. Tabular Report Include the following information in tabular form: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6 7. 8.

The actual start date for each activity. The time estimated to complete each activity. Past months estimated completion date. Current estimated completion date. Scheduled completion date. Actual completion date. Status of critical items. Number of personnel on the site for the Contractor and each subcontractor.

b. Narrative Report Include a written description of the progress of the work and circumstances that may delay the progress of the work. In the event of such circumstances, include

176


a description of the actions to be taken to maintain the Project schedule. This will not be considered notice of a claim for extension of the Contract Time. E. Contractors Responsibilities a. Submittals 1. Schedule of Values Submit to the Consultant before the first Application for Payment. 2. Progress Schedules Submit to the Consultant with each Application for Payment until the CPM is implemented. Submit the CPM schedule at the time it becomes operational, and thereafter at times when changes are made. 3. Submittal Schedule Submit to the Consultant within 21 days after receipt of Notice to Proceed. 4. Progress Reports Submit to the Consultant with each Application for Payment. b. Progress Schedules 1. Maintenance Update the milestone chart at least bi-weekly to indicate change in schedule and completion of tasks. 2. Extension To make a claim for an extension of the Contract Time, include revised schedules with the monthly submittal to indicate the proposed extension. F. Construction Reports Prepare a bi-weekly construction report, recording the following information concerning events at the site, and submit duplicate copies to the Consultant at weekly intervals: a. List of subcontractors at the site. b. Approximate count of personnel at the site. c. High and low temperatures, general weather conditions. d. Accidents and unusual events. e. Meetings and significant decisions. f. Stoppages, delays, shortages, losses.


177

g. Meter readings and similar recordings. h. Emergency procedures. i. Orders and requests of governing authorities. j. Change orders received, implemented. k. Services connected, disconnected. l. Equipment or system tests and start-ups. m. Partial completions, occupancies. n. Final Acceptance authorized.

N.

CONTRACTORS QUALITY CONTROL A. Responsibility The Contractor is responsible for implementing, maintaining, and supervising quality control in connection with the work. B. Administrative Staff Provide a competent and adequate staff for the administration, coordination, supervision, and superintendence of the work. Do not change key members of this staff without the consent of the Consultant, unless such staff members prove to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and cease to be in his employ. If the Contractor intends to change a key staff member, written notice will be given to the Consultant at least 15 days prior to the intended change. Key staff members will be full time employees, stationed at the site. Project staff will include, but is not limited to, the following: a. Project Coordinator The person who has responsibility for the work and who has the authority to act in matters for the coordination, direction, and technical administration of the work. Prior to commencement of the work, provide the Consultant with the name of the project manager. b. Project Superintendent The person in attendance at the project site during the performance of the work. The superintendent will represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent will be as binding as if given to the Contractor.

178 O.


PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. Final Cleaning and Adjustments The Contractor is responsible for the final cleaning of the Project, and for the coordination and direction of cleaning by other trades. a. Materials Use only cleaning materials recommended by the manufacturers of the surfaces to be cleaned. b. Execution 1. Employ experienced workers, or professional cleaners, for final cleaning. 2. For Final acceptance, clean surfaces whether exposed to view or not. 3. Remove trash, rubbish, waste materials, tools, and equipment from the site. 4. Remove grease, dust, dirt, plaster, mortar, fingerprints, and other foreign materials from interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view (i.e., the surfaces of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, woodwork, plaster, masonry, concrete, mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, ductwork, and conduit). Polish surfaces so designated to a shine finish. 5. Broom clean exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces of work areas. 6. Clean the elevator shafts, electrical closets, pipe and duct shafts, chases, furred spaces, and similar spaces that are generally unfinished. Leave these spaces free from rubbish, loose plaster, mortar, waste construction materials, dirt, and dust. 7. The Client will review items from which the Contractor proposes removing labels before they are removed. 8. Maintain cleaning until the date of Final acceptance or the date of partial occupancy of the building, whichever is earlier. Re-cleaning will not be required after the work has been inspected and accepted, unless later operations of the Contractor make re-cleaning of certain portions necessary. B. Adjustments to Electrical Equipment a. Make adjustments required to ensure operation of the various systems in accordance with the drawings and specifications . b. It is specifically understood that the making of adjustments to ensure the proper operation of the systems will cover a period of 12 months following the


179

final acceptance of the work. The Contractors and/or their suppliers will make adjustments required during this period without delay, and without additional cost to the Client. c. Should defects develop in the work within specified periods due to faults in materials or workmanship, (not caused by improper maintenance or operation of normal wear, tear, or usage), the Contractor hereby agrees to correct defective work to the Consultants satisfaction. Such corrective work, including but not limited to, cost of making good other work damaged or otherwise affected by making corrective work, will be done without additional cost to the Client and within 5 days after written notice to the Contractor by the Consultant. Costs of such corrective work is the responsibility of the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to do work so ordered, the Client may have work done, and the Contractor and his Sureties agree to pay the Client or his successor for the cost of such corrective work. C. Project Record Documents a. Documents and Samples at the Site Maintain at the site for the Consultant, a record copy of the drawings, specifications, addenda, bulletins, supplemental instructions, and Change Orders, in good order, and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition, shop drawings, product data, samples, and similarly required submittals. These will be available to the Consultant, and will be delivered to the Consultant at the time of Final acceptance. b. Posting 1. Project Record Drawings Keep a complete and accurate record of the locations of concealed items indicating the work as actually installed. Changes and deviations shall be indicated on both the shop drawings and the project record drawings. If shop drawings are not required for the areas where such deviations, changes, or concealed work occurs, then indicate these items on the project record drawings only. Give particular attention to concealed work which would be difficult to identify, measure, and record at a later date. The Contractor, and each subcontractor, will record concealed items, changes, and deviations under the direction of the Contractor as the work progresses. The Contractor will clearly identify deviations from the Contract Documents. 2. Project Record Specifications Indicate the changes made by addendum, bulletin, supplemental instruc-

180


tions, and change orders. Indicate the manufacturer selected for items whether specified proprietary or generically. 3. Project Record Submittals Product data will be manufacturers original printed material. Indicate printed material. Indicate changes and deviations on the shop drawings. The Contractor, and each subcontractor, will record changes and deviations under the direction of the Contractor as the work progresses. 4. Certification The Contractor and each subcontractor will certify, by endorsement on the project record drawings, that each of the revised sheets represents a complete and accurate record of the work as executed. c. Submittal Requirements 1. At the time of Final acceptance transfer notations from the project record drawings to a set of Mylar transparencies paid for by the Contractor. Submit the project record drawings (mylar transparency & on disk CAD v14), project record specifications, and project record submittals to the Consultant for transfer to the Client. Submit documents in suitable transfer cases indexed and marked for each division of the work. 2. No receipt or review of project record documents by the Consultant will be a waiver of deviations from the Contract Documents or the submittals, or in any way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Final payment is contingent upon receipt of the complete and up-to-date project record documents and required certifications. D. Operation and Maintenance Data a. Manual 1. Assemble a manual bound in hardcover binders, presenting for the Clients guidance, full details for care and maintenance of equipment installed under this contract. 2. Include manufacturers literature relating to motors and other equipment, catalog cuts, parts list, wiring diagrams, instruction sheets, and other pertnent information which will be useful to the Client in overall operation and maintenance. 3. Include a list of installers and service representatives with company names and addresses, names of individuals to contact, and telephone numbers. 4. Include manuals called for in order sections of the specifications.


181

b. Equipment Manuals Prepare and deliver complete operating and maintenance manuals. Provide information pertinent to the equipment for preventative maintenance and for replacement of expendable components. Manuals will be indexed and bound in loose-leaf binders. 1. Include the items listed below and other features as may be recommended by the manufacturer: aa. Catalog information of the unit(s) installed. bb. Installation details. cc. Wiring diagrams of electrical components. dd. Special control devices. ee. Complete list of parts with reordering numbers. ff. Software User Manuals. gg. System Component User Manuals hh. Operating temperatures. ii. Design temperatures. jj. Recommended spare parts list with unit prices. 2. Prepare operating instructions, complete and explicit, including, but not limited to processors, peripheral equipment, and signal transmission components. 3. Include in the manuals, charts and diagrams indicating component locations and control device locations. 4. Prepare detailed maintenance procedures and associated maintenance schedule for each system. 5. Provide name, address, and telephone number for local service representatives. c. Certifications The Contractor and each subcontractor shall certify, by endorsement of the manual, that the manual is complete and accurate. d. Submittal At the time of Final acceptance submit three copies of the manual to the Client. Submit documents in suitable transfer cases indexed and marked for each division of the work. E. Warranties a. Forms 1. Extended Warranties

182


Provide a copy of an extended warranty proposal for a period of 2, 3, & 5 years, in accordance with the specifications. This submittal must be filled out completely, signed and countersigned by the installer and manufacturer as required by the Contractor Documents. 2. Manufacturers Warranties Provide manufacturers warranty, modified when required to comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. b. Starting Date The starting date for warranties shall be the date of Final acceptance of the installation. c. Submittal At the time of Final acceptance, submit a completed - Statement of Manufacturers Review. A copy of this form is included within this specification package. At the time of Final acceptance, the submittals should include all warranties, reviews, including but not limited to, extended warranties, as required by the Contractor Documents. These forms should be submitted to the Consultant and/or the Client. d. System Warranties Warranty all systems, equipment, materials, and workmanship to be free from defects for a period of one year from the date of Final acceptance, unless otherwise specified. Replace or repair the work that may prove defective or not in compliance with the drawings and specifications without additional cost to the Client and without interference with the Clients operations. F. Statements of Application Upon completion of the work and in preparation for final acceptance testing, submit to the Client and/or their designated representative, a statement of application advising of the completion of the scope of work and the system's readiness to undergo the final acceptance testing process. G. Certificates of Occupancy If the law in the jurisdiction where the Project is located requires either a temporary or a permanent certificate of occupancy, then obtain and pay for such certificate(s) and at the time of Final acceptance, submit them to the Consultant.


183

H. Service and Maintenance Contracts a. At the time of Final acceptance submit to the Consultant executed contracts for extended service or maintenance required by the Contract Documents. b. Extended maintenance proposals where called for in the specifications will be submitted with the proposals for each trade at the time their portion of the work is bid. Furnish copies of the maintenance proposal to the Consultant for review prior to award of the subcontract for each portion of the work. I. Training of Operating Personnel a. Provide the services of a competent supervisor or technician to instruct the Clients personnel in the operation of each type of system as per the specifications. b. This training should be provided in accordance with the time frame required for training purposes and identified within this specification. The training sessions should follow the syllabus provided in the bid documents by the Contractor. The Client shall identify, prior to the start of training, those personnel that require these services. c. Before turning the equipment over to the client, the Contractor shall thoroughly test all equipment provided and/or installed and instruct the Client's designated personnel in its proper operation and on the spot preventative maintenance program.

P.

PROJECT COMPLETION A. Contract Submittals Prior to contract closeout the contractor shall assure compliance with the following requirements: a. Submittal of data assuring complete compliance with power and cabling requirements for installation as described within the manufacturers guide. b. Submittal of data assuring proper installation and system wiring in accordance with the manufacturers guidelines. c. Provision of AS BUILT drawings providing the Consultant with data described in the following sections. d. Inform the Consultant, at the start of the installation, through a milestone project schedule, of the proposed time of final acceptance testing. Prior to final acceptance testing, the contractor will conduct a pre-final acceptance test, and supply the Consultant with the testing procedures, the results of the pre-final acceptance test, as well as any punch lists developed as a result of the test. The

184


punch list will be completed prior to initiation of the final acceptance testing procedures by the Consultant. B. AS BUILT Drawings: a. Upon completion of the project and prior to Final acceptance, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing an As Built drawing package to the Consultant and/or the Client. The package shall consist of two hard copy sets along with the complete drawing package in a CAD format and supplied on disk. The version of CAD shall be compatible with that used by both the Consultant and/or the Client. b. The contractor will provide an accurate record of the equipment installed and its placement. The drawings should detail the type of terminal placed at each location and its exact location. c. The conduit layout should be detailed with the circuits within each conduit and all interconnections. The E-Z Code should be noted within this drawing, and all terminal locators should be marked within the units with the information requested in circuitry. d. Each panel within the entire system should be indicated along with each interconnection for this panel. e. All items such as card readers, door strikes, doors, terminal locations, conduit connections for the readers and terminals, interconnect cabling, and power layouts will be detailed. C. Final Acceptance a. When the contractor considers the work to be substantially complete, he will submit in writing to the Consultant: 1. A written notice that the work is substantially complete in accordance with the conditions of the contract. 2. The work has been inspected by a qualified person authorized by the Consultant for compliance with the Contract Documents and Acceptance Criteria. 3. The system has been tested and is capable of meeting all requirements in accordance with the specifications. b. Upon receipt of such notice the Consultant will schedule an inspection meeting with the Contractor. c. Should the Consultant determine that the work is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify the Contractor in writing stating the reasons. The con-


185

tractor will remedy the deficiencies in the work, and send a second written notice of the Final acceptance to the Consultant. The Consultant will then reschedule a re-inspection meeting. D. Final Inspection a. When the contractor determines the work is complete, he will submit a written certification that indicates: • Contract documents have been reviewed. • The work has been inspected and complies with all of the contract documents and acceptance criteria. • The system has been tested and passed all required test. • The work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents. • Inspections or letters of acceptance for items requiring approval from any governing or regulatory authority as identified in the Contract are complete and available. • The work is completed and ready for final inspection. b. Upon receipt of the certification, the Consultant will schedule the final acceptance testing procedures with the Contractor and all parties involved. Final acceptance testing will include, but not be limited to, the testing of all components, integrated features, report formats, and systems communication features in accordance with the specifications. c. Should the Consultant consider the work to be incomplete or defective, he will promptly notify the Contractor in writing listing incomplete or defective work. The Contractor will take immediate steps to remedy the stated deficiencies and send a second written certification that the work is complete. The Consultant will then reschedule a re-inspection meeting. d. When the Consultant finds the work acceptable under the contract, he will request the Contractor to make the closeout submittals. E. Contract Closeout The contractor will submit the following list of items to the Consultant prior to contract closeout:

186


a. Final Payment Request b. Contractors Affidavit of payment of debts and claims. c. Contractors Affidavit of release of Liens. F. Project Data a. The Contractor will compile and maintain accurate Project Record Documents, shop drawings, product data, maintenance and operations data, records of subcontractors, material suppliers, and related information that the Client may use for maintenance, operation, repair, renovation, or additions to the work. b. The contractor will furnish guarantees, warranties, certifications, letters of acceptance, maintenance agreements, bonds, or other documents required by the contract conditions and specifications. This material will be organized for submittal by the Contractor. c. The contractor will maintain at the site and in good condition, one complete set of all contract documents for use only as record documents. These documents will be marked record documents, and will not be for general reference or construction use. The contractor will make the documents available for inspection by the Consultant, and will not conceal the work until the information is recorded. d. All drawings will be legibly marked recording actual conditions of construction including but not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4.

Location and identification of existing equipment and related features. Field change in dimensions and detail. Changes by addenda and change orders. Description and details of features for maintenance, service, replacement, or expansion of the work.

e. The contractor will furnish two complete sets of project data in commercial quality three ring binders with durable plastic covers. The project will be identified on the face and side of the binder. If multiple binders are required, they will be identified as consecutively numbered volumes. The original documents shall be identified as SET NUMBER ONE. f. The contractor will provide the information in the Project Data Binders. G. Project Data Binders a. Introductory Information


187

1. Cover sheet or sheets giving complete project title, contract number, Clients name, and address, and phone number, name of project superintendent, project manager, and related general information. 2. Provide a complete listing of subcontractors and material suppliers, including company name, address, phone number, contact person, and local representative. 3. Table of Contents Sections: Section 1: (Reserved for Client) Section 2: Certificates and Acceptance Section Table of Contents. Contractors certification as described in items under Final Inspection and Contract Closeout. Certificate of Final Acceptance. Section 3: Warranties and Bonds Section Table of Contents. Contractors warranty of the work. Warranties, bonds, service and maintenance contract, executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and subcontractors as specified. Section 4. Complete information for each item: Product of work item. Scope of work. Name of firm or contractor with name of responsible principal, address and telephone number. Beginning date and duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. Information for instances which might affect the validity of the warranty or bond, and proper procedures in case of failure. b. Operating and Maintenance Data 1. Section Table of Contents. 2. List, with each system or product, the name, address, and telephone number of the responsible subcontractor or installer. Give drawing and specification reference, building location, manufacturer and model number, local supplier, and maintenance service-company for each item. 3. Data for maintenance and operation of all major mechanical and electrical systems, equipment and products furnished under this contract. 4. Content, for each unit of equipment system or product, as appropriate. Description and Maintenance procedures. Service schedule with MTBF schedule for system critical components. Manufacturers parts list, illustrations, drawings, and diagrams for

188


maintenance. Color coding legends. Circuit directories of panel boards. Instructions for care. Identification of the actual part installed and location of same. List of material and parts installed. Prior to final inspection, each system will be demonstrated, and the Clients personnel trained in the operation of the system. H. Documentation and Training The contractor will provide the services of the manufacturers trained representative for a period of at least 5 days to instruct the Clients designated personnel on the operation of the system and for at least 16 hours on the maintenance of the entire system. I. Warranty The entire installation and all items of equipment and materials furnished and installed by the contractor will be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of the final inspection and acceptance of the work. The contractor will be notified in writing of any defective items, and will repair or replace such items promptly without charge to the Client. J. Local Post-Installation Support Contractor will provide local technical support for the system for a minimum of one year - post installation. The technical support shall include on-site trouble shooting and maintenance capability for all equipment, wiring, and software required by the system. Spare parts anticipated to be needed for at least one year support will be maintained in stock in the local office. Should the contractor require storage of the spare parts inventory on site, the Client will provide storage within the facility, however, it is not to be anticipated that the Client will assume responsibility for the security of these parts as they are the property of the contractor.

CHAPTER

Locks and Key Control

7

T

he original intent of locks was to keep out those that did not have a key and therefore did not have access to certain areas, buildings, etc. It was not long after locks were used that they then became the target of those attempting to gain access. Locks can be compromised using special lock picking tools, drilled out using drills, or using a duplicate key made from an impression or from a master key all to gain access to the locked area. Locks are the most widely used security device to help protect facilities and property. Locks are not going to keep the determined well-equipped thief out of the property. They are instead a delaying device similar to perimeter fences. The better the lock, the more delay for the intruder. Remember thieves do not want to spend a great deal of time working on the lock since time is important to them. The longer they spend on defeating the lock, the less time they have inside the property, building, etc. The approximate time limit thieves like to stick to is around ten minutes from entry to exit. Anything that adds to that time is a delaying tactic and may make the location less attractive as a target. Using high security locks in conjunction with other security devices such as instruction detection increases the odds that the thief will be caught. So the use of good locks will add to the hardening of the target. Because all locks can be defeated with the proper tools and expertise, make sure that the lock you choose is right for the job and will provide some level of security. Therefore locks are to be used as a standalone security device. Locks can be used as a delaying tactic especially if the lock is a lock that was designed to be pick-resistant and impression-resistant. The pick-resistant and the impression-resistant locks cost more than other locks but work well as a delaying tactic to slow down an intruder. Lock picking is not used that frequently because of the expertise and skill needed to successfully pick the lock. Lock picking is harder to do


190


than it is portrayed in the movies on the television. Overall, locks are the least costly security device made, especially the mechanical locks and are a part of the first line of defense in security. The quality and strength of the lock the potential thief encounters will send the message that this is a hardened target or a soft target. If the effort was made to install a good security lock then probably there are other security devices that have been installed as well, such as an intrusion detection system. The potential thief may think twice and move on to a softer target to attack. Since locks are extension of the door or window into the wall the lock is only as good as the wall around it. If the wall is weak the lock will be bypassed by attacking the wall to gain entry. In this chapter the types of locks and their uses will be presented. Also there will be a look at some new innovations in locks that offer keyless entry. Keyless locks are gaining in popularity since they are no keys to loose or carry. Keyless entry has increased in recent years; some are even offering keyless ignition. This use of keyless entry locks has an effect on residence locking system and in fact there are locks on the market today that offer keyless entry.

TYPES OF LOCKS There are different types of locks on the market today. These range from deadbolts to electric strikes to keypad and combinations locks. Some locks offer more security than others and require considerable time and expertise to open. Other locks can be opened more easily without any special knowledge. Deadbolts are the most popular lock for residential use. All locks are operated by either a key, electronically using an access card, or numerical combination by entering pin numbers into a keypad to gain access. To enhance the use of locks they are usually used in conjunction with another security device such as an intrusion detection system. The primary part of a lock is the latch or bolt and most key-operated locks use it except for combination and padlock locks. There are various types of locks and below is the most widely used locks.

Cylindrical Locks Cylindrical locks are also known as key-in-knob or key-in-lever locks. Normally these locks are used to secure, offices, storage rooms, etc. The cylinder in the center of the doorknob identifies these locks. Some of the cylinder locks have a key way in both sides of the lock to unlock or lock the lock. These are used in a door that has a window above the doorknob and the potential exists that, if the glass is broken, entry can be made by reaching in and turning the thumb turn or handle to open the door. Some cylindrical locks are also installed with lever handles with the cylinder in the center.


191

The cylindrical lock has a cylinder or plug that is the key way. The grooves in the key are there so when the key is inserted into the lock they line up with the configuration of the pins in the plug. The pins cause the rotation of the plug as the key is turned moving the latch from the strike plate. The cylindrical lock is good for low security locations and applications. The lock is easily compromised by either removing the doorknob or lever or prying the latch from the strike plate.

Deadbolt Locks The deadbolt lock is also known as a tubular deadbolt. The lock is mounted on the door in a similar fashion to the cylindrical lock except that there is a bolt that slides into the strike plate when locked. The bolt extends into the frame at a minimum of 1 inch to prevent easy forcing of the lock out of the frame. The deadbolt lock is used on apartment doors, house doors, etc. The lock provides more protection than the cylindrical lock. To prevent unlocking the lock by breaking a window, it is recommended that deadbolt locks that are placed in doors with windows or next to windows have a double key cylinder which means that a key is needed to lock or unlock the lock on either side of the door. Deadbolt locks are used for residential and office security and provides an acceptable level of security. The lock can be defeated by prying the bolt back from the frame freeing the bolt from the strike plate. This is why a minimum of a 1 inch throw on the bolt is important since it cannot be forced back by prying the bolt. The frame can be forced open by spreading the door frame using an old automobile jack. The jack is placed in between the door frame and is extended until the frame forces the bolt to open. Another way to defeat the deadbolt is to find a weak point to enter like a window.

Mortise Locks The mortise lock gets its name from the way that the lock case is “mortised”, recessed into the edge of the door. The mortise lock that has a doorknob on the both sides of the door is the most common one. There is an exterior thumb latch on entrance doors rather than a doorknob on some models. To lock the lock there is a thumb turn or button. The button is usually in the side of the door above the latch and pushing the button in will lock the door. On some doors there is a very small lever instead of a button and by moving the lever up or down, the lock is either locked or unlocked. To install the lock into the edge of the door by recessing it into the door weakens the door and therefore the lock is considered to be low security and not to be used for areas requiring high security. Figure 7-1 shows a Sargent mortise lock.

192


Drop Bolt Locks Drop bolt locks, also known as jimmy proof locks, are used as auxiliary locks like the deadbolt. The strike and the lock body have interlocking leaves that are similar to a door hinge and when closed the locking pins in the lock body drop down into the holes in the strike locking the lock. The lock is extremely difficult to separate since the lock body and strike are interconnected with locking pins and the lock becomes a single unit. The lock is used in residential and commercial locations. The drop bolt lock is a deterrent to spreading the door frame since the strike does not extend into the door frame horizontally. Spreading the frame will not free the bolts from the strike since the bolts drop down into the strike.

Rim Cylinder Locks Rim cylinder locks are mounted by screwing to the inside surface of the door face. The rim cylinder lock is usually used in conjunction with the drop bolt lock or other surface mounted lock. The lock consists of an outer barrel, a cylinder and ring, tailpiece, back mounting plate, and two mounting screws. To help the lock fit varying door thicknesses the tailpiece screws are scored.

Disc Tumbler Locks Disc tumbler locks were designed for automobile doors. The locks are now used for desks, file cabinets, and padlocks are easy and cheap to produce. The lock

FIGURE 7-1 Sargent mortise lock.


193

however, has a limited life because they are produced using soft metal. The locks are not very effective as a security device and do not have extensive delaying since they are easily compromised.

Pin Tumbler Locks Pin tumbler locks are widely used today in residential and industrial settings. The lock has a cylinder that rotates and is called a plug that is linked to the locking mechanism. The plug has a shell around it and the shell with the plug inside is fixed to the door. When a key is inserted into the cylinder, it will rotate and this rotation is what works the locking mechanism. The key for the pin tumbler lock is grooved on both sides. When in the locked position the plug cannot rotate because a set of pin stacks that are spring loaded and extend into the top of the plug to keep it in place. The pin tumbler locks can be master keyed to a variety of patterns. The lock is not for high security applications since it can be compromised easily.

Unit Locks Unit locks are used in areas that have heavy use like institutional buildings, hospitals, etc. The lock is installed into the door by cutting a notch at the doors edge. The lock is one piece and the lock has a standard size for the cutout which helps simplify the door in preparation for the lock installation.

Cipher Locks Cipher locks also known as keypad locks or mechanical push button locks. These locks have a key pad with numbers from 0-9 and anyone wanting to gain entry that has access inserts their assigned PIN into the keypad and the lock is released. The locks are similar to the unit lock since the lock and door handle is one piece. These locks are used in secure areas to limit access and provide access control.

Fingerprint Locks Fingerprint locks are similar to the cipher lock in design and look, however instead of a keypad, there is a fingerprint reader installed. The lock also has a dual technology system that incorporates the fingerprint with a keypad. The lock is powered by 4 AA batteries and can get up to 5,000 operations before the batteries need to be replaced. Since the lock is stand-alone it can hold up to 10 persons’ fingerprint records. A key is needed to add or delete users. The lock can be used to replace an existing mechanical lock.

Padlocks Padlocks are portable, detachable locks and are used in conjunction with a hasp. There are low and high security padlocks. The low security padlocks are made

194


using hardened steel shackles. High security padlocks on the other hand are made of case hardened steel and are used with a security hasp.

Electric Strike Locks Electric strike locks are used in conjunction with an access control system. The strike is electrified rather than the lock. The strike is the part of the lock that is installed into the door frame. When an access card is presented that has valid access the electric strike moves and releases the latch from the lock allowing the door to open.

Electric Locks Electric locks are also used in conjunction with an access control system. The electric lock electrifies the lock which is the part of the lock that is attached to the door. When a valid access card is presented at the reader the electric lock releases the lock for the strike and the door opens.

Magnetic Locks Magnetic locks also known as Mag locks are an electronic magnet. Chapter 6 discussed the operation of the magnetic lock. The locks are used in conjunction with an access control system.

High Security Locks High security locks meet the following criteria: a. Resistant to being picked b. Resistant to forced entry c. Tamper resistant d. Permit entry to those with special knowledge and tools e. Record access and entry using electronic locks. All of the major lock manufacturers make a high security lock. For example, Schlage makes the Primus™ lock which is a high security lock. The Primus™ lock uses special keys. Special blanks are needed to make duplicate keys as well as a special machine to cut the key. To change the cores in these locks a special key is used and this allows for easy, rapid re-keying of the locks in the event a key is compromised and when someone leaves the company, etc. Medeco has a high security lock called KeyMark™ that uses special keys and the cylinders are interchangeable as well. To make duplicate keys special machine duplicate blanks are needed so any key making machine cannot make duplicate keys.


195

Corbin Russwin has a high security lock called the Pyramid™. The lock’s cylinder is 7-pin and is also interchangeable with other cylindrical locks that Corbin Russwin makes. The keys like the other high security locks cannot be duplicated without a special machine and special key blanks.

KEYING SYSTEMS The cores of some locks are interchangeable allowing the same key to be used for a variety of locks. Padlocks, cabinet locks, electrical key switches, and door locks are capable of using the same key. There are several different ways to key locks. The ways are identified by the keying system used. Below is a list of the various keying systems used: • Grand master key is the one that will open all the locks in the system including two master groups. • Master key will open of the locks on the one or two submasters. • Submaster key will open any locks within the submaster. This keying system can be used to have all the keys for the offices in one department opened by one key. The office keys are keyed alike. Master keying is done for convenience and not for security since it compromises security due to the loss of control. Some keys have do not duplicate stamped on them but this does not mean that the keys will not be duplicated. There are keys that cannot be duplicated without special equipment and tightly controlled special key blanks. One such key works with a lock made by Schlage called Primus™ A regular key will not work a Primus™ lock and the Primus™ lock cylinders can be interchanged with almost any 6-pin cylinder that Schlage makes as well as most other brands of cylinders made by other manufacturer. Primus™ locks are resistant to drilling, almost pick proof and are therefore considered high security locks. Medeco KeyMark™ locks have a special key that cannot be duplicated by just any key making machine even with an impression. The duplicate blanks are tightly controlled and an ordinary blank can not be used to make a duplicate key for the KeyMark™ lock. Medeco cylinders are interchangeable with Medeco cores and can be changed rapidly after employees leave or for whatever reason to maintain the high security integrity of the lock. Corbin Russwin Pyramid™ locks have special keys as well and the duplicate blanks are controlled. Each facility using Pyramid™ locks must complete a registration form. The form is used to order key blanks and cylinders as well as pin kits. The advantages of the high security locks and keying systems are as follows: 1. The cylinders are interchangeable within their product line and most of the other product lines as well.

196


2. The cores can be changed rapidly so when someone leaves the company, lost keys, etc. the cylinders can be changed to keep the integrity of the system. 3. The keys cannot be duplicated by any key making machine even with an impression. 4. The key duplicate blanks are unique and are tightly controlled.

SPECIFICATIONS Here are some general requirements for specifying locks for a project. • Choose type of lock Q

Mortise

Q

Cylindrical

Q

Deadbolt

Q

Drop bolt

Q

Rim Cylinder

Q

Disc tumbler

Q

Pin tumbler

Q

Unit lock

Q

Cipher

Q

Fingerprint

Q

Electric strike

Q

Electric lock

Q

Magnetic

Q

High security

• Choose color and style of lock • Prepare specification sheet for lock chosen The general specifications are necessary for specifying the type of locks to be used and where. Sometimes the site will have more than one type of lock and the specifications will call out each type of lock. The manufacturers of the locks have cut sheets for their products. The cut sheets provide the specifications for the var-


197

ious locks. If the project is a part of an overall security design package then you can add the sections on locks to the overall specifications as an other section., The Instructions to Bidders will also have sections pertaining to the locks. By putting all the security-related documents in one package it helps make the bidding process go more smoothly as well as the installation. After the type of locks and where they are to be used on the project has been decided, the next thing to do is to prepare the bid documents including the specifications. The more detailed you make the specification documents, the better off you will be in the long run. The details are important if you are going to get a good quote on the work of purchasing and installing the locks. The other part of the bid package preparation is the standard “Instructions to Bidders” document that will accompany the specification document. Also part of the bid package it is helpful to provide a set of preliminary drawings showing what doors will have which locks. The drawings will be used to do the “job walk” for the pre-bid meeting. Below is a sample bid specification for locks on a job for a fictitious company called ABCD Corporation. PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Section Includes: 1. Finish hardware for doors as specified and as listed in “Hardware Groups” and required by actual conditions. 2. Include screws, special screws, bolts, special bolts, expansion shields, and other devices for proper application of hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section XXXX: Carpentry 1. Section ZZZZ, Section WWWW, and Section YYYY - Certain hardware items installed with doors. 2. Division 16: Electrical. 1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. To purchase and install the locks listed in this document according to the schedule listed below. For the purpose of clarification, the following parties will be referenced in this document in the following manner: 1. The ABCD Corporation The Client 5667 First Street Livermore, CA. 94588 925-224-7955 Tel 925-224-7964 Fax www.abcd.com

198


2. The XYZ Consultants Inc. The Consultants 1200 Broadway Pleasanton, California 925-555-1234 Tel 925-555-1235 Fax www.xyzconsult.com 3. The ABCD Corporation The Facility(s) Office construction project 1700 Main Street Livermore, California B. In all new facilities, the system is being installed for the purpose of securing the Client’s facility. The locks will be installed on all the doors for the new office building for the corporation meeting this specification and the bidder instructions. The requirements for the locks to be used in conjunction with the access control system will be specified in the access control system part of the security requirements. C. Provide items, articles, materials, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled herein or on drawings, in the quantities necessary to complete the project. Provide hardware that functions properly and is good working order. Apprise the Architect of hardware items that will not operate properly, are improper for the conditions as specified, or will not remain permanently anchored as required by the installation instructions. “Change Orders” using the form supplied are to be submitted for any changes to hardware and the reason for such changes D. This Section calls for the contractor of choice to provide all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for the completion of the installation of locks for all the doors for the office building as indicated on the drawings and as described herein. The Owner reserves the right to supply other components if they are needed for this project. The system technologies called for within this Scope of Work are: 1. Install locks on all exterior and interior doors; 2. Components required for installation E. Contractor shall ensure the locks meet the operational and functional needs of the Client as specified herein, and as indicated on the drawings. The drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein, or on the plans, that are required to meet the functional and operational intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Client. F. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with other trades and contractors to provide a system that is totally integrated and operational as required for this project. G. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing with their Submit-


199

tal, a one year spare parts list with single component (itemized) and quantity pricing. Should any particular component be in redesign stage that would possibly cause it to be a non-production item within the 1 year period, this component shall be identified as such and the substitute or new component be identified on this spare parts list. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. The contractor shall review the following sections of the total project to ensure compliance with: 1. Division X Site Work 2. Division X Doors and Door Hardware 3. Division X Electrical All specification divisions are identified by The Construction Specification Institute Master Format 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: Submit 5 copies of hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules, which do not comply, will be returned for correction before checking. Hardware schedule shall clearly indicate architect’s hardware group and manufacturer of each item proposed. The schedule shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and correctness of the schedule. 1. Provide 2 copies of illustrations from manufacturer’s catalogs and data in brochure form. 2. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding conditions. Indicate unsuitable or incompatible items and proposed substitutions in hardware schedule. 3. Provide listing of manufacturer’s template numbers for each item of hardware in hardware schedule. 4. Furnish other Contractors and Subcontractors concerned with copies of final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as possible to hollow metal, wood door, and aluminum door fabricators in accordance with schedule they require for fabrication. 5. Samples: Lever design or finish sample: Provide 3 samples if requested by architect. B. Wiring Diagrams: Provide complete and detailed system operation and elevation diagrams specially developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-opens or door position switches are specified. Provide these diagrams with hard-

200


ware schedule submittal for approval. Provide detailed wiring diagrams with hardware delivery to jobsite. C. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation and adjustment instructions for finish hardware. Send installation instructions to site with hardware. D. Templates: Submit templates and “reviewed Hardware Schedule” to door and frame supplier and others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and reinforcing. E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section XXXX including specific requirements indicated. 1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following: a. Complete information in care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. b. Cut sheet for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product. 2. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect “As installed”. 3. Copy of final keying schedule. 4. As installed “Wiring Diagrams” for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. 5. One complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. F. The Contractor’s submittal shall include a complete list of equipment, materials, and installation instructions. All prices shall be itemized in single component prices as well as quantity pricing with any discounts so indicated. Alternative proposals are acceptable under this specification and shall comply with all standard requirements for the bid package submittal. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (i.e. latch and locksets, hinges, closers) from single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. B. Supplier: Recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities, who has been providing hardware for period of not less than 3 years. The supplier shall be, or employ, a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), who is registered in the continuing education program as administered by the Door and Hardware Institute. The hardware schedule shall be prepared and signed by a certified AHC.


201

C. Installer: Firm with 3 years experience in installation of similar hardware to that required for this project, including specific requirements indicated. D. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide nationally recognized testing agency label or stamp on hardware for labeled openings. Where UL requirements conflict with drawings or specifications, hardware conforming to UL requirements shall be provided. Conflicts and proposed substitutions shall be clearly indicated in hardware schedule. E. Handicapped Requirements: Doors to stairs (other than exit stairs), loading platforms, boiler rooms, stages and doors serving other hazardous locations shall have knurled or other similar approved marking of door lever handles or cross bars in accordance with local building codes. F. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to the installation of hardware, manufacturer’s representatives for locksets, closers, and exit devices shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractor’s personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and who is in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect and Owner. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver hardware to jobsite in manufacturer’s original packaging, marked to correspond with approved hardware schedule. Do not deliver hardware until suitable locked storage space is available. Check hardware against reviewed hardware schedule. Store hardware to protect against loss, theft or damage. B. Deliver hardware required to be installed during fabrication of hollow metal, aluminum, wood, or stainless steel doors prepaid to manufacturer. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Guarantee workmanship and material provided against defective manufacture. Repair or replace defective workmanship and material appearing within period of one year after Substantial Completion. B. Provide ten year factory warranty on door closer body against defects in material and workmanship from date of occupancy of Project. C. Replace shortages and incorrect items with correct material at no additional cost to Owner. D. At completion of project, qualified factory representative shall inspect closer installations. After this inspection, letter shall be sent to Architect reporting on conditions, verifying that closers have been properly installed and adjusted.

202


PART 2 PRODUCTS This part outlines the type of lock and the materials of construction the dimensions, diameter, etc. This section also outlines finishes, etc. Electronic locks are also outlined in this section. Some examples follow: 2.1 LOCKSETS - MORTISE Acceptable Manufacturer and Series: Sargent - 8200 x LNL Yale - 8700FL x AUR Corbin Russwin - ML2200 x NSA A. Provide lock functions specified in Hardware Groups, with following provisions: 1. Cylinders: Manufacturer’s high security removable core 6-pin, meeting the requirements of UL437. 2. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches. 3. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. Where required, provide open back strike and protected to allow practical and secure operation. 2.2 LOCKSETS - CYLINDRICAL A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Series: Sargent - 10-Line x LL Yale - 5400L x AU Corbin Russwin - CL3400 x NZD Cylinders: Manufacturer’s high security removable core 6-pin, meeting the requirements of UL437. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. Where required, provide open back strike and protected to allow practical and secure operation. 2.3 LOCKSETS - 11-LINE A. Acceptable Manufacturer and Series (No Substitutions): Sargent 11-Line x LL 1. Locksets shall be able to withstand 2400 inch pounds of torque applied to the locked lever without gaining access. 2. Locksets shall be cycle tested per ANSI A156.2, 1996, to two million cycles without any visible lever sag. 3. Locksets shall be able to fit a standard 2-1/8 inch (55 mm) bore without the use of thru-bolts. Standard rose size shall be 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) in diameter.


4. 5. 6. 7.

203

Lockset levers shall be made of solid material with no plastic fillers. Latchbolt head shall be one piece stainless steel. Latchbolt assemblies shall be encased within the lockbody. Cylinders: Sargent Signature Series, UL437 listed, high security 6pin cylinders. 8. Backsets: 2-3/4 inches. 9. Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 inch beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. Where required, provide open back strike and protected to allow practical and secure operation. 10. Locksets shall have a seven year limited warranty. 2.4 TYPICAL FINISHES AND MATERIALS A. Finishes, unless otherwise specified: 1. Butts: Out-swinging Exterior Doors a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel 2. Butts: Interior Doors and In-swinging Exterior Doors a. US26D (BHMA 652) on Steel 3. Continuous Hinges: a. US28 (BHMA 628) on Aluminum 4. Flush Bolts: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze 5. Exit Devices: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel 6. Locks and Latches: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze 7. Push Plates, Pulls and Push Bars: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel 8. Coordinators: a. USP (BHMA 600) on Steel 9. Kick Plates, Armor Plates, and Edge Guards: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel 10. Overhead Stops and Holders: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze 11. Closers: Surface mounted. a. Sprayed Aluminum Lacquer. 12. Latch Protectors: a. US32D (BHMA 630) on Stainless Steel 13. Miscellaneous Hardware: a. US26D (BHMA 626) on Brass or Bronze

204


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors, frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of finish hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install finish hardware in accordance with reviewed hardware schedule and manufacturer’s printed instructions. Pre-fit hardware before finish is applied, remove and reinstall after finish is completed. Install hardware so that parts operate smoothly, close tightly and do not rattle. B. Installation of hardware shall comply with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101 requirements. C. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant, forming tight seal between threshold and surface to which set. Securely and permanently anchor thresholds, using countersunk non-ferrous screws to match color of thresholds (stainless steel screws at aluminum thresholds). F. Lead Protection: Lead wrap hardware penetrating lead-lined doors. Levers and roses to be lead lined. Apply kick and armor plates with 3M adhesive #1357, as recommended by 3M Co., on lead-lined doors. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. After installation has been completed, provide services of qualified hardware consultant to check Project to determine proper application of finish hardware according to schedule. Also check operation and adjustment of hardware items. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At final completion, hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Make final adjustment to door closers and other items of hardware. Where hardware is found defective repair or replace or otherwise correct as directed. B. Adjust door closers to meet opening force requirements of Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. C. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of space or area, return to


205

work during week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware and doors. D. Instruct Owner’s personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. E. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.


CHAPTER

Video Surveillance

8

C

losed Circuit Television (CCTV) means that the system is a closed system and is intended for use by a facility to monitor their premises. The idea of closed means that the system does not broadcast TV signals over the airwaves as do the commercial TV stations but transmits them over a closed circuit. The system, in most cases, is designed and installed with the cameras wired to a central location on the site for monitoring and consists of cameras, multiplexers, monitors and recorders depending the on the size and complexity of the system. CCTV systems range in complexity from simple, using several cameras, a multiplexer, monitor and a recorder, to one using hundreds of cameras, multiplexers monitors and recorders and some even use a disk array for storing recordings. There are some systems that use wireless cameras but the system is still monitored by a central location on the site or over the company’s intranet. CCTV systems have been around for a long time and were primarily used by the government and government contractors in the beginning. These early systems were large, expensive and needed to be monitored by security personnel since there was not any motion sensing recording in the system. The earlier systems were analog and now the systems are digital. The camera images were recorded on reel-to-reel video tape recorders (VTR) and then came the VHS tape recorded on a VCR (Video Cassette Recorder) and now DVR (Digital Video Recorders) are common. The advent of CCTV allowed multiple locations to be viewed by one or two people and freed up security officers to perform other duties like responding to alarms. CCTV is used by security officers to do a video tour of the area. The systems consist of a camera, monitor, and cable that runs from the camera to the monitor. More sophisticated systems with multiple cameras use other hardware like Multiplexer’s which can transmit up to 16 cameras through a sin-


208


gle cable, microwave, and infrared line to a location for viewing and recording. It can transmit the images almost simultaneously to the central point. A MUX (multiplexer) is used to accept and record a number of camera inputs simultaneously. In this chapter we will explore the various components of a CCTV system, how they work, and what is information is needed to design a system. This chapter will cover the basics of CCTV, the terminology, etc. and is not intended to make you an expert. The purpose of the chapter is to acquaint you with CCTV systems. There are entire books devoted to the subject of CCTV systems and one excellent book on the subject is called Application & Design of CCTV by Charlie Pierce. Remember a CCTV system is not a security system in and of itself, but it is a part of an overall security system and is used to enhance security by documenting what is happening in critical areas. When the system is set to record on motion or in conjunction with a another security system it becomes a powerful tool in the security industry’s arsenal. There are different types of systems, wired, and wireless, fixed cameras, Pan Tilt Zoom (PTZ) cameras, black and white and color cameras to choose from. A word about dummy cameras, DO NOT USE THEM, or you are setting yourself up for a False Sense of Security claim. A dummy camera is made to look like a real camera except that there is nothing inside the housing so nothing is viewed or recorded. If you feel the urge to use a dummy camera then why not install the real camera instead. The money you think you are saving is not worth the potential lawsuit settlement for negligence or false sense of security when you can’t produce a “tape” of the incident because the camera is a fake. When you place a camera in an area the public perception is that the area needs to be watched and that you are watching the area and it is safe. With that being said let’s now explore the basic components of a CCTV system. Figure 8-1 shows a CCTV system with a MUX and monitor.

CCTV SYSTEM COMPONENTS—CAMERA The first component is the camera. The camera is what captures the image. The camera has two main components, the lens and the housing. Cameras are either black and white or color. Black and white cameras need less light to produce a good quality picture. Color cameras on the other hand need more light and today there are cameras that are color in the daytime and black white at night or other times of low light. The lens is what captures the images and it is the “camera”. The flowing are some of the lens sizes. The most common lens measurements are: • 2.8mm • 3.2mm

Video Surveillance

209

FIGURE 8-1 CCTV system with a MUX and monitor.

• 4.2mm • 6mm • 8mm • 12mm • 16mm There are three main types of lenses: • Fixed focus lens has a preset focal length and the lens calculator will help in choosing the angle of view. The lens has two main angles of view.

210


Q

30 degree for a narrow view

Q

60 degree for a wider view

• Varifocal lens is more flexible than the fixed focus lens and can be adjusted manually to obtain the field of view desired. • Zoom lens is just as the name implies and can be adjusted to zoom in very close or to a wide angle setting. The lens provides the widest variety of settings and is the most complex lens. The lens can be adjusted remotely by an operator in a central monitoring station. So to select the proper lens takes a little bit of work but in the long run it is worth the effort. You won’t need to wait until an event only to find out the recording of the incident does not meet your objective for the system to identify the perpetrator and the activity being performed at the time of the recording. The Charged Coupled Device (CCD) chip is the imaging device of the camera and the common sizes are listed below. The CCD light sensitive and it is what forms the image in most cameras today and the size is measured diagonally. The first two listed below are the most common on the market today. The 1/4" is starting to be more available and the 2/3" being used less frequently. • 1/3" • 1/2" • 1/4" The lens is placed in the lens mounting and the mounting is placed in the body or housing of the camera. The housing is what protects the camera from the elements, rain, ice, snow, etc. and this is important especially for outdoor cameras. Another problem with outdoor cameras is the problem of having the lens fog from changes in temperature. To prevent this from occurring, the outdoor camera housing has a heating device installed to keep the temperature from fluctuating and causing fogging of the lens. There are cameras that are used in hostile, corrosive, dusty, etc. environments inside as well as outside and they have special housings to protect them as well. The housing either has a mounting bracket or a mounting bracket can be installed. The housing can be large like those that are sometimes seen around shopping malls known as the “weather proof housing”. There are also dome housings which are smoke-colored so the position of the camera and what it is pointing toward cannot be seen. This is to prevent the intruder from knowing where the camera is pointing especially a PTZ (pan tilt zoom) if the security officer monitoring the CCTV system at the console is following the intruder using the camera in the dome.

Video Surveillance

211

The lens has an iris that regulates how much light passes through and is picked up on the image sensor. All cameras have an iris and the important thing to remember about the iris since it’s light sensitive is to not have it pointing directly into the sunlight. This will damage the lens and will also result in the images to be washed out in appearance by appearing too bright so any images are not identifiable, other than it is a person. The lens and the angle of the camera determine how much information is in the image that is sent to the monitor for review. The focal length is directly related to the angle of view depending on whether the length is short with a wide angle view or long with narrow angle of view and the focal length is measured in millimeters.

VIDEO TRANSMISSION—COAXIAL CABLE The coaxial cable is used to connect the cameras to the monitor and recorder. Coaxial cable is shielded to prevent interference for other electrical cables. There are coaxial cable connectors that are used to make the connections to the back of the MUX and monitor. These are usually screw connections called coax patch cables similar to the ones you find on your own VHS or DVR player.

Fiber Optic Cable Fiber optic cable is now being used to transmit CCTV video. The fiber optic cable turns the electronic video signal into laser light and injects into one of the glass rods, the fiber optic cable, and transmits it to a receiver. The receiver takes the laser light and coverts it back to an electronic video signal that can be displayed on a monitor. The fiber optic signal is not interrupted by water in the conduit or interference from high voltage being run the same conduit. The bandwidth of fiber optic is large.

Microwave Microwave is another method for transmitting video from a CCTV system. The microwave turns the video signal into a high frequency radio signal and the signal is transmitted from one location to another via free air waves. The receiver converts the high frequency radio signal back into video signal so it can be displayed on a monitor. Microwave transmits by line of sight and also has large bandwidth. A big disadvantage of microwave being used for video transmission is that it can be affected by weather and other climactic conditions. A heavy rain will cause the microwave transmitted video to have the video feed interrupted in transmission causing the loss of the video. This is not good when the video is critical because there may be gaps in the recorded video.

212


Multiplexer (MUX) The MUX is a device that can accept a number of cameras and record them almost simultaneously. The MUX is used in multiple camera systems to display the images on the screen in multi-split screen displays. Another name for the MUX is the “Multiplexer” and it is the switch that allows multiple cameras to be seen on one monitor. The Multiplexer can be used to transmit a number of cameras over the same transmission medium i.e. coaxial cable, Infrared, and microwave. This saves in the cost of the system since only one medium needs to be used. A good feature of the multiplexer is that during playback it allows for viewing only certain frames from the same camera. The camera can viewed in full screen which is duplexing.

DISPLAYING VIDEO—MONITOR A TV that is used to display the video either in real time or playback of recorded video is called a monitor. The number of lines of resolution that the monitor can produce relates to the quality of the picture. For example, a monitor that produces 1,000 lines of resolution will have a much clearer, sharper picture than one that produces 300 lines of resolution. With some of the systems today the video can be displayed on a computer monitor. To display the video on a monitor the system coaxial cable is connected from the multiplexer to the video monitor. Monitors come in all shapes and sizes and any TV monitor can display the video using the video input jack. The information that was presented above is the basics of a CCTV system. The intent of the presentation is not to make any CCTV “experts” but to acquaint those that will be preparing security design specifications for a project to understand enough about the systems to know what to look for in the design and to prepare some basic systems design specifications based the needs of the project.

RECORDERS—VCR The recording of CCTV system images has evolved from VTR through VCR to digital recorders. The VCR recorders used time lapse recordings. Time lapse was used to slow down the recording rate by recording the tape in steps, one frame at a time, to extend the recording time of the tape. A frame is one complete TV picture and is made of two fields. There are 25 frames per second in a TV picture. For example a 3-hour tape can have the extended recording time of 960 hours using the time lapse format. The problem with time lapse recording is, that if is done over a long period of time, there is a great deal of activity that is lost and not recorded since the picture is made of 25 frames per second and the recorder is recording one frame at a time. Some frames do not get recorded and they may have the image we are looking for. The reason for using time lapse was

Video Surveillance

213

because the cameras would be recording everything that happened and, yes, that includes nothing, 24 hours a day, seven days a week. When there was no one available to change the tapes, the time lapse on a three-day holiday weekend would last the weekend. When it was necessary to review the tapes for an investigation without a time or at least an approximate time of the occurrence the investigator would spend hours upon hours going through the tapes without any luck of seeing and recording of the event. Even with a time of occurrence there may not be an image because of the way the time lapse recording is done, frame by frame, the event may not show up on the recording.

Digital Video Recorders (DVR) Digital Video Recorders (DVR) does not use tape. The recording is done on a hard computer drive. No worry that the tape was not changed or none was in the recorder so there was no recording made or the tape was used too many times so the recordings are of poor quality. DVR also makes it easier to search the drive for the images you are looking for by showing the alarm points. The DVR works well with the cameras that are set to record on motion using infrared. The recorder can be programmed to record on motion everything that happens starting at 7:00 pm or 1900 hours until 7:00 am or 0700 everyday. So when you want to see an event you can go to the alarm point which detects movement or a change in the video motion on the hard drive to view the recording. Viewing the video you can look for changes in the scene to see what occurred. Frames per second (fps) are the number of frames that are recorded in one second. The recordings are done in real time which is approximately 30 frames per second (fps) per camera and not time lapse, so frames are not omitted that could contain the information you need. The DVR takes the analog signal, converts it to digital, and compresses it. The DVR are equipped to handle 4, 8, 16, or 32 camera inputs on the same recorder. So the system can grow with your needs. One camera will use approximately 2 gigs a day of drive space. If you have a 4 camera system, then you will use 8 gigs a day of space. If you don’t have any movement or change in the field of view then the system will not record so drive space will not be a problem. If on the other hand there is a great deal of movement, then more recording will take place and more hard drive space will be used. When the hard drive is filled, the recordings will start recording over what is already on the drive. For a very large system a disk array is used and can be cataloged into a juke box for searching and viewing at a later time. Very large CCTV systems utilize a juke box storage system the recorded images, the information, is kept in the juke box for a specified period of time and when the predetermined time limit has passed, the disks are reused to record new images.

214


The DVR can also be PC based rather stand-alone. The PC-based DVR records on the hard drive of the computer. PC-based systems can be unstable because the PC itself is unstable. An embedded DVR is designed to work as a DVR and is more stable and reliable since there are few moving parts.

WIRELESS CAMERAS Most of the wireless cameras transmitters in use today only have a short range of between 300 to 700 feet distance. The systems operate on 900 GHz and 2.8 GHz. The 900 GHz systems have a range of 300 feet and the 2.8 GHz system has a range of 300 to 700 feet. There is a 5.8 GHz system that has a range of 7 miles but it is not widely used because of the high cost. Like all radio transmissions the FCC regulates the wireless CCTV systems which the manufacturers of the equipment obtain, but the systems cannot be modified without FCC approval. The FCC also limits the number of transmitters on a site to four channels. The number of receivers is not limited by the FCC. The problem with wireless CCTV systems is that the signal may be blocked by microwave, high voltage power lines, and heavy metal walls. There are applications where wireless cameras will work well but remember the limitations on distances and know what will cause interference with the reception.

IP ADDRESSABLE CAMERAS A digital camera captures the image, digitizes the image and sends it via the LAN to a server that manages the information received. The server can record the information, display it on a monitor, and retransmits it over the LAN to remote locations. The IP cameras uses the CCD chip for digitizing the images and streams the video (sends) over the LAN using CAT 5 cable and the TCP/IP protocol. The video images use a great deal of bandwidth so the streaming of video may not be a good idea unless the pipe you have at your disposal is large enough to be unaffected by the large video streaming over the LAN. Check with the IT person before planning the use of real time streaming video to make sure it will not affect the rest of the LAN users. All devices that traverse the Internet need an address and the CCTV cameras, recorders, multiplexers, etc. all need addresses. The IT people will provide the necessary block of addresses to be used. Without an address the cameras and other equipment will not be reachable over the LAN. The use of the LAN to send CCTV images to a server and remote locations has distinct advantages: • The information can be shared quickly with remote sites so they can be provided with details of an incident. • For investigative purposes, the information can be analyzed quickly even from a remote location.

Video Surveillance

215

• Monitoring of remote locations can be done more economically from one location as long as there are procedures for addressing incidents at the remote location, such as emergency phone numbers. • The recording of the video cannot be tampered with even if the local recorder is destroyed. The disadvantages of using the LAN for CCTV are: • The amount of bandwidth used is large. • Sensitive video may need to be encrypted using more bandwidth. • Like all computer information it must be backed up in case of a server failure or hard drive crash.

BASIC SYSTEM DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS The steps in preparing the design specifications for a CCTV system are as follows. • The first step is to do a site assessment or proposed site assessment based on the following. The CAP Index is a good tool to help assess the crime and the potential for crime at the location as well as the following: Q

Q

What is the threat? What types of things may occur. For example, in a parking garage is vehicle thefts or crimes against persons? (CAP Index)

Q

What assets are we trying to protect from the threat?

Q

What is the potential loss that could occur from the threat?

• The second step is to do a vulnerability analysis. Q

What is the likelihood of occurrence of the threat?

Q

What will be the consequences?

Q

What will be the loss?

Q

Is there a liability issue?

• Do a complete survey of the location or proposed location as outlined in Chapter 2. This is important since the CCTV system is a part of the overall security system for the location. • Now do a threat assessment. This will help in the decision-making of whether to install cameras, where to install the cameras, and how many. This is accomplished by taking all the information collected in the site assessment and using it to make an informed decision on the use of a CCTV system.

216


Why is it so important to do the tedious job of the site assessment and the threat and vulnerability analysis? Why not just place cameras around the perimeter, doors, windows, fence lines, etc.? The upfront work will be time well-spent because the dividends of a well-designed CCTV system will yield good results in both deterring crime and catching and prosecuting those who commit crimes at the location. A number of CCTV systems are just thrown together. The camera locations are picked at random or with some idea of what is to be the expected outcome only to be disappointed when the images did not catch the perpetrators in the act. So the money spent on the system coupled with the resulting loss was money wasted. To improve the use of CCTV as a tool, planning is the key. Now you have the information needed to make a decision on the use of CCTV as one of the tools in the overall security plan for the location. To address the design considerations for the system the following checklist will help guide you through the process. The information collected in the threat and vulnerability analysis and the site assessment will help you in completing the checklist below. • What is the objective of the CCTV system? Q

To monitor

Q

To detect

Q

To recognize

Q

To identify

Q

Other, to deter

• What targets are going to have surveillance? Q

Persons

Q

Groups of individuals

Q

Objects/packages

Q

Vehicles

Q

Entrances

Q

Point of sale

Q

Other

• What activities are important? Q

Assaults, robberies

Q

Vehicle theft

Q

Damage to property

Video Surveillance

Q

Burglary

Q

Intruders

Q

Other

217

• What is the purpose of the surveillance? Q

Person

Q

Monitor

Q

Detect

Q

Recognize

Q

Identify

Q

Other

• How important is the clarity of the video image (recordings and real time)? Q

Ability to identify a perpetrator

Q

Identify what the perpetrator is doing

Q

Identify a vehicle license plate

Q

Identify the clothes the perpetrator was wearing (color camera)

Q

Other

• When is surveillance needed? Q

After hours only (after normal business hours) and on weekends

Q

24 hours a day

Q

Every day

Q

Every night

Q

Walking tours for security officers

Q

Other

• What actions will the video surveillance bring? Q

Immediate response

Q

Investigation

Q

Other

• Is the lighting adequate for the camera? Q

Outside cameras

218


Q

Inside cameras

Q

Color vs. black and white

• How will the system be monitored? Q

By security officers

Q

Just for recording

Q

Other

By conscientiously completing the checklist answering the questions in all 7 sections you will now have a good idea of what the CCTV system is going to do enhance the site security. It is important to know what images are important. For example, if you need to identify people then designing a system that will only monitor the scene will not provide the level of CCTV quality you need and are expecting. The checklist will help in camera, lens, and housing selection.

The Selection of the Lens The selection of the lens is based on the following. Just placing any lens on the camera will not get the job done and you will not have the optimal system producing the quality and detail you want from the system. To help in choosing a camera lens there is a lens calculator that will help. Most of the CCTV vendors have an interactive lens calculator on their websites. To find a lens calculator type in the words “lens calculator” in your browser search engine and the results of the search will yield all the lens calculators on the web. Since these calculators are interactive, when you enter your data, you will get the answers on the screen. The lens calculator will give you the field of view. To do this the lens calculator asks for and will provide the following information: 1. There is a section that is the select a lens and the various lens sizes are listed to make a selection all you do is highlight the size. 2. Next there is the CCD size and the various CCD sizes are listed to make a selection you do the same thing as you did for the lens size highlight the selection. 3. Now the camera angle or reading direction selection for one of the following: a. Horizontal b. Vertical c. Diagonal 4. Now the distance to the target. This is in feet or millimeters. This is a fill in the blank. 5. There is a calculate button and the following information is provided.

Video Surveillance

219

a. The angle in degrees b. The height c. The reading direction You will notice that as you click on a different reading direction the degree of the angle changes. Also as you change the lens size the degree of the angle also changes. The results you obtained in step five above will help you place the cameras around the location. By using a scaled drawing you can site the cameras where they should be placed to meet your system’s design objectives: • Whether the camera will be an indoor or outdoor installation. It is recommended that if the camera is to be used in an indoor setting that color be selected since it will enhance identification of people. • Will the camera be used for identifying a person or activity? • The distance that the person or activity will be identified.

Selection of the Housing The selection of the housing is based on whether the camera will be an indoor or outdoor installation. For outdoor installation the camera housing needs to be weatherproof to protect it from the elements. The use of PTZ cameras will need to be determined in the planning phase. There is no sense in paying for PTZ cameras if the system will not be monitored by security officers 24 hours a day. Fixed cameras will be installed if there are not security officers on the site or at remote station to monitor the CCTV system, which will save money. These housings give away where the camera is pointing; the domes on the other hand do not.

Camera Placement The next part of the design will be camera placement. Camera placement will depend on the answers you get from sections 2, 3, 4, & 5 above. This is the heart of the system and the system will be designed and installed to meet the desired needs and wants from the system. For example, if the recognition and identity of perpetrators and their activity is important, then the cameras need to be placed so that objective is met. The following must be decided if the cameras are to meet the objective: • The proper camera angle is important because along with the lens and will determine what is captured by the camera. • If the cameras will not be monitored by security officers, then fixed cameras will be installed.

220


Table 8-1 Reflective light sensitivity. Location

Empty asphalt Trees, grass Face Caucasian Red bricks Concrete unpainted Concrete with matt white paint Glass Snow

Reflectance Value

5% 20% 25% 35% 40% 60% 70% 85%

• The fixed cameras must have the proper lens, be placed at the proper angle and at the right distance so the objective is met of identifying the perpetrators and their activity. To help with the camera placement you can use a drawing that has the layout of the area, site, etc. and mark the camera locations on the drawing so you have a reference point to start from. The lens calculator will help with the placement of the cameras since you will know the distance and angle that is optimal for the most common lenses that are available and for the CCD sizes of the camera. The calculator will give the field of view for each of the lenses listed, and the CCD sizes based on the distance and angle of the camera.

LIGHTING The lighting for the proposed location that the camera will be viewing needs to be the minimum required for the camera to be effective, usually .2fc. Remember color cameras need more light. Table 9-1 provides some light reflectance percentages for common objects and things. The chart is important for determining the camera’s sensitivity, which is the amount of reflective light sensitivity a camera would need to operate in the environment. To determine the sensitivity needed there is a simple equation that can be used. Available light expressed in foot-candles 2 the reflectance value 4 the reflectance value.

Video Surveillance

221

For example: you have 4fc of light and the camera is viewing a matt painted concrete wall which has 60% reflectance for the background then, 4fc 2 .6 4 .24fc reflective light so you need a camera that has a sensitivity of .24fc of reflective light. The light sensitivity of a camera is on the manufacturer’s spec. sheet under “camera sensitivity”.


CHAPTER

Heavy Equipment Security

9

T

he securing of heavy equipment, portable equipment, tools, and materials are an important part of the security plan. Protecting equipment from theft is important since the theft of heavy and portable equipment is a growing and costly problem at job sites. The actual total loss from the theft of heavy equipment is not known but it is estimated by the National Insurance Crime Bureau to be $1 billion per year. The Insurance Services Office, Inc. (ISO) says that equipment thefts have risen 20% per year since 1996. The loss of heavy equipment by theft is estimated to be 50% of all losses by the ISO. The total loss from theft is considerably larger than the loss of equipment due to an accident such as a crane failing and collapsing. The problem needs to be addressed because it is causing some construction companies to go out of business. Not all the losses are reported to insurance companies and if a company has too many claims (losses) the insurance will become too costly for the company to afford forcing them out of business. By developing sound security countermeasures at the job sites the risk of thefts can be reduced which helps keep insurance rates down. What is driving the thefts is the high demand for the heavy equipment so there is a market for selling the stolen equipment. Most of the time, the equipment is stolen to fill an order. The thieves take orders and then go out and find the equipment and steal it to satisfy the order. The thieves need only 15 minutes or less to take the equipment, so if it looks like it will take more than 15 minutes they will go to another location. Hardening of the job site is an important deterrent to the equipment and material. Materials are also frequently stolen from job sites. If the job site will have a great deal of materials for construction on the site like wood, trusses, and other lumber it is probably a good idea to keep the materials in a fenced in area. The fence should be chain link with barbed wire on top. CCTV and good lighting will help to keep the materials secure. Materials should not be stored in any other


224


area that is not secured, especially at the end of the work day. To help minimize the risk try not to schedule deliveries of materials on Fridays if the materials will not be used until Monday. If the delivery is necessary then immediately store the materials in the secure locked fenced area. Make sure the lighting is sufficient to illuminate the area and not provide dark areas where thieves can hide. Make sure the CCTV system for the materials storage area is working properly, and as an extra precaution, hire security officers to cover the weekend shifts. The loss of heavy equipment is an issue that needs attention to save money and aggravation. Keys for any piece of equipment can be purchased from online auction houses. The keys will start any almost any piece of equipment. There are things that can be done to help minimize the risk to heavy equipment, portable equipment, and tools from the exposure to theft. The chapter will outline some of the steps that can be taken to help reduce the risk and harden the job site.

HARDENING THE JOB SITE We have been talking about hardening the job site throughout this book. Hardening the job site includes the following: 1. Develop a site security plan 2. Implement perimeter security 3. Fence in heavy equipment on the site when not in use 4. Provide security lighting around equipment fenced area 5. Use security officers 6. Use CCTV The first step is to develop a plan for the job site. The plan will help in guiding the job site through the process of developing a security plan but like any plan it needs to be updated to remain current so it can continue to provide value in helping the job site become and remain secure or hardened. Remember the objective of the security plan is to build in layers of security to thwart the thieves by making the job site appear to be a hardened site so thieves will think twice about attempting to steal anything. Preparing a plan is the first step. Now the plan serves no purpose if is not implemented. So the second step is to implement the plan. The implementation of the plan is an important phase. It is the first step to securing the job site and protecting the heavy equipment and tools from theft. All the heavy equipment should be placed in a chain link fenced area when not in use. The fence should have barbed wire on the top. The fenced-in equipment area will provide another layer of security for the thief to overcome. The more layers of security the harder it is for the thief to steal the equipment.


225

Security lighting should be used all over the job site but it is especially important for the equipment storage area. The more lighting that is focused on the equipment the better. The bright security lighting will be a deterrent to the thief. Using security officers to patrol the site is an effective way to deter the equipment thieves especially for job sites in high crime areas. The thieves want to be able to go in, get the equipment, and be out, all within 15 minutes so they are not detected. The fear of detection is their biggest threat and it also the greatest ally of the job site when it comes to protecting the equipment and tools. By having roving unscheduled security officers patrol, even if they are not assigned to the site, will help in the appearance that the job site is a hardened target so they think twice about entering the site to steal the equipment. Just having security officers on the job site will not by itself discourage thefts. The security officers need to be proactive and record, and challenge unknown persons that are attempting to enter the job site after hours. Any surveillance of the job site or attempt to enter the job site by unauthorized persons needs to be recorded in the DAR (Daily Activity Report) in detail with descriptions of the persons and names if possible. The security can ask for a driver’s license for identification and to record in their log book. Any vehicle associated with the unknown persons should be recorded as well, including the license plate, make model, color and year of the vehicle and any visible damage including the location. The more detail the officer can provide, the better. The information can be given to local law enforcement. If unknown persons enter the site the local police should called to report that there are trespassers on the job site. CCTV is a deterrent because thieves want to be anonymous and the presence of the CCTV cameras maybe a deterrent. CCTV is a useful tool especially in high crime area job sites. The CCTV cameras need adequate lighting for nighttime images to be of any value. Also the CCTV system must be designed properly to be effective. Chapter 8 has details on the design of CCTV systems. Any CCTV recordings of trespassers should be given to local law enforcement. The police may recognize some of the individuals that are on the job site unauthorized. Any attempt to enter the site that is recorded by the CCTV system should also be given to local law enforcement. The physical security countermeasures that can be used to harden the job site are outlined throughout the book. Physical security is the first line of defense in protecting the heavy equipment from theft.

PROTECTING EQUIPMENT Equipment security encompasses the heavy equipment used on the job site. The protection of the equipment from vandalism and theft is usually overlooked. There are things that can be done to help secure the equipment. 1. Kill Switches—The use of an engine kill switch to prevent the starting of the

226


equipment by unauthorized persons. The switch will not allow fuel or electricity to flow to the engine. All heavy construction equipment made by the same manufacturer will have the same key, known as a universal key, which will work any of the same equipment by that manufacturer. So that is where the kill switch will be of benefit. Even with the key the equipment cannot be started when a kill switch is installed. 2. Keys with Chips—Some equipment manufacturers are now making keys that have a chip installed in the key so the key can be coded to the same code for all the company’s equipment. 3. Mark all equipment—Prominently mark all heavy equipment with the company’s name to deter thieves. For example, mark the name of the company using a welder’s torch in places where the police can see it if the equipment was stolen. By marking the equipment in this way thieves are less likely to steal the equipment. 4. Notification to manufacturer and law enforcement—Notify the manufacturer and the law enforcement immediately when equipment is stolen. Provide the serial and model number. 5. Use of unique paints on the equipment will make it harder for thieves to hide the equipment to sell it easily. 6. The use of tracking devices so when a piece of equipment is stolen it can be tracked. 7. Store equipment in a designated area at the end of the shift and/or work day. The use of kill switches is becoming a more widely used practice. The kill switches as described above will not permit the engine to be started, even with a key, because no electricity or fuel will flow to the engine. They are simple to install and should be mounted on every piece of heavy equipment on the job site. The kill switches add another layer of security to the heavy equipment. First, is to move all equipment when not in use to the fenced locked area on the job site. Second, is the mounting of kill switches on all of the heavy equipment to help further secure the equipment. Keys with chips in them are now becoming available. The chip allows the owner of the equipment to select a code that can be used on all of the keys for all the equipment made by the manufacturer. The chip will not permit the piece of equipment to be started unless it has the proper code. This will help minimize the impact of the one key fits and works all equipment. Unfortunately the use of the chip is not widely used to date but is gaining in popularity. Several manufacturers have adopted the concept and Caterpillar is one of them. The key is known as the “Machine Security System” and allows the user to program in the code. The Caterpillar equipment cannot be started without the coded key.


227

Mark equipment in such a way as to deter the thief. Thieves do not want to steal equipment that has the company name and logo permanently etched into the metal. Welding is one method to do this and it will hard to remove. The pasting of a logo and company name on the equipment cannot be easily removed and will provide much protection against theft. The marking of the equipment should be prominently located to deter the thieves. The location chosen for the markings should be where it can be seen by anyone looking at the equipment. For example, mark the boom of a telescopic crane on both sides to discourage the thieves. The marking of equipment adds another layer of protection. Keeping the serial numbers and any PIN (product identification number) number will assist the police when equipment is stolen. Since most heavy construction equipment does not need to be , the equipment does not have a VIN (vehicle identification number) number, it has a PIN number instead. There is no uniformity to the Pin numbers and they vary in format so are similar to VIN numbers because they use letters and numbers. Others are five numbers or more with no letters. The PIN number is more valuable than the model number or equipment number for locating the vehicle. Law enforcement can use the PIN number to help recover the stolen equipment. The PIN numbers need to be recorded correctly by the company that owns the equipment and stored for future reference if needed. The problems that occur with the PIN numbers are that they are recorded incorrectly or not recorded at all. Some of the heavy equipment needs to be registered and by having the PIN or VIN number and reporting it stolen, it will make it harder for the purchaser of the stolen equipment to register it. The problem is that not all construction equipment needs to be registered because it is not driven on the public streets. It is delivered to the job site on a flatbed truck. But the PIN number can still be a good identifier of heavy equipment. Notifying law enforcement immediately about the theft of heavy equipment may make it easier to locate and recover the equipment. Serial and PIN numbers will help the police as will any prominent markings of the company name and logo. Finally, reward signs should be posted around the job site perimeter fence as well as the fence for the idle equipment storage stating that any information leading to the recovery of the stolen equipment will be rewarded. Also the signs should have information that the serial numbers and VIN numbers are recorded and will be given to law enforcement if the equipment is stolen. Also reward decals can be placed on the equipment to help thwart thieves. In all job site thefts of equipment, trespassing should be investigated. The reason for investigating all incidents will help in determining if the site is being targeted and by whom. Periodically it is a good idea to check online auction sales of equipment since sometimes the stolen equipment is sold through these online auctions. Also, sometimes some of the smaller equipment like Bobcats is sold at large flea markets.

228


The type of heavy equipment that is frequently stolen from job sites is as follows: 1. Loaders 2. Skid steers (Bobcats) 3. Backhoes The newer heavy equipment is an attractive target for the thieves. To help secure the equipment and add another layer of security the name and logo of the company can be bead-welded into the equipment and the bead-weld can be painted with a unique paint to make it stand out. For example, the paint can be a fluorescent orange or lime green. The painting of the bead-weld will make it more difficult for the thief since the name and logo will stand out and in order to remove the paint the equipment will need to be grinded down and repainted, something the thief may not want to do. The installation of tracking devices on heavy equipment is another method of securing the equipment. The tracking devices use GPS to track the location of the stolen heavy equipment and is similar to those devices found in other vehicles. LoJack™ will help track a stolen vehicle and will work to track heavy equipment as well. LoJack™ is radio tracking system that can be covertly installed on a vehicle. The antennas mounted on the equipment will also be a deterrent to thieves that a LoJack™ system is on the equipment. Thieves will avoid the equipment and go to a site where LoJack™ equipment is not used and, according to thieves, there is plenty of heavy equipment that is not protected by LoJack™ GPS systems. LoJack™ in 2002 had an 87% recovery rate of all stolen heavy equipment that had LoJack™ installed on it before the theft. When a vehicle with a LoJack™ installed is stolen and reported, the radio equipment is activated remotely by a transponder and the police have a LoJack™ tracking device to locate the stolen equipment. The LoJack™ uses satellite tracking (GPS) to track the stolen equipment. Insurers may offer a premium discount for installing a LoJack™ on a piece of heavy equipment. Do not leave equipment scattered all over the job site at the end of the work day. This makes it easy for thieves to steal since it won’t be missed as quickly if all the equipment was stored lined up in rows. It is hard to keep track of equipment when it is spread out over the job site. Thieves either caught or remaining anonymous in interviews have said they will avoid equipment that is in rows since it will be easy to notice missing equipment.

PROTECTING TOOLS AND PORTABLE EQUIPMENT Thefts on job sites are not just a problem that plagues the heavy equipment, tools and small equipment is stolen as well. For example, portable generators are a hot


229

commodity especially the large ones that can be towed by a pickup truck. Small generators are stolen as well. Other equipment that is stolen is as follows: • Welding equipment • Portable saws • Generators • Roto hammers • Concrete cutting saw blades • Air compressors • Hand tools • Survey equipment • Nail guns • Screw guns • Pick up trucks • Pneumatic tools • Grinders • Other tools Thefts of tools can become a problem if they go unchecked. To address the issue of tools theft, the following steps can be taken: 1. Establish an inventory control system of all the tools on the job site. 2. Record the serial numbers of all the power tools including the source like air compressors for pneumatic tools. 3. Mark all tools with company logo and name using a welder’s torch to beadweld the company’s name and logo on the tool. 4. For generators or any other tools with wheels immobilize them by using a boot like the police do. The boot fits over the wheel and locks the wheel so the vehicle cannot be moved. 5. Paint the tools, especially over the inventory number that is in plain sight, with a unique paint such as fluorescent orange or lime green. Use the same color for all the company’s equipment. 6. Store tools in secure location. Use steel flexible security cables and padlocks to secure the tools even they are stored in a van or trailer.

230


7. Use a heavy duty case-hardened steel hasp and lock with a guard for tool storage vans, sheds, and/or trailers. 8. Lock all gang boxes when not in use and in plain sight to minimize the risk of theft. Establishing an inventory control system is a simple process to develop but the key is in using it. The process could be as follows: • Mark each tool with a number. There should be two places where the number is stamped, one in plain sight and the other hidden. Use a documented check out and check in system for all tools and portable equipment. This is where the numbering system will help to make sure the tool that is returned is the one that was checked out. • Next is the development of a tracking table or sheet. Nobody likes paperwork or adding another step to doing the job but a good inventory system is just as important as keeping good records for accounting purposes. • Knowing how many tools and where they are important to controlling costs. Tools are assets that the company owns and it is important for accounting purpose to know the value of the tools along with other assets like the heavy equipment, helps determine the value of the company. • The trick is to keep the inventory system as simple as possible and still provide the protection of the tools. The sample check out/check in system sheets can be computerized at the end of the shift by scanning them into the files. This will ensure a permanent record that will back up the paper record. • There are ways to computerize the entire process even the signing for the tools. We have all seen the grocery store signing pads for credit card use. The same type of display and signing pad can be used for the tool check out/check in process. This will help streamline the process and make it easier to use. Of course the hard copy check out/check in tool sheets can still be used. The person in charge of tools would print and the sign their name. The person handing out the tools will verify the identification of the person signing out the tool by asking for a driver’s license, union card and/or subcontract company identification card. The license, union card and/or the subcontractor company card will be used to verify the signature as well. • Audits should be done at least monthly and any outstanding tools need to be tracked down and letters sent to the subcontractor whose employee signed for the tools or portable equipment. The name of the employee, description of the tool or piece of portable equipment, and date it was checked out will be provided. Hand tools like hammers and screwdrivers will not have letters sent out unless the dollar amount of the tools reaches over $200.

231


• The electronic tracking system can be designed to automatically generate the letters after the one month period if the tools and equipment that are not returned as a reminder. At the end of the project there should not be any tools unaccounted for. • Reimbursement for lost, damaged or unreturned tools will come out of the money to be paid to the subcontractor for the work performed and will be stated so in the original subcontract agreement signed at the start of the job. The tool and portable equipment return and reimbursement policy will be presented as part of the job site orientation program so there will not be any misunderstanding of the policy. For all power tools in addition to the internal number system record all serial numbers, model numbers and manufacturer’s names on the inventory sheet. Table 9-1 is sample inventory sheet that can be used to record information about the tools. The inventory system will help provide the records necessary for any tool that will help the police possibly locate them if they are stolen. The inventory will provide the stamped number that is on the tool. The hand tools like hammers and screwdrivers, should be tracked. For the more expensive portable equipment pictures of the hidden stamped number should be taken. To help reduce the attractiveness of stealing portable equipment the following can be done: • Use a wheel boot on one of the equipment’s wheels • Place reward decals on the equipment since thieves would rather steal equipment that has no markings. • Bead-weld the company logo and name onto the equipment • Cover the bead-weld with a special paint such as fluorescent orange or lime green.

Table 9-1 Sample inventory sheet. Description

Inventory

Check Out

Check In

Verified

Number/ Serial Number for Power Tools

Name/Print/Sign Company/Date

Name/Print/Sign Company/Date

By/Date Sign/Print

232


Think of the decals, the wheel boot and any other markings of the company logo being bead-welded onto the equipment as a deterrent to theft. These are prevention methods that do work. The thieves are looking for easy pickings and, if the portable equipment is marked, it is less likely to be a target of the thief since the chance of being caught is increased. There are plenty of other job sites for the thief to go where the pickings are easier since there are not any security countermeasures in place. Paint the stamped inventory or bead-welded number with a unique paint. This will make it easier to spot the tools and identify them as the company’s especially if the same unique paint is used for all of the company’s equipment. The painting of the tools and equipment will make them less attractive for the thieves. The storing of tools need to be done so that it makes it harder for the thieves to get their hands on them. Using a steel cable with a padlock to secure them, even when they are stored in a locked van or trailer, will add another layer of security. The more layers, the harder it will be for thieves to steal the tools and the less likely the thieves will target the job site. The use of heavy duty case-hardened steel hasps and padlocks will help secure the tools that are stored inside of vans, sheds, and/or trailers. Make sure to also install a guard to minimize the risk of the lock being cut off. Also implement a key control system to help keep the keys to the padlocks installed on the vans, sheds and/or trailers from falling into the wrong hands. As a part of the site security plan make sure that all gang boxes are locked when not in plain sight of the owners or not in use, especially during breaks, to help minimize the temptation and risk of theft. The same types of cables and locks used on other tool storage areas will also work on the gang boxes. The use of heavy duty case-hardened steel hasps and padlocks with guards will help secure the tools.

NATIONAL DATABASES There are now national databases of heavy equipment. One such database is maintained by the National Equipment Registry (NER). The National Equipment Registry’s purpose is to increase the recovery rate of stolen equipment and to reduce the number of heavy equipment thefts that are occurring every year. There is an annual fee to register equipment with NER. The fee is based on the number of heavy equipment registrations for 51 to 100 pieces of equipment. The fee is $700 per year, for over 100 pieces. The interested party is instructed to contact NER. The NER website is www.nerusa.com and information about the costs can be found there. NER also has a lifetime registration fee of $30 per piece of equipment. There are also partner discounts for registrations and one of the partners is the Insurance Services Office, Inc. which may be available through the company’s insurance plan.


233

The fees are used to provide the services offered by NER. The main service is a database of all the registered equipment that can be called 24 hours a day, 7 days a week to report stolen equipment. When the owner reports the piece of equipment stolen, the information in the database is provided to law enforcement so the equipment can be recovered. NER provides decals stating that the equipment is registered with NER and even if the decal is removed by thieves the equipment is still registered and can still be tracked. The decal states the equipment PIN is registered. The NER also provides theft prevention training to its members. The NER has filled the void of not having a 24/7 hotline for law enforcement to contact to help in the investigation of heavy equipment thefts from construction job sites.

INVESTIGATE ALL JOB SITE THEFTS All thefts should be reported and investigated. The job site should have a procedure to report all thefts that occur. The procedure should have the following elements: 1. Report all thefts to a company supervisor and team leaders. 2. Supervisors report theft to key company personnel and the local police. 3. Training for supervisors and team leaders in what to do when theft is suspected. 4. Key company personnel names and local police phone numbers should be provided to all work crews. 5. Periodically check flea markets and online auctions for equipment sales. 6. Examine recovered property that the police have in their possession. The investigation of thefts on the job site may sound like overkill, but think about this for a minute. There is a theory related to crime that is known as the “Broken Window Theory”. If there are broken windows in a neighborhood and they are not repaired, it will lead to other broken windows. The theory basically says that other and more serious crime will occur since, by not fixing the windows, the impression is given that no one cares. The same approach has been taken by communities to eliminate graffiti as soon as it happens. Which brings us back to our original idea of investigating thefts on the job site no matter how small. This may prevent or uncover some larger theft or a ring working on the inside to steal tools and equipment. This is what happens when investigations are done. Sometimes they lead to uncovering of a larger problem. The investigations can be done by outside firms that specialize in private investigations. These companies are licensed and bonded and have trained investigators.


CHAPTER

Electronic Access Control

10

E

lectronic access control is used to enhance the other physical security safeguards such as the perimeter fence, barriers, and intrusion detection devices, to aid in the preclusion of unauthorized entry. An access control system can minimize pilfering, loss of assets like desk top computers, personal and company property including the loss intellectual property, through the use of a package control system. Also the introduction of harmful materials, devices, and compounds to the site is minimized by a good access control system. The administration and procedures of the access control system like access control lists, personnel recognition, ID cards, badges, and personal escorts all contribute to an effective access control system. An important component of the access control system is the hardware that reads the badges and permits access to the site by unlocking the entry doors and operating the perimeter fence gates, etc. This chapter will focus on the hardware of the access control system as well the types of systems. Access control systems have been used for a long time to control entry to site. The systems can be a simple as a lock and on a door, to more sophisticated electronic systems. This chapter will focus on the electronic access control systems. The basic premise of an electronic access control system is based on the concept of something you have or are. The something you have could be a PIN number for a keypad for a cipher lock, an ID access card with or without a picture, or a key fob. The ID card is the size of a credit card. When the card is inserted or read by placing it near the reader the information on the card about the whether the person has access or not is verified in the access control system’s data base the system sends a signal to operate an electric strike or magnetic lock to release the door for entry. The keypad works in a similar fashion except in most cases the system is connected to a main or head end part of the system by punch-


236


ing in the right set of numbers the lock will be released on the door and the person will be able to enter. Sometimes the keypads operate an electric or magnetic strike but the majority of the keypad lock systems work a mechanical lock to open the door. The other system for access is based on something you are. The system works on biometrics. When choosing a biometric device it is a good idea to combine it with a card system. This way there are two different checks before access is granted, an access card and reader which pulls the template from storage and the biometric reader or scanner. There is difference between identification and verification. Positive identification answers the question “who am I”? The system matches the person’s identity by selecting the person’s identity from a number possible matches. Verification on the other hand addresses the issue of “I am who I say I am”. In the verification system the person is matched with a template that was captured when the person was enrolled in the system. Several types of biometric systems in use today and they are listed below. 1. The hand geometry reader 2. The finger print reader 3. Iris readers 4. Retina scans 5. Voice recognition 6. Signature recognition 7. Facial recognition

BIOMETRIC SYSTEMS—HAND GEOMETRY The hand geometry reader analyzes over 31,000 points and records over 90 separate measurements of the hand. These measurements include the width of the hand, the thickness, the length of the hand and the surface area to including the person’s grip on the palm reader are all used to verify the person’s identity that they are who they say they claiming they are. When a person places their hand on the reader the reader will match the information obtained from the reader with a template stored in the access control data base that was placed in the system when the person was enrolled into the system. To activate the hand geometry reader an access control badge is swiped at a card reader to pull up the person’s template for the match. If the person does not have access to the door the card reader light will blink red.


237

FINGERPRINT READER The fingerprint reader will analyze the fingerprint from the tip of the finger to the first knuckle. The enrollment procedure is the same as it is for the hand geometry reader. The enrollment of a person is used to create a template that is stored in the data base and matches are made to the template when a person presents an access control badge and then places their finger on the print reader. The access control badge is used to pull up the template and to ensure the person has access. If the person does not have access the card reader will blink red.

IRIS SCAN The iris recognition reader or pattern scan as it is known as and measures the unique patterns of striations, pits freckles, rifts, fibers, filaments, rings coronas, furrows, and vasculature in the person being enrolled. The person is enrolled by looking into the camera to record the Iris measurements and make a template. An access control badge and card reader is used as a part of the system just like in the hand geometry and finger print reader systems.

RETINA SCAN A retina scanner measures the elements of the blood vessel patterns of the retina. The retina is the rear portion of the eyeball. A camera is used to capture the image and a template is made that is used for verification. A card reader is also used as with the other forms of biometric readers to pull up the template to be matched. Unfortunately Iris and Retina scans have been given a bad reputation in the movies and TV shows and they have not really caught on as biometric devices for access control on a large scale.

VOICE RECOGNITION Voice recognition is another biometric system. Voice recognition analyzes the distinctive features of the voice to verify an individual. The voice can be captured a number ways including PC microphones, and telephones mobile and land. Since the medium where a voice is recorded can vary in quality it is best to record the voice on the medium that will be used to identify it later to prevent a discrepancy from the recorded voice and the voice attempting to be verified. To enroll a person is usually instructed to say a pass phrase or say a series of numbers that will be long enough to record 1 to 1 ½ seconds of speech and is asked to repeat the pass phrase or numbers several times. This makes the enrollment on this device longer than it is for the other devices.

238


False positives and negatives are an issue and need to be considered. A false positive occurs when the reader reads the hand, print Iris, and retina scans as being valid matching a valid template. A false negative occurs when the reader rejects a valid persons hand, finger print, Iris and retina scans as being invalid.

SIGNATURE RECOGNITION Signature recognition scan analyzes the strokes, speed and pressure a person uses to sign their name rather than on comparing the signatures. The physical signing of the signature is compared which is unique to an individual. There a weakness with the signature scan and that is if the person is not consistent when signing their name then they will have a tough time enrolling in the system since the physical aspects of the signing will be different. When enrolling people it must be stressed that singing in with only their initials is not acceptable. The reason is that there are too many false positives with using the initials. Using the initials does not provide enough of a writing sample for comparing the physical aspects of signing. An access control card can be used as in the systems to pull up the signature template. If the person does not have access the light on the card reader will blink red.

FACIAL RECOGNITION Facial recognition systems compare the features of the face. The features include the lines around the eye sockets, the cheek bones, the sides of the mouth, and the location of the nose and eyes. The lines near the hair lines are not used since they can be altered to change the appearance of the individual. Enrollment into the facial recognition system is easy. Several pictures are taken of the face from different sides. A template is made from the images captured. The system can be used in conjunction with an access card. The person swipes their access card and then sits or stands in front of a camera for a few seconds and the image is either matched or it is not. As in all the other systems if the person does not have access the card reader will blink red. Error rates of the devices can be disputed and it depends what type of testing was done and by whom so it is important you select the biometric system to be used after doing a thorough threat assessment and analysis. (see chapter 2 for details on threat assessments).

COMBINATION SYSTEMS Finally there are combinations of the biometric devices used for identification. What this does is it integrates two systems such as facial recognition and finger prints. Then there is something called a multimodal biometric system. This sys-


239

tem combines at least three systems for verification. For example the systems used could be hand geometry, facial recognition, and voice recognition. By using three is becomes increasingly harder to defeat the system the verification accuracy increases as well. These types of systems are expensive and would probably be used only in high security applications like government locations. There is plenty of information about biometrics on the internet. One good web site is www.biometricsinfo.org. The site provides information about the various biometric devices and applications and the information comes from the site www.IBGweb.com. Table 10-1 summarizes the biometric system’s strengths, weaknesses, and applications. Possible applications for each system are also listed in the Table 10-1.

Access Control Systems Cards There are several types of technologies used in the electronic access control cards. 1. Magnetic stripe 2. Proximity 3. Smart cards 4. Dual technology

Magnetic Stripe Magnetic stripe cards have a magnetic strip on the back of the card that contains information about the person, name, and access level. When the cardholder swipes the card the information on the strip is read and access is granted or denied based on the information on the strip. The magnetic stripe card is the most commonly used card technology. All credit cards, hotel keys, driver's licenses and ATM cards have and use magnetic strip technology to store. The cards are then read by specially designed readers that will read the information that is embedded on the magnetic stripe. The magnetic stripe is used to store the information to be read by the reader. The information on the stripe will depend on the card type. For example, a hotel key will have the room number, the person’s name, and dates of stay. A credit card will have the card (account) number, expiration date, and the name of the card holder. The card is swiped through the device that reads the magnetic stripe and in the case of access control the card holder is either granted access or denied.

Proximity Cards Proximity cards are based on Wiegand technology. Wiegand technology uses small diameter wire in short pieces embedded into a code strip in two rows. The number of codes that the card can use will depend on the numbers of wires used

240


Table 10-1 Biometric systems’ strengths and weaknesses. Type of System

Strengths

Weaknesses

Application

Hand Geometry

Resistant to fraud

Injury to hands will require re-enrollment of other hand

Data center Used with access control card

Easy to enroll Not an issue for end user

Cost Limited to 1 to 1 match

Not easily defeated

High false negatives

Differentiates between latex print and real

Injury to finger will case false negative

Unique in each individual

People are afraid to use it. Negative perception

Fingerprint

Iris Recognition

Easy to enroll Retina Scan

Unique in each individual Easy to enroll

Data center - Used with access control card

Sensitive government operations

Same as for the Iris scan…people Sensitive are afraid to use it. Negative government facilities perception

Voice Recognition

Highly resistant to imposter attacks

Need to enroll on the system that will be used to identify the voice later

Data center - Used with access control card

Signature Recognition

No perception of invasiveness

Enrollment can be a problem if the person does not sign their names consistently will be rejected People who sign only their initials will be rejected

Data centers - Used with access control card

High rates of false positives…and false negatives Lighting can be a problem

Airports

Facial Recognition

Difficult to forge since it is not the signature by the way it is signed People are accustomed to providing signatures Easy to enroll…person sits or stands in front of a camera No negative public perception like Iris and Retina scans


241

and can have a large number of codes. The wire used is a special alloy wire that has magnetic properties. The code strip is then embedded into an access control or other type of identification card the size of a credit card. When the access control card is presented to the reader the coded information on the card is read by the reader. This is done because the code strip embedded in the card produces a small strong electric signal which is picked up by the coil in the reader. Based on the coded signal the card holder is either granted or denied access through the door where the card was presented.

Smart Cards Smart card technology is a computer chip that is embedded in to the card. The chip is programmable and the information from the access control system data base is used to provide information to the chip. The type of information would vary but will definitely have access codes (levels) and the card holder’s name. Other information could be added such as credit for use at a company cafeteria, store, etc. to purchase items and the amount would get deducted from the card like a telephone prepay card. The information is then downloaded to the card when the card is printed. The card is read when is it is presented to the reader by swiping it in front of the reader.

Dual Technology Cards Dual technology cards have two types of technologies on the card. For example the card is a proximity card for access to the buildings and the other could a magnetic stripe on the back of the card that can be used as a part of the company’s property pass system when employees remove company property. The magnetic stripe would be read using a magnetic stripe reader. A bar code could be used as well in lieu of the magnetic stripe. It doesn’t make any difference what technologies are used only that two are used on the same card.

DESIGNING THE ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM When designing an access control system the first step of the process is to designate restricted zones. The zones can be defined as part of the threat and vulnerability assessment that was outlined in chapter 2. For government facilities the design specifications for the access control system like the rest of the physical security is spelled out in the bid documents for the job. These are areas that are to be restricted for various reasons depending on their use and how critical they are. It could access to the elevators in the lobby of a large office building, or the office and other areas of a company’s research facility, the company’s data center, etc. Sometimes access is restricted beyond the lobby or waiting area and restricting the parking lot for employee use only by adding an automatic gates and card readers. See Table 10.1 for a checklist of the following steps.

242


1. So the first step in the process of designing an electronic access control system is to decide what your needs are by designating the layers of access. For example what areas are to be designated, controlled, limited or exclusion. Define each restricted area as either controlled, limited, or exclusion areas. A controlled area is an area where access is controlled to those who need access. This is the first level of access and may include the parking lot, lobby, etc. Limited area is a more secure area and access is limited to those that need access. This would include certain work areas like laboratories where research is done. Exclusion zones are those areas where access is restricted. An example would be a data center, the telephone and data cabling rooms. 2. The next step in the decision process is to determine what type of system will best meet the needs and protect the facility, site, etc. in accordance with the layers of access and the control zones. This phase will be used to decide on what the operational features the system will encompass. 3. The next step is to determine the system requirements and traffic flow (transactions) through a portal. This is the amount of people that will pass through the door, turnstile, etc. and the times of day for the most transactions. To minimize problems the following questions need to addressed. Does the system meet the requirements for life safety for exiting in an emergency? In most jurisdictions the fire marshal will need to approve the system before it is installed to ensure it meets the NFPA 101 the Life Safety Code. Simply put the Life Safety Code says that any doors that are used for emergency exiting as well as entry must during an emergency allow for exiting without any special knowledge. Also if the power fails you can still exit in an emergency. The system must fail safe not secure. By failing safe means that you can exit but not enter. Will the system handle the number of transactions at peak times at an entry portal without causing undo delays? For example, during the morning when people are coming to work will the door access control system cause a delay for people to enter because the system is slow? What is the number of entrances that will be controlled? Will the system be able to handle expansion? Is servicing available locally if the system malfunctions?


243

What other systems will be integrated into the access control system? For example, CCTV, alarm monitoring, etc. 4. The fourth step is to select a card technology. There are several types of access control cards available. Choose the one that meets the needs of the project. Proximity access cards have a bit format on the card. The bit format is used for the parity, facility code and card number. For example if you have a 34 bit card, 2 bits are for parity bits, 16 for the facility code, and 16 for the card number range. The number of card bits is important as is the facility code. A larger the number of bits on the card allows for more information to be put on the card. The facility code is important because it is the code used for in the location and permits access to the facility. This reason is the number of bits on a card for one facility can be identical to another as can the card numbers so prevent one card from company A’s facility being read and granting access at another company B’s facility because they have the same number of bits and card number is the facility code. This is an important consideration when determining the specifications of the cards. If the system is being designed to protect sensitive information the card should have a minimum of 34 bits so the facility code for the facility will be unique and no other company will have the same facility code. These are known as custom cards. Not every location needs custom cards. For details on the technologies listed below refer to the section on cards in this chapter: Magnetic stripe cards Proximity (Wiegand) cards Smart cards Dual technology 5. The fifth step is to develop the design specifications for the system. The design specifications will outline what the system will do, the amount of traffic it will need to handle, the type of locks (magnetic or electric strike) to be used, the type of portals (turnstiles, mantraps, etc.), the type of card/reader technology, back up power, integration with other systems, CCTV, alarms, etc. 6. The sixth step is to design the system based on the design criteria outlined in step 5 above. The design will include the system layout with drawings. The drawings will include all the locations that have readers for access control, the alarm devices and locations, CCTV camera locations and the locations of the access control system panels. The access control system panels are used to control and monitor a specified number of doors. Some panels are capable of monitoring up to 32 doors. The panels will store the transactions and if power is lost the panels will operate using battery back up. Under normal conditions the transactions are sent to the head end of the system at least once a day.

244


TYPES OF ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM LOCKS There are two main types of locks used with electronic access control systems. More about locks will be presented in a later chapter. The two discussed in this section are related to electronic access control systems. 1. Magnetic lock 2. Electric strike The magnetic lock also referred to as the maglock. The principle of an electromagnetic lock is simple the lock is operated by a 12 or 24 VDC (volts of direct current). The locks also have a bridge available to allow AC operation as well. The lock operates on low voltage between ¼ to 1amp. There are two parts to an electromagnetic lock, the electromagnet and the armature. The electromagnet is the larger of the two with armature being the strike plate. The armature locks the door when the electromagnet comes in contact with it when it is energized with 12 or 24 VDC. The maglocks are usually found on glass store front type doors. The lock and strike plate are at the top of the door. The strike plate is mounted on the bottom of the top frame and the electromagnetic lock is mounted on the top of the door. The strike plate hangs down enough for the electromagnetic lock to make contact securing the door. This makes it easy to retrofit an existing door because the lock does not need to be built into the door handle. The electromagnetic lock is for both indoor and outdoor use. As with other locks that are on doors for emergency exiting check with the NFPA 101 the Life Safety Code’s section on electromagnetic locks. The local fire marshal will make the final approval before installing the lock. The fire marshal’s office in the jurisdiction where the lock is being installed will test the lock to make sure it meets the requirements set forth in the Life Safety Code. Electromagnetic locks that are listed by the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) can be used on a rated door. The electromagnetic lock however cannot replace the positive latching hardware for the door. The magnetic locks come in a large selection of finishes so the lock will blend or match the door frame finishes. This helps make the electromagnetic lock aesthetically pleasing. When preparing the specifications for the door hardware so make sure to include the color that will match the door. The other type of lock commonly used is the electric strike. An electric strike lock operates on 12 or 24 VDC (volts direct current) as well as AC power the same as the electromagnetic lock does. The electric strike lock looks like any other door handle lock except in this case the lock is electrically operated. The lock will draw from ¼ amp on 24 VDC to 45 amps on 12 VDC. The electric strike lock will remained locked if there is a power failure. So the lock fails secure. The lock will still allow exit from inside the building but will be locked on


245

the outside and not allow entry during a power failure. With AC power used to electrify the lock you will hear a buzzing sound when someone on the inside “buzzes” you in. DC power will not have the buzzing sound when the door is released from inside. The lock powered by DC power will click and but will not buzz. The electric strike lock is installed into the door handle and frame. The wires that control the lock need to be “fished” through the frame. The door handle contains the latch and the door frame will have the strike mounted into it. The strike is where the bolt slides into just like any non-electric lock bolt does. With the electric lock the keeper will release the bolt when it is activated allowing entry through the door. There are also electric strike locks that are built into the handle of glass lobby and store front type doors. The lock engages by having the bolt at the top of the handle slide into position in the frame. To exit from the inside the REX will shunt the alarm and the handle is pushed for exiting.

REQUEST TO EXIT DEVICE (REX) The request to exit device also known as a REX is important. Most access control systems do not require the use of a card reader to exit from a room, building, etc. so a Rex is used. The REX will permit exiting through the door without causing the door to go into alarm as a “forced door”. What the REX does is it shunts the alarm allowing exiting without a card. The REX is mounted at the ceiling near the door or the top of the exit door’s frame. When you walk by you can here the REX click or see the green light come on. The clicking sound and the green light coming on lets you know the REX working to allow exiting without causing a forced door alarm. The REX works by a motion sensor. As a person walks up to the door the passive infrared device or other motion sensor senses the presence of someone and will send the signal to the door to shunt the alarm so when the person hits the panic bar or turns the handle on the door the door will open without sending a forced door alarm. The forced door alarm is a feature of the access control system to record when doors are forced open or left open (propped open) too long. The access control system computer receives the alarm and the security officer or the designated person will need to answer the alarm. The alarm does not sound at the door that is forced open to exit in most cases it only sounds at the security console on the access control system computer. The REX does not release the lock unless the access control system has it programmed to do this task. So be careful when programming the access control system’s head end and make sure that the REXS for the doors in the system will not unlock the door but only shunt the forced door alarm when someone exits the door using the door hardware. Otherwise every time someone on the inside of the perimeter walks passed the door the REX will unlock the door. This will al-

246


low someone outside the perimeter to enter without an access card negating the purpose of the access control system. See Figure 10.1 to view a cutaway of a REX.

DOOR CONTACTS The doors that are electronically access controlled also have contacts installed on them. The purpose of the contacts is to provide the alarm points for monitoring the status of the door. For example, the contacts monitor the position of the door, open or closed and also if the door is held open too long. When programming the system the doors can be programmed to be held open for a set number of seconds to allow a person who has valid access to the door to enter. The reason for the setting the time to enter is so the door alarm will be activated during a normal entry. If the door is held open longer an alarm will be sent to the console alerting security officers that the door has not been closed and the event is also recorded. Since the last card that had a valid access before the door was propped open is also recorded it is easy to find out which employee propped the door open by identifying the card holder. This feature keeps the door from being propped open especially exterior doors so people can re-enter without using their access control badge. The door contacts are mounted either on the top of the door frame or on the side of the door frame. The important thing about them is that they are placed so they make contact with the door closed.

FIGURE 10-1 Cutaway of a REX.


247

AUTOMATIC DOOR CLOSER Another important piece of door hardware is the automatic door closer. There are various types of closers but the purpose of each is the same and that is to close the door automatically after entry is made. Without the automatic closer the door would remain open because most people would not stop to close the door after they have entered the area. Self closers are used on most exterior doors and can be adjusted to close quickly or slow. So as a part of the design some thought must be given door closers that will work with the doors that will be electronically access controlled. All access controlled doors must have an automatic door closer on it even interior doors.

ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PANELS The access control system panels are used to monitor a number of doors in the systems that access controlled. Some panels can monitor up to 32 doors. This is important in the design to know the capacity of the system and if there will be any for future growth or will an additional or new panel be needed to be added to monitor more doors and alarm points. The panel will also communicate with the system head end which is the main system computer. Information is stored on the panel and will continue to allow access to doors even if communications are lost with the main computer. Battery packs are installed in the panel in case power is lost the panel will keep the system operating for a number of hours. Most battery packs are good for 4 hours some can be longer and the access control system should have emergency power supply like a generator. What the panel does is to store information on the doors it controls and the recent transactions of the access card holders. Also, the panel will monitor the alarm points in the area. Alarm points such as door alarms.

SAMPLE DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEMS SECTION 17000 - ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. All drawings and the General Provisions of the Contract including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 PROJECT SCOPE: A. The system being developed under this design is electronic intrusion detection, egress control system that incorporates the technologies shown below. For the purpose of clarification, the following parties

248


will be referenced in this document in the following manner: 1. The ABCD Corporation The Client 5667 Gibraltar Drive Livermore, CA. 94588 925-224-7955 Tel 925-224-7964 Fax www.abcd.com 2. The XYZ Consultants Inc. The Consultants 4847 S. Orange Blossom Trail Orlando, Florida, 32835 407-851-8734 Tel 407-851-1215 Fax www.xyzconsult.com 3. The ABCD Corporation The Facility(s) Livermore, California Toronto, Canada Paris, France Amsterdam, Holland London, England B. In all new facilities, the system is being installed for the purpose of controlling traffic in the Client’s facility. The systems within the United States are being retro-fitted however the contractor must still comply with this specification and the bidder instructions. It is a requirement of the system that all technologies be integrated into one system to allow for instantaneous alert and response to any alarm condition that may be activated in the secured area. The system will be controlled through one central processor located in the facility. Archived information is to be sent via the “NET” to the remote server located in the Client’s offices in Livermore, California. The system must be compatible from the standpoint of the ability to read existing access control cards and to provide the same report formats to allow for standardization of a global network. C. It is also a requirement of the system to monitor all building management services as they relate to the facility. The operations manager shall have the ability to both monitor and control building management equipment through the access control screen located at the systems management console (SMC). D. This Section calls for the contractor of choice to provide all labor, materials, equipment, and service necessary for the completion of the integrated electronic security system and subsystem(s), as indicated on the drawings and as described herein. The internal “NET” shall be supplied by the Owner however it is the responsibility of the contractor to


249

verify that communication pathways are open and compatible with all components within the global system. The Owner reserves the right to supply other components if they are needed for this project. The system technologies called for within this Scope of Work are: 1. Access Control cards, readers, and field panels; 2. Closed Circuit Television camera and monitors; 3. Intrusion Detection Devices; 4. Duress Reporting Devices; 5. Video digital recording devices; and 6. Components required for installation E. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, software, and programming required to provide the Client with an integrated security system that is compatible with existing components in other offices operated by the Client. F. Contractor shall ensure the system meets the operational and functional needs of the Client as specified herein, and as indicated on the drawings. The drawings are diagrammatic only. Equipment and labor not specifically referred to herein, or on the plans, that are required to meet the functional and operational intent, shall be provided without additional cost to the Client. G. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with other trades and contractors to provide a system that is totally integrated and operational as required for this project. H. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing with their Submittal, a one year spare parts list with single component (itemized) and quantity pricing. Should any particular component be in redesign stage that would possibly cause it to be a non-production item within the 1 year period, this component shall be identified as such and the substitute or new component be identified on this spare parts list. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. The contractor shall review the following sections of the total project to ensure compliance with: 1. Division 2 Site Work 2. Division 7 Fire stopping 3. Division 8 Doors and Door Hardware 4. Division 16 Electrical All specification divisions are identified by The Construction Specification Institute Master Format 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit bid data containing original catalog cut sheets that provide complete technical data as required by the Owner to al-

250


low evaluation of the material and equipment proposed. The information should include component dimensions, wiring and block diagrams, wire/cable sizes, conduit sizes, performance data, ratings, operational characteristics, control sequences, and other descriptive data to describe the items proposed. B. The Contractor’s submittal shall include a complete list of equipment, materials, and installation instructions. All prices shall be itemized in single component prices as well as quantity pricing with any discounts so indicated. Alternative proposals are acceptable under this specification and shall comply with all standard requirements for the bid package submittal. C. The Contractor receiving the award shall submit within two weeks (14 days) of the award date a complete set of shop drawings. These drawings shall contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been properly coordinated and installed to function as described within the specifications. D. The Contractor shall upon the completion of the project, provide to the Client or their designated representative, a complete and accurate set of As-Built drawings. The submittal shall be in AutoCAD V2000 and supplied on a disk along with five copies of system(s) manuals and drawings. The submittal shall be completed and delivered to the Client and/or their designated representative at least two weeks prior to final acceptance testing. Punch item corrections will require a re-submittal if the list is substantial. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: The Contractor shall only represent a Company that specializes in the business of having provided Electronic Integrated Security Systems for a period of at least five (5) years. The supporting documentation supplied by the Contractor shall demonstrate the Manufacturer’s as well as the Contractor’s experience by including: 1. Installations for at least five (5) facilities of equal size and comparable technical requirements utilizing the equipment submitted. 2. For each facility, the information should include: a. Name and address of facility; b. Date of the Installation and System Acceptance; c. A point of contact for either the Owner or the Owner’s designated representative; d. The name of the project or construction manager, if applicable; and


251

e. The name of the Architect of Record, if applicable. 6. A description of the technical aspects of the system describing how the system functions in comparison to the System described within this specification. B. References and Regulatory Requirements. 1. All workmanship and materials supplied under this Section shall comply with the requirements of the following agencies and authorities: a. International Electrical Engineers (IEE) b. European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization (CENELEC) c. International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) d. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) US Standard e. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA) US Standard f. Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) (1999) US Standard g. National Burglar and Fire Alarm Association (NBFAA) - Standards of Application - US Standard h. Closed Circuit Television Manufacturers Association (CCTMA) - US Standard i. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) - European Equivalent 1.6 REQUIREMENTS OF THE DESIGN A. THE SYSTEM - The design for this system consists of several components. The intent is to allow full monitoring of all security and security related activities, including building management services (HVAC, Fire, Power, etc.) at the systems management console (SMC). The monitored functions shall consist of but not be limited to: 1. All access control devices for access and egress to and from the facility; 2. Intrusion detection equipment as it relates to fire doors, duress buttons, and other similar devices; 3. Delayed Egress Locking Devices; 4. Closed circuit surveillance cameras with a processor integrated into the overall system to provide reactive design functions and a digital recording device; and 6. Any additional components required for a complete installation but not identified within this specification. B. THE INSTALLATION - The Contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing the electronic system required for this design. All work will be inspected during the installation process and final acceptance testing will be conducted prior to the sys-

252


tem being accepted by the Client. The contractor shall advise the Client at each point of substantial completion to allow periodic inspections. Final acceptance testing shall be conducted when contractor advises the system is ready. Punch list corrections shall be completed within two weeks after list development. The testing process is on all items prior to acceptance of the system by the Client. The Client reserves the right to require complete system testing a second time if the punch list is of considerable size. 1. CENTRALIZED MONITORING - This design of this system is such that monitoring will be required in two locations. The primary monitoring of CCTV and all alarms will be at the systems monitoring console (SMC) located in the main console room. A second monitoring station at the Security Command Center (SCC) may be required for each site. This workstation will be monitored by security officers and shall mirror the information being sent to the SMC.. This station will be a workstation with all security and security related functions reporting to this location as well as the SCM. The system shall archive all access control, intrusion detection alarms, BMS functions, and CCTV video storage information at the main system server located in Livermore, California. The information shall be sent via the owner provided “NET” on a pre-programmed basis established by the Client and programmed by the Contractor. 2. The system shall provide for automatic display of alarm point locations at the SMC and SCC. The components of the integrated system shall include but not be limited to: A. The Front-end processor for each site complete with software license; B. One workstation, complete with software license; C. One (1) Net-controller unit; D. Power supply with battery backup; E. Software to accommodate 32 card readers; F. Software to accommodate up to 4 biometric readers (handgeometry); G. Field panels as required to monitor all points identified within this specification and on the drawings; H. Building management systems (BMS) monitoring and control capability for up to 100 points; I. Four (4) card reader units with locking and egress devices; J. One (1) Hand Geometry reader unit; K. Door position switches for each access control door leaf and other egress points within the facility; L. Duress reporting devices (3) to be located at a later date;


253

M. Four (4) emergency break glass release units; N. One (1) intercom master with 1 external slave unit; O. Twelve (12) dual technology volumetric protection devices with adjustable lens units; F. Training, manuals, service, and maintenance as specified; and, G. Any additional components required, but not specifically mentioned within this or other sections. E. CLOSED CIRCUIT SURVEILLANCE - The Contractor shall provide, install, terminate, program, and submit for final acceptance testing, a processor based Closed Circuit Television Surveillance system (CCTV). This system shall be integrated through the matrix switcher and the access control front end central processor to provide video coverage of each alarm point and/or surveillance locations identified for this project. Monitoring shall be required at the SMC and SCC with video storage both on site and at the Livermore, CA server. The system shall be reactive in design with all programming being done in accordance with this specification and the accompanying drawings. Each location shall be supplied with a 32 channel digital recorder that will serve as the video signal processor and shall be installed in such a manner as to allow it to integrate with other system components. The CCTV system shall consist of the following components: 1. Cameras - Fixed & Autodome 2. Monitors for SMC and SCC; 3. Video Matrix processor capable of handling up to 32 cameras with 8 outputs; 4. Digital Video Recording Unit; 5. Housings as required; 6. Power supplies as specified; 7. Training, manuals, service, and maintenance as specified; and, 8. Any additional components required, but not specifically mentioned within this or other sections. F. INTRUSION DETECTION: The Contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing, door position switches as indicated on the drawings accompanying this specification. Each door position switch shall be interfaced into the system in order that either intrusion or egress alarms through secured doors are reported to both the SMC and SCC. The IDS also shall interface with the camera controller unit to activate the camera system for the purposes of alerting the personnel in the monitoring areas and also to activate the recording functions of the system. This system shall be integrated through the Contrac-

254


tor provided cabling for the purpose of activating the video and security response techniques required for both interior as well as limited exterior areas. The system shall consist of the following components: 1. Door Position Switches; and 2. Any additional components required, but not specifically mentioned within this or other sections. G. DURESS REPORTING - The contractor shall provide, install, terminate, program, and submit for final acceptance testing, duress buttons at the locations indicated on the drawings accompanying this specification. The duress system shall, when activated, report to the SMC as well as the SCC. Additionally, the cameras selected by the Client and programmed by the Contractor shall be activated for the purpose of viewing the controlled area and recording all events that take place during the alarm. The components required for this portion of the system shall consist of: 1. Duress buttons - desk mounted 2. Any additional components required, but not specifically mentioned within this or other sections. H. STRIKE PLATES - All access control doors and all egress points from within the controlled space to the outside of the facility shall have strike plates installed to protect against direct attacks against the lock bolt of the door. G. DELAYED EGRESS LOCKING UNITS - Certain of the facilities covered under this specification may require the use of delayed egress locking devices. The contractor shall provide, install, terminate, service and submit for final acceptance testing, delayed egress locking devices at the locations indicated on the drawings accompanying this specification. The locking system shall be integrated with the fire alarm system to ensure compliance with all codes relative to the use of this device. Signage and other required components such as power supplies, etc., will the responsibility of the contractor to provide, install, terminate, service and maintain. The locking system, when activated, shall report to the SMC as well as the SCC. Additionally, the cameras selected by the Client and programmed by the Contractor shall be activated for the purpose of viewing the areas of egress and recording any events that take place during the alarm. The components required for this portion of the system shall consist of: 1. Delayed Egress Locking Units - mortise locking units; 2. Key cylinders;


255

3. Strike plates to fit each individual application; 4. Power supplies and transformers; and 5. Any additional components required, but not specifically mentioned within this or other sections. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Warrant material and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of system final acceptance. B. Warranty shall include the repair, replacement, and upgrade of defective security components and/or materials including the correction of defective work when given notice by the Client during the warranty period. C. Warranty response time shall be within 8 hours upon receipt of request from Client or their designated representative during normal working hours. Weekend response shall be extended to a period not to exceed 12 hours. 1.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. The Contractor shall provide project record drawings identifying the system architecture and rack/component distribution. B. The “document package” shall include three sets of system manuals for the overall system concept as well as individual components within the system. Manuals shall consist of: 1. Operations manual - provide all information for operation of the system, including but not limited to, trouble shooting information, as well as software operational information; 2. Installation manual - provide drawings describing all circuits, power distribution, equipment placement, and cable routing, in an AsBuilt drawings (C size) format. This manual shall also include reference to any conduit routing; 3. Maintenance/Service Manual - Provide all trouble shooting information, data that is applicable to on-site software manipulation, programming information, and service/maintenance records. C. The “drawing package” shall include three (3) sets of As-built drawings. These drawings shall be supplied to the Client or the Client’s designated representative for final acceptance testing, punch list development, and system acceptance. The drawings shall be corrected as required for final system acceptance. The As-Built drawings shall not be considered complete until accepted by the Client. 1.9 OPERATION TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Included with the shop drawing submittal should be a syllabus outlining the training program that will be provided to the Client or their

256


designated representative with reference to the operation of this system. This syllabus should include a minimum of 16 hours training with demonstrations of the features and functions of the primary system and integrated subsystems. B. The training classes should be conducted with competent supervisors or factory trained technicians and shall be conducted on site. The Client shall designate which individuals from their organization shall receive the training. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA MANUAL A. Assemble a set of three (3) manuals in hard bound covers, presenting for the Client’s guidance, full details for care and maintenance of visible surfaces, and of equipment included in the work. B. Include manufacturer’s literature relating to components and other equipment, catalog cut sheets, parts list, wiring diagrams, instruction sheets, and other pertinent information which will be useful to the Client in overall system operation and maintenance. C. Include a list of installers and service representatives with company names and addresses, names of individuals to contact, and telephone numbers. D. Prepare operating instructions, complete and explicit, including, but not limited to, instructions for start-up, operating, and stopping. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. The contractor shall test and service system on a quarterly basis during the warranty period. Each quarterly inspection shall “cover” up to 30% of the installed components. B. After each quarterly maintenance inspection the Contractor shall provide written notification to the Client of the system’s condition before and after service, exact components that were tested and serviced, and overall status of the system. All notices shall be sent to Mr. Mike Arata, ABCD Corporation, 5667 Gibraltar Drive, Livermore, California, 94588. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTEGRATED ELECTRONIC SECURITY SYSTEM (IESS): A. Refer to individual Integrated Electronic Security System Specification section for selected equipment and operational requirements. 2.1.1 Delayed Egress Locking Devices: A. Required Performance Features: 1. The contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing, a delayed egress locking device that provides the following features:


257

a. A request to exit switch shall be built into the device to detect attempts to use the door for unauthorized egress; b. Each unit shall be supplied with a lamp that indicates the disposition of the locking device. The lamp shall be protected by a masked bezel design that provide wide angle viewing along with the capability of providing three signals to indicate the armed status of the unit. The three signals shall be as follows: 1. A continuously lighted lamp indicates the device has just been armed and as soon as the rearm timer expires the unit will be fully armed; 2. A slow flashing light shall indicate the device being armed with no re-arm timing activation; and, 3. A flashing indicator shall indicate the unit is in an alarm condition. c. The application of less than 15 pounds of pressure to the push pad shall cause an internal switch to start an irreversible alarm cycle; d. Activation of the internal switch shall cause an internal horn to sound at a minimum volume of 85 db at 6ft. The internal horn shall be supplied with the ability to select activation or non-activation during a fire alarm condition; e. The unit supplied shall also be capable of controlling nuisance alarms by being equipped with firmware that will provide a nonactivation time of at least two seconds should the push pad be pushed by mistake; f. If the push pad is held for two seconds or more, the unit will revert to normal operating conditions, thereby activating the timing sequence as well as the internal sounding device causing the unit to release as designed for delayed egress requirements; g. Each unit supplied shall have a set of relay contacts rated at 1 ampere, 24 VDC, for external alarm indication and remote monitoring. The contacts should be designed to close when the device goes into the irreversible alarm condition. The internal relay contacts shall also be capable of driving a horn, lamp, or other indicative devices in accordance with the design; h. The contractor shall provide, install and terminate with each delayed egress device, a surface mounted door position switch to provide added monitoring capabilities to the secured door. The delayed egress locking device supplied shall have the ability to interface with this door position switch to allow activation of the alarm system should the door not close when the system is armed, the door is forced open when the system is armed, or to monitor anti-pass back activities through the shortening of re-arming times;

258


i. The unit shall be capable of being re-armed from the security console (SMC or SCC); j. Each unit supplied shall be integrated into the fire alarm system to allow immediate disabling of the timing sequence and unlocking of the device in the event of a fire evacuation need. The unit shall be interfaced with the building’s fire alarm system that should provide a set of normally closed contacts which open on alarm; k. Each unit supplied shall be capable of accepting console “override” by being supplied with an external inhibit input device to allow interfacing capability with card readers, wall mounted key switches, and/or remote security console controls. The override feature shall be controlled by a normally closed switch that in an open position disarms the unit; l. The firmware supplied with the unit shall have the ability to accommodate an adjustable re-arm time of from 2 to 28 seconds based on two second intervals or an infinite re-arm setting based on the status of the external door position switch. This adjustable time shall be changeable at the unit; m. Each unit shall be capable of being adjusted to meet the requirements of the local AHJ (authority having jurisdiction, i.e., Fire Marshal) by providing up to 15 or 30 seconds of time delay as standard with adjustable capabilities of from 0 to 60 seconds based on 2 second increments. The contractor shall, for any delay adjusted longer than 15 seconds, receive and provide to the Client a letter of acceptance from the local AHJ confirming acceptance of the extended time delay; n. The delayed egress devices shall also be supplied with an internal auxiliary locking device that is designed to engage when the unit is armed. This locking device shall be capable of withstanding forceful blows as well as pressures of more than 75 pounds on the push pad; o. Each unit shall be supplied with a key switch designed to allow manual arming, disarming, and resetting of the unit. The contractor is responsible for verifying the need for the keyed unit with the Client prior to the units being supplied. If the key is not required, the unit shall be supplied with a blank cylinder; and, p. The units supplied shall have been tested and accepted in accordance to ANSI A156.3, 1984, Grade 1, and shall meet all requirements for NFPA 101, Special Locking Arrangements. 2. The acceptable manufacturers for the delayed egress locking devices are as follows:


259

a. Von Duprin b. Security Door Controls c. Locknetics 2.1.2 Closed Circuit Television Surveillance Devices: A. Required Performance Features 1. The contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing, a delayed egress locking device that provides the following features: Closed Circuit Television Camera(s) a. The camera supplied for this project shall have an imager consisting of a 1/4” DSP Color CCD (domed unit) and provide active picture elements of 512H X 492V thereby equaling a horizontal resolution of not less than 330 TVL. b. The camera shall provide a usable picture under the conditions of scene illumination being 0.3 fc @ f1.4 and a 6.0 mm micro lens with Linear Electronic Iris. c. Each camera shall be positioned accordingly to provide the best view of each controlled area. d. DSP shall control back-light compensation, white balance, shutter speed and more. e. Each camera shall be synchronized when powered by DC. Synchronization shall be adjusted to power line zero crossing for rollfree vertical interval switching with the vertical phase delay being adjustable externally to allow vertical synchronization in multiphase power installations. f. Camera and dome housing size shall not exceed 3.09”H x 3.02W. g. Each camera shall be capable of operating in an environment that does not exceed -10 degrees C to +45 degrees C. h. Each unit shall be UL listed for safety i. Each camera unit shall be supplied with the appropriate transformer and power supply needed to meet the intent of this specification. j. Stand-by power packs shall be installed to provide a minimum of 4 hours of viewing should the building’s primary power be lost. k. Each camera shall be the WATEC DSP LCL-125D or equivalent. 2. Closed Circuit Television Monitors a. Monitors supplied at the SCM and SCC shall be 17” inch color units manufactured by Sanyo. The unit shall be configured for desktop or rack style mounting.

260


3. Acceptable Manufacturers - Closed Circuit Television Cameras, Lens, & Housings a. Watec America Corp. b. Opticom Technologies c. Sanyo d. Kalatel Inc 4. Digital Recording/Camera Controller units The contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing, a delayed egress locking device that provides the following features: a. One master control digital recording unit capable of 32 camera inputs and 16 alarm outputs b. 30 day recording speeds at 60 images per second c. 5 analog outputs d. Supplied with real time playback e. Searching capability based on activity detection f. Looping video for up to 32 cameras. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers - Digital Recording/Camera Controller a. Integral Technologies (DVX-32000) b. Sensormatic/Robot (Intellex) c. Loronix Corporation d. Nice Inc 2.1.3 Intrusion Detection Systems: A. Required Performance Features The contractor shall provide, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing an intrusion detection system consisting of the following equipment: a. Door Position Indicator Switches b. Door Monitoring System c. Power Supplies d. Other components not identified within this specification but required to provide a complete installation. 1. The door position indicator switches shall be provided with the following features: a. manufactured for use on steel without insulating brackets; b. concealed terminal screws; c. easy claiming terminals for expedited installation; d. mounting screws; e. biased for high security applications; f. capable of providing detection over a 3/8” to 1 1/4” gap; and g. color - natural.


261

2. The door position switch supplied for this project shall be the Sentrol 1047 series with the 1933 magnet, biased for high security applications, or equivalent. 2.14 Duress Reporting System: A. Required Performance Features: 1. The contractor shall supply, install, terminate, and submit for final acceptance testing, a duress reporting system that will be monitored at the SMC and SCC. The equipment required for this design shall be Sentrol 3040 Surface Mounted Panic Switch or equivalent and shall have the following performance features: a. the unit shall be UL listed for duress reporting; b. the unit shall be single pole/double throw; c. the unit shall be capable of mounting under or on the side of desks, counters, or any other area thereby making it hard to detect by outsiders; d. the unit shall be supplied in a housing that is smooth to prevent accidental damage to clothing; e. an actuating lever designed to accommodate only the tip of a finger for activation, shall be a feature of the unit; f. each unit shall have reed contacts that reset when the lever is in a closed position; g. a latching LED shall “lock-in” when the unit is activated and be powered by 12 VDC; h. the unit shall have single pole/double throw output for electrical compatibility; and i. the unit shall be supplied in white. 2.15 FIRE STANDARDS COMPLIANCE The contractor shall ensure that all equipment supplied for this project is in compliance with the United States Standard NFPA 101 including delayed egress locking devices, door hardware, emergency lighting, signal transmissions, and signage. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine all surfaces, anchors, and “grounds” that are to receive materials, fixtures, assemblies, components, and equipment. Immediately report all unsatisfactory conditions in writing to project manager. 3.2 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and marred finish to match original finish. Clean all units in-

262


ternally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer prior to final acceptance testing. 3.3 DEMONSTRATION A. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Client and/or the designated representatives of the Client, the features and functions of the system and subsystems as well as instruct and train the designated personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the system. B. The contractor shall provide, on high quality VHS formatted videotape, documentation of the training sessions and maintenance procedures. Each video shall be clearly identified for Client’s future reference. 3.4 INSTALLATION A. The contractor is required to install all equipment and/or devices in accordance with recommendations and/or instructions supplied by the Manufacturer. Where systems integration is required, the system shall work “as one” to provide the client an operational system as per specifications. 3.5 ELECTRICAL A. Power will be available at the site. The contractor is responsible for wiring from the source of power to the individual components. The contractor shall be responsible for providing to the Client, a complete set of shop drawings indicating the wiring and power requirements of their individual system and conduct a review of the electrical drawings as they pertain to Section 17. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to provide additions, corrections, or modifications to the electrical design as they relate to the installation of the security equipment called for under this specification. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS A. Definitions 1. Bid Documents Bid documents include the bid advertisement/invitation, instructions to bidders, sample documents, the bid form, contract documents and any addenda issued prior to the bid opening date. 2. Addenda Any narrative or graphic material issued by either the Client, or the Clients designated representative which would modify or change the bid documents by the addition, deletion, correction, or clarification of individual items contained in the bid documents, instructions, or specifications.


263

3. Bid All qualified bidders shall submit a complete and properly executed bid statement to the Client or their designated representative. Proposals will include an offer to supply, install, terminate, and check out a complete and operational system as specified. All work will be performed in accordance with any specifications, drawings, and data included in the bid documents. The bid statement has to be signed by a person in position of authority for the bidder. Lump sum pricing is acceptable for the bid statement, however, itemized pricing must be supplied in the bid package as support materials. 4. Base Bid A properly executed statement outlining the cost for hardware, work and services which the bidder proposes to perform, and which may be adjusted accordingly, at the option of the Client, by an alternate bids included with the base bid package. 5. Alternates Additional amounts that could be added (Add-Alternates) or deducted (Deduct Alternates) from the base bid for components, installation techniques, systems, or interfaces pertaining to the system design, which the Client does not wish included in the primary system. All prices submitted for alternates must be signed as required for the base bid, and will be subject to the same terms and conditions as the base bid. 6. Unit Pricing All bids must be itemized showing unit prices for materials and labor in order for the bid submittal to be considered complete. 7. Definition of the term qualified bidder A prime business entity that was invited to bid on this project, and submitted a bid for work described in the documents and specifications of this bid package. 8. Definition of the term qualified sub-contractor A corporate entity submitting pricing information for equipment and services related to a portion of this project. The pricing is submitted to the bidder for inclusion in the total package. 9. Definition of the term prime contractor The corporate entity proposing to be totally responsible for the services called for in the bid package submitted to the Client. The party accepts total responsibility for all sub-contractor performance related to the provision of equipment, installation, service, warranty, and any other conditions or requirements related to this project. B. Bidder Representation

264


1. Each bidder, by the action of submitting a bid package, is classified as a prime contractor and represents that: a. Contract documents, specifications, and supporting documents have been read and are fully understood by the bidder and all subbidders involved with the bid package. b. The bidder is fully responsible for the procurement, coordination, installation, and start-up of a complete and operational system and its related components, including all necessary accessories and peripheral equipment, whether or not specifically indicated by the contract documents. c. The bidder will make every effort to ensure that the various components of the project are purchased and installed in a coordinated, efficient manner. d. As limited by information contained in this proposal, the bidder fully understands the conditions under which the work is to be performed. Full disclosure of information will be made to bidders invited to enter into final negotiations. The bidder’s final offering represents a full understanding of all issues, including but not restricted to: 1. Transportation 2. Disposal 3. Handling and storage of materials or equipment 4. Availability of labor, water, power and roads 5. The uncertainties of the weather in this region 6. Coordination of construction efforts 7. Conditions of the surface and subsurface around the project 8. Shipping restrictions of certain suppliers and equipment manufacturers. 2. Submission of a proposal warrants that the bidder fully understands and agrees to coordinate with all other contractors (trades) on the project, and that this effort will include, but not be limited to: a. Scheduling of construction activities in the sequence required to obtain the best results when part of the work is depending upon the installation of other components. b. Coordinate installation of different components, where availability of space is limited, to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. c. Make adequate provisions to accommodate any items, components, or systems, scheduled for later installation. d. Where and when necessary, prepare memorandum for distribution to each party involved outlining special procedures required


265

for coordination. This memorandum may include but not be limited to items such as required notices, reports, and attendance at meetings. 3. The bidder guarantees coordination of schedules and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts, and ensure orderly progress of the work. Such administrative activities should include but not be limited to: a. Schedule preparations b. Installation and removal of temporary facilities c. Delivery and processing of submittals d. Progress (construction) meetings e. Project close out activities C. Documents 1. Bid documents may be obtained in accordance with the provisions of this specification. 2. All bidders are responsible for preparing and submitting a complete set of bid documents. 3. The Client, in duplicating the bid documents and making available the same, does so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and does not confer a license for, or grant any other use of the documents by any party either involved in the bid process, acting as a sub-bidder, or only having come into contact with the documents, unless so authorized by the Client. 4. All bidders and sub-bidders must immediately advise the Client, or the Clients designated representative, of any inconsistency or error discovered while examining the bid documents or of the site and local conditions. 5. All requests for clarification or interpretation will be submitted in accordance with the procedures outlined in the bid advertisement. 6. All interpretations, changes, additions, or deletions to the documents of this project will be made by addendum issued by the Client, and/or the Clients designated representative. 7. Substitution requests for system equipment, components, or installation procedures must be submitted with the bid package and documented. 8. All addenda to this project will be mailed, FAXED, or delivered via overnight services to all parties known to the Client as having received a copy of the bid documents for this project. D. Bidding Process The following instructions apply to the bid process: 1. Bid Submittal Format

266


a. All bids will be typed and submitted complete. b. Telephone or oral bids not acceptable. c. Blank pages, sections or other spaces must be marked accordingly. d. All pricing submitted for the bid must be itemized. e. Each copy of the bid will include the legal name of the bidder and a statement indicating whether the bidder is the sole proprietor, a partnership, corporation, or other legal entity. Each copy will be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to the contract. All bids by corporations will further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agents authority to sign the bid documents, and subsequently bind the bidder to the project. 2. Submission Procedures a. Each submission will be typed and will include copies of the bid, the bid security, and other documents as required, in a sealed envelope addressed in accordance with the bidder instructions. The envelope will be identified with the following information: b. Clients representatives address as specified in the bid instructions. c. The title of the project. d. The Bidders name and address. e. The Bidders license number if applicable. f. All bids must be delivered by the time and date, and in accordance with the manner specified in the bidder instructions. g. The bidder is fully responsible for timely delivery of the bids. Bids received after the time and date designated within the bidder instructions will be rejected. 3. Separate Contracts The Client reserves the right to enter into separate contracts for this work. The bidder will properly coordinate to the best of their ability with all other contractors to schedule and connect the work required under the scope of this project. 4. Bid Modification or Withdrawal a. The bid may not be modified, withdrawn, or canceled after the stipulated closing time for bid submittal. b. Bids withdrawn before the stipulated closing time may be resubmitted prior to the designated closing time and will be considered if they are fully in compliance with submittal requirements, and the security is in an amount sufficient to meet the requirements of the bid security section.


267

E. Consideration of Bids a. Rejection The Client reserves the right to reject any and all bids when such action is in the Client’s best interest. b. Unacceptable Bids All bids based on the following will be unacceptable for this project: 1. Any bid not based on the specifications included in this design and bid package. 2. Bids not signed by any person(s) having legal authority to bind the bidder to the submitted bid package. 3. Bids containing quotations qualified by memoranda. 4. Alternates, substitutions, additions, or deletions, submitted by the Bidder, and which are found by the Client, or the Client’s designated representative, not to be in compliance with the intended design of this specification. c. Acceptance of Bids 1. The Client reserves the right to waive any informality or irregularity in the bid when such action is found to be in the Clients best interest. 2. It is the intent of the Client to award the contract to the bidder showing the best combination of factors including; compliance with the bid format and submission requirements, compliance with technical specifications, bidders stability, strength and reputation, and that the bid is found to be reasonable in cost and schedule. Bids will not necessarily be awarded on the basis of any one factor, such as cost. 3. The Client reserves the right to request a best and final proposal from any or all bidders should it be deemed necessary. d. Unit Pricing 1. Unit prices (for individual hardware or software applications) will be considered in the process of awarding this contract. 2. Quantities specified in this design are approximate. Should additional hardware be required, prices will be modified at the same rate as the itemized price originally quoted. IV. AGREEMENT/SUBMITTAL FORMS A. Introduction The following forms will be required, as described by the specification: a. Bond Forms—Proof of Bond Capability with submittal b. Insurance Forms. Proof of coverage with submittal c. Surety Consent Forms—None required with initial submittal d. Licensing Certificate of Compliance. Required with submittal

268


e. Bid Summary Form. Required with submittal B. Bond Forms Required from selected vendor prior to final award of contract: a. Performance Bond A performance bond shall be supplied for the full value of the work to be performed as called for within the specifications and drawings. b. Payment Bond A payment bond shall be supplied for the full value of all work to be performed by sub-contractors and suppliers or for other financial obligations required under this project. C. Insurance Forms Certificates of Insurance Certificates of Insurance will be in the amount of $1,000,000 liability for each occurrence, combined liability, each occurrence and property damage, listing the ABCD Corporation as an additional insured. D. Surety Consent Statements a. Consent of Surety Company to elimination of further retainer at 50% contract completion. b. Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment. E. Licensing Certificate of Compliance Before work is performed at the site, file or record the construction contract with proper governmental or regulatory officials if such filing is required. Submit a statement of compliance signed by the issuing agency stating that filing has been accomplished. V. UNIT PRICES A. Introduction This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for unit pricing. All pricing must be quoted in US Dollars. However, the Client reserves the right to pay the amounts due in local currency. Unit prices are amounts proposed by bidders and should be indicated as the price per unit of materials or services. Unit prices are also required for change orders that will be added to or deducted from the Contract Sum, in the event the estimated quantities of work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased. Unit prices include necessary material, overhead, profit, and applicable taxes. Any costs or taxes unique to work in the European Economic Community must be included. B. Schedule The unit price schedule should include all items comprising the specified systems.


269

The Client reserves the right to reject the Contractors measurement of work-in-place that involves the use of established unit prices, and to have this work measured by an independent surveyor acceptable to the Contractor at the Clients expenses. VI. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Schedule of Values a. All payments, invoices, etc. will be routed through the Consultant for approval and review. The Contractor will develop a Schedule of Values that indicates the cost of each phase of construction listed in the Contractors Construction Schedule. The Schedule of Values will account for (but not be limited to accounting) for the following: 1. Contractors Construction Schedule 2. Application for payment 3. List of sub-contractors 4. Schedule of allowances 5. Schedule of alternates 6. List of products 7. List of principal suppliers and fabricators 8. Schedule of submittals Submit the Schedule of Values to the Consultant at the earliest feasible date, but in no case later than 10 working days before submittal of the initial Application for Payment. b. Identity the Schedule of Values by: 1. Project name and location 2. Name of the Client 3. Name of Consultant 4. Contractors name and address 5. Date of submittal c. Arrange the Schedule of Values in a tabular form with separate columns for: 1. Line item (phase, equipment, work to complete, etc.) 2. Related specification section 3. Name of sub-contractor 4. Name of manufacturer or fabricator 5. Name of supplier 6. Change orders (numbers) that have affected value 7. Dollar value 8. Percentage of Contract Sum to the nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. d. Provide to the Consultant a breakdown of the Contract Sum in suf-

270


ficient detail to facilitate continued evaluation or applications for payment and progress reports. Break principal subcontract amounts down into several line items. e. Round amounts off to the nearest whole dollar. The total shall equal the Contract Sum. f. For each part of the work where an application for payment may include materials or equipment, purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed, provide the Consultant separate line items on the Schedule of Values for initial cost of the materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the work. Payment for materials stored off site shall be subject to the Clients approval. g. Where appropriate, show line item value as a product of unit cost times quantity as estimated in the Contract Documents. h. Show line items for indirect costs, and margins on actual costs, only to the extent that such items will be listed individually in applications for payment. Each item in the Schedule of Values and applications for payment will be complete including its total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit margin. At the Contractors option, temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost may be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense. B. Schedule Updating Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values to the Consultant when change orders or construction change directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. C. Applications for Payment Each application for payment shall be submitted through the Consultant and will include information and be in an approved format. All applications for payment will be consistent with previous applications and payments as reviewed by the Consultant. The initial application for payment, the application for payment at time of Final Acceptance, and the final application for payment involve additional requirements. a. Payment Application Schedule Each progress payment date is as indicated in the agreement. The period of construction work covered by each application for payment is the period indicated in the agreement. b. Payment Application Forms Use Client supplied formats for application for payment. c. Application Preparation


271

Applications must include notarization and execution by the person authorized to sign legal documents. Incomplete applications will be returned without action. 1. Entries will match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractors Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions have been made. 2. Include amounts of change orders and construction change directives issued prior to the last day of the construction period covered by the application. D. Transmittal Submit three executed copies of each Application for Payment to the Consultant by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours of posting. One copy will be complete, including, but not limited to, waivers of lien and similar attachments, and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Client. E. Waiver of Mechanics Lien a. Subcontractors With each application for payment submit waivers of mechanics liens from subcontractors, or sub-subcontractors and suppliers for the construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for the amount requested, prior to deduction for retention, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. The Client reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the work must submit waivers. b. Contractors Submit each application for payment with the Contractors waiver of mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application. c. Final Application for Payment Submit final application for payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of work covered by the application that could lawfully be entitled to a lien. d. Waivers of Lien Submit waivers of liens, and execute in a manner acceptable to the Client. F. Initial Application for Payment Submittals Submittals required prior to the first application for payment include, but are not limited to: a. List of subcontractors

272


b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k.

List of principal suppliers and fabricators Schedule of Values Contractors Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final) Schedule of principal products Schedule of unit prices Submittal Schedule (preliminary if not final) List of Contractors staff assignments List of Contractors principal consultants Copies of building permits Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities for performance of the work l. Initial progress report m. Report of pre-installation meeting n. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies o. Performance and Payment Bonds (if required) p. Data needed to acquire the Clients insurance q. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required G. Application for Payment at Final Acceptance Following issuance of the Certificate of Final Acceptance, submit to the Consultant an application for Payment. This application will reflect any Certificates of Partial Final Acceptance issued previously for Client occupancy of designated portions of the work. Actions and submittals required prior to this application include, but are not limited to: a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties, guarantees and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjustment/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. f. Start-up performance reports. g. Change-over information related to Clients occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. h. Final cleaning. i. Application for reduction of retention, and consent of surety. j. Advice on shifting insurance coverage. k. Final progress photographs. l. List of incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to the Consultants certificate of Final Acceptance. H. Final Payment Application Actions and submittals required prior to submittal of the final Application for Payment include, but are not limited to: a. Completion of project closeout requirements.


b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.

273

Completion of items specified for completion after Final acceptance. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled. All work shall be complete and accepted by the Consultant. Transmittal of required Project construction records to the Consultant. Certified property survey. Proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations have been paid. Removal of temporary facilities and services. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish, and similar elements. Change of door locks to the Clients access.

VII. MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. Minor Changes in the Work Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the work, not involving an adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time, will be issued as needed by the Client or their designated representative. Changes in the scope of work for this project may affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time. Said changes will be negotiated by the Client and/or their designated representative. Said work should not progress until the receipt of the properly authorized by either the client and/or their designated representative. B. Change Order Proposal Requests a. Client-Initiated Proposed Requests Proposed changes in the work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time will be issued by the Consultant, with a detailed description of the proposed changes and supplemental, or revised drawings and specifications, if necessary. 1. Proposal requests are for information only. Do not consider them to be directives to either stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change. 2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 20 days of receipt of the proposal request, submit to the Consultant an estimate of cost necessary to execute the proposed change. 3. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, finish survey data to substantiate quantities. 4. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amount of trade discounts. 5. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the work will have on the Contract Time. b. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests When unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a

274


change to the Consultant. 1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Comply with requirements for substitution of one product or system for a product or system specified. C. Allowances Change Order Cost Adjustment Base Change Order cost adjustments solely on the difference between the original proposed work and actual cost of work under the Change Order. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents, whether for the purchase order amount or the Contractors handling, labor, installation, overhead, and profit, within 20 days of receipt of the change order or construction change directive authorizing work to proceed. Claims submitted later than 20 days may be rejected. Change order costs will not include Contractors or subcontractors indirect expenses. D. Construction Change Directive When the Consultant and the Contractor are not in total agreement on the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Consultant may issue a Construction Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the work for subsequent inclusion in a change order. The Construction Change directive will contain a complete description of the change in the work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor will maintain detailed records, on a time and materials basis, of work required by the Construction Change Directive. After completion of the change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. VIII. PROJECT COORDINATION A. Errors, Omissions and Inconsistencies


275

The Contractor is responsible for thorough study of contract documents furnished by the Consultant on the Clients behalf. The Contractor must report at once, in writing, all errors, inconsistencies, or omissions. The Contractor is liable for any damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency, or omission, and knowingly failed to report it to the Consultant or Client. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract documents without the specified notice to the Consultant, the Contractor will assume the risk for such performance, and will bear the attributable costs. Neither the Consultant nor the Client offers, or implies, any warranty regarding the availability of equipment, materials, supplies, labor or any other aspect of project completion. The Consultant and Client do not imply superior knowledge in those areas where the Contractor should have technical capabilities exceeding those of the Client and the Clients representatives. B. Drawings and Dimensions Dimensions marked on drawings will generally apply. Large scale drawings in general govern over small scale drawings. When measurements are affected by actual conditions, take actual measurements correcting dimensions in the drawings. Do not scale the drawings. C. Interface and Project Coordination a. Conduit and Wire Runs The Contractor is responsible for supplying and installing the wire required for this project. The conduit will be provided and installed by others. The Contractor shall complete termination utilizing the recommended wire. Final decisions, as to right-of-way and conduit “runs,” will be made by the Client and/or their designated representative. Review the relationship of work to that of other work before installation. In particular, review the following: Rough-ins and connection prints will be furnished for equipment not shown in the contract by those providing the equipment. Where applicable, the Contractor recommended conduit will be above ceiling and in wall cavities unless otherwise indicated. b. Coordination with Other Trades Close cooperation between the trades is required. Work installed without regard for other work may be removed, if necessary as de-

276


termined by the Consultant; at the installing Contractors expense. Each trade shall cooperate with and assist other trades on the project in conformance with trade jurisdictional rulings, and each trade shall perform the work that is within its jurisdiction. Examine the Contract Documents to determine the material and equipment that will be provided by other Contractors. Cooperate to provide continuity and progress of the work. Furnish to other Contractors, information required for the execution of the work. Furnish other Contractors advance information on locations and sizes of frames, boxes, sleeves, and openings needed for the work, and also furnish information and shop drawings necessary to permit trades affected to install their work properly and without delay. Where there is evidence that work of one contractor will interfere with the work of another contractor, all contractors are required to assist in working out conditions to make satisfactory adjustments, and will be prepared to submit and revise coordinated shop drawings. c. Drawing Coordination Locations indicated on the bid package drawings or described in the specifications are approximated. The Contractor shall provide the exact dimensions necessary to secure the best conditions and indicate same on the shop drawings which will be reviewed by the Consultant. The Contractor shall determine exact location requirements by dimensions of their equipment and submit same for review by the Consultant for any revised layout before the equipment is installed. The Contractor shall review the drawings for dimensions, locations of partitions and equipment, locations and sizes of structural support, foundations, and other detailed information required for the correct installation of the work. Work not shown on the drawings, but mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, or any incidental accessories necessary to make the work complete and ready for operation, will be furnished and installed by the Contractor without additional expense to the Client. The Contractor shall be responsible for items not shown on the drawings or specified otherwise, but reasonably incidental to the installation, as required by applicable codes, as practiced by the trade, or is stipulated by the manufacturer of the equipment being supplied, installed, or connected. These items shall be supplied, installed, and/or connected by the Contractor without additional expense to the Client.

CHAPTER

Role of the Security Officer

11

T

he use of security officers to help secure a job site can be a great help or add to the problem. Trained and motivated security officers provide a valuable service but if the officers are poorly trained or not properly screened and supervised, it can add to the problem. In other words, the security officer is just a “warm body” on the job site. It is unfortunate that the perception of security officers is that of the “rent-a-cop” image to the lazy-do-nothing image. Security officers have been given a bad reputation in the movies, on TV and in real life. To overcome the negative connotation about security officers there is a move by some states to require minimum amount of training before an officer can be assigned to a post. The minimum training varies from state to state and the average is 40 hours. The 40 hours covers basic subjects such as patrol, observation, reports, First Aid/CPR training, the laws of arrest, how to detain someone, etc. Contrary to popular belief the security officers do not have the powers of arrest that sworn police officers have. Many people have the misconception that security officers have arrest powers. The security officers possess citizen arrest powers only. The citizen arrest powers vary from state to state and in most cases only permit an arrest during the commission of a felony in the presence of the officer. The role of the security officer on the job site is important and needs to be well defined. Otherwise all that will be on the site is another warm body that may or may not be a deterrent to thefts on the job site, especially after hours and on weekends when there is no work being done. What will determine if the security officer will be a deterrent to theft will depend on two things: 1. The training level of the officer 2. What is expected (The Post Orders)


278


This chapter will outline the role of the security officer on the job site. Security officers can be a great benefit to the security of a job site or just another burden depending on what is expected of the officers. Remember this saying, “What you expect is what you get”. If you don’t expect anything you won’t get anything. Security officers need to be motivated into doing a stellar job. This is based on the simple premise that all humans want to feel needed and appreciated. Now saying that you want to motivate the security officer is one thing, actually doing it is another.

SECURITY OFFICER SELECTION The first place to start is the selection process. The selection criteria for choosing the proper applicants for security officer positions are no different than for selecting other employees, except that the persons selected need to be above reproach. The persons selected for security positions should not have a criminal record, especially felony convictions. Most states will not issue “Guard Cards,” as they are called, to any persons that have been convicted of a felony. This requirement has come about since 9/11/01. The security officers are usually provided by a company that is in the security officer business. They do the hiring of the officers and do the background checks on the officer applicants. The selection process will vary from company to company as will the quality of the background check. The steps in the hiring process are as follows: 1. The applicant completes the application. 2. Interviews are conducted. 3. Background checks are done. 4. Medical examination/drug screen 5. Offer of employment is made. The background check is usually done after an interview and is the last step in the process but there are some basic criteria that should be followed. The preemployment or background check should at a minimum include the following: 1. Verifying that the applicant is a citizen of the US 2. Verifying the employment history of the applicant 3. Completing a criminal history check 4. Verifying the previous addresses of the applicant 5. Verifying the educational background of the applicant


279

6. Fingerprint check 7. Drug and alcohol screen 8. Social Security Number check 9. Financial check The items listed above will not guarantee that the applicant will not be a problem once hired. The criminal records check is limited and has some issues. First the records check is not 100% accurate since some jurisdictions don’t have the records online. Second NCIC checks are not 100% either since not all crimes will get reported to the NCIC. However having stated those two points, a criminal history of the applicant is important to perform. The previous address checks will help with criminal check as well since the criminal records for places of residence can be checked. Most residence checks go back 10 years but, if so stated on the application, a longer check can be done. There are applications that request that every address the person has lived at be included. This may be more than twenty years of addresses to check. The more detailed the check the more it will cost so ten years is usually a good compromise for security applicants for some locations. More sensitive locations will require a more a longer and more detailed background check. The cost of background checks will vary depending on what is done. Financial background checks can cost more than the other checks and the residences history goes back more than ten years it will probably cost more. So will any criminal history that will take onsite court house research instead of database searches. All of these things can add cost to the background check and the cost can be justified if the officers are needed for a sensitive location. The client can request a more in-depth background check but the client will foot the bill not the company that will provide the security officers. The selection process for security officers is important and should not be overlooked when choosing a company to provide security officers to the job site. Ask the security company to explain their hiring process. Look at the company’s policies that establish the hiring process. Ask questions to clarify anything you don’t understand in the hiring process, either lack of one the steps outlined above or additional steps.

Security Officer Company Contracts Like any service there are contracts associated with providing security officers to the job site. The contracts vary from company to company. Some are more complex than others but the contract provided by the contracting company will tend to favor them. The contracts being presented need to be reviewed by the legal staff of the construction company that is hiring the security officers. In the ap-

280


pendix of this chapter is a sample contract that was provided by a company called “Get a Security Job Executive Recruiter.” The sample contract will favor the construction company in contracting with the security officer company. The contract outlines the requirements for both the security officer company and the construction company. The sections of the sample contract outline with more detail. The sample contract is just a sample and can be modified to meet the needs of the company and the advice of legal counsel. Consult an attorney for advice before using and signing this sample contract or any other contract.

Post Orders The post orders spell out what is expected of security officers at the assigned post. The orders tell the officers what to do during the course of their shift. The forms to be completed include what goes into the Daily Activity Report (DAR) and when and how to complete an incident report. The orders should set the standard of performance for the security officer. The orders can be viewed as only menial routine tasks to be performed every shift or as really contributing something to securing the job site. To make the orders meaningful they need to be developed with input from the security officer. The orders need to be reviewed periodically to keep them current. When the security officer completes all the paperwork, reports for the shift correctly, and follows orders, he or she needs to be recognized for doing their job. A pat on the back goes a long way even for doing the job. Especially when the reports reflect what is happening on the site. Security officers that are proactive in their approach should be rewarded with an extra day off with pay or a bonus. The post orders include such tasks as: • Post boundaries • Name of the post • Purpose • Duties Q

Making rounds or roving patrols

Q

What to look for

Q

What to check, doors, looks the fence line, etc.

• Exception to post orders • Policies • Reports


Q

Q

281

When to complete an incident report Completing the Daily Activity Report (DAR) Account for the activities of the security officer on each shift

• Maintaining and using the call list • Calling the police • Completing the pass-on log The boundaries of the post include the physical boundaries of the job site. The perimeter fence line and everything inside the fence is included in the physical boundaries of the post. If there is more than one post on the job site, the boundaries for each post are outlined and described in the post orders so the officers know what areas they are responsible for. Otherwise there may be overlap in some areas and gaps in coverage in others. To help clarify the boundaries of the post(s) it is helpful to include a map of the boundaries to help eliminate confusion. The name of the post can be as simple as the “back gate”. To identify the back gate the front of the job site is identified by the street name that borders the main gate (front gate) of the site. The purpose of the post describes what is expected of the post. For example, the back gate officer’s responsibility is to man the gate and to only permit authorized vehicles to enter the site. The duties spell out what is expected of the security officer on each shift: • For example, the gate is to remain closed at all times and the officer at the post is to open the gate and permit authorized vehicles to enter and leave after inspecting them. • The officer is to make rounds of the facility at unscheduled intervals not less than 6 times during the shift. • The officer is to look for anyone attempting to enter the site without authorization, especially after hours and on weekends. • The officer is to check the fence line and note any damage to the fence, such as cuts in the fabric, damage to the barbed wire, etc. • The officer is to check all the office trailer doors and windows and the fence around the equipment storage area. • Any exceptions to the post orders will also be recorded. This section can be used to temporarily change the orders for a special event, etc. • Any policies of either the Company or the Contractor are outlined in this section. The policy could include who to contact when calling off sick at the Post.

282


The post orders outlines what reports are to be completed for each shift based on the following: • When an incident report is to be completed • What is to be included in the report (who, what, when, why, where, and how) • What is to be included in the DAR (Daily Activity Report). This report is the activity report of the security officers and includes everything done by the officers on each shift. The call list is also part of the post orders and lets the security officer know who to call in an emergency and in what order. The call list includes the names and phone numbers of key company personnel. Below are a set of sample instructions to the security officers for the sample security officer contract. The tasks were not written for a job site but an office environment with some TI work being performed. These instructions would appear in the Post Orders for the site. The tasks listed below are duties to be performed by the security officers. To ensure that the duties are completed, bar code stations can be used to record the time and location of the security officer as he or she makes their rounds. Also a checklist form can be used to document the findings at each location. The times for locking and unlocking the doors will be spelled out in the Post Orders listed in the “Locking/inspecting locks” section in the sample below. The next section “Checking condition of doors/windows/locks/areas” is performed during the patrol (making the rounds) part of the shift. When making patrols it is best to not have a routine schedule. They should be done at different intervals. Thieves will case the site and watch and time the security patrols so the site can be entered without being detected. Patrolling is the same as making the rounds. This is where the security officers walk around the site to check to see if the site is secure. During the patrol the officers check doors, walk the fence line, and check the equipment storage areas. The number of patrols expected on each shift is also listed in this section. The patrols should occur at irregular intervals to prevent a pattern from developing that thieves could take advantage of by knowing when the patrols occur and the intervals between the patrols. Access control addresses the number requirement of not letting unauthorized persons enter the job site. It verifies who is permitted access to the site and who is not, especially after hours and on weekends. All visitors sign in at the construction management trailer, are properly escorted, and have the appropriate safety gear like hard hats, safety glasses, and safety shoes before entering the job site. The security officers are instructed to set or make sure that the intrusion detection alarms are completed in all of the job site trailers at the prescribed time.


283

This particular task is completed during the patrolling part of the post orders. Security officer reports will be discussed in the next section in more detail. The Daily Activity Report and the Incident Report are the two main types of reports that security officers use to communicate what is occurring on the job site after hours. The security officers should be spotchecking, as a part of their patrols, the portable fire extinguishers throughout the site. What they need to look for during the spot check is to make sure that there is an extinguisher where it is indicated on the site plan. Sometimes the extinguishers get moved or stolen and any missing extinguisher should be recorded in the DAR and an Incident Report should be completed as well. On the first of each month the officers should be thoroughly checking all of the portable fire extinguishers onsite. The check should include the following: • Is the extinguisher fully charged? • When was the extinguisher inspected last? • Is the annual inspection tag current? • Are they any cracks in the hose? • Is anything blocking access to the extinguisher? Any safety items need to be noted such as “lights burned out near the steps to the office trailer causing the steps to become a tripping hazard”. This can include coffee pot burners left on in the office trailers. Security can be trained to look for safety hazards as they patrol the job site and this will also help them in sharpening their observation skills to look, not just for safety hazards, but for anything else that seems out of place.

SECURITY OFFICER REPORTS Security must be familiar with and know how to complete several kinds of reports. The Daily Activity Report (DAR) is the report or log that describes what was done on each shift by the security officers. For example, “0230 completed patrol of the site and found the light over officer trailer number 3 burned out. This is a safety hazard since the steps are not illuminated”. The log entry provides some detail about what was found while patrolling the site. Do not accept any DAR entry such as “0230 completed patrol all is secure”. The statement tells you nothing and can be completed without even leaving the office and getting out and actually patrolling the site. If you are getting these kinds of DAR entries, talk to the security officer company and let them know that this is not acceptable. The DAR should have everything that occurs on the shift entered into the log. The time clock used to record all the events is military time. Military time is

284


based on a 24-hour clock and eliminates the need to write AM or PM after the time. The logs tell the story of what happened on the shift. Breaks taken by the security officer should also be logged in the DAR. The logs should be reviewed every day and entries that are not acceptable need to be discussed with the security officer company and the security officers. All events go in the DAR. The next report is the Incident Report. The Incident Report (IR), sometimes called the Unusual Event Report, is used to report anything that happens that is not of a routine nature. The IR answers the five Ws and one H questions; Who, What, Why, Where, When, and How? The report is a narrative that tells a story. Some IR forms have information that can be checked on boxes on the form. This usually includes information about individuals that are to be entered on the report. The report does have a space for the narrative which is the bulk of the report. For example, the fence line along the back of the job site has been cut and details about the cut need to be captured in an incident report as well as the DAR. Another example would be if a person comes to the job site after hours and is looking around and attempts to enter the site. The security officer sees the person and asks “Can I help you?” The person says he is there to check out some work that will be done on the site tomorrow and names one of the companies on site. When the security officer attempts to ask for the person’s name and identification, the person abruptly leaves the area. The description of the person should be as detailed as possible and an IR should be completed and the DAR should also reflect the incident. The IR with the detailed description can be invaluable for law enforcement later if there is an incident on the job site and equipment is stolen or damaged. Security officers should be trained to approach someone to solicit information so they do not put themselves in an unsafe situation. Officers should also know when not to approach but instead observe from a distance and report the suspicious activity to local law enforcement. Sometimes it is a good deterrent just to let the thieves know that someone is watching them, even when they are casing the job site and looking for an easy target. The security officers will help to harden the job site by adding another layer of security, patrolling the site and using their observation powers to know when something seems out of place. The IR and the DAR can be valuable tools when properly used and can help in protecting the job site from thefts by providing the information that may at the time seem insignificant but can be important later on, especially the descriptions of individuals that come to the site after hours.


285

APPENDIX A A. GENERAL B. LICENSING C. INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS D. DOCUMENTATION OF INCIDENTS E. PHYSICAL AND TRAINING STANDARDS F. EQUIPMENT G. SHORT TERM SUPPLEMENTAL SERVICE H. AUDIT AND PAYMENT I. INDEMNIFICATION J. MISCELLANEOUS K. PERIOD OF PERFORMANCE Each of the sections of the contract should be reviewed by the construction company’s legal council to determine if it meets the needs of the company. A quick review of the section headings follows and what is in the sample contract can be changed to meet the needs of the construction company. A. The “General” section refers to the general terms and conditions of the contract. This section spells out what services are expected to be furnished by the security officer company. B. Licensing section refers to any licensing requirements that may needed. This would include “Guard Cards” for all security officers and the licensing of the security officer contractor as well. All licenses will need to be valid and current. C. “Insurance Requirements” section outlines the requirements for insurance. Insurance such as Workers Compensation Insurance, General Liability, Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance, Fidelity Insurance, and False Arrest insurance are some of the types of insurance policies needed by the security officer company. There may others that the construction company’s legal council may require. In all insurance coverage in the liability and casualty area, the contractor shall provide documented evidence naming the client as the named insured, prior to acceptance of the contract. The contractor shall execute a “hold harmless” agreement as appended. D. The “Documentation” section outlines the requirements for incident reporting. The contractor shall be responsible for providing both a written and oral re-

286


port of any incident that occurs on any shift by the close of that shift period. This report shall be provided to the shift supervisor. An incident is defined as, but not limited to the following: • Any apparent or suspected criminal attack exercised against the client, its assets, or personnel, including the employees of the contractor assigned to the site or any authorized visitors thereon. • Any criminal or civil charges brought against the contractor or its personnel as it may relate to the contracted service. • Any apparent trespass of the client’s property. • Any verbal or physical confrontation resulting between a contract employee and a client employee or guest or visitor of the client. • Any performance failure of the contractor. • Any federal, state, or county regulatory requirement in which the contractor is in noncompliance. • Any equipment or system failure associated with the performance of the contract service. • Any fire or unsafe condition existing within the client’s environment and observed by or reported to a contract employee, and the emergency actions taken by the contract employee to eliminate or ameliorate such conditions. • Any incidents in which procedures governing the safe and orderly operations of the site are violated. E. The “Physical and Training Standards” outline what is expected of the security officers must be able to perform the tasks assigned without causing injury to him or herself and to others. The training standards can outline what the construction company will require in addition to the basic training all officers receive prior being assigned to a Post. What is in the sample contract cane be changed to meet the needs of the construction company. F. The “Equipment” section outlines which party is responsible for which equipment. This includes supplying the equipment and keeping it in good working order. G. The “Short-Term Supplemental Notice” section outlines the requirements the Company (Construction Company) has to notify the Contractor (Security Officer Company) that more security officers are needed. The notification will be 4 hours for up to 5 additional officers and 8 hours for any more than the original 5 officers. When supplemental manpower is required under circumstances which preclude giving four (4) hours’ advance notice to the Contractor of such need Contractor shall be compensated at the “Short Notice Supplemental Service” rate $21.60 per hour for the additional manpower provided. Otherwise, such “Short Notice Supplemental Service” shall be provided under the Standard rates agreed to: $14.40 per hour, which is made part hereof.


287

H. “Audit and Payment” section addresses what the responsibilities of the Company and Contractor are in regards to billing and payments. There is also a clause about which party can authorize overtime for officers. The basic tenant of the clause is to not permit the Contractor to staff the officer Posts on the job site to fill in for sick and vacations of officers assigned by charging overtime to the Company. I. “Indemnification” is the section that states who is liable for what and basically will request to have the Contractor hold the Company harmless from and against any and all suits, actions, legal or administrative proceedings, claims, demands, damages, punitive damages, liabilities, fines, penalties, losses, costs, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from the negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnitor (Contractor) in any way related to its performance under this Agreement, including without limitation acts or omissions resulting in personal injury, death, or damage or loss to tangible property. These hold harmless clauses are usually an area for much discussion and dispute. To make sure the Company is not put at a disadvantage have legal council of the Company review any proposed language changes to the clause offered by the Contractor for indemnification. This clause can be a sticking point in the contract because neither side wants to hold the other side harmless. J. The “miscellaneous” section can cover the following. Contractor shall not assign or transfer his/her rights, duties and obligations hereunder without obtaining XYZ prior written consent to such assignment. Should any provision of this Agreement or part thereof be held under any circumstances in any jurisdiction to be invalid or unenforceable, such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision of this Agreement or other part of such provision. This Agreement constitutes the entire Agreement between the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof. All prior contemporaneous or other oral or written statements, representations or agreements by or between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof are merged herein. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective permitted successors and assigns. This Agreement shall not be changed or modified orally but only by an instrument in writing signed by the parties which state that it is an amendment to this Agreement. This agreement shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the state of XXXX. Basically this clause will not permit any changes unless they are writing and have been reviewed and signed by both parties. K. “Period of Performance” section outlines how the duration of the contract. This Agreement shall commence at ____________AM/PM on___________ and shall expire at 12:00 midnight on___________, unless previously terminated by thirty (30) days’ written notice by either party to the other, or unless extended by written agreement prior to such expiration date. Any extensions of this Agreement shall be subject to the same terms and conditions. All notices given by ei-

288


ther party to the other under this Agreement shall be addressed as follows: If to Client: XYZ Attn: John Security 2 HAPPY STREET, Suite 500 San Mateo, CA 94403

If to Contractor: ABCD SECURITY, INC. P.O. Box 3244 ANYTOWN, CA 94019

All such notices shall be prepaid, registered, U.S. mail. (ABCD SECURITY, INC)

(XYZ)


289

APPENDIX B Special Security Instructions Locking/inspecting locks • Open/Secure all buildings by unlocking/locking all exterior doors at prescribed times. • Check and close all windows in office areas not occupied during non-business hours. • Open all buildings department doors at prescribed time. • Secure doors to unoccupied areas and turn off all lights. • While on patrol, check for and note all open doors. • Perform routine checks on building and offices. • Close all windows in areas that are unoccupied • Unlock doors and turn off alarms Checking condition of doors/windows/locks/areas • While making each patrol round check all floors. • Inspect all parking lots periodically. • Patrol bathroom areas to prevent unauthorized entry/vandalism. Patrolling/all types/modes/methods • Inspect the general office at all facilities for i.e., computers left on, trashcans not emptied causing a fire hazard, etc. • Patrol assigned areas on foot 3 times per shift not to exceed 4 hours. Access control • Prevent unauthorized entry to building • Insure that all visitors and contractors signed in and out prior to the beginning of each shift. • Prevent the removal of property from building. • Insure that all visitors to building have badges and read and sign visitors log

290


• Insure that visitors to administration area are escorted by employees. • Identify all persons in high risk areas. Observing conditions/events • Observe construction workers to prevent theft. Safety/Security • Ensure that all entrances are unobstructed during each patrol. • Keep all aisle clear of hazards. • Check for defective locks or keys on every shift • Check all electrical main panels nightly to ensure they are secured and not blocked. • Conduct an exterior buildings and parking lot lights during the hours of darkness. • Check each first aid station • Check all office and Warehouse overhead lights for bulb replacement. Equipment use/alarms • Set up alarm system in trailers at prescribed time. Reporting Incidents • Record all unusual occurrences. Fire • Inspect fire extinguishers the 1st of each month. • Check for fires, smoke, or smoking in unauthorized areas twice per shift not to exceed 4 hours. • Insure that fire doors are not obstructed. Immediately correct. • Operate all fire fighting equipment as required. • Respond to all fire alarms. Special reports/calls/contacts • Contact Performance Command Center Supervisor for any situation that can’t be handled by guard force.


291

• Maintain radio contact with SMC by conducting a radio check and status check 3 times per shift not to exceed 4 hours. Annotate as “Site Radio Check” and results in DAR.

292


APPENDIX C THIS AGREEMENT, effective ____________ is between XYZ (XYZ), a corporation organized under the laws of the State of, XXXXXX and ABCD SECURITY, INC., as Contractor.

A. General 1. Contractor agrees to furnish (protective guard services) for the protection of all personal and real property now or hereafter owned, leased, or possessed by XYZ in the building complex located at, 2 HAPPY STREET, SAN MATEO, CA 94403 against vandalism, theft, trespass, fire, and any other events detrimental to the security of such property. The specific number of Security Officers, the principal assignments and hours of duty, shall be agreed upon between XYZ and the Contractor, as described in the attached Statement of Work. All such Services shall be performed in accordance with the policies and guidelines as set forth in that Statement of Work, including but not limited to those set forth in the Special Security Instructions incorporated therein. 2. Contractor agrees to furnish Security Officers to, provide such protection service. 3. Such uniformed Officers will be employees of the Contractor, and the Contractor will pay all salaries and expenses of, and all federal Social Security taxes, federal and state unemployment taxes, and any similar taxes relating to such employees. 4. Contractor shall maintain workers’ compensation, general, and commercial liability, and other insurance as may be reasonable required by XYZ, throughout the term of the Agreement. The insurance policies shall be non cancelable except on fifteen (15) days written notice to XYZ. Evidencing such insurance shall be delivered to XYZ.

B. Licensing 1. ABCD Security Company valid and current state license if required by the state. 2. All officers that will be assigned to the Post will have a valid and current “Guard Card” before being permitted to work.

C. Insurance Requirements 1. The contractor shall present evidence of insurance on the types and amounts required by the state, city, county, or territory and in terms and amounts sat-


293

isfactory to client. Included in the requirement insurance coverage shall be the following: • Worker’s Compensation in accordance with applicable federal and state laws. • Employers Liability and Occupational Disease Liability in the amount of $_______ per occurrence • Comprehensive General Liability including but not limited to contractor’s protection insurance if subcontractors are used. Completed operations liability in the amount of $_______ each occurrence for bodily injury; and $________ for property damage. • Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance including, but not limited to, coverage for non-owned vehicles in the amount of at least $______ for bodily injury and $_____ for property damage. • Fidelity Insurance in the amount of $_______ per incident for the actions of the contractor and/or its agents. • False Arrest insurance for false arrest, false imprisonment, libel, slander, invasion of privacy in the amount of $_______ per incident. • In all insurance coverage in the liability and casualty area, the contractor shall provide documented evidence naming the client as the named insured, prior to acceptance of the contract. The contractor shall execute a “hold harmless” agreement as appended.

D. Documentation of Incidents The contractor shall be responsible for providing both a written and oral report of any incident that occurs on any shift by the close of that shift period. This report shall be provided to the shift supervisor. An incident is defined as, but not limited to the following: • Any apparent or suspected criminal attack exercised against the client, its assets, or personnel, including the employees of the contractor assigned to the site or any authorized visitors thereon. • Any criminal or civil charges brought against the contractor or its personnel as it may relate to the contracted service. • Any apparent trespass of the client’s property. • Any verbal or physical confrontation resulting between a contract employee and a client employee or guest or visitor of the client. • Any performance failure of the contractor. • Any federal, state, or county regulatory requirement in which the contractor is in noncompliance.

294


• Any equipment or system failure associated with the performance of the contract service. • Any fire or unsafe condition existing within the client’s environment and observed by or reported to a contract employee, and the emergency actions taken by the contract employee to eliminate or ameliorate such conditions. • Any incidents in which procedures governing the safe and orderly operations of the site are violated.

E. Physcial and Training Standards 1. Acceptability of personnel for service at 2 HAPPY STREET, SAN MATEO, CA 94403 will be governed by the following conditions: a. Individuals proposed for assignment, as Security Officers will have at least one year of prior satisfactory employment in a similar capacity. b. Prior to acceptance, any person proposed for assignment must be interviewed by an authorized representative of XYZ. c. Action in (b) above will be in addition to such screening and investigation done by the Contractor, the results of which are to be reported to XYZ. d. Without limiting responsibility of the Contractor for the proper conduct of the Officers and the protection of the specified property, the conduct of Security Officers is to be guided by a set of Standard Rules as agreed upon between XYZ and the Contractor and such other special written instructions applicable to the services as may be issued by XYZ from time to time through its authorized representatives. In addition: (1) Personnel shall not work at any other Contractor serviced location, while assigned to XYZ facilities. (2) Personnel shall not be required to work more than twelve (12) continuous hours in one (1) shift. (3) Personnel shall not be required to work more than forty (40) hours during a normal work week, which is defined as Saturday through the following Friday. (4) Personnel shall not be required to work more than two (2) different shifts within a normal work week unless the necessity for such assignments can be justified to the satisfaction of XYZ. (5) Under emergency conditions, exceptions to the above limitations may be approved by the designated Company representative: Primary: John Security, Corporate Manager, Global Asset Protection Department, Work: (650) XXX-XXXX Cell (916) XXX-XXXX Alternate:


295

e. Nothing in this section shall limit the right of XYZ to seek legal remedies in the event Contractor non performance results in actual damage exceeding the amount withheld from billing. Any failure on the part of ABCD SECURITY, INC. to require performance of the provisions of this section shall in no way affect the right of XYZ to enforce the provisions on subsequent occurrences. f. The final decision as to acceptability of an individual for work will rest with the authorized XYZ representative, as will the right to waive any of the below requirements. (1) Failure to provide the number of Officers required for each assignment and each shift as specified in the Statement of Work. (2) Failure to assign trained substitute Officers as replacements. (3) Allowing an Officer to work in excess of twelve (12) hours in any twenty four (24) hour period or more than forty (40) hours in a work week without the written consent of the authorized XYZ representative. (4) Failure to maintain complete records of all hours worked by each employee assigned. (5) Failure to assign a correctly uniformed and equipped Officer. (6) Failure to replace any employee within four (4) hours upon request. (7) Failure to furnish all equipment and material necessary for the performance of the services as specified under the contract. 2. Contractor will be responsible for conducting its own labor relations with any labor organization either representing or seeking representation among Contractor employees and shall negotiate or seek to adjust all disputes that may arise. In turn, XYZ agrees that, except as otherwise provided herein, the Contractor may freely enter into any contract with any labor organization lawfully representing or seeking representation among Officers performing duties described hereunder. No provision under such a contract or any existing contract shall obligate XYZ to Contractor employees or to any union representing Contractor employees on the termination of this Agreement or at any other time. In the event that the Contractor has knowledge that an actual or potential labor dispute prevents or threatens to prevent timely performance under this Agreement, an immediate notice, including all relevant information concerning the dispute, shall be sent to the authorized Company representative. 3. Prior to assignment to supply Services hereunder, each of Contractor’s employees to be so assigned shall be required to complete XYZ’s reasonable training requirements. 4. Contractor agrees to provide continuity of service and accepts the responsi-

296


bility of providing service for the protection of plant, property equipment, material, and personnel during any strike, threatened strike, work stoppage or other interference with normal plant operations. Officers will continue to report for duty, remain at their assignments until properly relieved and discharge their duties in the regular manner. In addition, Officers will perform such other protection duties as determined to be necessary and proper under the circumstances by the authorized representative. If the Contractor fails to provide continuity of service, then XYZ may hire Officers from another Contractor for the duration of the contingency situation. Any additional costs incurred by XYZ as a result of such action will be billed to the Contractor. 5. Contractor agrees that the facility protection service provided by this Agreement shall be performed by qualified, careful, and efficient employees of the Contractor in the strictest conformity with best practices, and in accordance with such standards as may be prescribed from time to time. Contractor further agrees that, upon request, with or without cause, Contractor will remove from service hereunder any employee(s) who, in unrestricted opinion, may be guilty of improper conduct or is not qualified or needed to perform the work assigned. It is further agreed that Contractor shall immediately replace any of its employees so removed if directed to do so. 6. Contractor personnel may be required to operate special access control equipment in the Performance Command Center provided and maintained by XYZ. The cost to repair any damage to such equipment beyond the scope of normal wear and usage will be the responsibility of the Contractor, and the next following invoice submitted will reflect a credit of such amount. 7. Daily inspections of the Security Officers shall be conducted at least once per 8 hour shift by a non resident supervisor of the Contractor. An “Officer’s Daily Activity Report” will be completed at the conclusion of each inspection and left in a sealed envelope for the authorized representative. Contractor supervisory personnel may not enter Company property beyond the Front Lobby area for purposes of inspection without the prior authorization of an authorized representative, except in a bonafide emergency. 8. Contractor personnel shall make no arrests or detentions without the express consent or written instruction from the authorized Company representative unless otherwise specified in the special security instructions. Officers shall not sign a complaint on behalf of XYZ and any request for a signed complaint by a law enforcement agency must be referred to an authorized XYZ representative. 9. Contractor agrees to prepare and submit work shift schedules to an authorized XYZ representative at least five (5) working days before the effective


297

date of implementation. Changes or substitutions in the work shift schedule will not be made without prior notification to XYZ except in a bonafide emergency.

F. Equipment 1. Contractor will provide and maintain: Two (2) two way radios for patrol communications. 2. XYZ will supply one (1) set of master keys as needed for use by Contractor personnel. These keys are not to be duplicated or removed at any time from the premises. Should a set of keys be lost or should it be shown that duplication of the keys provided has occurred, Contractor agrees to reimburse for the cost of re keying all exterior locks, doors, gates, etc. to the facility.

G. Short Term Supplemental Service 1. In emergencies, additional Officers, up to five (5) in number are to be provided within four (4) hours’ notification, and further reasonable numbers of personnel as required within eight (8) hours thereafter. If XYZ must fill this need from other sources because of non responsiveness by the Contractor, any costs in excess of that which would be due to the Contractor if they had met this condition, will be borne by the Contractor. 2. When supplemental manpower is required under circumstances which preclude giving four (4) hours’ advance notice to the Contractor of such need Contractor shall be compensated at the “Short Notice Supplemental Service” rate $21.60 per hour for the additional manpower provided. Otherwise, such “Short Notice Supplemental Service” shall be provided under the Standard rates agreed to: $14.40 per hour, which is made part hereof.

H. Audit and Payment Contractor shall furnish the Company a weekly summary of hours of service provided, both regular and special, in a format acceptable to XYZ. Contractor will invoice XYZ on a monthly or bi weekly basis and will mail or deliver same to such office as XYZ may from time to time direct. These invoices are payable to Contractor within (30) thirty days. No overtime will be paid unless it is authorized in writing by the Company. Any costs to man a Post that needs to be filled due to vacations and sick will be borne by the Contractor and not the Company.

I. Indemnification Each party (“Indemnitor”) shall protect, defend, indemnify, and hold the other

298


party (“Indemnitee”) harmless from and against any and all suits, actions, legal or administrative proceedings, claims, demands, damages, punitive damages, liabilities, fines, penalties, losses, costs, and expenses, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from the negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnitor in any way related to its performance under this Agreement, including without limitation acts or omissions resulting in personal injury, death, or damage or loss to tangible property. IN NO EVENT SHALL XYZ BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT OR REVENUE, OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, OR DAMAGES FOR BODILY INJURY OR DEATH INCURRED OR SUFFERED AS A RESULT OF PERFORMANCE, NONPERFORMANCE, TERMINATION, OR OTHER ACTION OR INACTION UNDER AGREEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL INTORE BE LIABLE TO CONTRACTOR OR ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY DAMAGE OR BODILY INJURY CAUSED TO CONTRACTOR OR ANY OF ITS EMPLOYEES OR REPRESENTATIVES WHILE SUCH PARTY IS PERFORMING SERVICES HEREUNDER, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT SUCH DAMAGE OR INJURY IS THE DIRECT RESULT OF XYZ’S NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.

J. Miscellaneous Contractor shall not assign or transfer his/her rights, duties and obligations hereunder without obtaining XYZ prior written consent to such assignment. Should any provision of this Agreement or part thereof be held under any circumstances in any jurisdiction to be invalid or unenforceable, such invalidity or unenforceability shall not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision of this Agreement or other part of such provision. This Agreement constitutes the entire Agreement between the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter hereof. All prior contemporaneous or other oral or written statements, representations or agreements by or between the parties with respect to the subject matter hereof are merged herein. This Agreement shall inure to the benefit of the parties hereto and their respective permitted successors and assigns. This Agreement shall not be changed or modified orally but only by an instrument in writing signed by the parties which state that it is an amendment to this Agreement. This agreement shall be construed in accordance with the laws of the state of XXXX.

299


K. Period of Performance This Agreement shall commence at ____________A.M./P.M. on___________ and shall expire at 12:00 midnight on___________, unless previously terminated by thirty (30) days’ written notice by either party to the other, or unless extended by written agreement prior to such expiration date. Any extensions of this Agreement shall be subject to the same terms and conditions. All notices given by either party to the other under this Agreement shall be addressed as follows: If to Client: XYZ Attn: John Security 2 HAPPY STREET, Suite 500 San Mateo, CA 94403

If to Contractor: ABCD SECURITY, INC. P.O. Box 3244 ANYTOWN, CA 94019

All such notices shall be prepaid, registered, U.S. mail. (ABCD SECURITY, INC)

(XYZ)


CHAPTER

Security Policies

12

P

olicies are the backbone of the security program. The policies state what will be done and who is to do it. They provide a guide for the employees, visitors, subcontractors about what is expected from a security standpoint while on the job site. The security policies are the framework for the security program. Think of the policies as the foundation that holds up the security program. As a contractor you wouldn’t think of constructing a building without a solid foundation so don’t implement a security program without the solid foundation of policies. Some of the security policies that need to be developed and implemented are as follows: 1. Physical Security 2. Site Access Control 3. Equipment Security 4. Pre-Employment Screening 5. Workplace Violence Prevention 6. Information Security 7. Bomb Threats The list is by no means exhaustive but the policies listed are some of the basic ones that can be used in most security programs. Each of the policies will be discussed in more detail later in the chapter. Developing and implementing security policies is not an easy task. As will be discussed in the next section of the chapter, the policies development should be a team effort with consensus. Obtaining the consensus of the team is the hard part


302


and executive management should set the direction and tone of the security policy team meetings in the first meeting. This way, the expectations are set and the team will know its charter. Writing the policies is usually easier than the implementation. The written policies are useless unless the whole company knows that they exist and that they will be enforced. Otherwise the effort of writing the policies is wasted. The way to communicate the policies to the company is to do it in a security awareness briefing. The summary of the policy and what each person’s role and responsibility will be in the implementation process are presented.

DEVELOPING POLICIES The policies should be developed using a team approach. As previously stated executive management will set the tone and direction of the team. When the meeting notice goes out for the first team meeting, the expectations are outlined in the memo to each team member so there is no misunderstanding of the purpose, goals, and charter of the team. The policy development team should consist of the following members at a minimum: • Executive management • Operations • Engineering • HR • Estimating • Accounting • Safety The reason for the team approach is to solicit input on the policy development so there will less resistance in the implementation phase. The list above is a sample of the departments or groups that should be part of the policy development team. Each company should decide which departments should be a part of the team based on the organizational structure of the company. Whatever departments or groups are chosen to be on the team just be sure it is a good representation of the company to help implement the policies when they have been approved. The steps for policy include the following: 1. Appoint members of the team 2. Decide which polices will be developed and implemented 3. Draft the policies 4. Keep the polices brief

Security Policies

303

5. Discuss each policy line by line to make sure that the team is in agreement 6. Make the necessary changes and review the policy again with the team at the next meeting 7. Finalize each of the policies 8. When each policy has gone through the steps above, submit the entire package to executive management for review an approval 9. Make any changes that executive management has noted 10. Have executive management sign the policies 11. Issue the policies 12. Present the policies to the company in security briefings 13. Review and update the policies at least annually The steps outlined above can be used as a guideline in helping to develop and implement security policies. As stated above the policies should be as brief as possible. If the policies are too long, they will not be read and consequently not followed. Brevity is important but the policy must convey what is to be done or not done clearly enough to be understood by all in the company. Policies cover rules and regulations and differ from procedures which are standards. For example, the standard may be on how to build a perimeter fence for the job site, the materials to use, how to anchor the fence, etc. while the policy on physical security states that there shall be a perimeter fence made from chain link fabric. To be really effective, policies make reference to any standards and guidelines that already exist within the company. Guidelines are a set of procedures on how to do something and are sometimes considered “best practices”. The policies answer the questions, Who, What, When, Where, Why, and How. The purpose of the policy is to let the employees and visitors know what is expected of them when they are on the job site. The policy of visitor sign will also provide information what the safety policy is for visitors to the site. The “Who” in the policy refers who is to comply with the policy. In other words, what group of employees is covered by the policy. All of the security policies should pertain to all of the employees of the company. “What” is the basis of the policy which is the subject covered by the policy. The title of the policy usually tells what the policy is all about. For example, the policy for access control would address access to company job sites. The “When” is the effective date of the policy. The date the policy is signed is in the header of the policy. It can also be described in the policy, for example, the policy for job site access control is not in effect until the person enters the job site. “Where” are the geographical locations that the policy is to be enforced. The

304


locations can be listed separately or the policy can state that it is for all locations, or “all locations with the exception of…”. The “Why” of the policy is explained in the purpose section. This is to let the employees and visitors know the reason for the policy. The purpose statement can be as simple as, “To protect all the employees, visitors and company property from theft and damage”. “How” explains what will be expected to implement the policy. This can be the signing in of, and the issuance of, visitor badges for all visitors to the job site. For company employees it may mean showing the company ID badge to the receptionist at the office trailer of the job site.

Summary • Security is meaningless if someone comes to your office and takes your laptop. • Wear your employee badge when you are at XYZ Company. • If you see someone you don’t recognize not wearing a badge, ask if you can help him or her.

SITE ACCESS CONTROL FOR JOB SITES This policy covers all employees and visitors to the job site. Access to every job site, equipment storage areas, tool storage, office trailers computer room, and work areas must be access controlled. Management responsible for the staff working in these areas must consult the Security Department to determine the appropriate access control method (receptionists, metal key locks, magnetic card door locks, etc.).

Policy • Badges Must Be Visible When in XYZ Company Premises Q

Q

Whenever in XYZ Company buildings or facilities, all persons must wear an identification badge on their outer garments so that the information on the badge is clearly visible. To obtain a picture ID badge complete the online form at (add link). Your manager must approve the badge request form. NO BADGES WILL BE MADE OR ACCESS GRANTED WITHOUT MANAGER’S APPROVAL.

• Temporary Badges for Employees Who Have Forgotten Their Badges Q

Employees who have forgotten their identification badge must obtain a temporary badge by providing a driver’s license or another piece of picture identification. The temporary badge shall be valid for a single day only.

• Reporting Lost or Stolen Identification Badges

Security Policies

Q

305

Identification badges and physical access cards that have been lost or stolen— or are suspected of being lost or stolen—must be reported to the Security Department immediately.

• No “Piggybacking” Through Controlled Doors Permitted Q

Q

Physical access controls for XYZ Company buildings are intended to restrict the entry of unauthorized persons. XYZ Company employees must not permit unknown or unauthorized persons to pass through doors, gates, and other entrances to restricted areas at the same time when authorized persons go through these entrances. This is essential to the security of XYZ Company premises and XYZ Company employees.

• Individuals without Identification Badges Must Be Challenged Q

Whenever a worker notices an unescorted visitor inside XYZ Company restricted areas, the visitor should be immediately questioned about the purpose for being in restricted areas. The visitor should then be directly accompanied to a reception desk, a guard station, or the person they came to see.

• Identification and Sign-In Process Required for All Visitors Q

All visitors must show picture identification and sign-in prior to gaining access to restricted areas controlled by XYZ Company.

• Escorts Required for All Visitors Q

Q

Q

Q

Visitors to XYZ Company offices must be escorted at all times by an authorized employee, consultant, or contractor. An escort is required as soon as a visitor enters a controlled area, and until this visitor leaves the controlled area. Visitors requiring an escort include customers, vendors, former employees, employee family members, equipment repair contractors, package delivery, and company staff. Law enforcement personnel will be referred by reception to the Legal Department for entry and escort.

• Periodic Identification Badge Reports Issued to Department Heads Q

Every department head shall receive a monthly listing of all persons in their area who currently have valid identification badges. Department heads must promptly report to the Security Department all valid badges that are no longer needed.

• Receptionists for Areas Containing Sensitive Information

306


Q

Receptionists or other staff must control visitor or other third party access to XYZ Company office trailers and the job site. Visitors and other third parties must not be permitted to use employee entrances or other uncontrolled pathways leading to areas containing sensitive information.

• Propped-Open Gates to Job Site Require Presence of a Guard Q

Whenever the gates to the job sit are propped-open (perhaps for moving large equipment in or out, or for large or similar items), the entrance must be continuously monitored by an employee or a contract guard from the Security Officer Company.

• Multi-User Computer or Communications Systems in Locked Rooms Q

All multi-user computer and communications equipment must be located in locked rooms to prevent tampering and unauthorized usage.

• Physical Security Measures for Computers and Communications Systems Q

Buildings which house XYZ Company computers or communications systems must be protected with physical security measures that prevent unauthorized persons from gaining access.

• Restricted Access to Tool Storage, Equipment Storage, Office Trailers (After hours) Q

The tool storage, equipment and office trailers after hours are controlled areas within the computer center. Access must be restricted to those whose job responsibilities require their presence in these areas.

• Approved Property Pass Is Required for Removal of All Company Owned Equipment.

ENFORCEMENT The policy must be adhered to and the requirements outlined must be followed. Any employee that violates this policy is subject to disciplinary action up to and including termination. The policy sample for site access control above has several main sections or headings. The sections are as follows: 1. The header of the policy which contains the title of the policy, authorizing signature, date, which is responsible for maintaining the policy (process owner), revision number, etc. The information contained in the header is administrative in nature. 2. The next section is the summary. This states what the policy is all about in summary fashion so if the reader only reads this section they can get a good idea what the policy is about and what the requirements are.

Security Policies

307

3. The purpose section spells out what the policy is all about and the reason for it. The section also states who is covered under the policy. 4. The next section is the policy itself. This section spells out what is to be done or not done. These are the rules and regulations that must be adhered to. 5. The last section outlines enforcement and what the consequences are for not following the policy. The policy on site access control is an important one in helping to keep the job site a safe and secure work site. The next sections will outline the other policies that are listed earlier in the chapter. A policy sample for each one will be presented.

PHYSICAL SECURITY The physical security policy spells out what is to be done at each job site to protect the personnel, equipment, etc. The physical security policy includes such things as: • The perimeter fence • Intrusion detection • CCTV system • Security lighting • Lock and key control

Summary • Security is meaningless if someone comes to your job site and steals tools, computers, etc. • All job sites will have a perimeter fence around the site made from chain link fabric. • All job sites will have adequate security lighting to thwart thieves. • Intrusion detection will be used on all office trailers, and the tool storage trailer • CCTV will be used in the equipment storage, tool storage and the officer trailer areas. • Lock and key control is important to protecting the site from thefts of tools and equipment.

308


PURPOSE—SITE PHYSICAL SECURITY The Site Physical Security policy is designed to help protect the job site, equipment storage areas, tool storage, office trailers computer room, and work areas must be from theft, and damage from vandalism. Management is responsible for ensuring that the policy is implemented and enforced on all job sites.

Policy Perimeter Fences • Whenever possible and in high crime areas a perimeter fence shall be installed on every job site. • The fence will be made of chain link fabric and will be eight (8) feet high and topped with barbed wire. • For detailed specifications on the chain link fabrics please refer to security design standard. • The chain link fence is to be temporary in nature and will be anchored to prevent the fence from blowing over in high winds. • “No Trespassing” signs should be posted along the fence line. • Reward signs for information for theft of equipment and materials from the job site need to be posted along the fence line. Intrusion Detection • All office trailers and tool storage areas will have intrusion detection installed and monitored. • The intrusion detection system shall be an industrial system and not a residential one • The system shall consist of motion detection and glass breaks for the office trailers. CCTV System • CCTV shall be installed on the job site to monitor the office trailers and the tool and equipment storage areas. • The CCTV system will meet the requirements of security design specification number. • The CCTV will be monitored off site as well as recorded on motion using a digital recorder.

Security Policies

309

Security Lighting • Security lighting shall be installed to light up the site. • The lighting will be placed around the equipment storage areas. • The lighting will create enough illumination for the CCTV cameras to work effectively. • See security design specification number for more details on lighting specifications. Lock and Key Control • All job sites will use a lock and key control system. • All keys will be accounted for and only those that have a need will receive the keys to the equipment and tool storage areas.

ENFORCEMENT The policy must be adhered to and the requirements outlined must be followed. Any employee that violates this policy is subject to disciplinary action up to and including termination.

EQUIPMENT SECURITY Heavy equipment security is important on the job site and the following policy provides some ways to protect the equipment. Equipment theft is a problem on some job sites and costs the companies in lost time in the project and higher insurance premiums. So the equipment security policy is an important one for securing the job site.

Summary • Security is meaningless if someone comes to your job site and steals tools, equipment, etc. • All job sites will have a perimeter fence around the site made from chain link fabric. • All job sites will have adequate security lighting to thwart thieves. • Intrusion detection will be used on all office trailers, and the tool storage trailer • CCTV will be used in the equipment storage area • Lock and key control is important to protecting the site from thefts of tools and equipment.

310


PURPOSE—EQUIPMENT SECURITY The Equipment Security policy is designed to help protect the heavy equipment on the job site. The heavy equipment on site must be from theft, and damage from vandalism. Management is responsible for ensuring that the policy is implemented and enforced on all job sites.

Policy Equipment Security • Whenever possible and in high crime areas a fence shall be installed on every job site to store the equipment used on the site when it is not in use especially after hours. • The fence will be made of chain link fabric and will be eight (8) feet high and topped with barbed wire. (For detailed specifications on the chain link fabrics please refer to security standard). • The chain link fence is to be temporary in nature and will be anchored to prevent the fence from blowing over in high winds. • Pad locks and cables will be used to secure the gates for the equipment storage area. • When the equipment is not in use it will be lined up in rows to make it easy to see if a piece of equipment is missing. • All equipment will have kill switches installed on it. • The most expensive pieces of equipment $100,000 or greater in value will have a GPS system installed to track the equipment if it is stolen. CCTV System • CCTV shall be installed on the job site to monitor the equipment storage area. • The CCTV system will meet the requirements of specification number. • The CCTV will be monitored off site as well as recorded on motion using a digital recorder. Security Lighting • The lighting will be placed around the equipment storage area. • The lighting will create enough illumination for the CCTV cameras to work effectively.

Security Policies

311

Lock and Key Control • All job sites will use a lock and key control system • The keys of the locks for the equipment storage area will be tightly controlled


PRE-EMPLOYMENT SCREENING Pre-employment screening is the background check that is completed on each full time and temporary employee hired to work directly for the contractor and it excludes sub-contractor employees. The policy outlines the pre-employment screening process. The Fair Credit Reporting Act (FCRA) sets the requirements and the rights of the individual when conducting the pre-employment screening. A summary of those requirements is in Figure 12-1. A copy of the summary is given to the applicant upon completing the application for employment. Also included in the application packet is a form for the applicant to sign granting permission to have the pre-employment screening done and to notify them of their rights under the FCRA. The form usually precedes the FCRA rights information. Both must be given to the applicant and the applicant must sign the release (permission) form before any background screening can be done. As you will notice the permission form states that any falsification of the application, resume or answers to interview questions will be grounds for dismissal if already hired, or the person will be eliminated form further consideration for employment. It is better to do the background screening before the person starts work. This way if there is any misleading, erroneous, or willfully deceptive information on the application, interview, etc. the person will not be given further consideration, rather than having to dismiss the person from employment. The company doing the background screening should provide a written report of their findings. The report should be forwarded to someone in the company for review. Any questions about the information in the report should be directed to the company that did the background screen. The reports will state for example if the person did attend and graduate from the schools listed on the application and has obtained the degrees listed. If there are discrepancies it will be noted on the report. If the person did not achieve the degrees listed at the institution listed than that will also be reported. It is important to remember that if someone is willfully deceptive on the application, resume or in answering the interview questions then it may not be a

312


A Summary of Your Rights Under the Fair Credit Reporting Act The federal Fair Credit Reporting Act (FCRA) is designed to promote accuracy, fairness, and privacy of information in the files of every "consumer reporting agency" (CRA). Most CRAs are credit bureaus that gather and sell information about you -- such as if you pay your bills on time or have filed bankruptcy -- to creditors, employers, landlords, and other businesses. You can find the complete text of the FCRA, 15U.S.C. §§1681-1681 u. The FCRA gives you specific rights, as outlined below. You may have additional rights under state law. You may contact a state or local consumer protection agency or a state attorney general to learn those rights. You must be told if information in your file has been used against you. Anyone who uses information from a CRA to take action against you -- such as denying an application for credit, insurance, or employment — must tell you, and give you the name, address, and phone number of the CRA that provided the consumer report. You can find out what is in your file. At your request, a CRA must give you the information in your file, and a list of everyone who has requested it recently. There is no charge for the report if a person has taken action against you because of information supplied by the CRA, if you request the report within 60 days of receiving notice of the action. You also are entitled to one free report every twelve months upon request if you certify that (1) you are unemployed and plan to seek employment within 60 days, (2) you are on welfare, or (3) your report is inaccurate due to fraud. Otherwise, a CRA may charge you up to eight dollars. You can dispute inaccurate information with the CRA. If you tell a CRA that your file contains inaccurate information, the CRA must investigate the items (usually within 30 days) by presenting to its information source all relevant evidence you submit, unless your dispute is frivolous. The source must review your evidence and report its findings to the CRA. (The source also must advise national CRAs -- to which it has provided the data -- of any error.) The CRA must give you a written report of the investigation, and a copy of your report if the investigation results in any change. If the CRA's investigation does not resolve the dispute, you may add a brief statement to your file. The CRA must normally include a summary of your statement in future reports. If an item is deleted or a dispute statement is filed, you may ask that anyone who has recently received your report be notified of the change. Inaccurate information must be corrected or deleted. A CRA must remove or correct inaccurate or unverified information from its files, usually within 30 days after you dispute it. FIGURE 12-1 Fair Credit Reporting Act (FCRA).

Security Policies

However, the CRA is not required to remove accurate data from your file unless it is outdated (as described below) or cannot be verified. If your dispute results in any change to your report, the CRA cannot reinsert into your file a disputed item unless the information source verifies its accuracy and completeness. In addition, the CRA must give you a written notice telling you it has reinserted the item. The notice must include the name, address and phone number of the information source. You can dispute inaccurate items with the source of the information. If you tell anyone -- such as a creditor who reports to a CRA -- that you dispute an item, they may not then report the information to a CRA without including a notice of your dispute. In addition, once you've notified the source of the error in writing, it may not continue to report the information if it is, in fact, an error. Outdated information may not be reported. In most cases, a CRA may not report negative information that is more than seven years old; ten years for bankruptcies. Access to your file is limited. A CRA may provide information about you only to people with a need recognized by the FCRA -- usually to consider an application with a creditor, insurer, employer, landlord, or other business. Your consent is required for reports that are provided to employers, or reports that contain medical information. A CRA may not give out information about you to your employer, or prospective employer, without your written consent. A CRA may not report medical information about you to creditors, insurers, or employers without your permission. You may choose to exclude your name from CRA lists for unsolicited credit and insurance offers. Creditors and insurers may use file information as the basis for sending you unsolicited offers of credit or insurance. Such offers must include a toll-free phone number for you to call if you want your name and address removed from future lists. If you call, you must be kept off the lists for two years. If you request, complete, and return the CRA form provided for this purpose, you must be taken off the lists indefinitely. You may seek damages from violators. If a CRA, a user or (in some cases) a provider of CRA data, violates the FCRA, you may sue them in state or federal court. The FCRA gives several different federal agencies authority to enforce the FCRA: FIGURE 12-1 Fair Credit Reporting Act (FCRA). (continued)

313

314


good idea to hire this person. Each company needs to establish some guidelines for when a prospective employee would be denied employment because of the results of the background screening.

Summary • Security is meaningless if someone especially a fellow employee comes to the job site and steals tools, equipment, etc. • All new hires will submit to a background screening. • The process will be completed before the employee starts work. • A third party will conduct the screening

PURPOSE—PRE-EMPLOYMENT SCREENING The Pre-Employment Screening policy is designed to help screen out potential employees that could be a problem. The screening is to make sure the person applying for the job is who they say they are. Also, the background is checked to make sure there are not any false statements on the employment application, resume, and in answers to interview questions.

Policy Pre-Employment Screening • All new hire company employees will be subjected to a background check. • The check will include; employment history, education, places of residence, financial, criminal history, DMV record check, and reference check. • All prospective employees will be asked to sign a form granting permission to conduct the screening. • The third party vendor will conduct the background screening and issue a report. • No offers of employment will be provided until the background screening is completed. • All pre-employment screenings will be in compliance with the Fair Credit Reporting Act. Reasons for Denial of Employment • Any willfully deceptive, or misleading statements made on the application • Any willfully deceptive, or misleading statements on the resume • Any willfully deceptive, or misleading statements during the interview

Security Policies

315


WORKPLACE VIOLENCE PREVENTION The sample Workplace Violence Prevention policy is designed to make the workplace safe and secure by not tolerating any threats or acts of violence.

Summary • Security is meaningless if someone especially a fellow employee comes to the job site and steals tools, equipment, etc. • All new hires will submit to a background screening. • The process will be completed before the employee starts work. • A third party will conduct the screening

PURPOSE—WORKPLACE VIOLENCE PREVENTION The Workplace Violence Prevention policy is designed to help make the workplace safe and secure. No threats or acts of violence will be tolerated. The Company has zero tolerance to violence and threats of violence policy. Any person that violates this policy is subject to immediate termination.

Policy Workplace Violence Prevention • All acts or threats of violence will not be tolerated. • Violent acts will result in disciplinary action up to and including discharge. • All threats (even in jest) are considered serious and may result in disciplinary action. • The Company policy prohibits retaliation or harassment against an employee who reports a real or perceived threat. Employee’s Responsibility • Never make a threat, even if kidding. • Never engage in an act of violence. • Report any threat or act of violence immediately to your supervisor.

316


• Never bring a weapon to work. • Learn the early warning signs of potential violence. Supervisor’s Responsibility • Take appropriate and immediate action to prevent injury (Emergencies should be reported to 911). • Notify Human Resources. • Call 1-800-U R -XXXX to advise the Assessment Team. • Follow-up action including disciplinary action Assessment Team Members • The Team is comprised of the following: • Corporate Security • Human Resources • Regional Security • Legal • Division Management Assessment Team’s Responsibility • Confidentially investigate every threat or act of violence reported to them. • Consult with the appropriate levels of management to determine course of action. • Continue to monitor policies and procedures to insure a safe and secure work environment.

ENFORCEMENT The policy must be adhered to and the requirements outlined must be followed. Any employee that violates this policy is subject to immediate termination.

INFORMATION SECURITY The Information Security policy outlines how to mark and protect company confidential documents:

Summary • Security is meaningless if someone especially a fellow employee comes to the job site and steals tools, equipment, etc.

Security Policies

317

• There are two types of documents in the Company—Public and Confidential. Public documents are not restricted and Confidential documents are. • All employees will safeguard “confidential” documents.

PURPOSE—INFORMATION SECURITY POLICY Our confidential information gives XYZ Company a competitive advantage in our marketplace. XYZ Company can be damaged if competitors, or unauthorized persons, gain access to this confidential information. Unauthorized disclosure of XYZ Company information is against our policy and can result in disciplinary action including dismissal:

Policy Company and Customer information is to be protected. Information can be classified as in one of the following classifications: • Public • Confidential Not all documents are considered Confidential. Some documents are considered public. Public Documents Public documents are those documents that will not cause any harm to the company or its customers if they are disclosed. Examples of our Public information include: • Information about the Company picnic • Information about the Company softball team • Information about the bowling team Confidential Documents Confidential documents are those documents that if disclosed will cause harm to the Company and/or the Customer. Examples of our confidential information include: • Any information that is owned by XYZ Company, including information in our databases, • Technical or scientific information relative to current and future products, services or research,

318


• Business plans, marketing plans, and all projections, • Earnings and all other financial data, • Personnel information including possible executive and organizational changes, • Application software source code and executables, and customer information Document Marking Confidential documents need to be marked so they can be protected. The documents should be marked on the cover sheet with the word “CONFIDENTIAL” and on the bottom right side of each succeeding page. Public documents do not need to be marked.

ENFORCEMENT The policy must be adhered to and the requirements outlined must be followed. Any employee that violates this policy is subject to immediate termination.

BOMB THREATS The Bomb Threat policy is short because the bomb threat procedures present detailed steps to take to address a bomb threat. The sample policy below will help with developing a job site bomb threat policy.

Summary • Security is meaningless if someone especially a fellow employee comes to the job site and steals tools, equipment, etc. • There two types of bomb threats; the vague one stating there is a bomb in this place, and the second one which is more specific giving time and location of the device. • All bomb threats should be taken seriously but the ones with the location and time should trigger an immediate evacuation of the job site.

PURPOSE—BOMB THREAT POLICY This policy is intended to give job sites direction in responding to bomb threats. It is the position of this Company that any threat is to be taken seriously and job site management will respond in a prudent and expeditious manner to all threats of bombs.

Security Policies

319

Policy There are two explanations for making a call reporting that a bomb is to go off in a particular location: 1. The caller has a definite knowledge or believes that an explosive device has been or will be placed and wants to minimize the potential personal injury or property damage. The caller may be the “bomber” or someone who has become aware of the situation. 2. The caller wants to create an atmosphere of fear and/or panic which will, in turn, possibly result in disruption of normal activities. What to Do The following is a guideline for all job sites in the event of a bomb threat: If a bomb threat is received remain calm and do the following: 1. Check the exact time 2. Listen carefully to the caller’s voice 3. Write down the caller’s exact words 4. Use the Bomb Threat checklist 5. Ask questions, particularly about: i. location of device ii. time of detonation iii. type of device 6. Listen for background noises 7. Note the time the caller hangs up 8. Hang up the phone. Immediately, before the next call comes in: i. ii.

Pick up that phone line and dial *69. Listen and write down the recorded phone number. 9

9. Call the local Police and report: i. ii. iii. iv. v.

Your name Location and telephone number you are calling from The situation (the fact that you have received a bomb threat) The location of the device, if known Time it is set to denote, if known

320


vi. Type of device, if know vii. Exact time you received the call viii. The information received after you dialed *69. ix. Any other information on the Bomb Threat Checklist 10. Inform your supervisor 11. Contact the Company Office at XXX-XXX

EVACUATION The following will govern the process of the job site’s handling of bomb threats especially those threats where the caller provides a time and location of the device: 1. Clear all buildings by using the fire drill procedure or other predetermined plan; 2. Call the local Police and request that they come and search all buildings; 3. Call the Company Office. Give the information clearly. 4. Inform all Supervisors of the bomb threat by the method determined to be best by the Job Site Manager. 5. Move all workers far enough away from buildings so that they will be safe in case of an explosion. 6. Assist the law enforcement officers in checking the buildings when requested. 7. After the site management and the law enforcement officers have thoroughly searched the buildings, the Job Site Manager shall decide whether or not to return work. A waiting period of at least 15 to 30 minutes after the time established for the bomb to go off should be observed (if there was an established time) before returning to work. 8. Any decision concerning dismissal of the job site after the above procedures have been followed shall be left to the judgment of the Job Site Manager.

ENFORCEMENT The policy must be adhered to and the requirements outlined must be followed. Any employee that violates this policy is subject to discipline up to and including immediate termination. The bomb threat checklist is important and sample checklists are in Figures 12-2 and 12-3. The development and implementation of security policies will help in security the job site because it will raise the awareness level of all the employees that are

Security Policies

321

at the job site. They will know what is expected of them and what their role is in the securing of the job site.

322


Bomb Threat Checklist Please print. Exact Wording of the Threat (Write Below)

QUESTIONS TO ASK When is the bomb going to explode?

Where is it right now?

What does it look like? What kind of bomb is it? What will cause it to explode?

Did you place the homh?_ Why? What is your address?. What is your name? FIGURE 12-2 Bomb threat checklist.

Security Policies

Sex of Caller:. Race: Age

Length of call:_

Number at which call is received: Time Date Caller's Voice Calm Crying Angry NormaL Excited Distinct Slow Rapid Soft Loud Laughter

/

/

Deep Ragged Clearing Throat Slurred Deep Breathing Nasal Cracking Voice Stutter Disguised Lisp Raspy Familiar

If voice is familiar, who did it sound like'.'

Background Sounds: Street noises Animal noises Croaky voices Clear _PA System _Static Music Local House noises Long Distance Motor _Booth Office machinery Factory Machinery Other FIGURE 12-2 Bomb threat checklist. (continued)

Accent

323

324


Threat Language: Well spoken (educated) Incoherent

Taped

Foul

Message read by threat-maker Irrational Remarks

Dale:

/

Your Name:_ Position: Phone Number: FIGURE 12-2 Bomb threat checklist. (continued)

Security Policies

FIGURE 12-3 Sample checklists.

325

326


FIGURE 12-3 Sample checklists. (continued)

CHAPTER

Investigations

13

I

nvestigations are conducted internally for several reasons:

1. Pre-employment screening 2. Theft of company property 3. Fraud and embezzlement 4. Policy and procedural violations The investigations are conducted by external resources or internally by company security personnel. The purpose of performing investigations is to verify facts as in the case of the pre-employment screening investigations or to find out what happened, who did it, how, when, where, and why are the goals when conducting theft and fraud investigations. All internal investigations need to be conducted as though the case will go to court. The case maybe a criminal one and in most cases will be a civil one for wrongful termination. So the approach the investigator must take is that the case will go to court so everything done must follow the law so it can be introduced as evidence. When conducting internal investigations the employee or employees under suspicion don not need to have their “rights read” to them before questioning about the incident since they are not under arrest. This chapter is not about how to conduct investigations but just an outline of the types of internal investigations that are conducted by companies. There are entire books dedicated to the subject of investigations and this chapter is to inform you about the types of internal investigations that are conducted every day in companies across the United States.


328


Most construction companies hire a third party investigative firm to conduct the investigations. The reason is simple. The third party companies have the trained and experienced personnel to conduct the investigations. Some of the larger construction companies have their own security staff that conducts internal investigations. Whatever method is used, it is important that whoever conducts the investigations is trained and experienced in doing the type of investigation that is required. Third party companies in most states must be licensed as a Private Investigator before they can conduct investigations. The license number will be displayed on their business cards and company stationary. Do not under any circumstances hire a company that is not licensed in the state where the investigation is to be conducted. Just like contractors in all states need to be licensed, so do private investigators. The following is a list of the seven states that do not require a PI license as of the writing of this book: • Colorado • Idaho • Mississippi • Missouri (No state license is required but Kansas City, St Louis, Joplin, St Joseph and Springfield require licensing) • South Dakota (No PI license but a business license is required through the State Department of Revenue) • Wyoming (No State license but each local jurisdiction requires one) Hiring an unlicensed third party investigator will only cause you more headaches and will void the entire investigation especially when the case goes to court in a wrongful termination suit. Because a company has a PI license in one state does not mean they can conduct an investigation in any state. The company would need to be licensed in all the states it wishes to conduct investigations. Several states allow a company that is licensed to conduct an investigation in their state if the company is licensed and the investigation originated in the licensed state. For example, a company that is licensed in California can conduct an investigation in Oregon and not be licensed in Oregon if the investigation originated in California. Even though there is limited reciprocity between California and Oregon there are restrictions to how the process works. To find out more contract the licensing agencies in Oregon and California. There are other states that have limited reciprocity as well and as of this writing those states are as follows: • Arkansas

Investigations

329

• California • Florida • Georgia • North Carolina • Oklahoma • Oregon • Tennessee • Virginia There are several states that have full reciprocity and they are as follows: • Louisiana • Arkansas • Oklahoma Full reciprocity means that, if you are licensed in one state, it is easy to get licensed in another that has full reciprocity. In the next sections of the chapter we will explore each of the three types of internal investigation listed above.

PRE-EMPLOYMENT SCREENING Pre-employment screening investigations are conducted to ensure the person applying for the job is who they say they are and has done the things they say they did on the application. In other words the pre-employment screening is used to verify applicant’s statements on the application, and interview relating to their employment and educational experiences as well as their places of residence, and criminal history. The Fair Credit Reporting Act (FCRA) requires prior notification and approval by the applicant before the pre-employment screening can be conducted. The FCRA requires the following before the pre-employment screening can be done: 1. The employer must clearly disclose in a separate document that a report will be prepared. 2. The applicant must sign a release form before any records can be checked for criminal history (convictions), education, driving records, credit reports, or educational credentials.

330


3. An additional notice is necessary when the potential employer will be checking references, such as previous employers, about job performance. 4. If the applicant is denied employment based on the report, the employer must provide the applicant with the report and a notice of legal rights under the FCRA. 5. The applicant can inform the screening agency if the information is inaccurate or unverified and the agency must correct or remove the information within 30 days. 6. All applicants have the right to inspect their files. To make sure that the applicant signature form and legal rights document meet the requirements of the FCRA, check with your legal counsel. Have your legal counsel prepare the proper documents so that the application is in compliance with the FCRA. When hiring a third party to conduct the pre-employment screening for the company, make sure that the company has done pre-employment screening in the past and has a proven successful track record. If possible, review any complaints against the company in their performance of conducting pre-employment screening. Meet with a company representative to discuss the process. The information that will be verified on the application is up to the hiring company but usually consists of the following: • Social Security Number check • Drivers license • Criminal history (convictions) • Places of residence • Employment • Financial (credit reports) • Educational credentials Each of the items listed above will be checked during the pre-employment screening. The prices vary for the services by company. The more information requested, the more the service will cost. The fees can exceed $100 per person screened. No matter what combination of services is selected, there must be a written report that discusses the findings of the screening conducted. Any discrepancies found during the screening should be noted in the report. The report should provide an analysis of the findings and indicate areas for further investigation. The company can choose to do further investigation or not. The hiring de-

Investigations

331

cision is a company function and not one of the screening company. Most screening companies will usually not provide a recommendation on hiring. It is important to remember that when criminal checks are done, they are only done in locations where the applicant has lived in the last ten years or whatever the limit that is set on the application for places of residence. The NCIC (National Crime Information Center) is only as accurate as the information that goes into it and the database is not 100% accurate so the person that is being screened may not be in the database but may still have a criminal history of convictions. NCIC not only has convictions it also has “wants and warrants”. These are people that are wanted in connection with a crime or those that have arrest warrants issued on them. The police will use the NCIC database when they pull someone over for a traffic infraction. By using the driver’s license number, name, and DOB, a check can be made of the NCIC to see if there are any “wants or warrants” on the person they have stopped. The whole purpose of the pre-employment screening is to see if the person you are hiring is who they say they are and that they have not provided fraudulent information on the application about their educational credentials, employment history, or when they answered the question about whether or not you have been convicted of a crime, usually a felony, that they answer truthfully. The conviction itself may not disqualify the applicant from the job for which they are applying, but by being deceptive or lying about the conviction will disqualify them. The information about being truthful on the application is stated in the text just above the line where the applicant signs and dates the application. Most companies however do not enforce the statement above the applicant’s signature and date. When the pre-employment screening report comes back with felony convictions and the applicant checked the “No” box when responding to the; “Have you ever been convicted of a felony?” There is in some cases a disclaimer saying that a “Conviction may not disqualify the applicant form the job.” The purpose of the question is to see if the applicant will be truthful or attempt to be willfully deceptive. In other , did the applicant lie? The thinking is that if the applicant lies about being convicted of a felony, what else will they lie about? Educational credentials are another area that is inflated on resumes and applications. The applicant may claim a degree from a school when all they did was attend for a year or two but did not receive a degree. Then there is the whole question of the online unaccredited degrees that are not from legitimate schools but the names sound like the prestigious universities. These schools are known as the diploma mills where the degrees are purchased and no course work is ever done. The pre-employment screens should red flag and highlight these diploma mill degrees and write it in the report. The diploma mill degree may not be grounds for disqualification unless the degree is needed for a professional position such as an engineer. This red flag on the diploma mill is a judgment call on whether the ap-

332


plicant will be disqualified unless it is an engineering degree that is required for the job. Another reason would be if the applicant has attempted to pass a close-sounding diploma school name with one of the prestigious universities on the application by changing the name to the exact spelling of the prestigious university then there is no doubt and the applicant should be disqualified. There have been cases where one of the former places of residence when checked is the address of the state penitentiary but the applicant checked the “No” box when answering the felony conviction question on the application. Again the felony conviction itself may be the disqualifier but lying about it certainly should be. The other area where applicants tend to embellish is the employment history. Sometimes the positions held and salaries are both inflated or the company listed is not real. Most companies have a policy of only saying that Mr. Jones worked here from this date to this date and will not provide any further information for fear of being sued by the applicant. The question the pre-employment screener should ask is, “Would this applicant be rehired by the company?” Any answer other than a yes is a no although the company may not come out and say “no”. This should be considered by the screening company to be a red flag and should be so noted in the report. You may not find out the reason why the company won’t consider rehiring the applicant but it is one more fact to review. There is no hard and fast rule to say not to hire an applicant based on the preemployment screening but there if are indicators that the applicant is not truthful, that must be considered in the hiring process. Check with legal counsel when establishing guidelines for making a decision on whether or not to hire an applicant based on the pre-employment screening results. Make sure the hiring decision is based on your written policy and procedures that have been approved by legal counsel and human resources. The hiring decision based on the pre-employment screening policy and procedures needs to be consistently applied across the board to all applicants equally. The financial check is used to make sure the applicant is not in debt especially if they are being hired to handle money matters. The temptation to steal may be too great in some instances. Being in debt in and of itself is not a reason for out right disqualification of the applicant but should be viewed in the context of other factors in the pre-employment screening. As with hiring decisions, when in doubt consult with legal counsel before acting. In the next section a different type of investigation will be discussed. Conducting investigations of stolen property from the job site is important. There is a certain amount of theft on all job sites, including tools, equipment, computers, etc.

Investigations for Theft of Company Property All thefts of company property from a job site should be investigated. The reason for the previous statement is based on the “broken window theory”. It was

Investigations

333

found that when police officers looked deeper in areas with broken windows, they found more serious crimes that might not have otherwise been discovered. In other words sweat the small thefts to prevent the major ones from occurring. This philosophy works. For example, when former New York City mayor Rudy Giuliani decided to tackle crime in the New York City Subway System he had the police arrest turnstile jumpers. There was an outcry that the police should be arresting drug pushers and not turnstile jumpers, but the drug pushers were also turnstile jumpers. The important point is that the drug pushers and other criminals tend to break other laws as well so arresting drug pushers, muggers, and robbers for turnstile jumping helped reduce crime in the subways of New York City. Theft of small items from a job site will probably lead to thefts of larger more costly items by the same perpetrators. Actively investigate all thefts that occur on the job site. This can be as simple as asking about the theft and letting people know that the company takes theft of any property seriously. Keep a record of who had access to the stolen property and when they were asked about the theft. Just by asking everyone if they saw anybody in the area where the item was stolen, will also let people know that thefts will be investigated. A cautionary note needs to be heeded. When talking to anyone about the thefts, do not accuse anyone of any theft unless you know that the person did it and have the proof. As a matter of fact it is best not to ask them if they stole whatever is missing. When you ask a person if they did it, they will say “No” unless they are ready to confess. It takes training, preparation and patience to get the person to an admission of guilt. In other words don’t “interrogate” anyone about the thefts. Leave that to the security department if the company has one, or to a third party private investigation company since they are trained on what questions to ask and how to properly ask them. The CCTV system can help with the investigation of job site thefts, especially if the cameras are covertly placed in tool and equipment storage areas and office trailers. Using overt cameras can also help since most people do not pay attention to the cameras or if the cameras are installed in smoke-colored domes they do not know in what the direction the camera is pointing. When there is a rash of thefts on a job site and the dollar loss is equal to the insurance deductible, hire a third party investigation company to do an undercover investigation. The purpose of the undercover investigation is to find out what is going on, who is involved, and acting covertly so that the perpetrator or perpetrators do not get tipped off that an investigation is being conducted. There are some important points about undercover investigation operations that need to be discussed: 1. Only one or two people in the company should know about the undercover operation. 2. The undercover operative is “hired” to fill an open job and not some made-

334


up position so the operative should have a background in the construction trades. Usually laborers are hired in large numbers and they come and go unnoticed from a construction job site. This may be a good place to have the operative work. 3. The undercover operative will not be approached on the job. 4. Daily reports will be completed and submitted by the operative to one person in the company. 5. After the undercover operation it must never be brought out that an undercover operative was used at the job site or any new hires will automatically come under suspicion as being an undercover operative. 6. For personal safety reasons, the undercover operative must never be revealed. Using an undercover operative is not a decision that should be taken lightly and should not be used frequently. The undercover operation should only be a need-to-know basis which is very limited, no matter what. The more people know, the higher the probability that the operation will be compromised because someone will say something and the “word” will be out about the operation. When hiring an undercover operative make sure that the person hired can perform the job and that the person is filling an open position like that of a laborer. Do not create a position just to hire the undercover operative. Do not compromise the operation by acknowledging the undercover operative by talking to them or summoning that person to the office for a meeting to get an update. This type of behavior on the part of the company during an uncover operation will jeopardize the operation and in some cases the operative. Communication with the undercover operative will be done by the use of daily reports that the investigation company will send to the designated company contact. The name of the operative will not appear on the report. The reports will detail the day’s events as they relate to the investigation. Other activities that are occurring outside of the investigation will also be included in the report, for example, evidence that drugs are being sold on the job site by one of the subcontractor’s employees, or that one worker, Bill, a company employee is always borrowing money from the other workers to buy coffee and other things from the coffee break truck. Bill has gambling and other debts and he owes a large sum of money to other people off site as well. This information was confirmed by the operative overhearing two what-appeared-to-be laborers attempting to get money from Bill. They threatened Bill and said if the they didn’t get the money in one week it would not be good for Bill. Someone in desperate need of money like Bill will resort to stealing to pay off the debt. Even though some of the items in the report are not the focus of the undercover investigation they should be re-

Investigations

335

ported because this is in keeping with the “broken window theory” we discussed earlier in the chapter. One week later a large piece of equipment was stolen from the job site and upon further investigation it was found that the stolen equipment was enough to cover Bill’s debts. Also it was discovered in the investigation that Bill had become the “inside man” for stealing construction equipment and tools from the job site to pay off his debts and make a little extra cash for himself, by helping the thieves gain access to the job site after hours. Upon completion it must never be acknowledged that an undercover operation took place at the job site. If word gets out about the undercover operation the employees will never trust any new hire thinking that this maybe an undercover operative as well and in some cases put the operative at risk of being harmed. Finally employees will lose trust in the company. Even long after the undercover operative has left the job site the identity of the operative should never be revealed since it may jeopardize safety. In most cases the true identity of the operative is not known to the company where the undercover operation takes place. Fraud and Embezzlement Investigations Frauds and embezzlement occurs on the job sites away from the watchful eye of the corporate office of the company. Part of the reason is that construction project budgets don’t provide the funds necessary to hire the number of employees to assure a segregation of duties and this makes it attractive for some to commit fraud and embezzlement. For example, a key job site employee may be responsible for ordering materials, receiving the materials, approval authority for the payment of invoices, and also manages the cost reports to record the purchase of materials. The headquarters accounting staff for processing of the paper work relies on the key job site employee’s signature approval for purchases, the monthly cost reports, and the explanation of cost overruns. Fraud and embezzlement investigations require an investigator that is experienced in investigating financial crimes. It is best to hire an investigative firm that has had experience in investigating these types of incidents. The definition of fraud and embezzlement as they are used in the context of this discussion is as follows: • Fraud—A false representation of fact with the intent to deceive such as forgery, making false statements on documents, and conducting fraudulent credit card transactions • Embezzlement—The theft of a tangible asset or money by those entrusted with asset or funds

336


• Felony embezzlement—The theft of an asset or funds whose value exceeds a predetermined dollar amount. The amount will vary by jurisdiction. Some of the types of fraud and embezzlement investigations that are conducted are as follows: • The ghost employee • Padding time cards • Expense report fraud • Excessive entertainment • Theft of tools and equipment • Kick backs • Worker’s compensation • Misappropriation of funds • Theft of materials • Procurement fraud The ghost employee is either a recently departed employee, relative, or a fictitious person created by someone with access to payroll records for the sole purpose of committing fraud. The ghost employee’s name, address, DOB, and Social Security Number are all entered into the payroll system. Then a time card is completed for each ghost employee and a paycheck is issued. The person perpetrating the fraud will have the paychecks sent to a PO box or direct deposit to their own bank account if the bank does match the name on the check to the name on the account. The fraudster will cash the checks if they are sent to a PO box. Another scheme is the padding of time cards. Additional hours that were not worked are added to the time card of an employee by either the dishonest employee or a contact in the payroll department. Expense report fraud is common across many industries. It is easy to perpetrate, especially if the expense reports are not audited on a random basis. A dishonest employee will add items to the expense report that have not been purchased or were purchased for personal use. For example, there is one case where the a management employee was purchasing airline tickets of business travelers using the company-issued credit card. After the purchase he would cancel the tickets and get a credit to his company-issued credit card account and then use frequent flyer miles to make the business trip. He claimed the expense for the tickets on his expense report so he got the cash back for the tickets. Since the company at the

Investigations

337

time did not automatically pay the credit card bill, a check was sent to the employee to pay the bill. This individual pocketed the cash for the airline tickets that were obtained using frequent flyer miles. In short he sold his frequent flyer miles to the company and he falsified his expense report by stating the cost of the tickets and using the receipt he received when he originally booked the flight. The management person was fired from the company after the investigation revealed what he was doing. Excessive entertainment is a way for paying for fun at the company’s expense. This type of entertainment can range from dinners to travel, theater tickets to sporting events, etc. Kickbacks are the giving and receiving of anything of value in order to influence a business decision without the consent or approval of management/or owner. Kickbacks are usually paid in cash to the recipient to avoid easy detection. Fraudulent worker’s compensation claims are an issue and cost not only the insurance carrier money, but the company as well, resulting in higher insurance premiums. Worker’s compensation claims are a target of the dishonest employee since many of the claims are not investigated. These claims usually result from an anonymous tip that Bob, who filed a claim for a back injury on XYZ company’s job site, was seen working at ABC Company’s job site lifting and carrying heavy materials. The company that Bob is working for is paying him under the table and in cash for his work. The tip will lead to an investigation into the legitimacy of Bob’s worker’s compensation claim. Misappropriation of funds is defined as the unauthorized use of another person’s or organization’s funds for one’s own benefit. Misappropriation of funds is a felony. For example, a key job site person orders materials for the job site and in reality the materials go this person’s home. So the company’s money is used because the materials are charged to the job site and approved by the key person who benefited from the purchase. The theft of materials from the job site is not always the result of outsiders but is also done by insiders (persons working on the job). The materials are stolen for personal gain to either use on a moonlighting job or for use at the thief’s own home. Procurement fraud includes, but is not limited to the following: • Cost and labor over charging • Price fixing • Defective parts • Inaccurate pricing • Bid rigging

338


Cost and labor over charging occurs mainly on time-and-materials contracts. The cost of the material and labor is inflated. This scheme can be done in collusion with key job site employees and the subcontractor on the job. Both make extra money on the deal. Price fixing and bid rigging are used to eliminate any competition in the bidding process. This is where a contractor works with one or more other contractors to not submit a bid for the job and two or more bidders agree to submit a pre-arranged bid that was decided among the bidders. Defective parts when a contractor bids a certain piece of equipment or machinery and then substitutes it with a less costly, usually inferior, piece of equipment and/or machinery and then pockets the difference. Signs that fraud and embezzlement is occurring: • An employee is living above his or her means. • Relationships with vendors and other suppliers that seem overly friendly and are seen together off the job frequently at fancy restaurants, on fishing trips, and vacations. • The employee who directs his or her subordinates to bend, ignore, or break standard operating procedures and policies to benefit the payer (the broken window theory). • The employee that has the gambling debts or other outside activity that is costing money. Controls need to be put in place to help minimize the exposure to the company and remove the temptation to be dishonest. Perform audits of all job site costs, especially cost overruns. Do not take someone else’s word that everything is okay. Question all expenditures to make sure that things are being done according to the procedures. Which brings us to the last area of investigations, the policy violations.

Policy and Procedural Violation Investigations Policies and procedures are important and when they are ignored, the reasons must be determined. Usually people will say the policies and procedures get in the way of doing the job. The policies and procedure are in place for several reasons—to keep things running smoothly, to provide some sense of order, and to protect the company’s assets. What we said earlier about the broken window theory applies here. Those that commit serious crimes also violate other laws like turnstile jumping. The same could be said for the policy and procedural violators. The ignoring of policies and

Investigations

339

procedures may mean that the employee violating the policy or procedures is benefiting financially from doing so. Policy and procedural violations need to be investigated and the violators need to be disciplined for the infractions. This will include termination if it is deemed appropriate. Work with legal counsel to develop policies and procedures that help minimize the threat from fraud and embezzlement.


CHAPTER

Information Security

14

S

ince the advent of computers, information security has become important when implementing a site security program. Information security is defined as follows:

• Information security is the protection of any information that a company has that gives it competitive advantage over other companies. There are various methods used to protect the information. • Information security does not only mean computer security, it is the protection of all information not how it is stored. • Information security has three basic elements: Q

Confidentiality

Q

Integrity

Q

Availability

The methods used to protect the company’s information are as follows: • Administrative • Physical • Technical Administrative methods for protecting information include policies and procedures. The policies state what is to be done and who is going to do it. For example the policy could state that all proprietary information will be locked when not in use and will not be removed from the office. All hard copies will be stamped with the word “CONFIDENTIAL” on all pages including any cover sheet.


342


To protect information on computer networks the access to the information is usually password-protected. In some instances the information is encrypted while it is stored on the server. This is not feasible for very large documents so access to the information will be password-protected as is the case for access to the company network. Confidentiality is not permitting the disclosure of the information to unauthorized or unwanted persons and is sometimes called the “Need to Know” principle. The “Need to Know” principle is where the only people that have access to the information are those that need to know it to do their jobs and then it is only that portion of the information that is relevant to the job. The principle is based on the government’s handling of information that is important to national security. Integrity is the gathering and maintaining of accurate information and preventing its modification through accident or a malicious act. The information must be accurate for it to be of any value. So the information needs to be protected from accidental or intentional modifications. To make sure the information is accurate, integrity checks are done to verify its accuracy and authenticity. Availability is making sure that there is access to the information when and where desired. If the information is not available when and where it is needed, it is useless. Information security is a necessary part of the site security plan. The protection of information needs to be done, not only for computer documents, but also for any hard copy documents.

DOCUMENT CLASSIFICATION In order to protect the important proprietary information of the company the important documents need to be identified. Two classifications are used: “public” and “confidential”. By using two classifications the system of classification is kept simple and manageable. The two classifications used in the sample policy are as follows: • Public • Confidential Public documents do not need to be protected since the information contained in them is not critical to the company or its customers. These documents include things like the company picnic, the Thanksgiving food drive, etc. Confidential documents need to be protected because they contain information that is sensitive to the company. The information could be proprietary information about bid proposals, customer information such as lists of contacts, internal programs like health, safety and environmental, employee records including Social Security Numbers, addresses, DOB, and driver’s license numbers. The confidential documents need to be clearly marked.


343

Not all documents in the company are confidential and classification should by the type of document. By limiting the number of confidential documents it is easier to protect them.

PHYSICAL SECURITY COUNTERMEASURES Now that the documents and information that need to be protected are identified, methods or countermeasures must implemented to safeguard the information. The countermeasures can be grouped as follows: 1. Physical 2. Technical (computer) Physical security countermeasures are those measures used to protect the information from theft or destruction. It is the actual protection of the physical document or any media that stores the document. Physical security countermeasures are as follows: • Physical access to the job site • Locked file cabinets • Securing the office trailers that contain the information • Intrusion detection • Security lighting • CCTV monitoring • Numbering the confidential documents • Manuals • Bids • Place a cover sheet on the documents with the number, date, etc. • Use a recordkeeping system for manuals by having the employees sign for them when they are issued. • Issue and use cables to lock laptops and other computers to prevent theft • Issue crosscut shredders to the job site to shred confidential documents • Develop and implement a security awareness program • Perform physical security audits of the job site • Physical protection of the telephony and computer cables and closets.

344


Physical Access The physical security countermeasures are the basic security measures used to protect the equipment, tools, and materials from theft. The countermeasures begin with the perimeter fence. The perimeter fence, as previously stated in Chapter 5, is used to help secure the site. Even though the fence can be compromised easily it is still some what of a deterrent and provides some sense of physical access control to the job site. After hours all gates should be locked using a case hardened padlock and cable, not chain, to wrap around the gate posts to secure the gate. Chain is too easy to compromise where cable, especially airplane cable, is harder to compromise by cutting. Figure 14-1 is a coil of airplane cable from Kabletek Manufacturing. Airplane cable is very difficult to cut and takes time. The more time it takes to cut the cable, the less time the thief has on site. A construction thief speaking to a reporter on the basis of anonymity stated that, if cable is used instead of chains to secure fences and across openings, he moves to another job site since cable is harder to cut and most sites use chains which are much easier to cut.

FIGURE 14-1 Airplane cable from Kabletek Manufacturing.


345

Securing File Cabinets Securing file cabinets that contain confidential documents requires a more substantial locking system than the one that is built into the file cabinet. To secure the file cabinet use a lock system like the one in Figure 14-2. The lock is one that Lab Safety Equipment Company sells under the name File Guard Locks® . The File Guard Lock® makes any ordinary file cabinet more secure. The lock consists of a steel channel bar and 3/8" steel bolts with deadbolt locks on each end. The bar is mounted directly to the file cabinet. The lock is a combination lock. To open the cabinet the proper combination needs to be entered then the thumb turn screw is turned retracting the deadbolts on both ends. The lock is more formidable than the stock locks that the come with the file cabinet. To add some extra security it is a good idea to anchor the file cabinet to the floor. This make it hard for the thieves to take the entire file cabinet to some other location to open the security lock.

FIGURE 14-2 File Guard Lock®.

346


Security Office Trailers The securing of office trailers, especially after hours, is an important part of the securing of the confidential documents. The trailers should have dead bolt locks installed on the doors with a plate over the lock between the door jamb and the door to prevent easy prying of the door to pop open the lock. The deadbolt should be at least a 1 1/2" throw on the bolt. This way it will make it harder to pry the lock out of the latch device on the frame of the door. Deadbolts alone will not however keep the thieves from breaking into the office trailer so instruction detection needs to be installed to help monitor the trailers. Dual technology glass break intrusion detection needs to be installed in the trailer since breaking the door may present a challenge to the thief when the dead bolt lock is installed. In addition to the dual technology glass breaks a motion sensor detection system should also be installed in the trailer as well. If the window is not broken but cut instead by the intruder, the motion sensor will detect the intruder upon entry into the trailer since the glass break will not be activated. The office trailers can be pre-wired and have all the security devices like the glass breaks and the motion sensors installed so, when the trailer is moved from job site to job site, the only cost will be for monitoring the security systems and not the installation and equipment. Monitoring only can cost around $450 while the cost of purchasing and installing the equipment can cost thousands of dollars.

SECURITY LIGHTING Another security countermeasure that is often overlooked on job sites is security lighting. Security lighting can be a great deterrent to would be thieves for fear of being seen, especially if the job site is all lit up. Chapter 15 has information on security lighting types and uses. Security lighting helps to keep the job site from being a target of thieves. Remember the thief wants to be anonymous when entering and stealing form a job site. The lighting makes it easy to be seen from off site by patrolling police officers as well as on the site by patrolling security officers. The security lighting also helps the CCTV cameras record better images that can be used to identify the thief or the thief’s vehicle including license plate number. CCTV monitoring of the site can be a deterrent to thefts and intruders. The CCTV system cameras that are strategically placed in and around the confidential document storage will help identify any people attempting to gain entry to the files after hours. The cameras used in the office trailer should be covert and set to record on motion after hours.

MARKING DOCUMENTS The next several countermeasures are directly related to the documents. Control numbers help track the documents and the person signs for the documents so who has what document and number is recorded.


347

• Number each confidential document. The use of a control number will help control the number of documents. • Number all the manuals and bid documents. • Have the employee sign for the manuals, bid documents and other confidential documents. • When the document is stamped with the word “Confidential” it will also say that the stamp is a color stamp and not black and white. The color of the stamp is not revealed but the black and white color of the word mean that the document is a copy from a copy machine or fax and not the original. The control number is also stamped on the original with a color stamp that is different than the color of the word “Confidential”.

SECURING LAPTOP AND DESK TOP COMPUTERS All laptop and desktops computers should be locked using a cable-and-lock system. Laptop docking stations have locks but the locks are not sturdy enough to prevent someone from stealing the a laptop computer. Laptops are an item that is stolen frequently, sometimes for the hardware and other times for the data that is on the hard drive. A sample of the Kensington Locking Cable® is in Figure 14-3. Figure 14-4 is another type of Kensington Locking Cable®. The locking cables are made from airplane cable and are difficult to cut. The locking cable provides a good deterrent against theft of the laptop and the data.

FIGURE 14-3 Kensington Locking Cable®.

348


FIGURE 14-4 Another type of Kensington Locking Cable®.

The cables can also be used to lock down desk top units on job sites to prevent the theft of the desk top computer on job sites.

DISPOSING OF CONFIDENTIAL DOCUMENTS To help keep confidential documents from falling into the wrong hands shredders should be given to the job site office trailers. Discarding confidential documents without shredding them first is not protecting them and will allow the documents to be found and possibly used by a competitor. These should be cross cut shredders. Cross cut shredders make taping the document back together after it has been shredded almost impossible because, when the documents are shredded, it looks like confetti. Shredders that shred the documents into strips are not as effective since the strips of the document are easy to tape back together. Cross cut or confetti shredders will produce the desired result, a shredded document that is useless and not easily put back together. For blueprints there are shredders made that will handle the job just like the legal and letter size shredders do, except they are larger so the blueprints can be fed into the shredder.


349

SECURITY AWARENESS Security awareness is an important part of the job site security program. What is security awareness? Security awareness is defined as follows. • Security awareness is a method for changing the attitudes of the company and personnel toward security to realize its importance. Awareness reminds company personnel of the importance of security. Security awareness takes many forms such as: • Formal presentations • Posters • Memos • Web sites • Security bulletins • Security slogans • Contests Formal presentations are used to enlighten employees about security and their role in security. The presentations are in a classroom setting and used to present the new or updated security policies and other subjects such as preventing equipment thefts. Posters are another tool in the security awareness program. The posters can be used to help prevent equipment thefts, thefts of tools, computers, etc. There are posters that can be purchased that have security awareness messages or more personalized posters can be developed and printed that are specific to the company. The posters can be placed on the job site in the officer trailers on the bulletin board and on the job site bulletin board outside the office trailer. The posters can also be hung on the walls in job site conference rooms. The message on the poster can be simple as shown in Figure 14-5. The information above is just a sample. Reward posters do work and by placing the posters in strategic places it may reduce the number of thefts that occur on every job site. The phone number can be to an offsite location and not to the company. The Construction Industry Crime Prevention Programs (CICP) have rewards programs and the CICP will pay the reward and run the hotline for its member companies. More details about the Construction Industry Crime Prevention Programs will be discussed in Chapter 19. Memos can also be sent to the job site letting them know about any thefts that have occurred on job sites in the area. The information is made available to companies that are members of the

350


Construction Industry Crime Prevention Program in their area. The information on thefts is provided by member companies that have suffered thefts and the police will also provide information about thefts of equipment and tools from nonmember companies. The memos are sent to the key job site personnel to be posted on the bulletin boards. Included in the theft summaries provided by the Construction Industry Crime Prevention Program is the information about rewards of up to $1,000 leading to the arrest and conviction of the thieves.

Security Website A website can be set up for security information, theft prevention tips, computer security tips, etc. The site can be used to disseminate security-related information including the posting of all the security policies.

Security Bulletins Security bulletins can be sent out when they are needed. The bulletins can contain information to make sure that all tools and equipment are secured at the end of each day since there have been a rash of thefts from construction sites in the area in recent weeks. The bulletins should only be used to disseminate timely information and not overdone, otherwise, they will not be taken seriously.

HELP WANTED STOP EQUIPMENT AND TOOL THEFTS EQUIPMENT AND TOOL THEFTS COST EVERYONE TO REPORT ANY INFORMATION ABOUT EQUIPMENT AND TOOL THEFTS CALL (888) XXX-XXXX WE WILL PAY A REWARD OF $1,000 FOR INFORMATION THAT LEADS TO THE ARREST AND CONVICTION OF THE THIEVES THAT STEAL EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS FROM THIS JOB SITE FIGURE 14-5 Help wanted poster.


351

Security Slogans The use of slogans will help bring important security tips to the employees. The slogans should be catchy and address one topic only. For example: • The Key to Security is You! • Don’t Be A Fool Lock Up the Tools • K.I.S.S.—Keep It Safe and Secure The slogans can be printed on coffee mugs, tee shirts, pens, mouse pads, pencils, posters, etc. The idea is to get them out to the employees. Contests based on the information contained in the security policies is another method for driving home the importance of security. Prizes for the winners can range from dinner for two at nice area restaurant to tee time at a local golf course for two. The contests can be run on a weekly basis for one month just after the security policies are posted and there have been security awareness sessions about the policies. Then the contests about the policies can be done on a monthly basis. The frequency chosen to run the contest is entirely up to the company since there is not any magic formula. The idea is to keep security in the minds of the employees.

PHYSICAL SECURITY AUDITS It is a good idea to perform physical security audits of the job site. The purpose of the audits is to make sure the physical security countermeasures that are in place are working. Any gaps in the protection need to be identified and mitigated as soon as possible so the integrity of the physical security protection can be maintained.

Physical Protection for Cables and Closets An important and often overlooked part of the physical security program is the protection of the computer cables and the telephony closets. The cables and the closets are vulnerable to being compromised if they are not protected. On the job site the office trailer usually has the site’s telecommunications (telephony) equipment in a closet or, as is the case sometimes, a restroom that is not being used since there is no plumbing connected to the trailer. The restroom becomes a storage closet. To protect the computer-related equipment including any network and other servers that are for the job site, it important to secure the equipment in an enclosure that can be locked. The servers should also be locked down to the floor of the trailer using cable and large padlocks. All of the cable terminations should be in this enclosure as well. The telephone switch gear should be locked in the enclosure. If it is not feasible to add an enclosure, the restroom door

352


should have a deadbolt installed on it. Intrusion diction should be placed in the room that includes glass breaks if there is a window, and motion sensors. A CCTV camera should be covertly placed in the room. A good way to do this is to install a real and phony motion sensor. The phony one will house the covert CCTV camera. Upon opening the door to the computer and telephony area the camera would begin recording. The camera should be set to record any time the door to the room is opened.

TECHNICAL SECURITY COUNTERMEASURES Technical security countermeasures are the measures used to protect the data on computers and networks. These include but are not limited to the following: • Access control (Authorization and authentication) • Installing firewalls at the job sites • Virus protection • Encryption

COMPUTER AND NETWORK ACCESS CONTROL Access control for networks and computers is usually done by the use of a password. The following are the principles that access control is based on: 1. Something you know 2. Something you have 3. Something you are 4. Combinations of the above Something you know is the password. Passwords are the most secure method for keeping unauthorized persons out of the computer and network. The problem with passwords is that most people choose a password that can be easily remembered. However, in doing so they make it easy for someone else to guess. The types of passwords people choose are as follows: • Names of their pets • Names of their children • Names of their hobbies • Names of favorite sports teams


353

• Their home address • Mother’s maiden name All of the passwords from the above list are not good. These passwords can be guessed after doing a little “social engineering,” that is, talking to the person about their family, hobbies, sports, etc. The information would then be used to try different passwords. For passwords to be effective they must be a combination of letters, special characters, and numbers and be at least eight characters in length. The password needs to be something the user can remember, because if the password needs to be written down, then it is not effective. Pass phrases are one way to remember passwords easily. For example: Thank God It’s Friday. Take the first letter of each word in the phrase and then add some numbers and special characters. Like this: T1G6I8F*9!! The use of plain English words that can be found in a dictionary is not a good idea since there are programs that can scan all the words in the dictionary to find passwords. There are other password-crack programs available on the Internet. Passwords should be changed every 90 days and the last password cannot be used for at least two cycles of changes. Changing passwords often helps keeps the passwords new and meeting the requirements of the system. In most computer networks the parameters around what is an acceptable password can be established and the system will not accept a password that does not meet those parameters. A token or card that is inserted into a slot on the computer is another tool. Once the token or card is inserted a password or Personal Identification Number (PIN) is then entered and, if they match, the person is granted access to the network. The system can work without the password or PIN addition but the password and PIN make the system stronger. Both are needed to gain access so if a token or card is lost or stolen, access cannot be gained to the system without the correct password or PIN. Something you are is the basis of the biometric systems. You either place your palm, eye, or finger on the reader or up to the reader. The reader reads the geometry of the finger, the hand, or the iris of the eye and, if there is a match, access is granted. The reader needs to read the geometry of the finger which includes the thickness, blood flow, size, etc. For the iris scan it reads the patterns of the iris. No two people have the same pattern in the iris. Combination systems include one of the following systems: A PIN and a password, a hand geometry reader and a password or a token and password with a PIN. Granting the user access to the network will also grant the user access to the files they need to do their job. So authorization and authentication is granted using passwords, tokens, personal identification numbers, biometrics, or combinations of the systems.

354


INSTALLING FIREWALLS ON JOB SITES A firewall in the information technology (IT) world is a device that helps to keep the unwanted, unauthorized people out of the network. Without a firewall the network is opened to all outside traffic that is on the Internet. Some of this traffic carries destructive payloads designed to either bring down your system or to hijack it and use it to launch other attacks. The definition of a firewall is as follows: • The firewall is a system that enforces an access control policy for network traffic as the traffic passes through access points. Firewalls are like network routers with an important difference, the firewall only filters traffic and only allows traffic that is permitted by policy through. The firewall filters in one of several ways: • Static packet filtering • Dynamic packet filtering • Stateful packet filtering • Proxy Static packet filtering filters the network traffic by using the flags stored in the packet header. All information that transmitted over the network is broken into packets for easy handling and transmission. When the packets hit the static packet filtering firewall, the headers are looked at. Only those that are permitted by the access control policy, known as the access control list (ACL), are permitted to enter the network. The details about the header and the flags is beyond our discussion and is part of the Transmission Protocol over the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). Dynamic packet filtering takes packet filtering one step further by also maintaining a connection table to monitor the state of the communication session. The dynamic packet filtering firewall does rely on the flag settings of the packet header and is used to prevent Spoofing attacks. A Spoof attack is where an outside system sends and acknowledgement (ACK) to an internal server making the server believe there is a connection and allows information to flow between the two. The dynamic packet filter looks up the connection in the table and finds that no such connection was made and drops the connection. Stateful packet filtering adds additional protection because, not just the state of the connection is analyzed, the context of the connection is also included. The firewall will be able to differentiate between various types of connectionless protocols such as UDP, NFS (Network File System), and RPC (remote procedure call) and because of their connectionless state were not able to be managed by the dynamic filtering.


355

A proxy server is also called an application gateway and mediates traffic between two network segments. For example, the job site and the main office of the company. The proxy is used to make the connection and the two segments are never actually connected and the proxy server plays the middleman in all connection attempts. A proxy server does route any traffic but speaks for each system on both sides of the firewall. The proxy is similar to two people speaking through the use of an interpreter and are carrying on a conversation without actually ever speaking directly to one another. The simplified information presented above about the different types of firewalls is for illustrative purposes. There is more technical detail about how they work that can be found in books on network security.

Virus Protection Virus protection is an important function today. The virus protection program resides on the Microsoft Exchange Server ® or what ever mail server the company is using. The virus protection will quarantine any email attachments that have a known virus. The purpose of the quarantine is to prevent the spread of the virus. An attachment that looks suspicious will be stripped from the email. The virus protection software program will look for the malicious code of the known viruses. Before an email attachment is opened virus programs will scan the attachment. If the attachment contains a virus or appears suspicious the attachment will be cleaned or quarantined. Virus protection that resides on a server is automatically updated and the end user does not need to update the virus protection. Each time new viruses are discovered, the virus protection software gets updated to recognize the new code. When an end user boots up to the network, their laptop will then have the updated version of the virus software running. Opening email attachments from unknown persons is not a good idea since it put the computer and the network at risk. Viruses are designed to do different things. Some will email everyone in your email contacts list, others will damage files on the computer, while others will erase records or leave a program called a Trojan Horse. The Trojan Horse is a program that allows someone else outside the company to control the computer or network. Virus protection is important in protecting the integrity of the network.

ENCRYPTION Encryption is used to scramble the information contained in a document so no one other than intended recipient can read the document. There are various types of encryption programs that are used. The most common used is on the Internet is HTTPS. The encryption was invented by Netscape to encrypt ecommerce transaction. When you purchase something online look on the bottom right side of the screen. You will see a gold lock. When it is in the locked position, you are

356


using HTTPS. The session is encrypted to prevent the stealing of credit card and other information when transmitted over the Internet. There are other encryption programs that can be used to encrypt an email. To decrypt the message the recipient would use the public key that was sent in a separate email. Encryption has its limits. For instance you cannot encrypt a 50-page document because it would bring the entire company network to a halt. All the computing power is needed for encrypting and decrypting the document. Encryption works well for an email or a document containing several pages.

CHAPTER

Security Lighting

15

S

ecurity lighting is an important part of theplan. On most projects, however, little consideration is given to the security design and layout. Usually lights are installed and that is far as it goes. A CCTV system is installed and the owners wonder why the images that the CCTV system is producing from the cameras along the perimeter of the property are not very good and usually are of poor quality. When something happens on the property, let’s say that damage is done to someone’s vehicle in the parking lot at night and the CCTV recordings either from a hard disk for digital or video tape for VHS systems, are reviewed to see what happened only to find the image is not good enough to make an ID of the perpetrator. It is not surprising that the image is not good enough to be able to see who perpetrated the damage. You can see the person and most cases identify if the person is male or female but there is not enough light to really see who the person is (positive ID) and what the person is wearing. Lighting is an overlooked consideration when installing a CCTV camera system and this short coming of inadequate security lighting is discovered after the system has been installed and needed for an incident investigation. In this chapter we will explore the types of security lighting and their uses. The integration of the security lighting and CCTV will be discussed. Security lighting is used to light up the perimeter and property during night time hours to make it look as if it is daylight instead of darkness. The reason for using security lighting is to make any intruder visible and not to be able to use the darkness to breach the perimeter security line undetected. Security lighting will also enhance the effectiveness of any security force on site by allowing them to view what is going on through the use of CCTV. To determine the requirements for security lighting for the location we need to know what we are trying to protect and from whom. For a quick reference for lighting requirements by foot-candle power see


358


Table 15-1 later in the chapter. The Table outlines the lighting requirements in the Us Army Field Manual 3-18.30. FM 3-18.30 is the security industry standard for lighting requirements. The manual is an update of a previous version and the lighting requirements have not changed. When choosing security lighting for a project, consideration should also be given to energy efficiency of the lamps and systems. There are lamps and security lighting systems that are energy efficient and at the same time produce illuminations that provide that meet the requirements outlined in Table 15-1. To find the best combination of energy efficiency and effective security lighting an assessment must be done of the site to assist with the system design and layout. Remember the goal of the security lighting is to provide illumination without shadows so that potential intruders will not be able to enter the location without being detected by the video surveillance system (CCTV), and roving patrols of security officers. The lighting will also aid the CCTV system by providing the necessary light for capturing images that will be useful for security and investigations of unauthorized entries to the site as well as identifying any perpetrators of vandalism to the site, equipment vehicles, etc. Finally security lighting is inexpensive to maintain and will aid security forces by reducing the advantages of concealment and surprise for the motivated intruder. Security lighting alone will not discourage an unauthorized person from attempting entry to the site but will assist security personnel in the detection of the unauthorized person attempting to gain entry. The lighting will enable the security force to observe activities around the site while minimizing the presence of the security force. To accomplish this task the lighting for security purposes must be able to contrast the intruder from the background. For painted surfaces, grass, clean concrete, and brick walls, the lighting does not need to be as intense and is therefore a cost savings from an operational and an initial purchase of the equipment as is needed for dark surfaces, dirty ones. To contrast an intruder from a dark or dirty background surface the intensity of the lighting must be greater, otherwise the background will provide cover for the intruder wearing dark clothes. The elimination of shadowing is an important consideration in the design of the security lighting system. Along with more intense lighting there are other things that can be done to the background to assist the lighting. For example, the use of the background can be done by painting stripes on the walls because the stripes will provide breaks in the background which helps contrast outlines or silhouettes. These breaks will not provide any cover for an intruder to hide and will be easily detected. The goals of security lighting are as follows: 1. Lighting is a psychological deterrence to an intruder because of the fear of being detected.

Security Lighting

359

2. Aid in detecting intruders 3. Prevent glare that may blind security officers but produce outward glare to blind intruders 4. Provide enough lighting for CCTV to depict and record colors with accuracy In this chapter we will look at the types of security lighting systems and their uses. Choosing security lighting can be done by understanding how the illumination of lighting is determined by using a light meter. The light meter will give you a pretty good idea if there is sufficient lighting for an area. The concept of “foot candles” will be discussed. Also the need for back up power sources will be discussed as well as emergency exit lights.

FOOT-CANDLE POWER Foot-candle power is not a new movement, it is how lights are rated. The concept is simple. A foot-candle is the amount of light that is emitted from one candle in a 1-foot-square area. A foot-candle is a unit of measure to determine the amount of light intensity from a light and it is equal to one lumen per square foot or the amount of light produced by one candle in a square-foot area. Foot-candles are measured using a light meter. Using a light meter is simple, especially with digital read-out. The meter is held in the area you want to check the illumination and the meter will produce a read-out of the foot-candles of light being produced by the lighting device. The higher the number of foot-candles being produced, the more light is being given off. There are standards for the amount of lighting required for emergency and security lighting. Foot-candles are now being replaced by Lux. One Lux is equal to 10 foot candles and is a metric measurement. Light meters will give the reading in both footcandles and Lux.

Categories of Security lighting Security lighting is divided into four basic categories. The four categories of security lighting are: 1. Continuous lighting 2. Standby lighting 3. Movable lighting 4. Emergency lighting Continuous lighting is the most common and widely used security lighting system. It consists of a series of fixed lights arranged to flood an area with light continuously during darkness. The lights are arranged to provide overlapping cones

360


of light. An example is the lights used in a chemical or oil refinery. There are two types of continuous lighting glare projection and controlled lighting: 1. Glare lighting also known as security lights. These lights will cause glare outwardly from inside the perimeter causing any intruder attempting to enter the site to be temporarily blinded from the glare thereby making it difficult to see inside the perimeter. 2. Controlled lighting can be seen along highways where the lighting is controlled and the width of the lighted strip is adjusted to fit a certain area which is a portion of the roadway. 3. Standby lighting is similar to continuous lighting in arrangement but the lighting is not continually illuminated. The lights come on either automatically by a sensor trip or manually illuminated by security officers when an intruder or suspicious activity is detected. 4. Movable lighting can be moved which is not continuous and is similar to a search light to track the movement of an intruder. A good example is the prison search light that watches several areas as it illuminates while it moves around. 5. Emergency lighting can duplicate all the previously discussed lighting systems and is used during a power outage or other failure that will cause the permanent lighting system to become inoperative. This can also include an attack on the system by an intruder. The emergency lighting is dependent upon an alternative power source, either a generator or batteries.

Types of Lamps (Luminaries) The bulb or lamp is the part of the light that produces the illumination. There are six types of lamps used in security lighting. The six types are listed and discussed below: 1. Incandescent lamps are the bulbs we all use in the lights in our homes. The incandescent bulb will provide instant illumination when it is switched on and is the most common bulb used in security lighting. 2. Fluorescent lamps are most commonly found in office lighting, kitchen and bathrooms. The fluorescent bulb will produce 62 lumens per watt and are therefore very efficient. The bulb is mercury vapor and is temperature sensitive. They are not used outdoors in cold climates. Fluorescent lamps will cause interference with radio reception. 3. Mercury vapor lamps are commonly used in security and produce a bluish cast when illuminated. The bulbs of mercury vapor lamps last longer than in-

Security Lighting

361

candescent lamps and can tolerate a 50 % power dip. The time for illumination of mercury vapor lamps when they are switched on is considerable. 4. Metal halide lamps are also very tolerant of power dips. The time for illumination when switched on is also considerable. However a power dip of 20 seconds or more will cause the lamp to turn off. 5. Sodium vapor lights are both high and low pressure lamps that produce a soft yellow light and are more efficient than mercury vapor lights. These lights are used in areas prone to fog and are usually found on highways and bridges because the yellow light will penetrate the mist more readily than white light. 6. Quartz lamps produce a very bright white light. The lamp illuminates almost as quickly as the incandescent lamps. Quartz lamps are high wattage ranging from 1500 to 2000 watts in security lighting systems. The quartz lights are used along the perimeter fences and other barriers. 7. Halogen lamps are charges with Xenon gas. The lamp produces a bright white light. The halogen lamp is popular today especially for vehicle headlights. Halogen lights are long-lasting.

TYPES OF SECURITY LIGHTING There are four general types of security lighting systems in use today. The four types are as follows. 1. Floodlights are luminaries that use a narrow beam to focus on a specific area. The lights are very bright and concentrated and therefore will produce glare and can be used to direct glare outward from the site. The lights can be automatically tripped using a passive inferred (PIR) device, by motion sensors, or manually by security personnel. 2. Fresnel lenses are those that produce illumination in a long horizontal beam. A good example is the light from a lighthouse. Fresnel lenses were designed for use in lighthouses to project a light in a long horizontal beam to warn ships of danger. In security use the illumination can be concentrated to produce glare for the intruder but not for those inside the perimeter. The lenses can be tripped by a PIR device, motion sensors, or manually. 3. Searchlights are incandescent lamps that are narrowly focused. They can be moved around and focused on any location inside or outside the perimeter. Searchlights are used for grand openings of stores, restaurants, etc. Hollywood also uses searchlights to signify gala events. 4. Street lamps are also considered a security light. Street lights are used in parking lots and sometimes at vehicle entrances to the site. Street lights are also

362


used along the perimeter. There are two types of street lights, symmetrical and asymmetrical. Symmetrical are used to disperse the illumination evenly and asymmetrical lights are used to disperse the light by reflection to where it is needed.

LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS FOR SECURITY PROTECTION Each of the four types of security lighting has its uses but no one type of lighting is good for all applications. When designing the system you need to take into consideration the following areas and lighting requirements (see Table 15-1). The table outlines the minimum amount of illumination needed and states it foot-candles based on the Department of the Army Field Manual 19.30 Physical Security (FM). FM 3-19.30 dated 8 January 2001 supersedes FM3-19 which was dated March 1979. FM 3-19.30 like the older version is the standard used in the security industry for security lighting requirements. The foot-candles have not changed from the older to the new edition of the FM. The minimum lighting recommendations below are based on FM 3-19.30. Table 15-2 summarizes the security requirements of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. These standards are used in numerous local ordinances that call for security lighting as a part of Crime Prevention Through Environmental Design (CPTED). CPTED has gained wide acceptance in a number of communities across the US and Canada. CPTED is the concept of adding the element of prevention through the use of the build out of the site to reduce the incidence of crime and the fear of crime. Security lighting, according to the ordinances in most communities, state that security lighting will not be directed above the horizontal plane of the project. The lights will have shields on

Table 15-1 Areas and lighting requirements. Location

Perimeter of outer area Perimeter of restricted area Vehicular entrances Pedestrian entrances Sensitive inner areas Sensitive inner structure Entrances Open yards Decks on open piers

Foot-Candles on Horizontal Plane at Ground level

0.15 0.4 1.0 2.0 0.15 1.0 0.1 0.2 1.0

363

Security Lighting

the fixtures to keep the light from being visible on the adjacent properties and roadways. The general use of floodlights as a part of the security lighting design is discouraged and may not be permitted. The following outlines the requirements of some jurisdictions for security lighting. The requirements are usually part of an ordinance that outlines all lighting requirements that are acceptable throughout the jurisdictions. The ordinances are usually enforced as a part of the building permit process: 1. The illumination from security lighting will not illuminate vertical surfaces on buildings to a level of eight feet above grade or eight feet above the bottom of doorways or entries which ever is greater. 2. Poles for mounting security lighting can be no more than 10 feet from the perimeter of the designated secure area. 3. Perimeter security lights will have motion sensors to activate the lights since the lights are to be in the off position until the motion sensor is tripped by an intruder that is within 5 feet of the perimeter. 4. The height of the pole that a security lighting fixture is mounted on is usually restricted to no more than 15 to 20 feet depending on the jurisdiction. 5. The illumination tables (foot-candles) permitted for each security lighting application are based on the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. Those jurisdictions that have adopted CPTED use the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America’s security lighting standards outlined in Table 15-2 below. 6. The jurisdictions will review and approve the plans for security lighting as a part of the site lighting master plan.

Table 15-2 Illuminating Engineering Society of North America’s security lighting standards. Location

Perimeter Fence Buildings Large open areas Entrances Gatehouses Pedestrian walkways and access points

Foot-Candles Required at level on Ground

0.5 0.5-2.0 0.5-2.0 10 30 4-6

364


Lighting requirements for the perimeter fence based on FM 3-19.30: 7. The perimeter fence where the fence is more than 100 feet or more from the building and there is 100 foot clearance for 100 feet outside of the perimeter fence. The type of lighting recommended is glare projection. 8. For what is known as semi-isolated fenced perimeters where there is not a clear zone within 60-100 feet outside the fence, controlled lighting is recommended. 9. For perimeter fence lines that are immediately adjacent to buildings, inside the fence area, controlled lighting is recommended. Lighting needed for illuminating the entrances to the site based on FM 319.30: 1. Lighting of entrances used for pedestrians to go to and from the site should be controlled lighting. The lighting should provide enough illumination for the recognition of people and examination ID badges, etc. and this requires a minimum of 2.0 foot-candles of illumination. 2. Vehicle entrances, on the other hand, should have lighting that produces enough illumination so a complete inspection of passenger cars, trucks, and freight cars (rail), including the contents, can be done safely. 3. Security officer gatehouses usually have a lower intensity of illumination inside the gatehouse so officers can see approaching vehicles and pedestrians. If the illumination intensity inside the gatehouse is too high then the officer will not be able to see out as easily. Lighting needed for illuminating the other areas of the site and property based on FM 3-19.30: 1. Vacant land, storage, garages, and parking areas require illumination by controlled lighting of not less than 0.2 foot-candles. 2. Open areas adjacent to security officers and the perimeter fence require controlled lighting illumination. 3. The decks on open piers are to be illuminated at minimum 1 foot-candle and water approaches to piers within 100 feet will be illuminated to 0.5 foot candles. 4. Areas beneath the pier will be illuminated with small wattage floodlights. The floodlights are to be anchored to the pilings of the pier. Movable lighting is also used for docks and piers. Lighting on docks and piers must not be glaring to pilots and violate any marine rules and regulations. The US Coast Guard has the authority to approve lighting adjacent to navigable waterways.

Security Lighting

365

5. Lighting fixtures placed in outdoor storage places are there to provide an adequate distribution of illumination in aisles, passageways, and recesses to eliminate shadowed areas where an intruder could seek to hide from detection.

LIGHTING REQUIREMENTS FOR CCTV Lighting is important for CCTV operation and, for CCTV to be an effective, the lighting must be adequate to capture images that are identifiable during hours of darkness. The intensity of the lighting of an area is usually overlooked when designing and installing a CCTV system. There are good CCTV installation companies that will address the lighting issues but the vast majority of CCTV installations don’t consider lighting. Without adequate illumination the CCTV system will not be an effective tool for monitoring the perimeter security. To help make CCTV more effective the following illumination and lighting arrangements should be considered in the overall design from the lighting guidelines of the US Army Corp of Engineers Technical Manual 5-811-1. 1. Balanced lighting is obtained by uniformly illuminating the scene. This will provide the best image contrast. The lighting must illuminate the entire area within a single camera’s field of view to ensure the that the maximum light-todark ratio does not exceed 6 to 1 and still provide the minimum faceplate illumination level necessary for the camera for its entire field of view. 2. The camera and light source alignment is attained when the camera is located below the plane of the lighting fixture used to illuminate the area. No camera should be positioned to look directly into the lighting plane especially if side light is used. To alleviate this problem the camera and the lighting should be aimed in the same direction. 3. Another important point to consider when supplying lights for CCTV illumination purposes is the spectral compatibility. The spectral compatibility is the amount of light put out by the light source is the same as that needed for the camera lens to operate properly. Since there are a number of CCTV cameras available for outdoor use, it is important then that the light source spectra and the camera lens spectra are a match and the light will provide the illumination needed for the lens to work at its optimum. 4. The understanding of the coordination of the lighting restart capability with the CCTV system to make sure the cameras are given the proper illumination. If the CCTV system being designed is for surveillance of a critical area or function, make sure any interruption in lighting will not create a problem for the camera lens chosen for the project. There are cameras that will adapt to low light situations but you need to know how that will affect the quality of the image captured by the camera lens. The best recommendation is to dis-

366


cuss the proposed CCTV design with a competent impartial CCTV system design installation company and not just a vendor that sells and installs certain systems.

ELECTRICAL POWER SOURCES FOR SECURITY LIGHTING No discussion about security lighting would be complete without mentioning electrical power sources for the lighting. There are a number of things to consider and the US Army Corp of Engineers Technical Manual 5-811-1(TM 5-811-1) outlines a number of requirements. The requirements outline the need for alternative and back up power sources. The type of back up system chosen will depend on whether there is need for uninterrupted power for the security lighting system for critical and sensitive areas of the site. Following is a discussion of the types of alternative and back up power systems for security lighting based on TM 5-811-1: 1. Alternative electric power is required in the event of an outage of the normal electric power source. The system used for the alternative power source must be reliable so that continuous illumination will be ensured through the use of a battery back up system. There two main types of alternative power sources. Uninterruptible Power Supplies (UPS) are not used for security lighting because they do not perform satisfactorily for lighting applications. a. Battery backup—the battery backup power source is used when the demand for power is small. The lights are wired to the batteries and when there is a loss of the main power the UPS will take over and keep the lights on the system illuminated or the lights themselves will have a battery pack built in that will take over during a normal power outage. A battery back up system is more economical for small demand systems. For larger demand systems a standby generator will be needed. b. The standby generator will be either an automatic or manual start. The generator is used to generate the power necessary to keep the lights illuminated during a disruption in the normal power source. 2. The re-strike or start up time for some lamps used in security lighting has to be considered when designing a backup power source. For example, when High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps are used, the time for the startup outage time is extended when using a generator because of the time required for re-striking the arc in a HID lamp. The shortest re-strike time for security lamps are the High Pressure Sodium (HPS) lamps which is less than 1 minute from a hot lamp. A lamp is hot for 3 minutes after loss of power. The total elapsed time form the loss of normal power to full HPS lamp illumination includes the times for the standby generator to start up and the HPS lamp to restrike is 4-5 minutes.

Security Lighting

367

So the tolerable outage time of the security lighting system needs to be considered in the design phase. What is a tolerable outage time will depend on the project and vary from project to project. Some projects have critical or sensitive locations that will require the need for back up and alternative power sources. The risk assessment will help in determining what the requirements will be for security lighting and alternative power sources. The design and use of re-strike systems needs to be carefully engineered to achieve the desired level of minimum illumination for security lighting.

WIRING AND LIGHTING CONTROLS The important points to remember in the design of security lighting system wiring and controls are as follows: 1. The wiring must be installed in accordance with applicable codes and ordinances. The wire will need to be placed underground to minimize accidental damage, vandalism, sabotage, or weather-related issues. 2. To minimize illumination degradation during power surges the feeders should be 3-phase with a 4-wire to its own breaker at the breaker box. 3. All lighting circuits need to be grounded. 4. The wiring circuit must be arranged so that if one lamp fails it will not leave a large portion of the perimeter in darkness, especially any critical areas. So the design of the lighting system must take into account the failure of lamps and make sure there is sufficient overlap to prevent a lamp failure from causing dark areas of the perimeter. There are two types of on-off security lighting controls: a. Automatic b. Manual Automatic controls can be a sensor that is activated by darkness, by a Passive Infrared Device (PIR), or a motion sensor. The type of activation used to automatically control the security lighting will depend on the needs of the location. Usually a combination of automatic control systems is used to activate security lighting. A good use of a PIR to activate security lighting would be in at an entrance to a building door, overhead door, etc. When someone approaches the entrance the PIR will activate a floodlight. The floodlight could be set to provide glare projection to blind the person approaching the entrance. A word of caution when setting the floodlight to provide glare projection is make sure that the approach is not used by vehicles or an accident may occur because the person driving the vehicle is blinded by the light.

368


Manual controls are similar to a switch in your office or home used to switch the lights off or on. These controls need to be accessible to and operated only by authorized personnel.

MAINTENANCE OF LIGHTING SYSTEMS Mechanical maintenance is important to keep the lighting system at its optimal performance level. Maintenance includes not only repair of damaged equipment but also preventive maintenance as well. Light levels will decrease over time due to aging lamps and dirt on fixtures and lamps can reduce the total illumination by 50%. This is especially true for those lamps and fixtures that are exposed to the elements. A preventive maintenance and inspection program should include the following items: 1. Inspection of all the electrical circuits 2. Replace or repair worn parts 3. Tighten connections 4. Check the insulation to make sure it is not worn or frayed which may cause a short circuit if the wires become exposed 5. Check to see if the fixtures are aimed properly 6. Clean fixtures to ensure optimal illumination at least every 6 to 24 months 7. Measurements should be taken with a light meter periodically to see if there is proper illumination according to the design criteria for the system. The information should be included in a report of the findings and kept on file. The foot-candle power requirements listed in Table 5-1 should still be available from the lighting system if not then recommendations for re-design must be considered and added to the report of the findings of the lighting measurements.

SECURITY LIGHTING DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS To design a security lighting system, planning for the type of lighting systems to be used must be done to ensure that the proper one is chosen for the particular application. The steps to designing the most effective and efficient security lighting system are outlined below: 1. Perform a risk analysis and a threat assessment for the project. 2. Look at the minimum lighting requirement and select the one the meets the requirement for the area.

Security Lighting

369

3. Select the type of lighting system (lamps) that will provide the proper illumination based on the requirements for the area. Usually more than one system is used for a project since different areas will require different lighting. 4. Review and comply with any local jurisdictions’ security lighting requirements since the security lighting plan will be part of the overall site lighting master plan that is submitted to the building department for approval. 5. Lay out the lamps and fixtures on a site plan and ensure that overlapping of the illumination is done to ensure effective illumination of the area. This will help avoid dark areas for intruders to hide so they will not be detected. 6. If a CCTV system will be part of the security plan then the lighting must be compatible with the CCTV camera lens. Remember the lighting spectra must be compatible with the camera lens spectra or the camera will not provide the best image. By knowing what the lighting will be you will be able to make a more informed decision about the CCTV system. 7. When designing the security lighting system make sure the lights do not create a nuisance to any surrounding neighbors. The security lighting, if designed properly, will illuminate both sides of the perimeter boundary but not extend out too far on the outside of the perimeter and into the neighbors’ perimeter. 8. For parking lots will the street lights design and layout provide adequate illumination for the CCTV system to capture good images? Will the lights produce dark spaces for intruders to hide from view?


CHAPTER

Animal Rights and Eco-Terrorism

16

I

n recent years there have been attacks against construction job sites by animal rights and eco-terror groups in the United States. The attacks include vandalism and arson. Some of the attacks have been costly and one such attack occurred in a San Diego, CA apartment complex under construction which was set ablaze destroying the entire complex and causing an estimated $50 million in damage. There have been other fires targeting single family housing developments as well. These have caused millions of dollars in damage not to mention an increase in the property and casualty insurance premiums for the contractor that sustained the loss and the deductible. This is part of the philosophy of these groups and that is to cause economic harm. When the casualty insurance premiums reach a certain level, it forces the contractor out of business because of the rise in insurance costs and/or a large increase in the deductible. Not every construction site is a target but it is better to become more aware of the potential threat than to dismiss it lightly. The problem is, to date, there has not been any accurate way to determine which sites are more vulnerable than others. The one factor that can be considered is the location of the construction job site. More research needs to be done to try and determine what type of job sites are vulnerable to being attacked by eco-terrorists. The following are some rough guidelines that may help in determining the vulnerability of a job site to eco-terrorism: • Is the site in an area that is considered environmentally sensitive? And by whom? • What is the scope of the project? Q

Residential

Q

Commercial


372


• Bio technology • Research laboratories • Have there been protests about the location of the project in the planning and zoning phase? • Has the environmental impact study been questioned? • Are the protests continuing now that the project has started? • Is the job site experiencing more vandalism than other job sites? The above questions may indicate one job site is more vulnerable than others but there is no 100% guarantee that the site will or will not be a target of ecoterrorism. The only way to help minimize the risk is to understand the way the eco-terrorists operate and to harden the job site by including security in all phases of the project to include planning and construction for all job sites that answering affirmatively to the questions outlined above. Job sites that answer “YES” to most of the questions listed above may have a higher level of vulnerability than job sites that answer “NO” to most of the questions. More research needs to be done in this area to come up with a good predictor of whether a job site will be or is a target of eco-terror groups. The FBI in a report to Congress defined domestic terrorism as follows: • Domestic terrorism is the unlawful use, or threatened use, of violence by a group or individual based and operating entirely within the United States (or its territories) without foreign direction, committed against persons or property to intimidate or coerce a government, the civilian population, or any segment thereof, in furtherance of political or social objectives. The two groups responsible for much of the eco-terrorism in the last several years are the Animal Liberation Front (ALF) and the Earth Liberation Front (ELF). ELF is the group that took responsibility for the fire in San Diego, CA. The group hung a banner over the burning complex saying, “If you built it we will burn it ELF”.

THE GROUPS: ALF AND ELF Both the Animal Liberation Front (ALF) and the Earth Liberation Front (ELF) are underground groups. Stop Huntingdon Animal Cruelty (SHAC) on the other hand is an above-ground group that accepts donations to carry out demonstrations, email campaigns, etc. with the goal of running Huntingdon Life Science out of business. SHAC emerged in the late 1990s first in Great Britain and then in the US. Huntingdon Life Sciences does most of the research for the various drug companies, cosmetic companies, etc. The research is done on animals


373

and SHAC was formed in Great Britain where Huntingdon Life Sciences originated to close them down because of their animal research. SHAC uses tactics that are designed to harass those who work for or do business with Huntingdon Life Sciences. Janitorial services that did work for Huntingdon Life Sciences have had their employees harassed and intimidated to the point the company severed its ties. SHAC takes credit for the demonstrations in front of employee’s homes, places of business of Huntingdon Life Sciences’ suppliers, and sending threatening emails to pressure them into dropping Huntingdon Life Sciences as a client or customer. It has been alleged that SHAC and the ALF have close ties and the ALF does the underground direct actions for SHAC. Construction companies that do work for any research laboratory can be a potential target. The web site www.shac.com has a listing of target companies. Construction companies in the US and Great Britain have been the targets of SHAC and the ALF. There has been unity between the ALF and the ELF since 1998. According to the FBI the ALF and the ELF do not have a centralized structure of command and control. The groups themselves also boast that they do not have a centralized hierarchical structure and that the cells are autonomous and you joined the organization because there is no organization. Everything revolves around the cells. The ALF and ELF consist of loosely connected cells that carry out the attacks. The cells are usually 4 to 5 members that know each other well and they don’t in most cases know any members of any of the other cells. The reason for this type of organizational structure is simple; if a cell is broken up by arrests, the cell’s members would not be able to give the names of other cells and their members to law enforcement. This is known as “Leaderless Resistance” and it reduces the possibility of the group or cell being infiltrated by law enforcement. The basic principle of the leaderless group or cell is that there is no central authority and chain-of-command and the only thing linking the cells is a common ideology and each cell is autonomous unconnected and unknown to each other. The ELF web site encourages prospective members not to attempt to join an existing cell but to form their own. Attempting to join an existing cell would be fruitless since the cells will not take on any unknown persons for security reasons. Both groups have a mandate that no humans are to be physically harmed during an attack and to date in the US that has held. In Great Britain however that has not been the case and several persons have been severely beaten. Although rare, violence against persons by the ALF does happen in Great Britain. The Animal Liberation Front (ALF) focuses mainly on animal issues. There is however crossover between the ALF and the ELF and some of the same cells carry out direct actions for both groups. ALF began operations in the United Sates in the late 1970s. Members do not join the group and there are no membership lists, dues, or applications. To become a member you become involved in or form a new cell. The cells are formed to carry out “direct actions” against

374


the companies and individuals who use animals in research for economic gain. “Direct action” is the activities taken against a target and takes the form of criminal acts to cause economic damage to the companies that engage in animal research. The majority of their attacks are against research laboratories that use animals in research, fast food restaurants that serve meat, farms that raise meat for consumption, etc. The ALF in Great Britain has attacked animal research laboratories under construction and also done the same in the US. The attacks usually involve vandalism to heavy equipment and the job site trailers and the project itself. The favorite weapons of the ALF are vandalism, arson, harassing emails, and freeing the animals called “liberations”. In recent years the group has carried out some bombings using pipe bombs in the San Francisco Bay area of California. ALF has harassed employees of the research laboratories at their homes as well as at work. A flood of emails were sent to one company causing the company email servers to go down because it could not handle all the traffic. During what they call “direct actions” the members carry signs saying, “Animal Killer”, etc. when demonstrating in front of a target’s home. There is enough noise to cause the neighbors to become upset and since the actions are done during the middle of the night they do have an impact. Demonstrations on weekends in normally quiet neighborhoods have an impact as well. The goals of the ALF as posted on their website www.alf.com North American Animal Liberation Press Office are as follows: • To liberate animals from places of abuse, i.e., laboratories, factory farms, fur farms, etc., and place them in good homes where they may live out their natural lives, free from suffering • To inflict economic damage to those who profit from the misery and exploitation of animals • To reveal the horror and atrocities committed against animals behind locked doors, by performing nonviolent direct actions and liberations • To hold those who are responsible and complicitous (sic) in the abuse, torture and death accountable for the terrorism they commit against innocent, sentient non-human animals • Any group of people who are vegetarians or vegans and who carry out actions according to these guidelines have the right to regard themselves as part of the Animal Liberation Movement The ALF website states that the cells range from one individual to many, working closely together to carry out actions. A member from one cell does not know members or the activities of another cell because they wish to remain anonymous.


375

Since the members of the underground cells are anonymous there is no way for above-ground movement to contact them. The communications are done through the use of communiqués from the underground cells to the aboveground movement. This a part of the security used by the underground movement to prevent discovery and arrest. The North American Animal Liberation Press Office was created to answer questions as to why actions are carried out. This protects the anonymity of the cell members. The Press Office states that since they do not engage in illegal activities. They do not know the details of such activities but instead provide commentary as to why actions are carried out by the cells. The Press Office disavows any direct knowledge or connection with the underground cells other than the communiqués sent to the Office about a direct action. The Earth Liberation Front (ELF) on the other hand has launched attacks against construction sites across the US. There is debate as to when the ELF started in the US. According to one report the ELF started in the US in 1977 near Santa Cruz, CA. The first action of the group occurred in 1977 in Watsonville, CA. Other attacks occurred in Northern California and Oregon in 1977. The leader of the original ELF was arrested at his home in Santa Cruz, CA in November 1977. The ELF of 1977 was disbanded in 1978 and reemerged in 1980. Whenever it actually started is not as important as their rise to prominence in news media which occurred in October 1998 with the fire bombing of a ski resort in Vail, Colorado. The damage included four ski lifts, a restaurant, and a picnic area for a loss exceeding $12 million. No one has ever been arrested for the fire bombing. The purpose of the group is to attack and cause economic damage to companies that are making money from destroying the environment. The ELF advocates “monkeywrenching” which is sabotage against industries and other entities that are perceived to be damaging the environment for economic gain. “Monkeywrenching” in the past was gluing locks shut to doors to target locations so they could not be unlocked, placing spikes in trees, arson, and other forms of property destruction. The goals of the ELF according to their web site are as follows: • Inflict economic damage on those profiting from the destruction and exploitation of the natural environment • To reveal and educate the public on the atrocities committed against the earth and all species that populate it • Take all the necessary precautions against harming any animal, human and nonhuman Some have been large apartment complex construction projects, a ski resort hotel in Vail, Colorado and others such as single family housing units. The fa-

376


vorite weapon of the ELF is arson. The building is attacked in the framing stage so there is sufficient air flow to spread the fire quickly causing total destruction. The ELF has also caused large losses by vandalizing construction equipment. The damaged equipment is spray painted with the letters ELF to take responsibility for the damage. The damage ranges from destroying the equipment by smashing it and ripping out all of the wiring to arson of the equipment to destroy it to stop the construction. There have been a limited number of ELF cell members captured and those that have been arrested are usually teenagers, college students, or former college students. The students have an interest in environmental and animal rights matters and are being recruited on college campuses across the U.S.

Tactics Used by the Animal Liberation Front The tactics used by the Animal Liberation Front (ALF) are as follows: • Using incendiary devices to burn vehicles belonging to Huntingdon Life Sciences executives, employees and others on their target list • Vandalizing homes and businesses by breaking windows and spraying red spray paint to symbolize blood on vehicle and building windows, placing rotting food in closets of offices, cutting phone and computer lines, stealing and using credit cards of targets, etc. • Sending harassing emails to employees to intimidate them into quitting the company • Breaking into labs to release the animals and destroying the laboratory and in some cases burning it as well The targets, especially those are chosen for economic sabotage, are not selected randomly. The targets are carefully and thoroughly researched before a “direct action” is carried out. Direct actions as they are called are the attacks made by the cells to cause economic loss to those that are targeted as abusing animal rights for profit. Direct actions can take several forms and below are some that have been used in the past: • “Monkeywrenching” which is the gluing of locks so they cannot be opened are useless. The locks have a superglue type substance injected into the cylinder rendering the lock useless when the glue dries. • Arson is used to destroy labs after the animals are freed. • Spray painting of cars and homes of targeted company’s employees. • Identity theft is another tactic used to go after executives of targeted companies.


377

• Harassing emails to employees. • Vandalizing target locations by spray painting, damaging equipment, etc. • Paint stripper to strip paint off vehicles of targets or target company vehicles. • Etching windows with messages like “DROP HLS”. The ALF in the past published a manual online called “The Animal Liberation Primer”. The manual outlines various subjects for the ALF participant to know. Below are some highlights of the manual which gives a good idea of how ALF operates. The manual is used as a training and education tool for the cell members. It used to be posted on the old ALF and ELF website but it has been removed for sometime now. The manual is in two parts. Part I is about the ALF the philosophy and what is needed and what to do if questioned by the police about a direct action. The second part of the manual is the how to do stuff. This section describes how to do the direct actions: Part I 1. The manual discusses the ideology of ALF; what is, and the purpose. 2. There is a discussion albeit brief about sabotage versus liberation. The section stresses that liberation of the animals is the heart of ALF. 3. A history of ALF follows which outlines past direct actions. 4. The “ALF lifestyle” is outlined and includes: a. b. c. d.

Diet: vegetarian or vegan Drug and alcohol free Physically and mental stability Limited access to mainstream animal rights groups is ok but it is better to steer clear of contact altogether.

5. How to deal with local law enforcement and federal agents. This is a set of instructions of what to do if arrested for an action. The guidance to members is as follows: a. Never make a statement that implicates yourself or any cell members b. Don not answer even seemingly harmless questions about anyone or anything. c. Do not believe law enforcement or federal agents when they say “they know everything so tell us what you know and it will go easier on you” d. Don’t say anything. Don’t lie to the police or federal agents since it is a crime to do so. 6. There is a section on security which outlines the following principles.

378


a. Never discuss illegal activities over the telephone b. Use a PO Box that is not registered in your name to receive sensitive mail. Meet with members of your cell in public places. For example, shopping malls, restaurants, and other busy public places. d. When contacting the media after an action to give the reasons for the action the following guidelines are given: - Make the message brief - Use all capital letters with no curves - Use a public typewriter - Make a copy of the finished press release. - Then make a copy of the copy - Never send the original - Don’t lick the envelope or stamp; remember DNA can be traced - Use a sponge for the envelope and stamp - Mail the communiqué from a public mailbox e. Never trust reporters f. Don’t brag or talk about the action to anyone other than cell members 7. Evidence is discussed by explaining what is used to track those that commit illegal acts. The following are some of the information that is provided in the manual: a. Traceable items include the following: - Finger prints - Tire tracks - Shoe prints - Blood stains - Saliva - Hair - Carpet fibers - Soil residue - Urine - Handwriting - Voice recordings b. Don’t wear anything that can be traced, for example, a pair of earrings. If one is lost it could be easy to match the one found with the one remaining in your possession. c. As for the tools used in the action, file the tips immediately so any marks from the action cannot be matched to the tool in your possession. Tools leave distinctive marks that can be matched. d. Don’t keep militant literature like this primer in your house. It can be used against you in court and make a great impact. e. Store any incriminating tools, photos, and literature at the home of some-


379

one who is completely sympathetic and dedicated to the movement but not involved in any direct action. 8. The manual lists items that are necessities for carrying out direct actions: a. b. c. d. e. f.

Gloves cotton, not latex Ski mask Disposable dark pants Dark hooded sweat shirt Walkie talkies Flash light and batteries

9. The last section in Part I is about the cell. First and foremost the manual states that is better to start your own cell than to try and join an existing cell. The reason is simple. The cells as the manual states should be made up of those whom all members can trust and know well. This is to prevent infiltration by law enforcement. When recruiting potential cell members the manual instructs the cell to look at long-time trusted friends who share the same beliefs and the check them out. Make sure that the potential member is not mentally unstable, a gossip, are there personal problems that would interfere with direct actions, etc. Don’t rush picking a team since it is important. The cell, it is called a team in the manual, should be from 2 to 5 people and a decision made as to who will be the cell leader. The decision as to who will be the leader should be determined by the person forming the cell. The cell does not operate in a democratic fashion and the leader makes the decisions for the cell. PART II PART II of the manual instructs the cell members on how to carry out direct actions. The manual instructs the cells to start with easy actions such as gluing locks, clogging (sponging) toilets in restaurants by using a dry compacted sponge down the hole then flushing the toilet causing water to backup on to the floor, painting, breaking windows using sling shots, and etching windows are the basic direction actions. These actions take minimal planning, cost, and worry. The basic direct actions are considered training for the cell in learning to work together. The advanced direct actions take more planning, cost, and coordination on the part of the cell. The advanced actions include the following: 1. Vehicle sabotage that includes gluing locks, etching windows, using paint stripper to ruin the paint, writing slogans and messages into the paint, and arson of the vehicle 2. Combination actions—actions that combine painting, etching, breaking

380


windows, or gluing locks 3. Arson-there are detailed descriptions and instructions on how to make incendiary devices in the manual. The devices are not sophisticated but they are effective 4. Live liberations of animals from labs, fur farms, and factory farms Security of direct actions is discussed although the manual doesn’t refer to it in exactly those terms. The following items are according to the manual likely skills, information, and people to carry out a direct action: 1. Perform surveillance of the target to know all security systems, security officers, etc. this includes the locations of cameras, types of alarm systems, and when the security officers do rounds. For example what time and duration do the security officers patrol the job site? 2. Sometimes security is “tested” (probed) to see what type of response occurs for a breach. 3. Don’t forget to wear gloves and dark clothing with a ski mask. 4. Develop detailed layout of the site. This can be done by video tap, digital camera, or sketch. 5. Location to position the lookout with a walkie talkie to communicate with the rest of the cell if security officers are heading in their direction. 6. Make sure vehicles that transport cell members to the direct action location are in good working order; i.e. no broken taillights, working brake and headlights, or anything else that may draw the attention of the police while enroute. Obey all traffic laws; don’t speed, make full stops at stop signs, etc. Pick a predetermined location to hide vehicles during the operation so they will not be noticed by police or security. 7. Use police scanners to monitor police activity. 8. Don’t talk about the action after it is completed to anyone outside of the cell. 9. When leaving the site of the action obey traffic laws, don’t draw attention to the vehicle. 10. Discard tools and clothing worn during the action but not at the site or near the site of the action. In the above list are some of the security precautions that the cells are encouraged to take so they will not be discovered before, during, or after a direct action. The ELF uses a similar how-to book with much of the same information. Another manual used by both groups is a how-to arson manual. The manual


381

describes how to make incendiary devices from ordinary materials. For example, use an egg timer to set off an incendiary device that is usually contained in a plastic 5-gallon bucket that has a diesel/gas mixture. The diesel/gas mixture is poured into the plastic bucket about ½ full and the egg timer is used to ignite matches, flares, etc, and then used to ignite the diesel/gas mixture. When the plastic bucket burns down, the burning liquid is released spreading across the floor. Several of the devices are placed in a target location can cause considerable damage. There are other devices that are also discussed in the manual. What is important is that ordinary materials are used to make the incendiary devices.

PROTECTING THE JOB SITE The first step in protecting the job site is to develop a job site security plan. Without a plan job sites in the area are targets of eco-terror. It may hard to have one in place in time to prevent the site from becoming a target. With a job site security plan in place some of the basics of securing the site are covered. The following steps can help minimize the threat to the job site form an eco-terror attack. While there is no such thing as 100% security that will make the job site totally secure, there are things that can be done to help increase the site security. The following are some of the things that can be done to help increase the security of the site: 1. Make sure all the security lighting is working. Stress to security officer that all lights that are not working be reported in the Daily Activity Report (DAR). 2. Use security officers on job sites in areas and on the types of jobs that are high risk for eco-terror attacks. This would include jobs where there has been opposition to the project because the environment will be harmed. The job is a laboratory for research (vivisection) company that is on the target list of SHAC. To find out if a company is on the target list go to the SHAC website at www.shac.com. 3. Instruct the security officers to patrol at irregular intervals and change the intervals to different times every night. Don’t accept routine. The purpose of the irregular patrols is to throw off the eco-terrorists in their planning since when they plan an operation they look for regularities so they know what happens when. 4. Instruct (increase awareness) the office and other employees at the job site to look for the following since a part of the planning process for the eco-terror cell is to conduct surveillance of a target location before carrying out the attack. It is important that the following actions don’t get overlooked because they seemed insignificant at the time of occurrence: a. The same vehicle parked near the job site for several days. Get the license

382


plate number, vehicle color, and make. Note anything unusual about the behavior of the individuals, i.e. did they seem nervous when they noticed you looking at them and drive away quickly? b. Unknown persons taking pictures or video of the job site. Write down descriptions of the persons immediately after they leave. Take pictures of them if possible. Note anything unusual about the behavior of the individuals, i.e., did they seem unusually nervous when confronted? c. Unknown persons walking around sketching the jobsite from outside the fence. Ask can you help them? Write down descriptions of the persons immediately after they leave. Note anything unusual about the behavior of the individuals, i.e. did they seem unusually nervous when confronted? d. Unknown persons coming into the office trailer asking questions about the job site. Write down descriptions of the persons immediately after they leave. Note anything unusual about the behavior of the individuals, i.e. did they seem unusually nervous when asking questions? e. Watch for persons loitering around the job site after hours at night on weekends and in the early morning as well. 5. Instruct and add to the Post orders that the security officers note in the DAR any persons that are seen loitering near the job site. The officers should provide descriptions of the individuals and their behaviors. 6. Any breaches to the job site security should be captured in an Incident Report (IR) and noted in the (DAR) all such incidents shall be captured in an IR not matter how insignificant they may seem at the time. Pictures should be taken whenever possible using a digital camera and are to be included with the Incident Report. Video of the breach shall be referenced in the Incident Report by the time and location of the digital recording. 7. Construction sites have been the target for vandalism for a long time but pay particular attention to vandals that use paint thinner thrown on vehicles, spray painting of the letters ALF, or ELF s part of the vandalism. 8. Add to Post orders that patrols are conducted at irregular hours. The times need to vary and change every shift and day. The goal is to avoid any routine in patrols in frequency and number of officers doing the patrols to keep any group doing surveillance of the job site off balance. Remember they are looking for routines so they know that the time of the attack there will be no patrols. 9. Use covert CCTV cameras as well as the visible cameras. The covert cameras can be hidden almost anywhere as long as the location will provide video images that can be used to identify individuals and/or vehicles including license plates.


383

Being more vigilant may help prevent the job site from falling victim to ecoterrorists. The more unpredictable and non-routine the security is on the job site the harder it will be for the eco-terrorists to plan and carry out an attack and remain anonymous which is one of the main goals of the eco-terrorists.


CHAPTER

Developing the Job Site Security Plan

17

N

ow that we have discussed the various components of job site security we can put it all together in job site security plan. When developing the plan all the security elements that have been discussed in the book can be used in formulating the plan. The plan should comprehensive and flexible enough to keep pace with the everchanging job site. To develop the plan the following steps are a good guideline to follow: 1. Perform a threat assessment of the job site location a. Security survey b. Crime statistics c. Type of project d. Threats including eco-terror 2. Use the information from the threat assessment to develop the security plan a. Physical security b. Security lighting c. Equipment protection d. Protecting tools e. CCTV f. Intrusion detection g. Security officers h. Information protection 3. Communicate the plan to the job site 4. Maintain the plan through audits


386


There are some security basics that can be used on all job sites. These include the following: • Physical security • Security lighting • Equipment protection • Tool protection • Intrusion detection • CCTV • Information protection The degree of security for any given job site will depend on the findings of the threat assessment. The higher the risk, the more security will be needed. Ignoring security or not implementing security because it costs too much or we don’t need it is not a good business decision. Remember losses from thefts occur every day on construction sites. Vandalism is another concern for construction job sites.

PERFORMING THE THREAT ASSESSMENT The first step in formulating the job site security plan is to do a threat assessment. Doing an assessment is important to the success of the security plan that is developed for the job site. The threat assessment will answer the following questions. • Is the area where the job site is located or will be located a high crime area? • What types of crimes are committed in the area? Q

Robberies

Q

Assaults

Q

Burglaries

Q

Vandalism

• What are the frequency rates of the crimes? To put it simply—what can go wrong resulting in a loss? Risk analysis is taking the vulnerabilities (threats) and determining the likelihood of whether a threat will cause a loss. The purpose of the risk analysis and threat assessment is to make sure the most cost-effective solutions are proposed. So the steps to the process are as follows: 1. Identification of the assets


387

2. Identification of the threats 3. Analyze the threats (risk assessment) 4. Determine what countermeasure (security feature) will mitigate or minimize the impact of the threat 5. Do a cost analysis so the benefit of the countermeasure selected can be quantified. We need to know what we are protecting and who or what we are protecting it from. This information allows for the formulation of a security plan that will reduce the threats to a manageable and acceptable level. The reason for spending the time and effort to develop the security plan using the threat assessment is that the security program will be a risk-based program. The money for the program will be spent to mitigate the most severe risks which are the risks that can potentially cause the largest loss. For example, the theft of heavy equipment is a potential problem on any job site but if the area has had several heavy equipment thefts on other job sites in the area recently then this could be a potential problem for the proposed job site as well. If the area has a large number of vehicle thefts, this could also be a potential problem for the job site. The more that is learned about the area and the crime statistics, the better prepared the job site can be when establishing the site security plan: 1. Identifying the assets is the first step in the threat assessment process. The table in Table 17-1 can be used to collect the information to identify the assets. A separate asset table can be used to collect information about assets by location or department. 2. Now a value must be assigned to the assets. Assigning value is not a simple task. For equipment or products, the value can be the purchase or the replacement costs. To determine value, you would answer the following questions: a. How much revenue does this equipment, facility, etc. generate? b. How much does it cost to maintain? c. How much would it cost if the equipment were lost? d. How much would it cost to replace? 3. Now that the assets are identified the risks need to be identified. The various risk categories are examined, and the various factors are applied until a list of possible threats is created. Since there is not a scientific way to determine which risk categories apply to an asset; it is a subjective determination. Common sense should prevail.

388


Table 17-1 Asset Identification Table. ASSET People Buildings Computers Intellectual Property Equipment

DESCRIPTION OF ASSET, NUMBER, ETC.

4. The next step is to go through the various assets and the threats to estimate how much would be lost if the threat causes a loss. Building and equipment replacement costs can be calculated.What about business loss because patrons are afraid to go to the business because it is in a high crime area or the crime rate is increasing? 5. Now calculate the probability of occurrence by using the formula below. Simple Probability 4 p(Event 1) + p(Event 2) The Probability of Event 1 + the Probability of Event 2 Then there is the probability of related events. Probability of Related Events 4 p(Event 1) 2 p(Event 2) 4 p(Both Events) The Probability of Event 1 2 Probability of Event 2 gives the both events occurring.

probability of

6. The frequency of occurrence is then used to determine cost of the expected loss the on a particular asset because of a threat. The following formula is used. Probability 2 Financial Impact 4 Expectation of Losses The corrected probability 2 the expected loss after the countermeasure has been implemented 4 The corrected loss The cost of the counter measure 1 the corrected loss 4 The net benefit of the countermeasure Cost of deductible savings + the net benefit of the Total cost avoidance

countermeasure 4


389

Table 17-2 provides a snapshot of the seven steps necessary for conducting a risk analysis. The checklist can be used as a guide to make sure the steps are all completed. Risk analysis is described in more detail in Chapter 2. The process of risk analysis is used to categorize the risks by their probability of occurrence. The higher the probability the more likely that threat will result in a loss. Then the high probability risks are the ones that are to be mitigated. Mitigating the risk can be in one of several ways. 1. Avoid the risk 2. Transfer the risk 3. Risk segregation 4. Acceptance of the risk 5. Reduction of the risk 6. Combinations of any of the above methods for risk mitigation. The methods listed above are the ways that risk is managed no matter what the risk is. All of the risk has some financial consequence if the risk results in a loss.

Table 17-2 Risk Analysis Checklist. STEPS

DESCRIPTION

Identify Assets People, equipment, etc Set Value of Asset Identify Risks Estimate Loss of Asset (formulas below) Calculate Probability: Simple Prob 4 p(Event 1) + p(Event 2) Prob of related Events p(Event 1) 2 p(Event 2) 4 p(Both Events) Calculate Cost of Loss: P 2 (Financial Impact 4 EL (Expected Loss) CP (corrected probability) 2 EL 4 corrected loss (CL) CM (cost of countermeasure) 1 CL 4 Net benefit of CM Cost of deductible + net benefit CM 4 Total cost avoidance

People, equipment, etc. Cost of replacement or loss of use What could cause a loss How to calculate Simple Probability

Calculating the cost of a loss and the cost of avoidance

390


The higher the risk, the greater the probability a loss will occur. The risks that will result in the highest dollar loss are the ones that need to be mitigated to either minimize the exposure or eliminate it all together. Avoiding the risk means that the activity is not done so there will not be any exposure to the risk. For example, a company can avoid doing construction work that requires blasting to be done to clear the way for the project to be built. This may not be practical especially if the company builds roads avoiding the risk may not be an option. So other ways to mitigate the risk need to be used. Transferring the risk can be accomplished by purchasing an insurance policy so the insurance company then takes on the risk. The insurance company is paid a premium to take on the risk. By purchasing insurance the company will still need to take steps to help perform the task of using explosives safely in the course of the work or the premiums will be so high the construction company would not be able to afford them. So sometimes transferring the risk becomes a partnership and is more of a sharing the risk rather than transferring it entirely to the insurance company. The insurance company will not accept all of the risk and in some cases will not accept the risk at all. There are deductibles that we have spelled out in our automobile insurance policies and businesses have deductibles for their property insurance. These deductibles keep rates down. It is not unheard of for a business to have a deductible of $250,000 or more for a loss experienced from a property casualty claim. This is why earmarking expenditures for security planning and countermeasures to reduce the risk from loss due a security-related incident is good business. Risk segregation is used to separate the risks. The objective is to separate a high risk from other risks so that the high risk will not impact the other lower risks if there is a loss. Risk segregation has two components. First is the separation or spreading out the activity to minimize the exposure. For example, having and enforcing a policy that does not allow all the top executives to travel together on the same flight to limit exposure so in the unlikely event the plane crashes all the top executives are not lost in the single event. Second is duplication or back-up. This is where you back-up your company’s data in case there is a server or disk failure. The data won’t be lost. Another example is to have back-up power for perimeter lighting so the facility will still have lights in the event of a power outage. Risk acceptance is when the company management decides after doing analysis that the potential loss from the risk is not significant and nothing needs to be done about the risk.

The Elements of the Plan The plan spells out who is responsible for security on the job site. Job safety co-


391

ordinators can also be responsible for security since they move around the site performing safety-related duties to ensure subcontractor compliance with job site safety standards and will be able to ensure the subcontractor compliance with job site security standards as well. The job safety coordinator can function as the job site security coordinator. Once the security plan is in place, it is a matter of auditing to maintain the level of security required to meet the level of risk that the job site is exposed to. So what should be in the job site security plan? Figure 17-1 is an example of what should be in the plan. The example is by no means exhaustive and is for illustrative purposes and discussion. The sample can be used as a guideline for developing a job site specific security plan. To develop a job site specific security plan, the first step is to do a threat assessment of the job site. The site security plan should be risk-based so the money allocated for security is used to mitigate the greatest risks. On all job sites the greatest risk is the theft of tools, equipment, and materials. So all job site security plans should address the protecting of tools, equipment, and materials from theft. An important part of any plan is assigning responsibility to ensure success. The sample plan assigns responsibility for the various elements of the plan. Assigning responsibility also provides accountability and without accountability it wouldn’t get done. The plan elements include the following under the heading “Section 1 General Security Precautions”: 1. Designate a Job Site Security Coordinator 2. Install a perimeter fence around the job site 3. Post “NO TRESSPASSING” Signs on the perimeter fence 4. Security Lighting 5. Establish a clear zone around the perimeter fence 6. Gate and site access control 7. Storage trailers 8. Office trailers 9. Protecting computers from thefts 10. Gang boxes 11. Tools 12. Equipment 13. Security officers

392

Job Site Security Plan

RESPONSIBILITY All Trade Con tractors

XYZ Contractor Company

3-Post "NO TRESSPASSING" Signs

"NO TRESSPASSING" and Reward/Hotline signs shall be posted along the fence line.

Order the signs from the Company Equipment Yard


4. Lighting

Ensure effective lighting for the site


5. Clear zone

Ensure lhal there a clear zone of five feet around any perimeter fence line. All perimeter fence gates especially Ihose in Ihe rear of the site shall be locked when not in use.

Lighting is sufficient to illuminate site and can be seen from outside the perimeter fence. Keep materials from piling up within 5 feel of fence line which will obstruct view from outside the perimeter fence. Establish access control procedures for after hours and remote gate deliveries.

6. Gate and site access control

FIGURE 17-1 Sample Job Site Security Plan.

All Trade Contractors/XYZ Contractor Company XYZ Contractor Company


SECTION 1 GENERAL SECURITY PRECAUTIONS SECTION DESCRIPTION ACTION/APPLICATION I . Designate it Job Ensures that security plan Performs inspections using security is followed checklist Site Security Coordinator 2. Install perimeter All sites shall have fence perimeter fenced except for TI work, inside an existing building

SECTION

DESCRIPTION

7. Storage trailers

Lighting covers all storage trailers

. Computers

10. Gang boxes

1 1 . Tools

RESPONSIBILITY XYZ Contractor Company

Storage trailers have pad locks Subcontractor trailers have padlocks Access to storage trailers is limited to designated employees CCTV for monitoring storage trailers in high crime areas Intrusion detection for trailers storing high value equipment or materials Lighting covers all office trailers Trailer is wired for security alarms Laptops are locked with locking cable Desk top computers are locked using a cable lock to prevent theft Secure gang boxes when not in use

All storage trailers on site have padlocks and have padlock shields All subcontractor trailers on the site are padlocked and have padlock shields Restrict access to trailers to minimize pilfering.


Provide CCTV to monitor high value storage in high crime areas.

XYZ Contractor Company Subcontractors

Provide a pre-engineered intrusion detection system using motion and infrared sensors in combination. Lighting is sufficient to illuminate the office trailer or all the office trailers on the site. The trailer is wired for security alarms and the system is monitored off site. All laptops in the office trailer are locked with a locking cable All desk top computers are locked with locking cable to prevent theft

XYZ Contractor Company Subcontractors

All gang boxes are to be secured when not in use to minimize the loss exposure from pilfering

All contraclors/XYZ

All tools are to have identifying marks on them. Power tools with a value of over $500 will

Inspect subcontractors' tools to ensure compliance Check XYZ tools as well for compliance. Documented check in/out for tools

All Contractors/XYZ

All contractors/XYZ

XYZ Contractor Company XYZ Contractor Company XYZ Contractor Company XYZ Contractor Company

393

FIGURE 17-1 Sample Job Site Security Plan. (continued)

All contractors/XYZ


8. Office trailers

ACTION/APPLICATION Lighting is sufficient to illuminate all the storage trailers on site

394

SECTION 12. Equipment

Ensure equipment has anti-theft (levSees installed Ensure the DARs and IR.s are completed daily

FIGURE 17-1 Sample Job Site Security Plan. (continued)

ACTION/APPLICATION XYZ equipment information is maintained by the Yard. All other contractors will need to have the information for all their equipment that is on the site. Provide equipment information sheet if contractor does have a sheet (SEE ATTACHMENT BELOW Sample from ihe California Highway Patrol). The contractor will maintain their own records/sheets. Kill switches, fuel cap locks, hitch locks, wheel locks, etc. Master keys are tracked and monitored Review at least weekly the DARs and the IRs. Ensure that all Post orders are being followed by the security officers.

RESPONSIBILITY All contractors/XYZ

All concractors/XYZ Contractor company


13. Security Officers

numbers recorded DESCRIPTION Ensure all equipment on the site has a completed equipment information sheet


395

The designation of the “Job Site Security Coordinator” is an important first step. The coordinator will then be responsible and accountable for ensuring security is implemented and maintained at the job site. As previously stated, the “Job Site Safety Coordinator” can be assigned to take on the role and duties of the “Job Site Security Coordinator”. Security training can be provided to the job site safety coordinators as a part of the overall coordinator’s training. The security training would be based on the job site security plan. The role of the crime prevention coordinator would be to ensure that the job site security plan is being adhered to in a similar fashion to job site safety standards. This is done by using the security checklists or survey forms. The checklist in Figure 17-2 can be used as a guideline to develop a checklist for any job site. The job site security checklist is a way to capture what is being or not being done to address job site security. The survey form is easy to complete since most of the information is captured by circling a “YES” or “NO” answer to the questions on the form. The survey is about two pages so it is not cumbersome and time-consuming to complete. The form can also be completed by security officers as a part of their routine patrols. The survey form can be completed on a weekly basis to ensure compliance with the sit security plan. When deficiencies are noted on the form, a corrective action follow up survey is done to ensure the items are corrected before the end of the week. Follow up is extremely important to ensure compliance. Without follow up the security survey and the site security plan will have no meaning. To close out an item that needed corrective action all that is needed is a brief memo on the last page of the survey form by the security coordinator that item number xxx has been corrected and the date. Installing a perimeter fence around the job site is important. The perimeter fence is presented in more detail in Chapter 5. This will also help keep people out so they will not get hurt by falling into the deep excavations that are done on job sites. The perimeter fence also help address liability issues of the job site being an “attractive nuisance”. The perimeter fence is temporary but still should be secured to prevent it from falling over in a strong wind or if someone leans up against it. The posting of “No Trespassing” signs is important so there is no question that anyone coming onto the job site uninvited is trespassing and will be subject to arrest. Without the signs, in most California jurisdictions, an arrest for trespassing will not by made by local law enforcement. The signs can be purchased from the local Construction Industry Crime Prevention Program chapter. The Construction Industry Crime Prevention Program will be discussed in greater detail in Chapter 18. Security lighting is presented in more detail in Chapter 15. Security lighting is an often overlooked part of providing security to the job site. Properly distributed lighting around the job site can be a deterrent to thieves and vandals for fear of being seen. The lighting should be distributed around the entire perimeter and

396


JOB SITE SECURITY CHECKLIST T.

CFNFRAI. INFORMATION A. Name of job: Address: Citv/State:_ B. Project Executive. C, Safety/Security Coordinator D. Approximate Size of Total Area {Sq. ft / Acres E. Date of this Evaluation. F. Previous Surveys:

I.

Date

Date

CONTROL OF ENTRY AND M O V E M E N T

1.

Is the perimeter of site fenced?

Yes

No

2.

Are there gate access control procedures for after hours?

Yes

No

3.

Are "NO TRESPASSING SIGNS" posted?

Yes

No

4.

Is identification required of all persons entering?

Yes

No

5.

Does the lighting provide enough illumination for: A. So the site can be viewed from outside the perimeter?

Yes

No

B. To illuminate all the storage trailers?

Yes

No

C. To illuminate office trailers?

Yes

No

FIGURE 17-2 Job Site Security Checklist.

397


(i. 7.

II.

Are there materials stored within 5 feet of the perimeter fence?

Yes

No

R&S

Yes

No

Subcontractor

Yes

No

Yes

No

Do all the storage trailers padlocked and have a padlock shield?

8.

Are areas to storage trailers restricted?

9.

How are employees distinguishable from visitors? Explain.

10.

Are all visitors escorted at all times?

Yes

No

11.

Arc computers locked with cable lock (laptop and desk top)?

Yes

No

Is the office trailer wired for security alarms and are alarms Monitored offsite? Yes

No

Docs the alarm system provide protection for: a. All exterior doors? b. All exterior windows?

Yes Yes

No No

5.

Is the system inspected and tested regularly?

Yes

No

7,

Are records maintained of all alarm activation's to include time, date location, action taken, and cause of the activation? Yes No

8,

Is alarm response adequate?

Yes

No

9,

Has an updated call list been provided to the monitoring facility?

Yes

No

ALARMS 1. 2.

FIGURE 17-2 Job Site Security Checklist. (continued)

398


III.

TOOLS And EQUIPMENT 1.

Are gang boxes secured when not in use?

Yes

No

2.

Are all tools subcontractor and R&S clearly marked?

Yes

No

3.

Is there a document to sign to ills in/out?

Yes

No

4.

Does all equipment subcontractor and R&S have kill switches, fuel cap locks, hitch locks, or wheel locks?

Yes

No

Docs contractor have information for all their equipment i.e. serial numbers, VIN numbers, etc.?

Yes

No

5.

CORRECTIVE ACTION REPOR1 COMMENTS:

DATE:

SECURITY COORDINATOR SIGNATURE

END OF DOCUMENT

FIGURE 17-2 Job Site Security Checklist. (continued)


399

around storage areas for tools and equipment. The office trailers and employee parking areas should also have sufficient lighting to illuminate the area so there are no shadows, especially in the employee parking area. Make sure to change lighting timer to coincide with Daylight Savings Time changes. This will ensure proper illumination of the parking area during the winter months when it gets dark earlier. Some of the security can be set to come on using motion sensors. These types of lights are useful around the tool and equipment storage areas in addition to the normal lighting at those locations. The purpose is to deter thieves when they approach these areas because the additional lights will come on as the motion sensors are tripped. The lights should be positioned so the people approaching the storage are covered in light and the CCTV cameras will be able to record usable images. A clear zone should be established around the perimeter fence for five feet. The purpose of establishing and maintaining a clear zone around the perimeter fence is to have the fence line observable from either side of the fence. This will make it harder for someone to penetrate the fence without being seen. The security lighting previously discussed will also be a help by illuminating the clear zone on both sides of the fence. Clear zones do work so they must be maintained and, each week during the security survey, the clear zone around the entire perimeter needs to be checked. Storing anything within five feet of the perimeter fence should be prohibited and strictly enforced. The perimeter fence will have gates for entry to the job site. The gates, especially those in the rear of the job site, should remain locked when not in use. The front gates near the office trailer can remain open during working hours. The other gates will be opened for deliveries. When a large number of deliveries are scheduled, like cement, the gate will remain open but there should be a security officer or an employee posted at the gate to keep out those that do not have a legitimate business reason to enter the site. All the gates should be secured after hours by locking the gates using cables and case-hardened padlocks. If the opening is too large for a gate then cables with locks should be used to secure the opening. The cables can be removed during working hours so the equipment move in and out of the storage area more easily. Procedures should be established for after hours deliveries if there are any and remote gate operations. All after hours deliveries should have a company representative on site to sign for the delivery and to ensure its authenticity. Storage trailers are the box part of a tractor-trailer rig and should have the following items to help secure them: • Lighting covers all storage trailers • Storage trailers have padlocks

400


• Subcontractor trailers have padlocks • Access to storage trailers is limited to designated employees • CCTV for monitoring storage trailers in high crime areas • Intrusion detection for storage trailers storing high value equipment or materials Lighting is important to securing the perimeter and it also important for securing the storage trailers. Having sufficient lighting around the storage trailers will be a deterrent to thieves since they want to get into the site undetected and also to leave without being detected. The lighting in the area with a clear zone around the storage trailer will help by making it easy to see anyone near the trailer from a distance. The lighting will also help the CCTV cameras that are monitoring the outside of the trailer produce better images. A CCTV camera should also be placed inside the storage trailer facing out toward the door. A security light should also be placed in the trailer to come on when the door is opened and the light should be projected out the door. The CCTV camera should be placed behind the light to get a good image. The storage trailer that has a CCTV and security light in it would be used for storing materials for the job site. The materials can be anything of significant value that should be protected. The CCTV and security lighting can be portable and moved to other trailers as necessary. The purpose of the security lighting and CCTV is to be a deterrent and the thieves would not know which trailers have them installed until the trailer is broken into by the thieves. Case-hardened padlocks should be used on all storage trailers using an airplane cable to make it harder to cut. The padlock should be placed in a shield to prevent easy cutting of the lock to gain entry. The keys for the padlock should be controlled so that there are not numerous sets of keys floating around for the padlocks. All personnel that have a key for the lock shall sign for the key and will be asked to produce the key for inspection during weekly security surveys. When someone leaves that had a key, the locks should be changed immediately so the security of the padlock will not be compromised. Even if the key is turned in prior to the exit of the employee, the padlock should still be changed perhaps with another job site’s padlock. Access to the storage trailers should limited to those who need to have access. Don’t open the trailers at the beginning of the work day and leave them open and unattended all day especially those trailers that contain high value equipment or materials. By leaving the storage trailers open unattended, the high value equipment and materials will disappear and it will be hard to keep an accurate inventory. Subcontractors should also be following the same guideline. For trailers that are used to distribute high value equipment, there should be someone signing the equipment out so an inventory can be kept.


401

Access to the trailers will be limited by who has a key for the padlock. This is why is important to control the keys to the storage trailer padlocks as closely as possible. The subcontractors need to establish a key control system for the keys to their trailers. CCTV monitoring as previously stated can be used inside the storage trailer. CCTV cameras used outside the trailer should be positioned so that anyone approaching the trailer will have their images captured by the CCTV cameras. To have images that are good enough to identify the individuals the cameras need to be placed so that the person is dominant in the field of view about 20% of the field of view. So placing the CCTV camera on top of a high pole a distance from the trailer will not provide the identifiable image necessary. The lighting around the trailer needs to be sufficient for the type and model of the CCTV cameras selected so that there is compatibility. Check with the company that supplies CCTV systems for your jobs or contact a security consultant that is knowledgeable in CCTV to provide a system design that meets the requirements we have discussed. The CCTV should be recorded on a digital recorder and only record on motion. The storage trailers could also have an intrusion detection system installed. A combination motion and infrared will work. When the door is opened with the alarm set, the motion and infrared will detect the motion sending an alarm. The doors and windows on the office trailer should have balanced magnetic switches. The CCTV will record when the motion sensor is tripped. Protecting high value storage can be done economically by using a pre-engineered system that can be placed into any storage trailer. The system can be wireless to save on running cable or a self-contained unit using a large battery that is charged during the day. The pre-engineered system can use a cell phone to send the alarm to the alarm monitoring company or dial a phone through a PC in the office trailer. Using a pre-engineered security system that is portable will save time and money and, with the advances in electronics today, designing and building a pre-engineered security system should not present a great technological challenge. Wireless systems are now available and may be a good solution for a construction job site, especially the storage trailers. Office trailers should have instrusion detection systems pre-wired so when the trailer is moved from job site to job site, the only cost that will be incurred is the monitoring of the alarms. Monitoring the alarms can be as low $420 per year. The reason most alarm monitoring seems expensive is that you are paying for the equipment installation and the purchase of the equipment. It is better to design and purchase a system that can be installed in the trailer before it is sent to a job site. Purchasing the equipment will save money in the long run since it will not be included in the annual monitoring fee. Some companies have paid $2000 and up per year per trailer for the monitoring and purchasing the equipment. The

402


cost of purchasing and installing the intrusion detection equipment can be around $1600 to $2000 or more depending on what equipment is installed. But remember this is a one time charge that can be charged to several job sites to recuperate the cost. The annual monitoring and equipment cost can be for several years so you may be paying more than the intrusion equipment is worth or too much for monitoring to cover the cost of the equipment. Before you sign the contract with the alarm company that gave you a quote on installing and monitoring the intrusion detection equipment for the job site trailers, think about how much you will paying for the installation and purchase of the equipment over time, 2 or 3 years. The intrusion detection systems can be installed in the trailer before it is sent out to the job site. The cost of the system can then be spread over several job sites. The pre-engineered intrusion detection systems should consist of the following: • Motion sensors • Infrared sensors • Balanced magnetic switches for all the doors and windows • CCTV camera that is disguised to look like a motion sensor The motion sensors are important for adding a layered approach to the intrusion detection. The balanced magnetic switches will be the first line of detection. When a thief opens the window or door after hours the balanced magnetic switch will detect the intrusion and send an alarm. The motion sensor will confirm that an entry been made and send an alarm. The reason for using dual technology sensors is to make sure that at least one will detect the movement. The CCTV camera is important for getting an image of who entered the trailer. The camera needs to be strategically placed to cover the doors and the windows. More than one camera may be needed to cover the possible entry points. Remember the cameras are there to capture a good image of the intruder. Camera placement is important and so is lighting. The lights in the trailer can be set to come on with motion after hours to provide the lighting necessary to get a good image. Having the lights come on in the trailer may deter the intruder because it will alert the security officers or patrolling police officers that someone is in the trailer. The desktop computers in the office trailer should be protected by locking them to the floor using airplane cables and case-hardened padlocks. The airplane cable is also used to secure laptop computers during working hours when they are left unattended. The padlocks for the desktop computers should have a shield placed over them so cutting the lock would not be an option or easily done. The idea of the cables is to deter or slow down the thief. The thief does not want to take too much time in the trailer so anything that slows them down will be passed over. They only want to spend 10 minutes or less in trailer and on site. The


403

longer they are on site and in the trailer, the more likely they will be detected and caught in the act. Protecting tools from theft starts with stressing that all gang boxes are locked when not in use or unattended. This minimizes the temptation for someone to steal tools from the gang box. Subcontractors should have their employees lock their gang boxes and during the weekly security survey the gang boxes that are not locked, not in use, and unattended should be noted in the comments section of the report. The subcontractor’s employees can be made aware of the losses that occur because the gang boxes are not locked through the use of a security awareness campaign similar to those that are used to reinforce safety on the job. Tools that have a value of $xxx or more (what ever the company wants to set as the threshold value) will be protected and inventoried. The sample security plan sets a value for any power tools $500 or more in value. Below in Table 17-3 is a sample tool check out sheet. The purpose of the tool check out/in sheet is to track where the tools of value are so that an accurate inventory can be kept. The check out/in sheet will also provide information on who has the tools and for how long. In addition to the tool check out/in sheet an inventory sheet will also be helpful. Heavy equipment should be stored in a designated fenced area after hours. The fence should be locked and have barbed wire on top. The storage area should also have CCTV surveillance as well. Security lighting needs to be installed around the storage area fence. If it is not practical to store the equipment in a fenced area, then line up the heavy equipment in straight rows and don’t leave it scattered around the job site. The straight rows make it easy to observe the equipment from outside the perimeter fence so missing equipment will noticed immediately. The equipment should be placed in rows after every work day. If the job site has security officers for after hours, the security part of the plan should include viewing the security officer’s Daily Activity Reports (DARs) since these reports outline all the activities performed by the officers on each shift. The Incident Reports (IR) should be reviewed as well. The DAR should be re-

Table 17-3 Sample Tool Check Out Sheet. Sample Tool Check Out/In

Description

Inventory Number/ Serial Number for Power Tools

Check Out Name/ Print/Sign Company/Date

Check In Name/ Print/Sign Company/Date

Verified By/Date Sign/Print

404


viewed daily as should the IR. The weekly security survey should comment on any of the Daily Activity Reports and Incident Reports that are not complete and neat. The job site security plan is an important part of the security program and it is the guide that is used to gauge whether the job site security is adequate or not.

CHAPTER

Where to Find Help with Job Site Security and Useful Forms

18

T

his chapter is in two parts. Part I is a summary of organizations that are helpful for planning and implementing job site security or recovery of stolen heavy and other equipment and tools from a job site. Part II is useful forms for planning and implementing job site security. The first part of this chapter will look at places and organizations where construction companies can turn to for help. A little about each organization is presented along with any cost of membership. The links for the organizations’ websites will also be presented. The second part of the chapter is a summary of all the forms and checklists presented in the book. The forms and checklists are useful for planning and implementing a job site security program. Every job site is different so having one plan and using it on all job sites may not work. However there are some basics that can be used on every job site. The following is a list of the basics: 1. Use a perimeter fence or the natural boundaries to help secure the entire job site. For road construction jobs, fencing the job is not practical, but the building of a fenced-in equipment storage area to stage equipment that is not being used or after hours may help prevent equipment thefts. Maintain a clear zone around the perimeter or storage area fence on both sides of at least 5 feet so the area can be viewed from outside the fence. 2. Provide lighting around the perimeter of the site and around office trailers and equipment storage containers. 3. Post “No Trespassing” signs on the perimeter fence or equipment storage fence.


406


4. Alarm the office trailers, tool storage trailers (containers) and model homes on the job site. 5. Mark equipment so it can be identified if recovered and to thwart thieves. 6. Use CCTV to monitor equipment storage areas, office trailers and tool storage trailers. For road construction equipment storage areas there are CCTV cameras that can be used that run on batteries and record remotely. Wireless CCTV is another option.

PART I WHERE TO FIND HELP WITH JOB SITE SECURITY Outside help is available to help construction companies cope with the ever increasing need for job site security. Some of the links for job site security help especially help in preventing heavy equipment thefts are as follows: 1. The Public Entity Risk Institute http://www.riskinstitute.org/FP_DOCS/Chapter4construction.pdf 2. The National Equipment Register http://www.nerusa.com 3. The California Highway Patrol http://www.chp.ca.gov/html/farmconstruction.html 4. International Risk Management Institute www.irmi.com 5. Construction Industry Crime Prevention Program (Northern California) http://www.constructioncrime.com/about_us.asp 6. Crime Prevention Program (Southern California) http://www.crimepreventionprogram.com/ 7. Construction Industry Crime Prevention Program (Pacific Northwest) http://www.cicpp.com/ 8. Check with the local law enforcement agency in the area of the job site. Most of the crime prevention divisions have information on protecting heavy construction equipment from theft. 9. Security consultants provide services related to construction site security such as surveys, security equipment design, and supervision of the installation. The links listed above are just some of the sites that provide information to help prevent heavy equipment thefts. There are many others and to find more, just


407

type in the “preventing heavy equipment theft” in the search engine and hit search. Most of the prevention information is from insurance companies so another resource is to check is with the company’s insurance provider. The first link listed above is for the Public Entity Risk Institute (PERI). The Risk Institute provides information that will help entities address their risk management issues. Even though it is for public entities the information will also be of assistance to private companies in addressing their risk management issues. PERI published an article called “Construction Equipment Security” written by Larry Barnet. To find the article go to the link listed above. Along with article there are training slides. To locate the training slides on the web site type in the title of the article in the upper left hand side of the page then hit “search”. This will bring you to the 4 choices choose this one; FPSH Chapter 4 Construction Equipment Security. Then click on the link; Download a pdf copy of the training slides here. The slides are a good training tool and they can be customized to meet your needs. Both the article and the slides from PERI on “Construction Equipment Security” are good references for establishing a heavy equipment theft prevention program. The National Equipment Register is another source of information. The site can be found using the link listed above. National Equipment Register is a service that is based on fees paid by the equipment owner. Although the organization’s focus is the registering of equipment, the site does provide other information relating to job site security. There are tips for preventing equipment thefts. To register the equipment the owner can decide on one of two options; an annual fee or a one time fee for the life of the equipment as long as the company owns the equipment. So the fee schedule has two options either annual or lifetime. The annual fee is based on the number of pieces of equipment the company wishes to register. For example, for 1-5 pieces the cost is $75.00 per year; for 6-10 pieces of equipment the cost is $100.00 per year, and it goes up to 51100 for $700.00 per year. For over 100 pieces you are advised to contact NER for the cost. The second method is the lifetime fee which is $300.00 per piece of equipment. The fees paid are used to register the equipment in the NER database. The benefits of registering the equipment with NER is that law enforcement has 24-hour access to the equipment registration files so if the equipment disappears from your job site, law enforcement will have information about the equipment nationally from the NER database. By registering the equipment, decals are provided for each piece of registered equipment stating the equipment is registered in a national data base. Alerts are sent to law enforcement about equipment thefts when a registered piece of equipment is stolen. The NER will also check used equipment sales for

408


the stolen equipment. All the information about the theft including police and insurance reports are added to the registered stolen equipment’s profile. Also offered on the NER web site is a free loss prevention and security guide for equipment owners. The document is 12 pages in length and outlines what to do to prevent equipment thefts and establish site security: 1. Establishing security policies 2. Establishing an inventory management system for equipment 3. Performing background checks on prospective employees 4. Establish site security a. Posting “No Trespassing Signs” b. Post signs stating that all the equipment on the site is registered with NER c. Perimeter fence or use natural barriers d. Gates e . Lighting f. Keys g. Locks 5. There is a section on vehicle security. 6. Security of equipment in transit use king pin locks, low fuel in the transport vehicle, etc. 7. Security of equipment not in use, store equipment in a single row, etc. 8. What to do in case of a theft - answer the questions who, what, when, where, and why and anything else that may be helpful. The 12-page free booklet is a good guideline to help establish site and equipment security. The booklet can be found at the following link and provides some guidelines for preventing job site equipment thefts that can also be used to prevent job vandalism and thefts of other types of equipment other than heavy equipment, i.e. tools, computers, etc. http://www.nerusa.com/includes/WebLossPrevention.pdf If the link does not work go to the NER website and find the link to the Theft Prevention Guide on the bottom of the Services to Equipment Owners web page. The purpose of the NER is to have a national repository of construction equipment that law enforcement can use to help recover stolen construction equipment and supplying the decals that can be a deterrent to thieves because they do not want to steal equipment that can be easily traced so it is harder to sell. The California Highway Patrol has some guidelines for protecting heavy equipment from theft. The link in the list above will bring to the information.


409

The web page is titled “Farm and Construction Equipment Theft Prevention”. The site has three main tip headings as follows: 1. Mark the equipment 2. Keep records 3. Protecting the equipment The first suggestion made on the web page is to mark equipment with the driver’s license number of the principle in the company preceded by “CA” for California. The use of the driver’s license number may not be the best choice for marking equipment because of the identity theft problem that is prevalent today. The site says to use an identification system approved by law enforcement. Instead of the driver’s license number maybe the contractor’s sate license number can be used to mark equipment. All contractors are required to have one and each one is unique to that contractor. Maybe the abbreviation or the letters of the company’s name or the state where the license is issued can precede the contractor’s license number. There is also an Owner Applied Number (OAN) that is a ten-digit number assigned by a law enforcement agency. The problem not every law enforcement uses the system and the system was designed for farm equipment as a part of SB 453 in California. The whole purpose of the system is to have a unique number that each contractor use to mark their equipment that is easily recognized and accepted by law enforcement not just in California but also nationwide. The reason for needing an identification number is that most heavy construction equipment does not have a unique vehicle identification number (VIN) like other vehicles do because most heavy equipment does not need to be registered and issued license plates by the DMV. To come up with a workable solution more work and research needs to be done in this area of identification numbers for marking equipment to come up with a system that will be accepted and recognized nationwide. The use of the contractor’s state license number may be the answer. There are some details that need to be worked out. For example, how does law enforcement have access to the state contractor’s license numbers in all the states? Are there duplicate numbers across the license numbers from state to state? Are the contractor’s license numbers truly unique numbers that can be used for easy identification of heavy and other construction equipment? Only by answering these questions will we know if the solution of using the contractor’s license number preceded by the two letters of the state of issuance is a viable solution. Establish a recordkeeping system by recording the serial number of the equipment and the number applied to the piece of equipment. Included in the record

410


there should be pictures of the piece of equipment. Use a digital camera to take the pictures and place them in the record. In the pictures show the identification number on the piece of equipment. The records with the pictures will be valuable if the equipment is stolen. Part of the record should include some proof of the original purchase of the equipment which will be needed to claim ownership of the equipment if and when it is recovered. It can’t be stressed enough that good records of heavy and other equipment is important. All of the records can be kept electronically so updating them will be easier. The initial set up of the records may take a little effort. The protecting the equipment section is the theft prevention aspect and recommends the following: 1. Re-key the equipment since most of the equipment is keyed alike. 2. Don’t leave equipment in remote areas. 3. Store equipment when not in use in a line or some orderly fashion so missing equipment will be noticed immediately. 4. Take an inventory of the equipment often (daily) so missing equipment will be discovered quickly. 5. Use a distinctive paint to paint the company logo on the equipment. 6. Make use of anti-theft devices such as fuel cutoffs, wheel locks, tracking devices, alarms, etc. 7. Challenge strangers that are on the job site to show them you are alert. The last section of the California Highway Patrol (CHP) web page outlines what to do if there is a theft of equipment. The suggestions are as follows: 1. Notify law enforcement immediately of the theft provide the manufacturer number, serial number, and the other markings like the Owner Applied Number. 2. Notify local equipment dealers since most circulate stolen equipment bulletins. 3. Notify the California Highway Patrol’s nearest Investigative Services Unit. For information on the Investigative Services Unit contact information call the nearest CHP Office. 4. Notify the CHP of any offers to sell the stolen equipment. International Risk Management Institute presents articles in the free monthly newsletters that address construction equipment security from time to time. The IRMI is also partners with the National Equipment Register. The newsletters are free to anyone who subscribes. To subscribe follow the link by clicking on the


411

large blue radio button that says “Free Risk Tips”. There are five newsletters to choose from. The five are as follows: 1. IRMI Update 2. D & O Compass 3. Personal Lines 4. Pilot 5. The Electronic Owl The IRMI Update is the one that will provide information on construction equipment security since the newsletter is about risk management issues. The other newsletters are more about the insurance lines themselves and may not be of interest. There are other resources on the web site. The International Risk Management Institute offers training sessions in the field of risk management. The Construction Industry Crime Prevention Program (CICP) is a non profit association. Construction companies pay a fee to join. The CICP was formed in 1971 by contractors to help fight construction site vandalism and theft. The fees for the Northern California CICP are based on the number of homes built per year for a residential builder and for contractors by the number of employees. The CICP and the CPP provide valuable services to member companies. The web site has the fee schedules on the application for membership. The application for membership can be found by clicking on the link “Join Us”. The fees for joining the Southern California Crime Prevention Program (CPP) which also a non profit organization and is separate from the Northern California CICP can be found on the membership application. The fees are based on the number of employees the company employs. The fees for joining the Pacific Northwest CICP Chapter are based on the number of employees that are employed by the contractor. The web site has a tab called “Join Us” on the left side of the screen. When you click on the “Join Us” tab you will find the fee schedule. The CICP or CPP (Southern California) membership benefits are as follows: 1. Provide theft alerts via email or fax of construction equipment that is stolen from construction sites. 2. Provide a reward system through the use of a 24-hour hotline to report tips on stolen equipment. The reward is provided by the CICP and CPP. The hotline allows the caller to remain anonymous. 3. Training of law enforcement personnel and contractors on construction site security.

412


4. Provide services for security audits of job sites. 5. Reward and No Trespassing signs are available for purchase by members for a small fee. 6. Provide recovery of stolen equipment. 7. Act as a liaison for the contractors and law enforcement. 8. Private investigation services 9. Training of site managers in internal control techniques. The CICP also provides education for law enforcement officers to help with construction site vandalism and theft incidents by providing tools, containers and equipment for sting operations. The CICP and the CPP also provide to law enforcement information about thefts of equipment from job sites. Numerous law enforcement agencies are providing information to help prevent construction site thefts and vandalism. The information is usually provided through the crime prevention division of the law enforcement agency. A good example is the Paso Robles, CA Police Department’s brochure called “Construction Site Crime Prevention”. The brochure can be found using the following link: http://www.prcity.com/government/departments/police/pdf/ConstSiteSafety.pdf. The brochure provides come good guidelines for securing a construction job site. The following are the highlights of the brochure. • Designate a crime prevention coordinator • Identify all the assets and property • Establish surveillance of the job site by soliciting the help of neighbors, businesses, and residents around the job site • Lock gates when not in use • Secure tools an equipment when not in use • Fence the job site • Light up the job site • Use alarm systems the alarms should sound locally to alert the neighbors and passing police patrols that a break in is occurring • Hire security officers • Post “No Trespassing” signs The brochures are free to any construction company working in the area or


413

from the Internet. The information contained in the brochure is practical and sound advice for protecting the construction job site from thefts and vandalism. Another example of a brochure that addresses job site security is one produced by the Springfield, MO, Police Department. The brochure can be found on the following web site. http://www.ci.springfield.mo.us/spd/CrimePreventionTips/2004CrimePreventionTips/aug2004crimeprevtip.html. The brochure covers similar topic as the Paso Robles Police Department brochure does. The following are the highlights of the construction crime prevention brochure of the Springfield Police Department. • Identify the assets • Surveillance of the by soliciting the help of neighbors, businesses, residents, cab drivers, bus drivers, etc. • Supervisors should control keys • Lock gates not in use • Secure tools an equipment not in use • Mark tools and equipment by engraving • Provide lighting for the job site • Fence the job site • Post “No Trespassing” signs • Remove graffiti from the job site as soon as possible • Hire security officers • Report all thefts and vandalism to law enforcement The City of Atlanta, GA Police Department’s Community Services Division has brochure for construction site security. The brochure can be found using the following link: http://www.atlantapd.org/cpt/Construction%20Site%20Brochure.pdf The brochure is called “The Community Services Section Tips for Crime Prevention Tips for Construction Sites”. The brochure is not much different then the two brochures previously outlined. The following are the highlights of the brochure: • Inventory controls Q

Maintain lists of equipment including make and model number

Q

Mark equipment

414


Q

Develop and use a strict toll and equipment check out/in procedure to account for tools and equipment. Consider using bar codes on tools for identification.

• Site security Q

Install a chain link perimeter fence and inspect the fence regularly (at least weekly) to check for damage, openings cut in the fence or digging under the fence to gain entry. Block the entrances with heavy equipment to prevent easy access and exit.

Q

Limit the number of entrances to the site

Q

Install alarms on trailers and model homes

Q

Post “No Trespassing” signs

Q

Keep a clear zone around perimeter fence

Q

Keep the area well lit

Q

Use CCTV to monitor the site

Q

Use badges to identify the sub-contractors

Q

Do not let visitors wander around the site

Q

Lock up tools and equipment when not in use

Q

Q

Q

Install lighting along the perimeter shining into the site. This will keep the light from blinding neighbors and police like outward facing lights would. Do not allow parking near equipment, tools, and materials. This will make it harder for the thieves. Doors to trailers and storage containers should face the perimeter of the site. This will allow police or neighbors to see if a door is open or if someone is trying to open the door. Do not obstruct the view of the doors with equipment or materials.

• Preventive tips Q

Q

Q

Schedule deliveries of materials such as windows, doors, cooper pipe and plumbing, as close to the date of installation as possible Install the appliances when an occupancy date has been set. If this is not feasible install and cover windows, doors and hardware and give the place a lived in look. Block entrances to the parking lot by using heavy equipment.


Q

Q

Q

Q

415

Disable large heavy equipment at night by disconnecting the battery Key the heavy equipment with different keys so one key does not fit all the equipment. Park equipment in a line so that the most mobile and small equipment is in the middle with the larger equipment on the ends or use a circle and place the smaller and most mobile equipment in the center. Drop all of the ground engaging equipment to the ground, i.e. blades, buckets, etc. this will make the equipment more difficult to move.

The brochures outlined above are just three of the many that local law enforcement agencies have produced in recent years to address the issues of construction job site security. For more information contact the local law enforcement agency usually the crime prevention division in the area where the job site will be or is currently located and ask about brochures and/or tips for construction site security. If the local law enforcement agency does not have a brochure you can follow the tips from one of the sample brochures discussed above. The brochures are a good basis for a job site security plan and the sample plan is outlined in this chapter can be used to develop your own site security plan. Once the plan has been developed for one site it can be used at other job sites as well. The plan should have the telephone number for the local law enforcement agency’s crime prevention division. Job site security plans are important in protecting the job site from vandalism and thefts. Seeking out and joining the organizations, especially the Construction Industry Crime Prevention Program (CICP) on the West Coast, is also important to job site security. If your area does not have a CICP program, then maybe starting one would be beneficial.

PART II USEFUL FORMS Now we will focus on all the forms used throughout the book. Using the forms makes it easy to develop plans, perform surveys, etc. There are not only forms but checklists to help guide you through the risk management process. You are welcome to use the forms in your company as is or modify them to meet your needs. It is easier to have some form or checklist to complete to make sure that things are not overlooked when planning and implementing a construction job site security program. The forms and checklists are based on what is presented in the book and Chapter 17 brings it all together by presenting how to prepare and implement a site security program. Once the plan is implemented there are forms and checklists to keep the program current and to identify any gaps in the pro-

416


gram that need to be addressed. It is important to audit the site security plan at regular intervals usually weekly to make sure that the plan is being followed. The saying, “What gets measured gets done” applies in security as well. If the plan is written and never audited (measured) then it will not get done. The importance of job site security needs to be emphasized as much as job site safety does. This is why using the site safety coordinator as the job site security coordinator is vital to the success of the security plan because the job site safety coordinator will provide visibility and credibility to the security plan. Figure 18-1 is a survey form for conducting security surveys. The form is detailed and can be used for the initial assessment of a proposed job site location. Table 18-1 is sample risk calculation formula for assessing the risks and quantifying them. The risk formula equates risks not only by probability of occurrence but also by potential dollar loss along with the cost of risk avoidance which is then used to calculate the savings if any for implementing the risk avoidance countermeasure. Table 18-2 is a chart to help identify the assets at the job site. The table can be expanded to list all the assets at the job site. The final list is a good reference of what assets are assigned to which job site. Figure 18-2 is a sample master security officer contract. The contract can be used to hire a security officer contract company to supply security officers for the job site. Before using this or any contract check with legal counsel and have them review the contract. Table 18-3 is a security lighting table. The table is a quick reference for what the foot-candles should be various locations in order to have adequate lighting for security.

Table 18-1 Quantifying Risks and Justifying Avoidance Expenditures. Probability 2 Financial Impact 4 Expectation of Losses

0.8 $50,000 40,000 Cost of avoidance measure $25,000

.8 is the probaility of occurrence

Probability After Effect of Avoidance and/or Reduction Actions 2 Financial Impact After

Effect of avoidance and/or reduction actions 4 Revised expectation of losses 0.1 $50,000 5,000 .2 is the corrected probability after the preventive measure has been implemented. $15,000 $5,000 10,000 Actual benefit from the cost avoidance/reduction measure $100,000 $10,000 $110,000 Total cost avoidance including the $100,000 insuracne deductible and the countermeasure

417


PARTI BUILDING and/or SITE PHYSICAL FEATURES 1. Location of facility: 2. Job:

3. Street Address and Zip: 4. Telephone: 5. Number of structures on the Site: (a) I story

(b) 2 story

(c) 3 story

(d) 4 story

(c) 5 story or higher

6. Number of structures interconnected: (a) At grade level or higher 7. Total working population on: a) First (day) shift

(b) Below grade

(b) Second shift

(c) Third shift

8. Estimated number of daily visitors: 9. Number of automobiles parked daily: PART 2 SOCIAL and POLITICAL ENVIRONMENT 10. Is the facility in a:

(a) City

(c) Unincorporated hamlet

(b) Town

(c) Incorporated village

(e) Rural area

11. Estimated percentage of neighboring area: (a) Residential (c) Industrial

(d) Agricultural

(d) Agricultural _

(b) Commercial

(e) Undeveloped

12. Estimated percentage of residential area: (a) One family homes (b) Two family homes

(c) Multiple dwellings

High rise multiple dwellings

13. Police department having jurisdiction: 14. Total sworn officers in the department: 15. Average response times for emergency calls: 16. Is the jurisdiction separately reported in the Standard Metropolitan Statistical Area section of the Uniform Crime Reports? 17. If 16, is yes, what are the most recent indexes for; (a) Total crime (c) Property crime > r-

Open/Secure all buildings by unlocking/locking all exterior doors at prescribed times. Check and close all windows in office areas not occupied during non-business hours, Open all buildings department doors at prescribed time.

'r

Secure doors to unoccupied areas and turn off all lights.

'r "r "? >

While on patrol, check for and note all open doors. Perform routine checks on building and off ces, Close all windows in areas that are unoccupied Unlock doors and turn off alarms

Checking condition of doors/wmdows/locks/areas > >

While making each patrol round check all floors. Inspect all parking lots periodically.

f

Patrol bathroom areas to prevent unauthorized entry/vandalism.

>

Inspect the general office at all facilities for i.e., computers left on, trashcans not emptied causing a fire hazard, etc,

"r

Patrol assigned areas on foot 3 times per shift not to exceed 4 hours.

>

Insure that all personnel are briefed to display their badges prior to entering facility.

> >

Prevent unauthorized entry to building Insure that all visitors and contractors signed in and out prior to the beginning of each shift.

r >

Prevent the removal of property from building. Insure that all visitors to building have badges and read and sign visitors log

> >

Inspect all employees on every round to insure that badges are displayed. Insure that visitors to administration area are escorted by employees.

>

Identify all persons in high risk areas.

r

Observe construction workers to prevent theft.

> r

Record all unusual occurrences ,

Patrolling/all types/modes/methods

Access control

Observing conditions/events Safety/Security

Equipment use/alarms Reporting Incidents FIGURE 18-2

Sample master security officer contract. (continued)

433

434


Fire

> •• > f 'f

Inspect fire extinguishers the 1st of each month. Check for fires, smoke, or smoking in unauthorized areas twice per shift not to exceed 4 hours, Insure that fire doors are not obstructed. Immediately correct. Operate all fire fighting equipment as required. Respond to all fire alarms.

Special reports/calls/contacts >•

Contact Performance Command Center Supervisor for any situation that cant be handled by guard force

'f Maintain radio contact with SMC by conducting a radio check and status check 3 times per shift not to exceed 4 hours. Annotate as "Site Radio Check" and results in DAR

Preventing Prevent the taking of photos

FIGURE 18-2

Sample master security officer contract. (continued)

FIGURE 18-3

Sample bomb threat checklist. (continued)


435

Table 18-3 Security Lighting Specification table. Location

Foot-Candles on Horizontal Plane at Ground level

Perimeter of outer area Perimeter of restricted area Vehicular entrances Pedestrian entrances Sensitive inner areas Sensitive inner structure Entrances Open yards Decks on open piers

0.15 0.4 1.0 2.0 0.15 1.0 0.1 0.2 1.0

Table 18-4 Security lighting guidelines. Location

Foot-Candles Required at level on Ground

Perimeter Fence Buildings Large open areas Entrances Gatehouses Pedestrian walkways and access points

0.5 0.5-2.0 0.5-2.0 10 30 4-6

Table 18-5 Risk assessment steps. STEP

Description

Identification of the assets Identification of the threats Analyze the threats (risk assessment) Choose Countermeasure Cost analysis of countermeasure Cost benefit, ROI

People, equipment, buildings, etc. CAP Stats, etc. Probability of occurrence Alarms, access control, etc.

436


Table 18-6 Risk assessment matrix. Severity

High Medium Low

Probability of Occurrence

High 1 4 7

Medium 2 5 8

Low 3 6 9

Table 18-7 Mitigation of risk. Method

Defined

Risk Avoidance Risk Reduction Risk Segregation Risk Acceptance Risk Transfer Combination

Avoid the risk Reduce the potential loss Separation/duplication Accept the risk Purchase insurance or self insure Any combinations of above

Table 18-8 Risk analysis checklist. STEPS

DESCRIPTION

Identify Assets Set Value of Asset Identify Risks Estimate Loss of Asset (formulas below) Calculate Probability: Simple Prob 4 p(Event 1) + p(Event 2) Prob of related Events p(Event 1) 2 p(Event 2) 4 p(Both Events) Calculate Cost of Loss: P 2 (Financial Impact 4 EL (Expected Loss) CP (corrected probability) 2 EL 4 corrected loss (CL) CM (cost of countermeasure) 1 CL 4 Net benefit of CM Cost of deductible + net benefit CM 4 Total cost avoidance

People, equipment, etc Cost of replacement or loss of use What could cause a loss

How to calculate Simple Probability

Calculating the cost of a loss and the cost avoidance

Index Access control systems, 71–72 cards, 239 designing, 241–243 locks, 244–245 panels, 247 Access points and perimeter fence, 79–80 Alarm categories, 114–115 systems, 53–56 ALF, 372–381 tactics used, 376

Fence

Barbed wire, 109–110 Balanced magnetic switches, 51–52 Biometric systems – Hand geometry, 236 Bomb threats, 318

Gates

Cable coaxial, 211 fiber optic, 211 Camera wireless, 214–215 Capacitance, 137–139 Cards access control systems, 239 dual technology, 241 magnetic stripe, 239 proximity, 239 smart, 241 Closed circuit television (CCTV), 70–71 components, 208 Combination systems, 238–239 Computer and network access control, 352–353 Crime statistics, 28–30

chain link, 99–101 concrete walls, 105–106 openings, 106–107 types of, 98 vibration sensors, 133 wood, 103–105 wrought iron, 102–103 Finger print reader, 237 Foot-candle power, 359 Forms, 415–434 cantilever, 108 motorized, 109 roll/side, 107 swing, 109 Glass breaks, 125–126 Hardening the job site, 224–225 Information security, 72–73 Installing firewalls on job sites, 354–355 Intrusion detection job trailers, 51 systems, 84 Investigations, 73 job site thefts, 233–234 Iris scan, 237 Job security surveys, 65 where to find help, 406–415 Keying systems, 195–196

Displaying video, 212 Disposing of confidential documents, 348 Document classification, 342–343 Door automatic closer, 247 contacts, 246 Eco-Terror, 73–74 Electric field, 137 ELF, 372–381 Encryption, 355–356 Enforcement, 306–307, 320–321 Equipment security, 64 Evacuation, 320 Facial recognition, 238

Lamps (Luminaries) types of, 360–361 Lighting, 82 for video surveillance, 220–221 requirements for CCTV, 365–366 requirements for perimeter protection, 362–365 system maintenance, 368 Locks access control system, 244–245 and key control, 58–64 cipher, 193 cylindrical, 190–191 deadbolt, 191 disc tumbler, 192–193 drop bolt, 192


438


Locks electric, (continued) 194 electric strike, 194 fingerprint, 193 high security, 194–195 magnetic, 194 mortise, 191 padlocks, 193–194 pin tumbler, 193 rim cylinder, 192 specifications, 196–197 types of, 190 unit, 193 Maintenance of lighting systems. 368 Marking documents, 346–347 Microwave, 127–131, 211 Monitor displaying video, 212 Multiplexer (MUX), 211–212 National databases, 232–233 Photo electric beam. 140–141 Physical security, 6–7, 45, 307 audits, 351 countermeasures, 343––346 lighting, 45–51 role of technology in, 7 Policies developing, 302–304 summary, 304 Pre-Employment screening, 311–314, 329–339 Protecting equipment, 225–232 Protecting the jobsite, 381–383 Razor wire, 110–111 Recorders digital video (DVR), 213 VCR. 212–213 Remote job sites, 80–81 Request to exit device (REX), 245–246 Retina scan, 237 Risk analysis steps, 31–34 choosing the method to mitigate the risk, 32–34 planning and designing, 34 Securing laptop and desk top computers, 347–348 Security awareness, 349–351 Security bulletins, 350 Security lighting, 346 categories, 359–360 design considerations, 368–369

electrical power sources, 366–367 types of, 361–362 Security officer, 84 company contracts, 279–280 reports, 283–284 role, 65–70 post orders, 67, 280–283 selection, 278–279 Security planning, 75 Security survey, 75–95 how to conduct, 94–95 Security web site, 350 Security slogans, 351 Sensors infrared, 122–125 ultrasonic, 119–122 vibration, 131–132 volumetric, 119 Sensor technology, 115–116 Signature recognition, 238 Site Access Control for job sites, 304–306 Survey form, 18–27, 44–45, 85 benefite of doing, 85–94 Switches, 116–119 Technical security countermeasures, 352 Tenant improvements (TI) jobs, 79 Threat assessment, 3–6 analyze the risk for probability of occurrence, 14–15 calculating the cost of a loss, 16–17, 43–44 conducting and using, 40–44 how to do, 12–13, 40–41 identify risk of, 13–14, 41–42 performing, 386–404 role of in physical security, 3–6 Tools and equipment, 83–84 Traffic flow controlling vehicular and pedestrian, 57–58 Video design considerations, 215–221 motion detection, 141 transmission – coaxial cable, 211 Virus protection, 355 Violation investigations Voice recognition, 237–238 Wire taut, 13–1409 Wiring and lighting controls, 367–368 Workplace violence prevention, 315

Construction Site Security

Construction Site Security

Goodnight, Goodnight, Construction Site

Open Source Web Site Construction Kit

A Year at a Construction Site (Time Goes By)

Port Engineering: Planning, Construction, Maintenance, and Security

Sustainable On-Site CHP Systems: Design, Construction, and Operations

Site Unseen

Site Investigation

Site Unseen

Black Site

Black Site

Site Matters

The Levee Site and the Knoll Site

ASP.NET Site Performance Secrets

Web Site Story

Drupal 6 Site Blueprints

The Mill Iron Site

Love at First Site

Web Site Cookbook

Archaeological Site Manual

Joomla! 1.5 Site Blueprints

501 Web Site Secrets

Perl Web Site Workshop

Love at First Site

Web Site Story

ASP.NET Site Performance Secrets

Site Engineers Manual

Site Engineers Manual

Web Site Story

Web Site Measurement Hacks

Construction Site Security